Automatic Transmission CR-V 2007

06/09/15 17:32:25 62SWA00A_140_0001
SUPPLEMENTAL RESTRAINT SYSTEM (SRS) (If automatic transmission maintenance is

required)
The CR-V SRS includes a driver’s airbag in the steering wheel hub, a passenger’s airbag in the dashboard above the
glove box, seat belt tensioners in the front seat belt retractors, seat belt outer lap tensioners in the front seat belt lower
anchor, side curtain airbags in the sides of the roof, and side airbags in the front seat-backs. Information necessary to
safely service the SRS is included in this Shop Manual. Items marked with an asterisk ( ) on the contents page
include or are located near SRS components. Servicing, disassembling, or replacing these items require special
precautions and tools, and should be done only by an authorized Honda dealer.
• To avoid rendering the SRS inoperative, which could lead to personal injury or death in the event of a severe frontal
or side collision, all SRS service work should be done by an authorized Honda dealer.
• Improper service procedures, including incorrect removal and installation of the SRS, could lead to personal injury
caused by unintentional deployment of the airbags and/or side airbags.
• Do not bump or impact the SRS unit, front impact sensors, or side impact sensors when the ignition switch is ON (II),
or for at least 3 minutes after the ignition switch is turned OFF; otherwise, the system may fail in a collision, or the
airbags may deploy.
• SRS electrical connectors are identified by yellow color coding. Related components are located in the steering
column, front console, dashboard, dashboard lower panel, in the dashboard above the glove box, in the front seats,
in the roof side, and around the floor. Do not use electrical test equipment on these circuits.
ＳＷＡ７Ｅ０００００００００Ｊ１４０１ＡＢＡＴ００
06/09/15 17:32:25 62SWA00A_140_0002
Automatic Transmission
Automatic Transmission A/T Gear Position Indicator
Special Tools ............................................... 14-2 Component Location Index ....................... 14-325
Service Precautions for 4WD Model ......... 14-4 Circuit Diagram ........................................... 14-327
General Troubleshooting Information ...... 14-5 Transmission Range Switch Test .............. 14-329
DTC Troubleshooting Index ....................... 14-12 Transmission Range Switch
Symptom Troubleshooting Index ............. 14-16 Replacement ............................................ 14-331
System Description .................................... 14-28 A/T Gear Position Indicator Panel
DTC Troubleshooting ................................. 14-84 Light Harness Replacement ................... 14-333
Road Test ..................................................... 14-222 A/T Gear Position Indicator Panel
Stall Speed Test .......................................... 14-225 Replacement ............................................ 14-338
Pressure Test ............................................... 14-226 D3 Switch Circuit Troubleshooting ........... 14-340
Shift Solenoid Valve Test ........................... 14-230 D3 Switch Test ............................................ 14-342
Shift Solenoid Valve Replacement ........... 14-235 D3 Switch Replacement ............................. 14-343
Shift Solenoid Harness Replacement ....... 14-235
A/T Clutch Pressure Control Solenoid A/T Interlock System
Valve A Component Location Index ....................... 14-345
Test ........................................................... 14-238 Circuit Diagram ........................................... 14-346
Replacement ............................................ 14-240 Shift Lock System Circuit
A/T Clutch Pressure Control Solenoid Troubleshooting ...................................... 14-347
Valve B Key Interlock System Circuit
Test ........................................................... 14-241 Troubleshooting ...................................... 14-352
Replacement ............................................ 14-245 Shift Lock Solenoid Test ............................ 14-354
A/T Clutch Pressure Control Solenoid Shift Lock Solenoid Replacement ............. 14-355
Valve C Shift Lock Stop Replacement .................... 14-356
Test ........................................................... 14-243 Shift Lock Stop Cushion Replacement ..... 14-356
Replacement ............................................ 14-245 Shift Lock Release, Release Spring,
Input Shaft (Mainshaft) Speed Sensor Release Shaft Replacement ................... 14-357
Replacement ............................................ 14-246 Shift Lock Release, Release Spring,
Output Shaft (Countershaft) Speed Sensor Release Extension Replacement ........... 14-358
Replacement ............................................ 14-246 Park Pin Switch Test ................................... 14-359
2nd Clutch Transmission Fluid Pressure Park Pin Switch Replacement .................... 14-360
Switch Replacement ............................... 14-247
3rd Clutch Transmission Fluid Pressure Transmission End Cover
Switch Replacement ............................... 14-247 End Cover Removal .................................... 14-364
ATF Temperature Sensor Park Lever Stop
Test and Replacement ............................ 14-248 Inspection and Adjustment .................... 14-370
ATF Level Check .......................................... 14-251 Idler Gear Shaft Bearing Replacement ..... 14-370
ATF Replacement ....................................... 14-252 Selector Control Shaft Oil Seal
Transfer Assembly Inspection ................... 14-254 Replacement ............................................ 14-371
Transfer Assembly Removal ..................... 14-255 Selector Control Shaft Bearing
Transfer Assembly Installation ................. 14-257 Replacement ............................................ 14-371
Transmission Removal .............................. 14-259 ATF Feed Pipe Replacement ...................... 14-372
Transmission Installation ........................... 14-279 End Cover Installation ................................ 14-430
Drive Plate Removal and Installation ........ 14-302
ATF Cooler Hose Replacement ................. 14-302 Transmission Housing
ATF Filter Replacement .............................. 14-304 Housing and Shaft Assembly Removal .... 14-373
Shift Lever Removal ................................... 14-306 Bearing Removal ........................................ 14-375
Shift Lever Installation ............................... 14-308 Bearing Installation .................................... 14-376
Shift Lever Disassembly and Reverse Idler Gear
Reassembly ............................................. 14-309 Removal and Installation ........................ 14-377
Shift Lever/Shift Cable Bracket Assembly Shaft Assembly and Housing
Replacement ............................................ 14-311 Installation ............................................... 14-425
Shift Lever Knob Replacement .................. 14-315
Shift Lever Knob Cover Replacement ....... 14-316
Shift Lever Ring Replacement ................... 14-317
Shift Cable Replacement ............................ 14-319
Shift Cable Adjustment .............................. 14-321
ＳＷＡ７Ｅ０００００００００Ｊ１４０１ＺＣＡＴ００
06/09/15 17:32:25 62SWA00A_140_0003
Valve Body A/T Differential

Valve Body and ATF Strainer Removal .... 14-378 Component Location Index ....................... 14-437
Valve Body Repair ...................................... 14-380 Backlash Inspection .................................... 14-438
Valve Body Valve Installation .................... 14-381 Differential Carrier Replacement .............. 14-439
Main Valve Body Disassembly, Final Driven Gear Replacement ................ 14-439
Inspection, and Reassembly .................. 14-382 Transfer Drive Gear Replacement ............ 14-439
ATF Pump Inspection ................................. 14-383 Carrier Bearing Replacement .................... 14-440
Regulator Valve Body Disassembly, Oil Seal Replacement ................................. 14-441
Inspection, and Reassembly .................. 14-384 Carrier Bearing Outer Race
Servo Body Disassembly, Replacement ............................................ 14-442
Inspection, and Reassembly .................. 14-385 Carrier Bearing Preload Inspection ........... 14-444
Shift Solenoid Valve
Removal and Installation ........................ 14-386 Transfer Assembly
Valve Body and ATF Strainer Inspection .................................................... 14-447
Installation ............................................... 14-423 Disassembly ................................................ 14-449
Transfer Holder Disassembly .................... 14-452
Torque Converter Housing Transfer Holder Roller Bearing
Mainshaft Bearing and Oil Seal Replacement ............................................ 14-453
Replacement ............................................ 14-387 Transfer Holder Tapered Roller Bearing
Countershaft Bearing Replacement .......... 14-388 Outer Race Removal/Installation ........... 14-453
Secondary Shaft Bearing Replacement ... 14-389 Transfer Drive Gear Bearing
Selector Control Shaft Oil Seal Replacement ............................................ 14-454
Replacement ............................................ 14-390 Transfer Output Shaft Bearing
Removal/Installation ............................... 14-454
Shafts and Clutches Transfer Housing Tapered Roller Bearing
Mainshaft Disassembly, Outer Race Replacement ........................ 14-455
Inspection, and Reassembly .................. 14-391 Reassembly ................................................. 14-457
Mainshaft 5th Gear Axial Clearance
Inspection ................................................ 14-392
Countershaft Disassembly,
Inspection, and Reassembly .................. 14-394
Countershaft Reverse Selector Hub and
3rd Gear Removal ................................... 14-395
Countershaft Reverse Selector Hub and
3rd Gear Installation ............................... 14-396
Secondary Shaft Disassembly,
Inspection, and Reassembly .................. 14-397
Secondary Shaft Ball Bearing, Idler Gear
Removal and Installation ........................ 14-398
Secondary Shaft 2nd Gear Axial Clearance
Inspection ................................................ 14-399
Secondary Shaft 1st Gear Axial Clearance
Inspection ................................................ 14-401
Idler Gear Shaft
Removal and Installation ........................ 14-403
Idler Gear/Idler Gear Shaft
Replacement ............................................ 14-404
1st, 2nd, and 3rd Clutch Disassembly ....... 14-405
4th and 5th Clutch Disassembly ................ 14-407
Clutch Inspection ........................................ 14-410
Clutch Waved-plate Phase Difference
Inspection ................................................ 14-411
Clutch Clearance Inspection ...................... 14-412
1st, 2nd, and 3rd Clutch Reassembly ........ 14-418
4th and 5th Clutch Reassembly ................. 14-420
06/09/15 17:32:27 62SWA00A_140_0004
Special Tools
Ref. No. Tool Number Description Qty
07406-0020004 A/T Oil Pressure Gauge Set 1
07PAB-0010000 Mainshaft Holder Set 1
07JAC-PH80000 Adjustable Bearing Remover Set 1
07749-0010000 Handle Driver 1
07746-0010400 Driver Attachment, 52 x 55 mm 1
07GAD-SD40101 Driver Attachment, 78 x 90 mm 1
07LGC-0010100 Snap Ring Pliers 1
07947-ZV00100 Oil Seal Driver Attachment 1
07KAF-PS30200 Bearing Separator 1
07746-0030100 Driver, 40 mm I.D. 1
07QAD-P0A0100 Driver Attachment, 42 mm I.D. 1
07LAE-PX40000 Clutch Spring Compressor Set 1
07ZAE-PRP0100 Clutch Compressor Attachment 1
07LAD-PW50601 Attachment, 40 x 50 mm 1
07947-SD90101 Oil Seal Driver Attachment 1
０１
０１
０１
０１
０１
０１
０１
０１
０１
０１
０１
０１
０１
０１
０１
０１
０１
14-2
ＳＷＡ７Ｅ０００００００００Ｊ１４０１ＰＡＡＴ００
06/09/15 17:32:28 62SWA00A_140_0005
Ref. No. Tool Number Description Qty

07JAD-PH80101 Oil Seal Driver Attachment 1
07NAD-PX40100 Driver Attachment, 78 x 80 mm 1
070AJ-0020101 Preload Inspection Tool 1
07PAB-0020000 Companion Flange Holder 1
07746-0030400 Driver Attachment, 35 mm I.D. 1
07KAF-PS30120 Bearing Installer Attachment 1
07LAF-PZ70110 Bearing Installer Attachment 1
07JAF-SJ80110 Installer Shaft, 14 x 165 mm 1
07JAF-SJ80120 Installer Nuts, 14 mm 1
０１
０１
０１
０１
０１
０１
０１
０１
０１
14-3
06/09/15 17:32:28 62SWA00A_140_0006
Service Precautions for 4WD Model

This 4WD model does not have the feature that 1. Set the free rollers according to the wheel base and
mechanically switches between 4WD (four-wheel drive) tread of the vehicle.
and 2WD (front-wheel drive).
2. Move the vehicle to position the front wheels on
Do not drive the vehicle with rear wheels on the ground the speedometer tester and the rear wheels on the
even though the front wheels are off the ground. The free rollers. Make sure to align the center of the
front wheel power is conveyed to the rear wheels, and wheels to the center of the speedometer tester and
the vehicle will start off. the free rollers.
Always lift the vehicle up so all four wheels are off the 3. Tie down the vehicle securely using the towing
ground when testing and inspecting the vehicle to hook and tie-down hook bracket to prevent the
rotate the wheels such as Pressure Tests. vehicle from rolling or over the free rollers.
Use the free rollers under the rear wheels when 4. Start the engine, shift the transmission into the
performing test the vehicle with the speedometer tester. D position, accelerate the vehicle gradually, and
measure the vehicle speed.
Precautions on using free rollers
5. After measurement, use the brake pedal to
• Inspecting and testing using a chassis dynamometer gradually decelerate and stop the vehicle.
is not feasible.
• Do not operate the accelerator, brake pedal or
steering wheel abruptly. It may cause the vehicle to
roll and create a hazardous condition.
• The maximum testing speed should be 50 km/h
(31 mph).
• The maximum continuous operating time should be
3 minutes.
• Make sure to tie down the vehicle securely with the
side anchor wires and center tie down wire. The free
rollers are to be set under the rear wheels.
• Make sure to place the free rollers parallel to the

roller of each speedometer tester.
• Putting the front and rear wheels on the
speedometer testers and free rollers
inappropriately may cause the vehicle to roll off
or over the free rollers and create a hazardous
condition.
• The side anchor wires and certain tie-down wire
must be appropriately tensioned. If the wires
have too much slack, the expected tie-down
efficiency cannot be obtained.
• When attaching the side anchor wires and center
tie-down wire, make sure they are not interfering
with the bumper and other parts of the vehicle
body.
• Do not attach the wires to any place other than
the designed areas.
• Do not operate the speedometer testers at a
speed more than 50 km/h (31 mph) or for more
than 3 minutes.
14-4
ＳＷＡ７Ｅ１ＳＥ１０４００００００００ＢＡＡＴ００
06/09/15 17:32:28 62SWA00A_140_0007
General Troubleshooting Information

How to Check for DTCs with the Honda If the D indicator or malfunction indicator lamp (MIL)
Diagnostic System (HDS) has been reported on, or if a driveability problem is
suspected, do this:
When the powertrain control module (PCM) senses an
abnormality in the input or output system, the D 1. Connect the HDS to the DLC. (See the HDS user’s
indicator (A) in the gauge control module (B) will manual for specific instructions.)
usually blink.
＊０１ 2. Turn the ignition switch ON (II), select A/T system,
B
and observe the DTC in the DTCs MENU on the
HDS screen.
NOTE: If the HDS does not communicate with the

PCM, troubleshoot the DLC circuit; R20A1 and
R20A2 engine models (see page 11-199), K24Z1
engine model (see page 11-589).
3. Record all fuel and emissions DTCs, and A/T DTCs,

and freeze data.
4. If there is a fuel and emissions DTC, first check the

fuel and emissions system as indicated by the DTC
A (except for DTC P0700, DTC P0700 means there is
one or more A/T DTCs, and no problems were
When the Honda Diagnostic System (HDS) is connected detected in the fuel and emissions circuit of the
to the data link connector (DLC) (A) (located behind the PCM).
driver’s dashboard lower cover) and the SCS mode is
selected, it will indicate the diagnostic trouble code 5. Clear the DTC and data.
(DTC) when the ignition switch is turned ON (II) and the
appropriate menu is selected. 6. Drive the vehicle for several minutes under the
＊０２ same conditions as those indicated by the freeze
data, and then recheck for a DTC. If the A/T DTC
returns, go to the indicated DTC’s troubleshooting.
If the DTC does not return, there was an
intermittent problem within the circuit. Make sure
all pins and terminals in the circuit are tight.
Symptom Troubleshooting Versus DTC

Troubleshooting
Some symptoms will not trigger diagnostic trouble
codes (DTCs) or cause the D indicator to blink. If the
malfunction indicator lamp (MIL) was reported ON or
the D indicator has been blinking, check for DTCs. If the
A
vehicle has an abnormal symptom, and there are no
DTCs stored, do the symptom troubleshooting. Check
*: This illustration shows LHD model.
the list of probable cause(s) for the symptom, in the
sequence listed, until you find the problem.
(cont’d)
14-5
ＳＷＡ７Ｅ１ＰＫ７７１００００００００ＢＢＡＴ２０
06/09/15 17:32:29 62SWA00A_140_0008
General Troubleshooting Information (cont’d)

How to Troubleshoot Circuits at the PCM 3. Raise the under-hood fuse/relay box (A).
Connectors ＊０４
NOTE: The PCM overwrite data and monitors the EVAP A

system for up to 15 minutes after the ignition switch is
turned OFF. Jumping the SCS line after turning the
ignition switch OFF cancels this function. Disconnecting
the PCM during this function, without jumping the SCS
line first, can damage the PCM.
1. Connect the HDS to the DLC.

＊０３
4. Disconnect PCM connectors (A), and probe the

terminals in the inspection port on the terminal side
of the connectors.
＊０５
2. Jump the SCS line with the HDS.

14-6
06/09/15 17:32:29 62SWA00A_140_0009
5. Check the connector inspection port (A) size, and 7. Gently slide the pin probe into the inspection port
select a suitable pin probe. at the connector terminal side. Always use the
＊０６ inspection port. Do not slide the probe into the
connector terminals.
• For accurate result, always use the pin

probe (male).
• To prevent damage to the connector
terminals, do not insert test equipment
A
probes, paper clips, or other substitutes as
they can damage the terminals. Damaged
terminals cause a poor connection and an
incorrect measurement.
• Do not puncture the insulation on a wire.
Punctures can cause poor or intermittent
electrical connections.
6. Connect one side of the patch cord (A) terminal to a
digital multimeter (B), and connect the other side of
the patch cord terminals to a commercially
available banana jack (Pomona Electronics Tool
No. 3563 or equivalent) (C).
＊０７
(cont’d)
14-7
06/09/15 17:32:29 62SWA00A_140_0010

Clear A/T DTCs Procedures How to End a Troubleshooting Session
1. Connect the HDS to the DLC (A). This procedure must be done after any troubleshooting.
＊０８
1. Reset the PCM with the HDS while the engine is
stopped.
2. Turn the ignition switch OFF.
3. Turn the ignition switch ON (II), and wait for

30 seconds.
4. Turn the ignition switch OFF, and disconnect the

HDS from the DLC.
5. Do the PCM idle learn procedure; R20A1 and R20A2

engine models (see page 11-302), K24Z1 engine
A
model (see page 11-703).

6. Start the engine in the P or N position, and warm it
up to normal operating temperature (the radiator
2. Turn the ignition switch ON (II). fan comes on).
3. Clear the DTC(s) on the HDS screen. 7. To verify that the problem is repaired, test-drive the
vehicle for several minutes at speeds over 50 km/h
OBD Status (31 mph) or under the same conditions as those
indicated by the freeze data.
The OBD status shows the current system status of
each DTC and all of the parameters. This function is
used to see if the technician’s repair was successfully
finished. The results of diagnostic tests for the DTC are
displayed as:
• PASSED: On board diagnosis is successfully finished.

• FAILED: On board diagnosis has finished but failed.
• NOT COMPLETED: The on board diagnosis was
running but is out of the enable conditions of the DTC.
14-8
06/09/15 17:32:30 62SWA00A_140_0011
PCM Updating and Substitution for Testing 1. Turn the ignition switch ON (II), but do not start the
engine.
Special Tools Required
Honda interface module (HIM) EQS05A35570 2. Connect the HDS to the DLC (A).
＊０９
Use this procedure when you have to substitute a
known-good PCM in a troubleshooting procedure.
Update the PCM only if the PCM does not already have
the latest software loaded.
NOTE: Do not turn the ignition switch OFF while

updating the PCM. If you turn the ignition switch OFF
before completion, the PCM can be damaged.
How to Update the PCM

NOTE:
• Make sure you have the latest software on the HDS.
• To ensure the latest program is installed, do a PCM A
update whenever the PCM is substituted or replaced.
• You cannot update a PCM with the program it already *: This illustration shows LHD model.
has. It will only accept a new program.
• Before you update the PCM, make sure the battery is 3. Make sure the HDS communicates with the PCM. if
fully charged. it does not, go to the DLC circuit troubleshooting;
• To prevent PCM damage, do not operate anything R20A1 and R20A2 engine models (see page 11-199),
electrical (audio system, brakes, A/C, power windows, K24Z1 engine model (see page 11-589). If you did
sunroof (if equipped), or door locks) during the the DLC circuit troubleshooting, skip steps 4 and 5,
update. then clean the throttle body; R20A1 and R20A2
• If you need to diagnose the Honda interface module engine models (see page 11-340), K24Z1 engine
(HIM) because the HIM’s red (＃3) light came on or model (see page 11-741) after step 9.
was flashing during the update, leave the ignition
switch in the ON (II) position when you disconnect the 4. Select the INSPECTION MENU with the HDS.
HIM from the data link connector (DLC). This will
prevent PCM damage. 5. Select the TP POSITION CHECK in the ETCS TEST
• High temperature in the engine compartment might with the HDS.
cause the PCM to become too hot to run the update. If
the engine has been running before this procedure, NOTE: If there is no result from TP POSITION
open the hood and cool the engine compartment. CHECK, clean the throttle body; R20A1 and R20A2
model (see page 11-741) after this procedure.
6. If the HDS does not have the update function,

disconnect the HDS from the DLC, and connect the
Honda interface module (HIM) to the DLC.
(cont’d)
14-9
06/09/15 17:32:30 62SWA00A_140_0012

7. If the software in the PCM is the latest, disconnect How to Substitute the PCM
the HDS or the HIM from the DLC, and go back to
the procedure that you were doing. If the software 1. Make sure you have the anti-theft code for the
in the PCM is not the latest, do the PCM update audio or the navigation system (if equipped).
procedure as described on the HIM label or in the
PCM update system. 2. Connect the HDS to the DLC (A).
＊１０
NOTE: If the PCM update system requires you to
cool the PCM, follow what is shown on the screen.
8. Do the PCM idle learn procedure; R20A1 and R20A2

9. Do the crank pattern clear/crank pattern learn

procedure; R20A1 and R20A2 engine models
(see page 11-5), K24Z1 engine model (see page
11-380).
3. Turn the ignition switch ON (II).
4. Make sure the HDS communicates with the PCM. If

it does not, go to the DLC circuit troubleshooting;
R20A1 and R20A2 engine models (see page 11-199),
K24Z1 engine model (see page 11-589). If you did
the DLC circuit troubleshooting, skip steps 5 thru 9,
then clean the throttle body; R20A1 and R20A2
model (see page 11-741) after substituting the PCM.
5. Select the INSPECTION MENU with the HDS.
6. Select the TP POSITION CHECK in the ETCS TEST

with the HDS.
NOTE: If the result of TP POSITION CHECK was

failed, clean the throttle body; R20A1 and R20A2
model (see page 11-741) after this procedure.
8. Remove the battery.
14-10
06/09/15 17:32:30 62SWA00A_140_0013
9. Remove the PCM cover (A). 13. Turn the ignition switch ON (II).
＊１１
NOTE: DTC P0630 ‘‘VIN not Programmed or
A Mismatch’’ will be stored because VIN has not been
programmed into the PCM. Ignore it, and continue
this procedure.
14. Input the VIN to the PCM with the HDS.
15. Update the PCM if it does not have the latest

software.
16. Select the IMMOBILIZER SYSTEM with the HDS.
17. Rewrite the immobilizer code with the PCM

replacement procedure in the HDS; it allows you to
start the engine.
18. Reset the PCM with the HDS.

10. Remove the bolts (A), and remove the PCM (B).
＊１２ 19. Do the PCM idle learn procedure; R20A1 and R20A2
D
C 20. Do the crank pattern learn procedure.
21. Enter the anti-theft code for the audio or the

navigation system (if equipped) and set the clock.
E
A
9.8 N·m
(1.0 kgf·m,
7.2 lbf·ft)
11. Disconnect PCM connectors A (C), B (D), and C (E).
NOTE: PCM connectors A, B, and C have symbols

(A=□, B=△, C=○) embossed on them for
identification.
12. Install the PCM and the battery in the reverse order
of removal.
14-11
06/09/15 17:32:31 62SWA00A_140_0014
DTC Troubleshooting Index

NOTE:
• Record all freeze data and review General Troubleshooting Information (see page 14-5) before you troubleshoot.
• The DTC in parentheses is the Honda code that you will see when you use the HDS in DTCs/Freeze Data menu.
• The DTC marked with an asterisk ( ) is caused by an electrical circuit problem and cannot be caused by a
mechanical problem in the transmission.
• The MIL comes on when the PGM-FI control system detects a failure on the DTC indicated ‘‘OFF or ON’’ in the MIL
box.
DTC D MIL Detection Item Page

Indicator
KE, KG, KS, KK, KM, KN,

KD, KQ, and KP, KU,
KU-N KU-i, KW,
models KX, KY, KZ,
FO, IN, MA,
and PH
models
P0107 (12-7) Blinks OFF or ON OFF or ON Manifold absolute pressure (MAP) (see page 14-84)
sensor circuit low voltage input
P0108 (12-8) Blinks OFF or ON OFF or ON Manifold absolute pressure (MAP) (see page 14-85)
sensor circuit high voltage input
P0335 (88-2) Blinks OFF or ON OFF or ON Crankshaft position (CKP) sensor A (see page 14-86)
no signal
P0339 (88-6) Blinks OFF or ON OFF or ON Crankshaft position (CKP) sensor A (see page 14-87)
intermittent interruption
P0365 (89-2) Blinks OFF or ON OFF or ON Camshaft position (CMP) sensor B (see page 14-88)
no signal
P0369 (89-6) Blinks OFF or ON OFF or ON Camshaft position (CMP) sensor B (see page 14-89)
intermittent interruption
P0705 (5-2) Blinks ON OFF Transmission range switch (see page 14-90)
(multiple shift-position input)
P0706 (6-2) Not ON OFF Transmission range switch (open) (see page 14-96)
blinks
P0711 (28-5) Blinks OFF OFF ATF temperature sensor (see page 14-100)
(range/performance)
P0712 (28-3) Blinks OFF OFF ATF temperature sensor (short) (see page 14-101)
P0713 (28-4) Blinks OFF OFF ATF temperature sensor (open) (see page 14-103)
P0716 (15-5) Blinks ON OFF Input shaft (mainshaft) speed sensor (see page 14-106)
(range/performance)
(no signal input)
(intermittent failure)
P0721 (9-5) Blinks ON ON Output shaft (countershaft) speed (see page 14-120)
sensor (range/performance)
P0722 (9-3) Blinks ON ON Output shaft (countershaft) speed (see page 14-125)
sensor (no signal input)
14-12
ＳＷＡ７Ｅ００Ｅ１０４００００００００ＧＡＡＴ００
06/09/15 17:32:31 62SWA00A_140_0015

Indicator

KD, KQ, and KP, KU,
KU-N KU-i, KW,
models KX, KY, KZ,
FO, IN, MA,
and PH
models
P0723 (9-6) Blinks ON OFF Output shaft (countershaft) speed (see page 14-130)
sensor (intermittent failure)
P0747 (76-4) Blinks ON OFF A/T clutch pressure control solenoid (see page 14-134)
valve A stuck ON
P0752 (70-4) Blinks ON OFF Shift solenoid valve A stuck ON (see page 14-135)
P0756 (71-3) Blinks ON OFF Shift solenoid valve B stuck OFF (see page 14-136)
P0757 (71-4) Blinks ON OFF Shift solenoid valve B stuck ON (see page 14-137)
P0761 (72-3) Blinks ON OFF Shift solenoid valve C stuck OFF (see page 14-138)
P0771 (74-3) Blinks ON OFF Shift solenoid valve E stuck OFF (see page 14-139)
valve B stuck OFF
valve B stuck ON
P0780 (45-1) Blinks ON OFF Shift control system (see page 14-142)
valve C stuck OFF
valve C stuck ON
P0842 (25-3) Blinks ON OFF 2nd clutch transmission fluid pressure (see page 14-145)
switch (short or stuck ON)
P0843 (25-4) Blinks ON OFF 2nd clutch transmission fluid pressure (see page 14-147)
switch (open or stuck OFF)
P0847 (26-3) Blinks OFF OFF 3rd clutch transmission fluid pressure (see page 14-150)
switch (short or stuck ON)
P0848 (26-4) Blinks OFF OFF 3rd clutch transmission fluid pressure (see page 14-152)
switch (open or stuck OFF)
valve A (open/short)
valve A
valve B (open/short)
valve B
(cont’d)
14-13
06/09/15 17:32:31 62SWA00A_140_0016
DTC Troubleshooting Index (cont’d)

Indicator

KD, KQ, and KP, KU,
KU-N KU-i, KW,
models KX, KY, KZ,
FO, IN, MA,
and PH
models
valve C (open/short)
valve C
P0973 (7-3) Blinks ON OFF Shift solenoid valve A (short) (see page 14-170)
P0974 (7-4) Blinks ON OFF Shift solenoid valve A (open) (see page 14-173)
P0976 (8-3) Blinks ON OFF Shift solenoid valve B (short) (see page 14-176)
P0977 (8-4) Blinks ON OFF Shift solenoid valve B (open) (see page 14-179)
P0979 (22-3) Blinks ON OFF Shift solenoid valve C (short) (see page 14-182)
P0980 (22-4) Blinks ON OFF Shift solenoid valve C (open) (see page 14-185)
P0982 (60-3) Blinks ON OFF Shift solenoid valve D (short) (see page 14-188)
P0983 (60-4) Blinks ON OFF Shift solenoid valve D (open) (see page 14-191)
P0985 (61-3) Blinks ON OFF Shift solenoid valve E (short) (see page 14-194)
P0986 (61-4) Blinks ON OFF Shift solenoid valve E (open) (see page 14-197)
P16C0 (99-1) Not ON ON PCM A/T control system incomplete (see page 14-200)
blinks update
P1717 (62-1) Blinks OFF OFF Transmission range switch ATP RVS (see page 14-201)
switch (open)
• Shift solenoid valve A or D stuck
OFF
• Shift solenoid valve B stuck ON
• Shift valve A, B, or D stuck
• Shift solenoid valve E stuck ON
• Shift valve E stuck
• A/T clutch pressure control solenoid
valve A stuck OFF
• Shift solenoid valve B or C stuck ON
• Shift valve B or C stuck
• Shift solenoid valve D stuck ON
• Shift valve D stuck
• A/T clutch pressure control solenoid
valve C stuck OFF
14-14
06/09/15 17:32:31 62SWA00A_140_0017

Indicator

KD, KQ, and KP, KU,
KU-N KU-i, KW,
models KX, KY, KZ,
FO, IN, MA,
and PH
models
• Shift solenoid valve B or C stuck
OFF
• Shift valve B or C stuck
P2122 (20-3) Blinks ON OFF Accelerator pedal position (APP) (see page 14-214)
sensor A (throttle position sensor D)
circuit low voltage
P2123 (20-4) Blinks ON OFF Accelerator pedal position (APP) (see page 14-215)
sensor A (throttle position sensor D)
circuit high voltage
U0028 (107-1) Blinks OFF or ON OFF or ON F-CAN malfunction (F-CAN bus OFF) (see page 14-216)
U0121 (107-7) Blinks OFF OFF F-CAN malfunction (see page 14-217)
(PCM-to-ABS modulator-control unit)
U0122 (107-4) Blinks OFF OFF F-CAN malfunction (see page 14-219)
(PCM-to-VSA modulator-control unit)
U0155 (107-3) Blinks OFF or ON OFF or ON F-CAN malfunction (see page 14-221)
(PCM-to-gauge control module)
NOTE:
• Record all freeze data and review General Troubleshooting Information (see page 14-5) before you troubleshoot.
• The DTC in parentheses is the Honda code that you will see when you use the HDS in DTCs/Freeze Data menu.
• The DTC marked with an asterisk ( ) is caused by an electrical circuit problem and cannot be caused by a
mechanical problem in the transmission.
• The MIL comes on when the PGM-FI control system detects a failure on the DTC indicated ‘‘OFF or ON’’ in the MIL
box.
14-15
06/09/15 17:32:31 62SWA00A_140_0018
Symptom Troubleshooting Index

Symptom Probable cause(s) Notes
When you turn the • F-CAN communication line error • Check the F-CAN communication line for a DTC
ignition switch ON • Gauge control module defective (see page 22-210).
(II), the D indicator • PCM defective • Check A/T gear position indicator drive circuit in
comes on and the gauge control module by gauge control
stays on in all shift module self-diagnostic function (see page
lever positions, or 22-198).
it never comes on
at all
A/T gear position • F-CAN communication line error • Check the F-CAN communication line for a DTC
indicator does not • Gauge control module defective (see page 22-210).
come on while the • PCM defective • Check A/T gear position indicator drive circuit in
shift lever is in that • Transmission range switch the gauge control module by gauge control
position defective module self-diagnostic function (see page
22-198).
• Inspect the transmission range switch (see page
14-329).
Transmission still • D3 switch defective • Check the D3 switch circuit (see page 14-340).
shifts into 4th or • D3 switch circuit defective • Check the D3 switch (see page 14-342).
5th gear in D even • Transmission range switch • Inspect the transmission range switch (see page
though the D3 defective 14-329).
switch is pressed
When you turn the • F-CAN communication line error • Check the F-CAN communication line for a DTC
ignition switch ON • Gauge control module defective (see page 22-210).
(II), the D3 • PCM defective • Check A/T gear position indicator drive circuit in
indicator comes on • D3 switch defective the gauge control module by gauge control
and stays on in all • D3 switch circuit defective module self-diagnostic function (see page
shift lever 22-198).
positions, or it • Check the D3 switch circuit (see page 14-340).
never comes on at • Check the D3 switch (see page 14-342).
all
D3 indicator does • F-CAN communication line error • Check the F-CAN communication line for a DTC
not come on in D3 • Gauge control module defective (see page 22-210).
driving mode • PCM defective • Check A/T gear position indicator drive circuit in
• D3 switch defective the gauge control module by gauge control
• D3 switch circuit defective module self-diagnostic function (see page
22-198).
• Check the D3 switch circuit (see page 14-340).
• Check the D3 switch (see page 14-342).
14-16
ＳＷＡ７Ｅ１ＰＥ１０４００００００００ＨＢＡＴ００
06/09/15 17:32:32 62SWA00A_140_0019

Shift lever cannot • Accelerator pedal position sensor • Inspect the APP Sensor signal; R20A1 and R20A2
be moved from P circuit engine models (see page 11-268), K24Z1 engine
while you are • Accelerator pedal position sensor model (see page 11-655).
pressing on the defective • Troubleshoot the shift lock system circuit
brake pedal • Brake switch circuit (see page 14-347).
• Brake switch defective • Test the shift lock solenoid (see page 14-354).
• Shift lock solenoid defective • Inspect the transmission range switch (see page
• Shift lock solenoid control circuit 14-329).
• Shift lock mechanism defective
• Throttle body defective
• Transmission range switch ATP P
switch stuck OFF
• Transmission range switch ATP P
switch line opened
Ignition switch • Interlock control system circuit • Troubleshoot the key interlock system circuit
cannot be moved • Key interlock solenoid stuck ON (see page 14-352).
from ACC (I) to • Park pin switch stuck OFF • Inspect the transmission range switch (see page
LOCK (0) (key is • Transmission range switch 14-329).
pushed in, shift
lever in P)
HDS does not DLC circuit error Troubleshoot the DLC circuit; R20A1 and R20A2
communicate with engine models (see page 11-199), K24Z1 engine
the PCM or the model (see page 11-589).
vehicle
(cont’d)
14-17
06/09/15 17:32:32 62SWA00A_140_0020
Symptom Troubleshooting Index (cont’d)

Engine runs, but 1. Low ATF level • Check the ATF level, and check the ATF cooler
vehicle does not 2. Shift cable broken or out of lines for leakage and loose connections. If
move in any gear adjustment necessary, clean the ATF cooler lines.
3. Connection between the in shift • Check for a loose shift cable at the shift lever and
cable and transmission or body the transmission control shaft.
is worn • Improper alignment of ATF pump and torque
4. ATF pump worn or binding converter housing may cause ATF pump seizure.
5. Regulator valve stuck or spring The symptoms are mostly an rpm-related ticking
worn noise or a high pitched squeak.
6. ATF strainer clogged • Check the line pressure.
7. Mainshaft worn or damaged • Be careful not to damage the torque converter
8. Final gears worn or damaged housing when replacing the main ball bearing.
9. Transmission-to-engine You may also damage the ATF pump when you
assembly error torque down the main valve body. This will result
10. Axle disengaged in ATF pump seizure if not detected. Use the
proper tools.
• Install the main seal flush with the torque
converter housing. If you push it into the torque
converter housing until it bottoms out, it will
block the fluid return passage and result in
damage.
• Check the ATF strainer for debris. If the ATF
strainer is clogged with particles of steel or
aluminum, inspect the ATF pump. If the ATF
pump is OK, find the damaged components that
caused the debris. If no cause for contamination
is found, replace the torque converter.
• Inspect the differential pinion gears for wear. If
the differential pinion gears are worn, replace the
differential assembly, replace the ATF strainer,
thoroughly clean the transmission, and clean the
torque converter, cooler, and lines.
Vehicle moves in 2 1. 1st accumulator defective • Check the 1st clutch pressure.
and R, but not in D 2. 1st gears worn or damaged • Inspect the clutch piston, clutch piston check
and 1 3. 1st clutch defective valve, and O-rings. Check the spring retainer and
retainer seal for wear and damage. Inspect the
clutch end-plate-to-top disc clearance. If the
clearance is out of tolerance, inspect the clutch
discs and plates for wear and damage. If the
discs are worn or damaged, replace them as a set.
Inspect the clutch waved-plate height. If the
height is out of tolerance, replace the waved-
plate. If the discs and plates are OK, adjust the
clearance with the clutch end plate.
• Inspect the 1st clutch feed pipe. If the 1st clutch
feed pipe is scored, replace the end cover.
• Replace the secondary shaft if the bushing for the
1st clutch feed pipe is loose or damaged.
14-18
06/09/15 17:32:32 62SWA00A_140_0021

Vehicle moves in 1. 2nd accumulator • Check the 2nd clutch pressure.
D, 1, and R, but defective • Inspect the clutch piston, clutch piston check valve, and
not in 2 2. 2nd gears worn or O-rings. Check the spring retainer and retainer seal for wear
damaged and damage. Inspect the clutch end-plate-to-top disc
3. 2nd clutch defective clearance. If the clearance is out of tolerance, inspect the
clutch discs and plates for wear and damage. If the discs are
worn or damaged, replace them as a set. Inspect the clutch
waved-plate height. If the height is out of tolerance, replace
the waved-plate. If the discs and plates are OK, adjust the
Vehicle moves in 1. Shift solenoid valve E • Check the D indicator, and check for loose connectors.
D, 2, and 1, but defective • Inspect the shift solenoid valve E for seizure, and O-rings for
not in R 2. Shift fork shaft stuck wear and damage.
3. Shift valve E defective • Check for a missing shift fork bolt on the shift fork shaft.
4. 4th/reverse accumulator • Check the 4th clutch pressure.
defective • Inspect the clutch piston, clutch piston check valve, and
5. 4th clutch defective O-rings. Check the spring retainer for wear and damage.
6. Reverse gears worn or Inspect the clutch end-plate-to-top disc clearance. If the
damaged clearance is out of tolerance, inspect the clutch discs and
plates for wear and damage. If the discs are worn or
damaged, replace them as a set. Inspect the clutch waved-
plate height. If the height is out of tolerance, replace the
waved-plate. If the discs and plates are OK, adjust the
• Inspect the reverse selector gear teeth chamfers, and
inspect the engagement teeth chamfers of the countershaft
4th gear and reverse gear. Replace the reverse gears and
the reverse selector if they are worn or damaged. If the
transmission makes a clicking, grinding, or whirring noise,
also replace the mainshaft 4th gear, reverse idler gear, and
countershaft 4th gear.
Poor 1. Low ATF level • Check the ATF level, and check the ATF cooler lines for
acceleration; 2. Shift cable broken or out leakage and loose connections. If necessary, clean the ATF
flares when of adjustment cooler lines.
starting off in D 3. ATF pump worn or • Check for a loose shift cable at the shift lever and the
and R; stall binding transmission control shaft.
speed high in 2 4. Regulator valve stuck or • Improper alignment of ATF pump and torque converter
and 1, and in D spring worn housing may cause ATF pump seizure. The symptoms are
in 1st and 2nd 5. ATF strainer clogged mostly an rpm-related ticking noise or a high pitched
6. Torque converter check squeak.
valve defective • Check the ATF strainer for debris. If the ATF strainer is
clogged with particles of steel or aluminum, inspect the ATF
pump. If the ATF pump is OK, find the damaged
components that caused the debris. If no cause for
contamination is found, replace the torque converter.
(cont’d)
14-19
06/09/15 17:32:32 62SWA00A_140_0022

Poor acceleration; 2nd clutch defective • Check the 2nd clutch pressure.
flares when • Inspect the clutch piston, clutch piston check
starting off in D valve, and O-rings. Check the spring retainer and
and R; stall speed retainer seal for wear and damage. Inspect the
high when starting clutch end-plate-to-top disc clearance. If the
off in 2 clearance is out of tolerance, inspect the clutch
Poor acceleration; 1. Shift cable broken or out of • Check for a loose shift cable at the shift lever and
flares when adjustment the transmission control shaft.
starting off in D 2. 4th clutch defective • Check the 4th clutch pressure in the D and R
and R; stall speed positions.
high in R • Inspect the clutch piston, clutch piston check
valve, and O-rings. Check the spring retainer for
wear and damage. Inspect the clutch end-plate-
to-top disc clearance. If the clearance is out of
tolerance, inspect the clutch discs and plates for
wear and damage. If the discs are worn or
damaged, replace them as a set. Inspect the
clutch waved-plate height. If the height is out of
tolerance, replace the waved-plate. If the discs
and plates are OK, adjust the clearance with the
clutch end plate.
Poor acceleration; 1. Shift solenoid valve E defective • Check the D indicator, and check for loose
stall speed low in 2 2. Torque converter one-way clutch connectors.
and 1, and in D in defective • Inspect the shift solenoid valve E for seizure, and
1st and 2nd 3. Engine output low O-ring for wear and damage.
4. Torque converter clutch piston • Replace the torque converter.
defective
5. Lock-up shift valve defective
Poor acceleration; 1. Engine output low Replace the torque converter.
stall speed low in R 2. Torque converter clutch piston
defective
14-20
06/09/15 17:32:32 62SWA00A_140_0023

Engine idle 1. Misadjusted engine and • Check the ATF level, and check the ATF cooler
vibration transmission mounts lines for leakage and loose connections. If
2. Low ATF level necessary, clean the ATF cooler lines.
3. Shift solenoid valve E defective • Improper alignment of ATF pump and torque
4. Drive plate defective or converter housing may cause ATF pump seizure.
transmission misassembled The symptoms are mostly an rpm-related ticking
5. Engine output low noise or a high pitched squeak.
6. Torque converter clutch piston • Inspect the ATF strainer for clogging with
defective particles of steel or aluminum. If the ATF strainer
7. ATF pump worn or binding is clogged, replace it, and clean the torque
8. Lock-up shift valve defective converter, cooler, and lines.
• Check the D indicator, and check for loose
connectors. Inspect the shift solenoid valve E for
seizure, and O-rings for wear and damage.
• Check for a misinstalled/damaged drive plate.
• Adjust the engine and transmission mounts.
• Replace the torque converter.
Vehicle moves in N 1. Excessive ATF • Check the ATF level, and drain the ATF if it is
2. Foreign material in separator over-filled.
plate orifice • Check the 1st, 2nd, 3rd, 4th, and 5th clutch
3. Relief valve defective pressures.
4. 1st clutch defective • Check the ATF strainer for debris. If the ATF
5. 2nd clutch defective strainer is clogged with particles of steel or
6. 3rd clutch defective aluminum, inspect the ATF pump. If the ATF
7. 4th clutch defective pump is OK, find the damaged components that
8. 5th clutch defective caused the debris. If no cause for contamination
9. Clutch end plate-to-top disc is found, replace the torque converter.
clearance incorrect • Inspect the clutch piston, clutch piston check
10. Needle bearing seized up, worn, valve, and O-rings. Check the spring retainer and
or damaged retainer seal (1st, 2nd, and 3rd) for wear and
11. Thrust washer seized up, worn, damage. Inspect the clutch end-plate-to-top disc
or damaged clearance. If the clearance is out of tolerance,
inspect the clutch discs and plates for wear and
damage. If the discs are worn or damaged,
replace them as a set. Inspect the clutch waved-
plate height. If the height is out of tolerance,
replace the waved-plate. If the discs and plates
are OK, adjust the clearance with the clutch end
plate.
• Inspect the 1st clutch feed pipe. If the 1st clutch
• Inspect the 3rd clutch feed pipe. If the 3rd clutch
feed pipe is scored, replace it and O-ring under
the feed pipe guide.
1st or 3rd clutch feed pipe is loose or damaged.
• Inspect the 5th clutch feed pipe. If the 5th clutch
feed pipe is scored, replace it and the O-ring
under the feed pipe guide.
• Replace the mainshaft if the bushing for the 5th
clutch feed pipe is loose or damaged.
(cont’d)
14-21
06/09/15 17:32:32 62SWA00A_140_0024

Late shift after 1. Shift solenoid valve E defective • Check the D indicator, and check for loose
shifting from N to 2. A/T clutch pressure control connectors.
D, or excessive solenoid valve A defective • Inspect the solenoid valve filter/gasket and
shock when shifted 3. A/T clutch pressure control O-rings for wear and damage, and inspect the
into D solenoid valve B defective solenoid valves for seizure.
4. A/T clutch pressure control • Check the input shaft (mainshaft) speed sensor
solenoid valve C defective and output shaft (countershaft) speed sensor
5. Shift cable broken or out of installation.
adjustment • Check for a loose shift cable at the shift lever and
6. Connection between the shift the transmission control shaft.
cable and transmission or body • Check the 1st clutch pressure.
is worn • Inspect the clutch piston, clutch piston check
7. Input shaft (mainshaft) speed valve, and O-rings. Check the spring retainer and
sensor defective retainer seal for wear and damage. Inspect the
8. Output shaft (countershaft) clutch end-plate-to-top disc clearance. If the
speed sensor defective clearance is out of tolerance, inspect the clutch
9. ATF temperature sensor discs and plates for wear and damage. If the
defective discs are worn or damaged, replace them as a set.
10. Foreign material in separator Inspect the clutch waved-plate height. If the
plate orifice height is out of tolerance, replace the waved-
11. Servo control valve defective plate. If the discs and plates are OK, adjust the
12. 1st accumulator defective clearance with the clutch end plate.
13. 1st check ball stuck • Inspect the 1st clutch feed pipe. If the 1st clutch
14. Lock-up shift valve defective feed pipe is scored, replace the end cover.
15. 1st clutch defective • Replace the secondary shaft if the bushing for the
Late shift after 1. Shift solenoid valve E defective • Check the D indicator, and check for loose
shifting from N to 2. A/T clutch pressure control connectors.
R, or excessive solenoid valve A defective • Inspect the solenoid valve filter/gasket and
shock when shifted 3. Shift cable broken or out of O-rings for wear and damage, and inspect the
into R adjustment solenoid valves for seizure.
4. Connection between the shift • Check the input shaft (mainshaft) speed sensor
cable and transmission or body and output shaft (countershaft) speed sensor
is worn installation.
5. Input shaft (mainshaft) speed • Check for a loose shift cable at the shift lever and
sensor defective the transmission control shaft.
6. Output shaft (countershaft) • Inspect the clutch piston, clutch piston check
speed sensor defective valve, and O-rings. Check the spring retainer for
7. ATF temperature sensor wear and damage. Inspect the clutch end-plate-
defective to-top disc clearance. If the clearance is out of
8. Shift fork shaft stuck tolerance, inspect the clutch discs and plates for
9. Foreign material in separator wear and damage. If the discs are worn or
plate orifice damaged, replace them as a set. Inspect the
10. Shift valve E defective clutch waved-plate height. If the height is out of
11. 4th/reverse accumulator tolerance, replace the waved-plate. If the discs
defective and plates are OK, adjust the clearance with the
12. Lock-up shift valve defective clutch end plate.
13. 4th clutch defective • Check for a missing shift fork bolt on the shift
fork shaft.
• Check the 4th clutch pressure.
• Inspect the servo valve and O-ring.
14-22
06/09/15 17:32:33 62SWA00A_140_0025

The transmission 1. Input shaft (mainshaft) speed • Check the D indicator, and check for loose
does not shift sensor defective connectors.
2. Output shaft (countershaft) • Check the input shaft (mainshaft) and output
speed sensor defective shaft (countershaft) speed sensor installation.
Excessive shock or 1. A/T clutch pressure control • Check the D indicator, and check for loose
flares on all solenoid valve B defective connectors.
upshifts and 2. A/T clutch pressure control • Inspect the solenoid valve filter/gasket and
downshifts solenoid valve C defective O-rings for wear and damage, and inspect the
3. Input shaft (mainshaft) speed solenoid valves for seizure.
sensor defective • Check the input shaft (mainshaft) speed sensor
4. Output shaft (countershaft) and output shaft (countershaft) speed sensor
speed sensor defective installation.
5. ATF temperature sensor
defective
6. Foreign material in separator
plate orifice
Excessive shock or 1. Shift solenoid valve E defective • Check the D indicator, and check for loose
flares on 1-2 2. A/T clutch pressure control connectors.
upshift or 2-1 solenoid valve A defective • Inspect the solenoid valve filter/gasket and
downshift 3. A/T clutch pressure control O-rings for wear and damage, and inspect the
solenoid valve B defective solenoid valves for seizure.
4. A/T clutch pressure control • Check the 1st and 2nd clutch pressures.
solenoid valve C defective • Inspect the clutch piston, clutch piston check
5. 2nd clutch transmission fluid valve, and O-rings. Check the spring retainer and
pressure switch defective retainer seal for wear and damage. Inspect the
6. Foreign material in separator clutch end-plate-to-top disc clearance. If the
plate orifice clearance is out of tolerance, inspect the clutch
7. 1st accumulator defective discs and plates for wear and damage. If the
8. 2nd accumulator defective discs are worn or damaged, replace them as a set.
9. 1st check ball stuck Inspect the clutch waved-plate height. If the
10. 2nd check ball stuck height is out of tolerance, replace the waved-
11. Lock-up shift valve defective plate. If the discs and plates are OK, adjust the
12. 1st clutch defective clearance with the clutch end plate.
13. 2nd clutch defective • Inspect the 1st clutch feed pipe. If the 1st clutch
(cont’d)
14-23
06/09/15 17:32:33 62SWA00A_140_0026

flares on 2-3 solenoid valve B defective connectors.
upshift or 3-2 2. A/T clutch pressure control • Inspect the solenoid valve filter/gasket and
downshift solenoid valve C defective O-rings for wear and damage, and inspect the
3. 3rd clutch transmission fluid solenoid valves for seizure.
pressure switch defective • Check the 2nd and 3rd clutch pressures.
4. Foreign material in separator • Inspect the clutch piston, clutch piston check
plate orifice valve, and O-rings. Check the spring retainer and
5. 2nd accumulator defective retainer seal for wear and damage. Inspect the
6. 3rd accumulator defective clutch end-plate-to-top disc clearance. If the
7. 2nd check ball stuck clearance is out of tolerance, inspect the clutch
8. 2nd clutch defective discs and plates for wear and damage. If the
9. 3rd clutch defective discs are worn or damaged, replace them as a set.
3rd clutch feed pipe is loose or damaged.
3. Foreign material in separator solenoid valves for seizure.
plate orifice • Check the 3rd and 4th clutch pressures.
4. 3rd accumulator defective • Inspect the clutch piston, clutch piston check
5. 4th accumulator defective valve, and O-rings. Check the spring retainer and
6. 3rd clutch defective retainer seal (3rd) for wear and damage. Inspect
7. 4th clutch defective the clutch end-plate-to-top disc clearance. If the
clearance is out of tolerance, inspect the clutch
3rd clutch feed pipe is loose or damaged.
14-24
06/09/15 17:32:33 62SWA00A_140_0027

3. Foreign material in separator solenoid valves for seizure.
plate orifice • Check the 4th and 5th clutch pressures.
4. 4th accumulator defective • Inspect the clutch piston, clutch piston check
5. 5th accumulator defective valve, and O-rings. Check the spring retainer for
6. 4th clutch defective wear and damage. Inspect the clutch end-plate-
7. 5th clutch defective to-top disc clearance. If the clearance is out of
tolerance, inspect the clutch discs and plates for
wear and damage. If the discs are worn or
damaged, replace them as a set. Inspect the
clutch waved-plate height. If the height is out of
tolerance, replace the waved-plate. If the discs
and plates are OK, adjust the clearance with the
clutch end plate.
• Inspect the 5th clutch feed pipe. If the 5th clutch
• Replace the mainshaft if the bushing for the 5th
clutch feed pipe is loose or damaged.
Noise from 1. ATF pump worn or binding • Improper alignment of ATF pump and torque
transmission in all 2. Mainshaft bearing, countershaft converter housing may cause ATF pump seizure.
shift lever bearing, or secondary shaft The symptoms are mostly an rpm-related ticking
positions bearing defective noise or a high pitched squeak.
• Be careful not to damage the torque converter
housing when replacing the main ball bearing.
You may also damage the ATF pump when you
torque down the main valve body. This will result
in ATF pump seizure if not detected. Use the
proper tools.
• Install the main seal flush with the torque
converter housing. If you push it into the torque
converter housing until it bottoms out, it will
block the fluid return passage and result in
damage.
• Inspect the ATF strainer for clogging with
particles of steel or aluminum. If the ATF strainer
is clogged, replace it, and clean the torque
converter, cooler, and lines.
• Inspect the mainshaft, countershaft and
secondary shaft for wear or damage.
Vehicle does not Torque converter one-way clutch Replace the torque converter.
accelerate above defective
50 km/h (31 mph)
Vibration in all Drive plate defective or transmission • Check for a misinstalled/damaged drive plate.
shift lever misassembled • Adjust the engine and transmission mounts.
positions
(cont’d)
14-25
06/09/15 17:32:33 62SWA00A_140_0028

Shift lever does 1. Transmission range switch • Check the D indicator, and check for loose
not operate defective or out of adjustment connectors.
smoothly 2. Shift cable broken or out of • Inspect the transmission range switch for
adjustment operation.
3. Connection between the shift • Check for a loose shift cable at the shift lever and
cable and transmission or body is the transmission control shaft.
worn
Transmission does 1. Shift cable broken or out of • Check for a loose shift cable at the shift lever and
not shift into P adjustment the transmission control shaft.
2. Connection between the shift • Check the park pawl spring installation and the
cable and transmission or body is park lever spring installation. If installation is
worn incorrect, install the spring correctly. Make sure
3. Park mechanism defective that the park lever stop is not installed upside
down. Check the distance between the park pawl
shaft and park lever roller pin. If the distance is
out of tolerance, adjust the distance with the park
lever stop.
Torque converter 1. Shift solenoid valve E defective • Check the D indicator, and check for loose
clutch does not 2. A/T clutch pressure control connectors.
disengage solenoid valve A defective • Inspect the solenoid valve filter/gasket and
3. Torque converter clutch piston O-rings for wear and damage, and inspect the
defective solenoid valves for seizure.
4. Lock-up shift valve defective • Replace the torque converter.
5. Lock-up control valve defective
operate smoothly solenoid valve A defective • Inspect the solenoid valve filter/gasket and
3. Torque converter clutch piston O-rings for wear and damage, and inspect the
defective solenoid valves for seizure.
4. Torque converter check valve • Replace the torque converter.
defective
14-26
06/09/15 17:32:33 62SWA00A_140_0029

engage solenoid valve A defective • Inspect the solenoid valve filter/gasket and
3. Input shaft (mainshaft) speed O-rings for wear and damage, and inspect the
sensor defective solenoid valves for seizure.
4. Output shaft (countershaft) speed • Replace the torque converter.
sensor defective • Check the input shaft (mainshaft) speed sensor
5. Torque converter clutch piston and output shaft (countershaft) speed sensor
defective installation.
6. Torque converter check valve
defective
A/T gear position 1. Transmission range switch • Check the D indicator, and check for loose
indicator does not defective or out of adjustment connectors.
indicate shift lever 2. Shift cable broken or out of • Inspect the transmission range switch operation.
positions adjustment • Check for a loose shift cable at the shift lever and
3. Connection between the shift the transmission control shaft.
cable and transmission or body is
worn
Speedometer and Output shaft (countershaft) speed • Check the D indicator, and check for loose
odometer do not sensor defective connectors.
work • Inspect the transmission range switch operation.
• Check the output shaft (countershaft) speed
sensor installation.
The engine does VTEC rocker arms defective Check the engine rocker arms.
not rev to high rpm,
and the
transmission
upshifts at low rpm
14-27
06/09/15 17:32:33 62SWA00A_140_0030
System Description
General Operation
The automatic transmission is a combination of a 3-element torque converter and triple-shaft electronically controlled
unit which provides 5 speeds forward and 1 reverse. The entire unit is positioned in line with the engine.
Torque Converter, Gears, and Clutches

The torque converter consists of a pump, turbine, and stator assembly in a single unit. The converter housing (pump)
is connected to the engine crankshaft and turns as the engine turns. Around the outside of the torque converter is a
ring gear which meshes with the starter pinion when the engine is being started. The entire torque converter assembly
serves as a flywheel while transmitting power to the transmission mainshaft, the transmission has three parallel
shafts; the mainshaft, the countershaft, and the secondary shaft. The mainshaft is in line with the engine crankshaft,
and includes the 4th and 5th clutches, and gears for 5th, 4th, reverse, and idler. The mainshaft reverse gear is integral
with the mainshaft 4th gear. The countershaft includes the gears for 1st, 2nd, 3rd, 4th, 5th, reverse, park, and the final
drive. The final drive gear is integral with the countershaft. The countershaft 4th gear and the countershaft reverse
gear can be locked to the countershaft providing 4th or reverse gear, depending on which way the selector is moved.
The secondary shaft includes the 1st, 2nd, and 3rd clutches, and gears for 1st, 2nd, 3rd, and idler. The idler shaft is
located between the mainshaft and secondary shaft, and the idler gear transmits power between the mainshaft and
the secondary shaft. The gears on the mainshaft and the secondary shaft are in constant mesh with those on the
countershaft. When certain combinations of gears in the transmission are engaged by the clutches, power is
transmitted through the mainshaft, then to the secondary shaft to the countershaft or through the mainshaft to the
countershaft to provide drive.
Electronic Control
The electronic control system consists of the powertrain control module (PCM), sensors, and solenoid valves. Shifting
and lock-up are electronically controlled for comfortable driving under all conditions. The PCM is located in the engine
compartment.
Hydraulic Control
The valve bodies include the main valve body, the regulator valve body, and the servo body. They are bolted to the
torque converter housing. The main valve body contains the manual valve, the shift valves A, B, C, and E, the relief
valve, the lock-up control valve, the cooler check valve, the servo control valve, and the ATF pump gears. The
regulator valve body contains the regulator valve, the torque converter check valve, lock-up shift valve, and the 1st
and 3rd accumulators. The servo body contains the servo valve, the shift valve D, accumulators for 2nd, 4th, and 5th,
and shift solenoid valves for A, B, C, D, and E. Fluid from the regulator passes through the manual valve to the various
control valves. The 1st, 3rd, 5th clutches receive fluid from their respective feed pipes, and the 2nd and the 4th
clutches receive fluid from the internal hydraulic circuit.
Shift Control Mechanism

The PCM controls to shift gears shift solenoid valves A, B, C, D, and E, and the A/T clutch pressure control solenoid
valves A, B, and C, while receiving input signals from various sensors and switches located throughout the vehicle.
The shift solenoid valves shift the positions of the shift valves to switch the port to send hydraulic pressure to the
clutch. The A/T clutch pressure control solenoid valves A, B, and C regulate their respective pressure, and pressurize
to the clutches to engage it and its corresponding gear. The pressures of the A/T clutch pressure control solenoid
valves also apply to the shift valves to switch the port.
Lock-up Mechanism
The lock-up mechanism operates in the D position (2nd, 3rd, 4th, and 5th), and in D position D3 driving mode (2nd and
3rd). The pressurized fluid is drained from the back of the torque converter through a fluid passage, causing the torque
converter clutch piston to be held against the torque converter cover. As this takes place, the mainshaft rotates at the
same speed as the engine crankshaft. Together with the hydraulic control, the PCM optimizes the timing and volume
of the lock-up mechanism. When the shift solenoid valve E is turned on by the PCM, shift solenoid valve E pressure
switches the lock-up shift valve on and off. The A/T clutch pressure control solenoid valve A and the lock-up control
valve control the volume of the lock-up conditions.
14-28
ＳＷＡ７Ｅ１ＰＥ１０４００００００００ＣＡＡＴ００
06/09/15 17:32:58 62SWA00A_140_0031
Gear Selection
The shift lever has six positions; P: PARK, R: REVERSE, N: NEUTRAL, D: DRIVE 1st through 5th gear range, and 1st
through 3rd gear range with D3 driving mode, 2: 2nd gear, and 1: 1st gear.
Position Description
P: PARK Front wheels locked; park pawl engaged with park gear on countershaft. All
clutches are released.
R: REVERSE Reverse; reverse selector engaged with countershaft reverse gear and 4th
clutch engaged.
N: NEUTRAL All clutches are released.
D: DRIVE General driving; starts off in 1st, shifts automatically to 2nd, 3rd, 4th, then 5th,
(1st through 5th) depending on vehicle speed and throttle position. Downshifts through 4th, 3rd,
2nd, and 1st on deceleration to stop. The lock-up mechanism operates in 2nd,
3rd, 4th, and 5th gears.
D: DRIVE Used the rapid acceleration at highway speeds and general driving, up-hill and
with D3 driving mode down-hill driving; starts off in 1st, shifts automatically to 2nd, then 3rd,
(1st through 3rd) depending on vehicle speed and throttle position. Downshifts through 2nd to
1st on deceleration to stop. The lock-up mechanism operates in 2nd and 3rd
gears.
2: SECOND Used for engine braking or better traction starting off on loose or slippery
surfaces; stays in 2nd gear, does not shift up and down.
1: FIRST Used for engine braking; stays in 1st gear, does not shift up.
Starting is possible only in the P and N positions because of a slide-type neutral-safety switch.
Automatic Transmission (A/T) Gear Position Indicator

The A/T gear position indicator in the instrument panel shows which shift lever position has been selected without
having to look down at the shift lever.
Transfer Mechanism (4WD)

The transfer mechanism consists of the transfer drive gear on the differential, the transfer shaft, the transfer drive gear
(hypoid gear), the transfer output shaft (hypoid gear), and the companion flange. The transfer mechanism assembly is
on the rear of the transmission, beside the differential. The transfer drive gear on the differential drives the transfer
shaft and transfer drive gear (hypoid gear), and the transfer drive gear (hypoid gear) drives the transfer output shaft
(hypoid gear). Power is transmitted from the transfer drive gear on the differential to the rear differential via the
transfer shaft and the propeller shaft.
14-29
06/09/15 17:32:59 62SWA00A_140_0032
System Description (cont’d)

Clutches and Gears
The 5-speed automatic transmission uses hydraulically-actuated clutches to engage or disengage the transmission
gears. When hydraulic pressure is introduced into the clutch drum, the clutch piston moves. This presses the friction
discs and steel plates together, locking them so they don’t slip. Power is then transmitted through the engaged clutch
pack to its hub-mounted gear. Likewise, when the hydraulic pressure is bled from the clutch pack, the piston releases
the friction discs and the steel plates, and they are free to slide past each other. This allows the gear to spin
independently on its shaft, transmitting no power.
NOTE: The illustration shows the 4WD transmission, 2WD does not have the transfer mechanism.
＊０１
MAINSHAFT
MAINSHAFT 5TH GEAR
REVERSE 4TH GEAR RING GEAR
IDLER GEAR MAINSHAFT 5TH
REVERSE GEAR CLUTCH TORQUE CONVERTER
4TH
MAINSHAFT CLUTCH
IDLER GEAR DRIVE PLATE
MAINSHAFT
IDLER SHAFT FINAL DRIVE GEAR
COUNTERSHAFT
IDLER SHAFT
IDLER GEAR
COUNTERSHAFT 5TH GEAR
COUNTERSHAFT 2ND GEAR
COUNTERSHAFT 1ST GEAR
SECONDARY SHAFT
PARK GEAR SECONDARY SHAFT 1ST GEAR
SECONDARY SHAFT 2ND GEAR
REVERSE SELECTOR HUB
2ND CLUTCH
COUNTERSHAFT REVERSE GEAR TRANSFER DRIVE GEAR
REVERSE SELECTOR
COUNTERSHAFT 4TH GEAR DIFFERENTIAL

ASSEMBLY
SECONDARY SHAFT 3RD
IDLER GEAR CLUTCH TRANSFER ASSEMBLY
1ST TRANSFER
COUNTERSHAFT DRIVE GEAR
3RD GEAR CLUTCH
(HYPOID GEAR)
SECONDARY SHAFT
3RD GEAR
FINAL DRIVEN GEAR
TRANSFER SHAFT
DRIVEN GEAR
TRANSFER SHAFT
TRANSFER OUTPUT SHAFT

(HYPOID GEAR)
14-30
ＳＷＡ７Ｅ１ＰＥ１０４１１３１００４１ＣＡＡＴ００
06/09/15 17:32:59 62SWA00A_140_0033
1st Clutch
The 1st clutch engages/disengages 1st gear, and is located at the middle of the secondary shaft. The 1st clutch is
joined back-to-back to the 3rd clutch. The 1st clutch is supplied hydraulic pressure by its ATF feed pipe within the
secondary shaft.
2nd Clutch
The 2nd clutch engages/disengages 2nd gear, and is located at the end of the secondary shaft, opposite the end cover.
The 2nd clutch is supplied hydraulic pressure by a circuit connected to the internal hydraulic circuit.
3rd Clutch
The 3rd clutch engages/disengages 3rd gear, and is located at the middle of the secondary shaft. The 3rd clutch is
joined back-to-back to the 1st clutch. The 3rd clutch is supplied hydraulic pressure by its ATF feed pipe within the
secondary shaft.
4th Clutch
The 4th clutch engages/disengages 4th gear, as well as reverse gear, and is located at the middle of the mainshaft. The
4th clutch is joined back-to-back to the 5th clutch. The 4th clutch is supplied hydraulic pressure by its ATF feed pipe
within the mainshaft.
5th Clutch
The 5th clutch engages/disengages 5th gear, and is located at the middle of the mainshaft. The 5th clutch is joined
back-to-back to the 4th clutch. The 5th clutch is supplied hydraulic pressure by its ATF feed pipe within the mainshaft.
Gear operation
Gears on the mainshaft:
• 4th gear engages/disengages with the mainshaft by the 4th clutch.
• 5th gear engages/disengages with the mainshaft by the 5th clutch.
• Reverse gear engages/disengages with the mainshaft by the 4th clutch.
• Idler gear is splined with the mainshaft, and rotates with the mainshaft.
Gears on the countershaft:

• Final drive gear is integral with the countershaft.
• 1st, 2nd, 3rd, 5th, and park gears are splined with the countershaft, and rotate with the countershaft.
• 4th gear and reverse gear rotate freely from the countershaft. The reverse selector engages 4th gear and reverse
gear with the reverse selector hub. The reverse selector hub is splined to the countershaft so that the 4th gear and
reverse gear engage with the countershaft.
Gears on the secondary shaft:

• 1st gear engages/disengages with the secondary shaft by the 1st clutch.
• 2nd gear engages/disengages with the secondary shaft by the 2nd clutch.
• 3rd gear engages/disengages with the secondary shaft by the 3rd clutch.
• Idler gear is splined with the secondary shaft, and rotates with the secondary shaft.
The idler gear on the idler shaft transmits power between the mainshaft and the secondary shaft.
The reverse idler gear transmits power from the mainshaft reverse gear to the countershaft reverse gear, and changes
rotational direction of the countershaft to reverse.
14-31
06/09/15 17:32:59 62SWA00A_140_0034

Power Flow
P Position
Hydraulic pressure is not applied to the clutch. Power is not transmitted to the countershaft. The countershaft is locked
by the park pawl, interlocking the park gear.
N Position
Engine power transmitted from the torque converter drives the mainshaft idler gear, the idler shaft idler gear, and the
secondary shaft idler gear, but hydraulic pressure is not applied to the clutches. Power is not transmitted to the
countershaft. In this position, the position of the reverse selector differs according to whether the shift lever shifted
from the D or R position:
• When shifted from the D position, the reverse selector engages with the countershaft 4th gear and the reverse
selector hub, and the 4th gear engages with the countershaft.
• When shifted from the R position, the reverse selector engages with the countershaft reverse gear and the reverse
selector hub, and the reverse gear engages with the countershaft.
NOTE: The illustration shows the 4WD transmission; 2WD does not have the transfer mechanism.
＊０１
MAINSHAFT PARK GEAR REVERSE REVERSE
IDLER GEAR SELECTOR SELECTOR
HUB TORQUE CONVERTER
COUNTERSHAFT
IDLER SHAFT
IDLER SHAFT
IDLER GEAR
SECONDARY SHAFT
IDLER GEAR COUNTERSHAFT
REVERSE GEAR
COUNTERSHAFT
4TH GEAR
TRANSFER (4WD)
14-32
ＳＷＡ７Ｅ１ＰＥ１０４１１２０００００ＣＡＡＴ００
06/09/15 17:33:00 62SWA00A_140_0035
1st Gear
• Hydraulic pressure is applied to the 1st clutch, then the 1st clutch engages the secondary shaft 1st gear with the
secondary shaft.
• The mainshaft idler gear drives the secondary shaft via the idler shaft idler gear and the secondary shaft idler gear.
• The secondary shaft 1st gear drives the countershaft 1st gear and the countershaft.
• Power is transmitted to the final drive gear, which in turn drives the final driven gear, and the transfer drive gear
(4WD).
• 4WD: The transfer drive gear drives the transfer drive gear (hypoid gear) and the transfer output shaft (hypoid gear).
＊０２
MAINSHAFT COUNTERSHAFT
IDLER GEAR 1ST GEAR
TORQUE CONVERTER
MAINSHAFT
FINAL DRIVE GEAR
COUNTERSHAFT
IDLER SHAFT
SECONDARY SHAFT
IDLER SHAFT
IDLER GEAR
SECONDARY SHAFT
IDLER GEAR
1ST CLUTCH
SECONDARY SHAFT
1ST GEAR
TRANSFER
DRIVE GEAR
(HYPOID GEAR)
FINAL DRIVEN GEAR

TRANSFER (4WD)
TRANSFER DRIVE GEAR

TRANSFER
OUTPUT SHAFT
(HYPOID GEAR)
(cont’d)
14-33
06/09/15 17:33:00 62SWA00A_140_0036

Power Flow (cont’d)
2nd Gear
• Hydraulic pressure is applied to the 2nd clutch, then the 2nd clutch engages the secondary shaft 2nd gear with the
secondary shaft.
• The mainshaft idler gear drives the secondary shaft via the idler shaft idler gear and the secondary shaft idler gear.
• The secondary shaft 2nd gear drives the countershaft 2nd gear and the countershaft.
(4WD).
＊０３
COUNTERSHAFT TORQUE CONVERTER
MAINSHAFT 2ND GEAR
IDLER GEAR
MAINSHAFT
FINAL DRIVE GEAR
COUNTERSHAFT
IDLER SHAFT
SECONDARY SHAFT
2ND CLUTCH
IDLER SHAFT
IDLER GEAR
SECONDARY SHAFT
IDLER GEAR
SECONDARY SHAFT
2ND GEAR
TRANSFER
DRIVE GEAR
(HYPOID GEAR)
FAINAL DRIVEN GEAR

TRANSFER (4WD)
TRANSFER DRIVE GEAR

TRANSFER
OUTPUT SHAFT
(HYPOID GEAR)
14-34
06/09/15 17:33:01 62SWA00A_140_0037
3rd Gear
• Hydraulic pressure is applied to the 3rd clutch, then the 3rd clutch engages the secondary shaft 3rd gear with the
secondary shaft.
• The mainshaft idler gear drives the secondary shaft via the idler shaft idler gear and secondary shaft idler gear.
• The secondary shaft 3rd gear drives the countershaft 3rd gear and the countershaft.
(4WD).
＊０４
MAINSHAFT COUNTERSHAFT
IDLER GEAR 3RD GEAR
TORQUE CONVERTER
MAINSHAFT
FINAL DRIVE GEAR
COUNTERSHAFT
IDLER SHAFT
SECONDARY SHAFT
IDLER SHAFT
IDLER GEAR
SECONDARY SHAFT
IDLER GEAR
SECONDARY SHAFT
3RD GEAR
3RD CLUTCH
TRANSFER
DRIVE GEAR
(HYPOID GEAR)
FINAL DRIVEN GEAR

TRANSFER (4WD)
TRANSFER DRIVE GEAR

TRANSFER
OUTPUT SHAFT
(HYPOID GEAR)
(cont’d)
14-35
06/09/15 17:33:01 62SWA00A_140_0038

4th Gear
• Hydraulic pressure is applied to the servo valve to engage the reverse selector with the countershaft 4th gear and
reverse selector hub while the shift lever is in forward range (D, 2, and 1 positions).
• Hydraulic pressure is also applied to the 4th clutch, then the 4th clutch engages the mainshaft 4th gear with the
mainshaft.
• The mainshaft 4th gear drives the countershaft 4th gear and the countershaft.
(4WD).
＊０５
MAINSHAFT 4TH CLUTCH
4TH GEAR
TORQUE CONVERTER
MAINSHAFT
FINAL DRIVE GEAR
COUNTERSHAFT
SECONDARY SHAFT
REVERSE
SELECTOR
HUB COUNTERSHAFT
4TH GEAR
REVERSE SELECTOR
TRANSFER
DRIVE GEAR
(HYPOID GEAR)
FINAL DRIVEN GEAR

TRANSFER (4WD)
TRANSFER DRIVE GEAR

TRANSFER
OUTPUT SHAFT
(HYPOID GEAR)
14-36
06/09/15 17:33:01 62SWA00A_140_0039
5th Gear
• Hydraulic pressure is applied to the 5th clutch, then the 5th clutch engages the mainshaft 5th gear with the
mainshaft.
• The mainshaft 5th gear drives the countershaft 5th gear and the countershaft.
(4WD).
＊０６
5TH CLUTCH MAINSHAFT
5TH GEAR TORQUE CONVERTER
MAINSHAFT
FINAL DRIVE GEAR
COUNTERSHAFT
SECONDARY SHAFT
COUNTERSHAFT
5TH GEAR
TRANSFER
DRIVE GEAR
(HYPOID GEAR)
FINAL DRIVEN GEAR

TRANSFER (4WD)
TRANSFER DRIVE GEAR

TRANSFER
OUTPUT SHAFT
(HYPOID GEAR)
(cont’d)
14-37
06/09/15 17:33:02 62SWA00A_140_0040

R Position
• Hydraulic pressure is applied to the servo valve to engage the reverse selector with the countershaft reverse gear
and reverse selector hub while the shift lever is in the R position.
• Hydraulic pressure is also applied to the 4th clutch, then the 4th clutch engages the mainshaft reverse gear with the
mainshaft.
• The mainshaft reverse gear drives the countershaft reverse gear via the reverse idler gear.
• The rotation direction of the countershaft reverse gear is changed by the reverse idler gear.
• The countershaft reverse gear drives the countershaft via the reverse selector, which drives the reverse selector hub.
(4WD).
＊０７
REVERSE MAINSHAFT 4TH CLUTCH
IDLER GEAR REVERSE GEAR
TORQUE CONVERTER
MAINSHAFT
FINAL DRIVE GEAR
COUNTERSHAFT
SECONDARY SHAFT
COUNTERSHAFT REVERSE
REVERSE GEAR SELECTOR
HUB
REVERSE SELECTOR
TRANSFER
DRIVE GEAR
(HYPOID GEAR)
FINAL DRIVEN GEAR

TRANSFER (4WD)
TRANSFER DRIVE GEAR

TRANSFER
OUTPUT SHAFT
(HYPOID GEAR)
14-38
06/09/15 17:33:02 62SWA00A_140_0041
Electronic Control System

Functional Diagram
The electronic control system consists of the powertrain control module (PCM), sensors, and solenoid valves.
Shifting and lock-up are electronically controlled for comfortable driving under all conditions.
The PCM receives input signals from the sensors, switches, and other control units, processes data, and outputs
signals for the engine control system and A/T control system. The A/T control system includes shift control, grade
logic control, clutch pressure control, and lock-up control.
The PCM actuates the shift solenoid valves and the A/T clutch pressure control solenoid valves to control shifting
transmission gears and torque converter.
＊０１
PCM
Engine RPM Signal
Accelerator Pedal
Position Sensor Signal (ETCS)
F-CAN Line Gauge Control
PGM-FI Control Module A/T Gear
Engine Coolant System Position Indicator
Temperature Sensor Signal D3 Indicator
Barometric Pressure
Sensor Signal
Manifold Absolute
Pressure Sensor Signal
A/T Control System
ATF Temperature
Sensor Signal Shift Solenoid Valve A
Service Check Signal Shift Control Shift Solenoid Valve B

Grade Logic Control
• Ascending Shift Solenoid Valve C
Control
• Descending Shift Solenoid Valve D
Transmission Control
Range Automatic
Switch Signal 5-speed and
Shift Solenoid Valve E Reverse
A/T Clutch Pressure

Control Solenoid Valve A
D3 Switch Signal Clutch Pressure A/T Clutch Pressure
Control Control Solenoid Valve B
Input Shaft (Mainshaft) A/T Clutch Pressure
Speed Sensor Signal Control Solenoid Valve C
Output Shaft (Countershaft) Lock-up
Speed Sensor Signal Lock-up Control ON/OFF
2ND Clutch Transmission Fluid Lock-up

Pressure Switch Signal Self-diagnosis/ Conditions
Fail-safe Function Vehicle Speed Signal
3rd Clutch Transmission Fluid Communication and Data Link Connector
Pressure Switch Signal Output Function
Brake Pedal Position

Switch Signal
Shift Lock Control Shift Lock Solenoid
(cont’d)
14-39
ＳＷＡ７Ｅ１ＰＥ１０４１０６０００００ＣＡＡＴ００
06/09/15 17:33:03 62SWA00A_140_0042

Electronic Control System (cont’d)
Electronic Control System Component Locations - LHD model
＊０２
D3 SWITCH
PARK PIN SWITCH

DATA LINK
CONNECTOR (DLC) SHIFT LOCK SOLENOID
＊０３
2ND CLUTCH TRANSMISSION OUTPUT SHAFT A/T CLUTCH PRESSURE
FLUID PRESSURE SWITCH (COUNTERSHAFT) CONTROL SOLENOID VALVE A
SPEED SENSOR
POWERTRAIN
CONTROL MODULE
(PCM)
INPUT SHAFT
(MAINSHAFT)
SPEED SENSOR
TRANSMISSION
RANGE SWITCH
3RD CLUTCH
TRANSMISSION
FLUID PRESSURE
SWITCH
SHIFT
SOLENOID
VALVE C
SHIFT
A/T CLUTCH PRESSURE
SOLENOID
CONTROL SOLENOID VALVE C VALVE B
A/T CLUTCH PRESSURE
CONTROL SOLENOID VALVE B SHIFT
SOLENOID
VALVE A
SHIFT SOLENOID
VALVE E
SHIFT SOLENOID
VALVE D
ATF TEMPERATURE
SENSOR
14-40
06/09/15 17:33:03 62SWA00A_140_0043
Electronic Control System Component Locations - RHD model

＊０４
D3 SWITCH
DATA LINK
CONNECTOR (DLC)
PARK PIN SWITCH SHIFT LOCK SOLENOID
＊０５
2ND CLUTCH TRANSMISSION OUTPUT SHAFT A/T CLUTCH PRESSURE
FLUID PRESSURE SWITCH (COUNTERSHAFT) CONTROL SOLENOID VALVE A
SPEED SENSOR
POWERTRAIN
CONTROL MODULE
(PCM)
INPUT SHAFT
(MAINSHAFT)
SPEED SENSOR
TRANSMISSION
RANGE SWITCH
3RD CLUTCH
TRANSMISSION
FLUID PRESSURE
SWITCH
SHIFT
SOLENOID
VALVE C
A/T CLUTCH PRESSURE
SHIFT
CONTROL SOLENOID VALVE C
SOLENOID
A/T CLUTCH PRESSURE VALVE B
CONTROL SOLENOID VALVE B
SHIFT
SOLENOID
SHIFT SOLENOID VALVE A
VALVE E
SHIFT SOLENOID
VALVE D
ATF TEMPERATURE
SENSOR
(cont’d)
14-41
06/09/15 17:33:04 62SWA00A_140_0044

Shift Control
The PCM instantly determines which gear should be selected by various signals sent from sensors and switches, and
it actuates the shift solenoid valves A, B, C, D, and E to control shifting transmission gears.
Shift solenoid valves are a normally closed type. Shift solenoid valve opens the port of shift solenoid valve pressure
leading to shift valves while shift solenoid valve is turned ON by the PCM, and closes the port when shift solenoid
valve is OFF. The combination of driving signals to shift solenoid valves A, B, C, D, and E are shown in the table.
Position Gear position Shift solenoid valves

A B C D E
D Shifting from N position OFF ON ON OFF OFF
Stays in 1st ON ON ON OFF OFF
Shifting gears between 1st and 2nd OFF ON ON OFF OFF
Stays in 2nd OFF ON OFF ON OFF or ON
Shifting gears between 2nd and 3rd OFF ON ON ON OFF or ON
Stays in 3rd OFF OFF ON OFF OFF or ON
Shifting gears between 3rd and 4th OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF or ON
Stays in 4th ON OFF OFF OFF OFF or ON
Shifting gears between 4th and 5th ON OFF OFF ON OFF or ON
Stays in 5th ON OFF ON ON OFF or ON
2 2nd gear OFF ON OFF ON OFF
1 1st gear ON ON ON OFF OFF
R Shifting from P and N position OFF ON OFF OFF ON
Stays in reverse ON ON OFF OFF ON
Reverse inhibit OFF OFF ON OFF OFF
P Park OFF ON OFF OFF ON
N Neutral OFF ON ON OFF OFF
14-42
06/09/15 17:33:04 62SWA00A_140_0045
Shift Control - Grade Logic Control

The grade logic control system has been adopted to control shifting in the D position. The PCM compares actual
driving conditions with programmed driving conditions, based on signals from the accelerator pedal position sensor,
the throttle position sensor, the engine coolant temperature sensor, the barometric pressure sensor, the brake pedal
position switch signal, and the shift lever position signal, to control shifting while the vehicle is ascending or
descending a slope.
＊０６
PCM
Engine RPM Signal Engine RPM

Control
Shift Position
Transmission Range Control
Switch Signal
Fail-safe Control Shift Solenoid

Valve A
Accelerator Pedal Shift Solenoid

Position Sensor Signal Valve B
Throttle Position Actual Driving
Sensor Signal Shift Position Comparison Shift Solenoid
with Signals Valve C
Read of ATF
Temperature Shift Solenoid
Valve D
Shift Solenoid
Output Shaft Master Target of Valve E
(Countershaft) Shifting Position
Speed Sensor Signal
Correction of Data
Selection of
Input Shaft Shifting Mode
(Mainshaft)
Speed Sensor Signal
Grade Logic Control
ATF Temperature
Sensor Signal
Calculation of
Gradient
Brake Pedal Position
Switch Signal
Engine Coolant Correction of Engine

Temperature Coolant Temperature
Sensor Signal Sensor Signal Data
Barometric Pressure
Sensor Signal
(cont’d)
14-43
06/09/15 17:33:04 62SWA00A_140_0046

Grade Logic Control: Ascending Control
When the PCM determines that the vehicle is climbing a hill in the D position, the grade logic system extends the
engagement area of 2nd, 3rd, and 4th gears to prevent the transmission from frequently shifting between 2nd and 3rd
gears, between 3rd and 4th gears, and between 4th and 5th gears, so the vehicle can run smooth and have more
power when needed.
Shift programs stored in the PCM between 2nd and 3rd gears, between 3rd and 4th gears, and between 4th and 5th
gears, enable it to automatically select the most suitable gear according to the magnitude of a gradient.
＊０７
ASCENDING MODE: Upshift Schedule
100 %
1ST 2ND 2ND 3RD 3RD 4TH
Throttle opening
: FLAT ROAD MODE

: GRADUAL ASCENDING MODE
50 4TH 5TH
: MEDIUM ASCENDING MODE
: STEEP ASCENDING MODE

: HEAVY STEEP ASCENDING MODE
0
Vehicle speed
Grade Logic Control: Descending Control

When the PCM determines that the vehicle is going down a hill in the D position, the shift-up speed from 4th to 5th
gear, from 3rd to 4th gear, and from 2nd to 3rd gear (when the throttle is closed) becomes faster than the set speed
for flat road driving to widen the 4th gear, 3rd gear, and 2nd gear driving area. This, in combination with engine
braking from the deceleration lock-up, achieves smooth driving when the vehicle is descending. There are three
descending modes with different 4th gear driving areas, 3rd gear driving areas, and 2nd gear driving areas according
to the magnitude of a gradient stored in the PCM. When the vehicle is in 5th gear or 4th gear, and you are decelerating
when you are applying the brakes on a steep hill, the transmission will downshift to lower gear. When you accelerate,
the transmission will then return to a higher gear.
＊０８
DESCENDING MODE: Downshift Schedule
100 %
1ST 2ND 2ND 3RD 3RD 4TH 4TH 5TH
: FLAT ROAD MODE

Throttle opening
: GRADUAL DESCENDING MODE

50
: MEDIUM DESCENDING MODE
: STEEP DESCENDING MODE
0
Vehicle speed
14-44
06/09/15 17:33:04 62SWA00A_140_0047
Shift Control - D Position D3 Driving Mode Control

This automatic transmission is provided with the D3 driving mode in the D position. The D position has two modes;
general driving mode (shifts gears automatically 1st through 5th), and the D3 driving mode (shifts gears automatically
1st through 3rd). The transmission switches the mode by pushing the D3 switch on the shift lever knob in the D
position.
＊０９
SHIFT LEVER KNOB
D3 SWITCH
NOTE: The illustration shows the LHD model; RHD is symmetrical.
In the D3 driving mode, the D3 indicator next to the D indicator in the gauge assembly comes on. The D3 driving mode
is cancelled by pushing the D3 switch, and the D3 indicator goes off. Also, the D3 driving mode is cancelled when the
ignition switch is turned off. When the shift lever is moved out of the D position in the D3 driving mode, the D3
indicator goes off, but the transmission returns into D3 driving mode when returning the shift lever into the D position,
and the D3 indicator comes on.
＊１０
D INDICATOR D3 INDICATOR
(cont’d)
14-45
06/09/15 17:33:05 62SWA00A_140_0048

Clutch Pressure Control
The PCM actuates A/T clutch pressure control solenoid valves A, B, and C to control the clutch pressure. When shifting
between gears, the clutch pressure regulated by A/T clutch pressure control solenoid valves A, B, and C engages and
disengages the clutch smoothly.
The PCM receives input signals from the various sensors and switches, processes data, and outputs current to A/T
clutch pressure control solenoid valves A, B, and C.
＊１１
PCM
PGM-FI
Ignition Timing Control
Input Shaft Requirement System
(Mainshaft)
Speed Sensor Signal
Output Shaft
(Countershaft) Actual
Speed Sensor Signal Decision of
Driving Shift Shifting Mode
Position
Accelerator Pedal
Position Sensor Signal
Throttle Position
Sensor Signal
Current A/T Clutch Pressure
Master Target of Control Solenoid
Controlling Current Feedback
Valves A, B, and C
Manifold Absolute
Pressure Sensor Signal Correction of Data
Barometric Pressure
Sensor Signal
Engine RPM Signal Correction of Engine

Torque Signal Data
2nd Clutch
Transmission Fluid Correction of
Pressure Switch Signal Hydraulic Pressure
Applying Timing
3rd Clutch
Transmission Fluid
Pressure Switch Signal Correction of Engine
Coolant Temperature
Sensor Data
Engine Coolant
Temperature
Sensor Signal Correction of ATF
Temperature Sensor
Signal Data
ATF Temperature
Sensor Signal
14-46
06/09/15 17:33:05 62SWA00A_140_0049
Lock-up Control
The shift solenoid valve E controls the hydraulic pressure to switch the lock-up shift valve and lock-up ON and OFF.
The PCM actuates the shift solenoid valve E and the A/T clutch pressure control solenoid valve A to start lock-up. The
A/T clutch pressure control solenoid valve A applies and regulates hydraulic pressure to the lock-up control valve to
control the volume of the lock-up.
The lock-up mechanism operates in the D position (2nd, 3rd, 4th, and 5th), and in the D position D3 driving mode (2nd
and 3rd).
＊１２
PCM
Engine Coolant Engine Coolant

Temperature
Sensor Signal Temperature Control
Shifting Position
Transmission Range Control
Switch Signal
Barometric
Pressure
Sensor
Signal Gradient Control
by Magnitude
Accelerator Pedal
Position Sensor Signal
Throttle Position Fail-safe Control
Sensor Signal
Output Shaft Actual

(Countershaft) Driving
Speed Sensor Signal Shift
Position
Lock-up Control
Input Shaft
(Mainshaft) • Lock-up ON/OFF
Speed Sensor Signal Control
Shift Solenoid
• Lock-up Condition Valve E
Control
Correction
ATF Temperature of ATF
Sensor Signal Temperature
Sensor Data
Driving
Engine RPM Signal Shift
Position
Information
Master Target of
Controlling Current
A/T Clutch Pressure

Current Feedback Control Solenoid
Valve A
(cont’d)
14-47
06/09/15 17:33:06 62SWA00A_140_0050

PCM A/T Control System Electrical Connections
＊１３
IGNITION SWITCH A/T CLUTCH PRESSURE
BATTERY
CONTROL SOLENOID VALVE A
BAT IG1 C36 PCM B44
IG1 LS A
SHIFT LOCK
SOLENOID A/T CLUTCH PRESSURE
CONTROL SOLENOID VALVE B
A27 B35
BRAKE PEDAL SLS LS B
POSITION SWITCH
A40 A/T CLUTCH PRESSURE
BK SW CONTROL SOLENOID VALVE C
B25
LS C
BRAKE LIGHTS SHIFT SOLENOID
VALVE A
A31 B10
DATA LINK CONNECTOR SCS SH A
SHIFT SOLENOID
GAUGE CONTROL MODULE VALVE B
B11
A36 SH B
CAN H
F−CAN SHIFT SOLENOID
Transceiver A37
CAN Controller CAN L VALVE C
B20
SH C
SHIFT SOLENOID
VALVE D
B26
A/T Gear Position Indicator SH D
Driver Circuit
SHIFT SOLENOID
VALVE E
B24
SH E
P R N D 2 1 D3
C13
VCC1
A/T Gear Position Indicator Dimming C43 OUTPUT SHAFT
Dimming Circuit Circuit NC (COUNTERSHAFT)
C14 SPEED SENSOR
SG1
P B13 MANIFOLD
ATP P C11 ABSOLUTE
MAP PRESSURE
TRANSMISSION R B14
RANGE SWITCH ATP R SENSOR
N B12 B18
ATP N VCC2
B17 INPUT SHAFT
D B21 NM (MAINSHAFT)
ATP D B33 SPEED SENSOR
2 B16 SG2
ATP 2
1 B15
ATP 1 ATF
B27 TEMPERATURE
B28 ATFT SENSOR
ATP FWD
B22
ATP RVS
B29
D3 SWITCH EGRP
A41 EGR VALVE
D3 SW POSITION
B2 SENSOR
2ND CLUTCH TRANSMISSION EGR
FLUID PRESSURE SWITCH B8
OP2SW
3RD CLUTCH TRANSMISSION
FLUID PRESSURE SWITCH B9 R20A1 and R20A2 engine models
OP3SW
C22
B36 POIL CS EOP SENSOR
PG1
B1
PG2
C40 B39
LG1 SVM
C44 IMT VALVE
LG2 B37
SVS＋
B38
SVS−
PCM Harness Connector Terminal Locations
4 5 6 8 9 1 2 3 4 7 8 9 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9
(10) 14 15 16 17 18 19 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18
20 21 (22) 23 24 25 20 21 22 23 24 25 20 21 (22) (23)
(26) 27 28 29 31 33 34 35 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 27 29 30 31 32
36 37 (39) 40 41 42 44 36 (37) (38) (39) 41 42 43 44 36 (37) 39 40 (41) 42 43 44
A (44P) B (44P) C (44P)

Terminal side of female terminals
14-48
06/09/15 17:33:06 62SWA00A_140_0051
PCM A/T Control System Inputs and Outputs - K24Z1 Engine Model
＊１４
A (44P) B (44P) C (44P)
PCM CONNECTOR A (44P)

Terminal Wire color Terminal name Description Signal
number
A27 RED SLS (SHIFT LOCK Drives shift lock solenoid With ignition switch ON (II), in the P position, brake
SOLENOID) pedal pressed, and accelerator released: Battery
voltage
A31 BRN SCS (SERVICE CHECK Detects service check signal With service check signal shorted with the HDS:
SIGNAL) About 0 V
With service check signal opened: About 5.0 V
A36 WHT CAN H (CAN Sends communication With ignition switch ON (II): About 2.5 V (pulses)
COMMUNICATION SIGNAL signal
HIGH)
A37 RED CAN L (CAN Sends communication With ignition switch ON (II): About 2.5 V (pulses)
LOW)
A40 LT GRN BK SW (BRAKE PEDAL Detects brake pedal With brake pedal released: About 0 V
POSITION SWITCH) position switch signal With brake pedal pressed: Battery voltage
A41 BLU D3 SW (D3 SWITCH) Detects D3 switch signal With ignition switch ON (II):
• With D3 switch ON: About 0 V
• With D3 switch OFF: Battery voltage
PCM CONNECTOR B (44P)

number
B1 BLK PG2 (POWER GROUND) Ground circuit for PCM Less than 1.0 V at all times
circuit
B2 BLU/RED EGR (EXHAUST GAS Drives EGR valve With EGR operating: Duty controlled
RECIRCULATION (EGR) With EGR not operating: About 0 V
VALVE)
B8 BLU/RED OP2SW (2ND CLUTCH Detects 2nd clutch With ignition switch ON (II):
TRANSMISSION FLUID transmission fluid pressure • Without 2nd clutch pressure: About 5.0 V
PRESSURE SWITCH) switch signal • With 2nd clutch pressure: About 0 V
B9 BLU/WHT OP3SW (3RD CLUTCH Detects 3rd clutch With ignition switch ON (II):
TRANSMISSION FLUID transmission fluid pressure • Without 3rd clutch pressure: About 5.0 V
PRESSURE SWITCH) switch signal • With 3rd clutch pressure: About 0 V
B10 BLU/BLK SH A (SHIFT SOLENOID Drives shift solenoid In the R position, and in 1st, 4th, and 5th gears in the
VALVE A) valve A D position: Battery voltage
In the P and N positions, and in 2nd and 3rd gears in
the D position: About 0 V
(cont’d)
14-49
06/09/15 17:33:06 62SWA00A_140_0052

PCM A/T Control System Inputs and Outputs - K24Z1 Engine Model (cont’d)
＊１５
A (44P) B (44P) C (44P)

number
B11 GRN/WHT SH B (SHIFT SOLENOID Drives shift solenoid In the P, R, and N positions, and in 1st and 2nd
VALVE B) valve B gears in the D position: Battery voltage
In 3rd, 4th, and 5th gears in the D position: About
0V
B12 RED/BLK ATP N (TRANSMISSION Detects transmission range In the N position: About 0 V
RANGE SWITCH N switch N position signal In any position other than N: About 5.0 V
POSITION)
B13 BLU/BLK ATP P (TRANSMISSION Detects transmission range In the P position: About 0 V
RANGE SWITCH P switch P position signal In any position other than P: Battery voltage
POSITION)
B14 WHT ATP R (TRANSMISSION Detects transmission range In the R position: About 0 V
RANGE SWITCH R switch R position signal In any position other than R: Battery voltage
POSITION)
B15 RED ATP 1 (TRANSMISSION Detects transmission range In the 1 position: About 0 V
RANGE SWITCH 1) switch 1 signal input In any position other than 1: Battery voltage
B16 GRN/RED ATP 2 (TRANSMISSION Detects transmission range In the 2 position: About 0 V
B17 WHT/RED NM (INPUT SHAFT Detects input shaft With ignition switch ON (II): About 0 V or about
(MAINSHAFT) SPEED (mainshaft) speed sensor 5.0 V
SENSOR) signal With engine running in N position: About 2.5 V
B18 YEL/BLU VCC2 (SENSOR VOLTAGE) Provides sensor voltage With ignition switch ON (II): About 5.0 V
With ignition switch OFF: About 0 V
B20 GRN SH C (SHIFT SOLENOID Drives shift solenoid In the N position, and in 1st, 3rd, and 5th gears in
VALVE C) valve C the D position: Battery voltage
In the P and R positions, and in 2nd and 4th gears in
B21 YEL/GRN ATP D (TRANSMISSION Detects transmission range In the D position: About 0 V
RANGE SWITCH D switch D position signal In any position other than D: Battery voltage
POSITION) input
B22 RED/WHT ATP RVS (TRANSMISSION Detects transmission range In R position: About 0 V
POSITION)
B24 YEL SH E (SHIFT SOLENOID Drives shift solenoid valve E In the P and R positions: Battery voltage
VALVE E) In the N position, and in 1st gear in the D position:
About 0 V
14-50
06/09/15 17:33:07 62SWA00A_140_0053

number
B25 BLU/YEL LS C (A/T CLUTCH Drives A/T clutch pressure With ignition switch ON (II): Pulses
PRESSURE CONTROL control solenoid valve C
SOLENOID VALVE C)
B26 GRN/RED SH D (SHIFT SOLENOID Drives shift solenoid In 2nd and 5th gears in the D position: Battery
VALVE D) valve D voltage
In the P, R, and N positions, and in 1st, 3rd, and 4th
gears in the D position: About 0 V
B27 RED/YEL ATFT (ATF TEMPERATURE Detects ATF temperature With ignition switch ON (II): About 0.2−4.0 V
SENSOR) sensor signal depending on ATF temperature
B28 BLU/YEL ATP FWD (TRANSMISSION Detects transmission range In the D, 2, and 1 positions: About 0 V
RANGE SWITCH D, 2, switch D, 2, and 1 signal In any position other than D, 2, and 1: Battery
AND 1) input voltage
B29 WHT/BLK EGRP (EXHAUST GAS Detects EGR valve position With engine running: 1.2−3.0 V depending on EGR
RECIRCULATION (EGR) sensor signal valve lift
VALVE POSITION SENSOR)
B33 GRN/BLK SG2 (SENSOR GROUND) Sensor ground Less than 1.0 V at all times
B35 BRN LS B (A/T CLUTCH Drives A/T clutch pressure With ignition switch ON (II): Pulses
PRESSURE CONTROL control solenoid valve B
SOLENOID VALVE B)
circuit
B44 RED/BLK LS A (A/T CLUTCH Drives A/T clutch pressure With ignition switch ON (II): Pulses
PRESSURE CONTROL control solenoid valve A
SOLENOID VALVE A)
PCM CONNECTOR C (44P)

number
C11 GRN/RED MAP (MANIFOLD Detects MAP sensor signal With ignition switch ON (II): About 3.0 V
ABSOLUTE PRESSURE At idle: About 1.0 V depending on engine speed
(MAP) SENSOR)
C13 YEL/RED VCC1 (SENSOR VOLTAGE) Provides sensor voltage With ignition switch ON (II): About 5.0 V
C14 GRN/WHT SG1 (SENSOR GROUND) Sensor ground Less than 1.0 V at all times
C36 BLK/RED IG1 (IGNITION SIGNAL) Detects ignition signal With ignition switch ON (II): Battery voltage
C40 BRN/YEL LG1 (LOGIC GROUND) Ground circuit for PCM Less than 1.0 V at all times
circuit
C43 BLK/WHT NC (OUTPUT SHAFT Detects output shaft With ignition switch ON (II): About 0 V or about
(COUNTERSHAFT) SPEED (countershaft) speed sensor 5.0 V
SENSOR) signal With driving: Pulses
(cont’d)
14-51
06/09/15 17:33:07 62SWA00A_140_0054

PCM A/T Control System Inputs and Outputs - R20A1 and R20A2 Engine Models
＊１６
A (44P) B (44P) C (44P)

number
A27 RED SLS (SHIFT LOCK Drives shift lock solenoid With ignition switch ON (II), in the P position, brake
SOLENOID) pedal pressed, and accelerator released: Battery
voltage
A31 BRN SCS (SERVICE CHECK Detects service check signal With service check signal shorted with the HDS:
SIGNAL) About 0 V
With service check signal opened: About 5.0 V
A36 WHT CAN H (CAN Sends communication With ignition switch ON (II): About 2.5 V (pulses)
HIGH)
A37 RED CAN L (CAN Sends communication With ignition switch ON (II): About 2.5 V (pulses)
LOW)
A40 LT GRN BK SW (BRAKE PEDAL Detects brake pedal With brake pedal released: About 0 V
POSITION SWITCH) position switch signal With brake pedal pressed: Battery voltage
A41 BLU D3 SW (D3 SWITCH) Detects D3 switch signal With ignition switch ON (II):
• With D3 switch ON: About 0 V
• With D3 switch OFF: Battery voltage

number
circuit
B2 BLU/RED EGR (EXHAUST GAS Drives EGR valve With EGR operating: Duty controlled
RECIRCULATION (EGR) With EGR not operating: About 0 V
VALVE)
B8 BLU/YEL OP2SW (2ND CLUTCH Detects 2nd clutch With ignition switch ON (II):
TRANSMISSION FLUID transmission fluid pressure • Without 2nd clutch pressure: About 5.0 V
PRESSURE SWITCH) switch signal • With 2nd clutch pressure: About 0 V
B9 BLK/RED OP3SW (3RD CLUTCH Detects 3rd clutch With ignition switch ON (II):
TRANSMISSION FLUID transmission fluid pressure • Without 3rd clutch pressure: About 5.0 V
PRESSURE SWITCH) switch signal • With 3rd clutch pressure: About 0 V
B10 BLU SH A (SHIFT SOLENOID Drives shift solenoid In the R position, and in 1st, 4th, and 5th gears in the
VALVE A) valve A D position: Battery voltage
In the P and N positions, and in 2nd and 3rd gears in
14-52
06/09/15 17:33:07 62SWA00A_140_0055

number
B11 GRN/WHT SH B (SHIFT SOLENOID Drives shift solenoid In the P, R, and N positions, and in 1st and 2nd
VALVE B) valve B gears in the D position: Battery voltage
In 3rd, 4th, and 5th gears in the D position: About
0V
B12 RED/BLK ATP N (TRANSMISSION Detects transmission range In the N position: About 0 V
RANGE SWITCH N switch N position signal In any position other than N: About 5.0 V
POSITION)
B13 BLU/BLK ATP P (TRANSMISSION Detects transmission range In the P position: About 0 V
RANGE SWITCH P switch P position signal In any position other than P: Battery voltage
POSITION)
B14 WHT/GRN ATP R (TRANSMISSION Detects transmission range In the R position: About 0 V
POSITION)
B15 BRN ATP 1 (TRANSMISSION Detects transmission range In the 1 position: About 0 V
B16 RED ATP 2 (TRANSMISSION Detects transmission range In the 2 position: About 0 V
B17 WHT/RED NM (INPUT SHAFT Detects input shaft With ignition switch ON (II): About 0 V or about
(MAINSHAFT) SPEED (mainshaft) speed sensor 5.0 V
SENSOR) signal With engine running in N position: About 2.5 V
B18 YEL/BLU VCC2 (SENSOR VOLTAGE) Provides sensor voltage With ignition switch ON (II): About 5.0 V
B20 GRN SH C (SHIFT SOLENOID Drives shift solenoid In the N position, and in 1st, 3rd, and 5th gears in
VALVE C) valve C the D position: Battery voltage
In the P and R positions, and in 2nd and 4th gears in
B21 YEL/GRN ATP D (TRANSMISSION Detects transmission range In the D position: About 0 V
RANGE SWITCH D switch D position signal In any position other than D: Battery voltage
POSITION) input
B22 YEL ATP RVS (TRANSMISSION Detects transmission range In R position: About 0 V
POSITION)
B24 YEL SH E (SHIFT SOLENOID Drives shift solenoid valve E In the P and R positions: Battery voltage
VALVE E) In the N position, and in 1st gear in the D position:
About 0 V
B25 BLU/WHT LS C (A/T CLUTCH Drives A/T clutch pressure With ignition switch ON (II): Pulses
PRESSURE CONTROL control solenoid valve C
SOLENOID VALVE C)
B26 GRN/RED SH D (SHIFT SOLENOID Drives shift solenoid In 2nd and 5th gears in the D position: Battery
VALVE D) valve D voltage
In the P, R, and N positions, and in 1st, 3rd, and 4th
gears in the D position: About 0 V
B27 BRN/RED ATFT (ATF TEMPERATURE Detects ATF temperature With ignition switch ON (II): About 0.2−4.0 V
SENSOR) sensor signal depending on ATF temperature
B28 BLU/YEL ATP FWD (TRANSMISSION Detects transmission range In the D, 2, and 1 positions: About 0 V
RANGE SWITCH D, 2, switch D, 2, and 1 signal In any position other than D, 2, and 1: Battery
AND 1) input voltage
(cont’d)
14-53
06/09/15 17:33:07 62SWA00A_140_0056

PCM A/T Control System Inputs and Outputs - R20A1 and R20A2 Engine Models (cont’d)
＊１７
A (44P) B (44P) C (44P)

number
B29 WHT/BLK EGRP (EXHAUST GAS Detects EGR valve position With engine running: 1.2−3.0 V depending on EGR
RECIRCULATION (EGR) sensor signal valve lift
VALVE POSITION SENSOR)
B33 GRN/YEL SG2 (SENSOR GROUND) Sensor ground Less than 1.0 V at all times
B35 BRN/WHT LS B (A/T CLUTCH Drives A/T clutch pressure With ignition switch ON (II): Pulses
PRESSURE CONTROL control solenoid valve B
SOLENOID VALVE B)
circuit
B44 WHT LS A (A/T CLUTCH Drives A/T clutch pressure With ignition switch ON (II): Pulses
PRESSURE CONTROL control solenoid valve A
SOLENOID VALVE A)

number
C11 GRN/RED MAP (MANIFOLD Detects MAP sensor signal With ignition switch ON (II): About 3.0 V
ABSOLUTE PRESSURE At idle: About 1.0 V depending on engine speed
(MAP) SENSOR)
C13 YEL/RED VCC1 (SENSOR VOLTAGE) Provides sensor voltage With ignition switch ON (II): About 5.0 V
C14 GRN/WHT SG1 (SENSOR GROUND) Sensor ground Less than 1.0 V at all times
C36 BLK/YEL IG1 (IGNITION SIGNAL) Detects ignition signal With ignition switch ON (II): Battery voltage
circuit
C43 BLK/BLU NC (OUTPUT SHAFT Detects output shaft With ignition switch ON (II): About 0 V or about
(COUNTERSHAFT) SPEED (countershaft) speed sensor 5.0 V
SENSOR) signal With driving: Pulses
14-54
06/09/15 17:33:08 62SWA00A_140_0057
Hydraulic Controls
Valve Bodies
The valve body includes the main valve body, the regulator valve body, and the servo body. The ATF pump is driven
by splines on the left end of the torque converter which is attached to the engine. Fluid flows through the regulator
valve to maintain specified pressure through the main valve body to the manual valve, directing pressure to the shift
valves and to each of the clutches via the solenoid valves. The shift solenoid valves A, B, C, D, and E are bolted on the
servo body. The A/T clutch pressure control solenoid valves A, B, and C are mounted on the outside of the
transmission housing.
＊０１
A/T CLUTCH PRESSURE
SHIFT SOLENOID CONTROL SOLENOID
SHIFT SOLENOID VALVE A VALVE D VALVE B
SHIFT SOLENOID A/T CLUTCH PRESSURE
VALVE E CONTROL SOLENOID
SHIFT SOLENOID VALVE B VALVE C
SHIFT SOLENOID
VALVE C
A/T CLUTCH
PRESSURE
CONTROL
SOLENOID
VALVE A
SERVO BODY
REGULATOR VALVE BODY
MAIN VALVE BODY
(cont’d)
14-55
ＳＷＡ７Ｅ１ＰＥ１０４８０１０００００ＣＡＡＴ００
06/09/15 17:33:08 62SWA00A_140_0058

Hydraulic Controls (cont’d)
Main Valve Body
The main valve body contains the manual valve, the shift valves A, B, C, and E, the relief valve, the lock-up control
valve, the cooler check valve, the servo control valve, and the ATF pump gears. The primary function of the main valve
body is to switch fluid pressure on and off and to control hydraulic pressure going to the hydraulic control system.
＊０２
MAIN VALVE BODY SHIFT VALVE A
SHIFT VALVE B
MANUAL VALVE
SHIFT VALVE C
RELIEF VALVE
COOLER CHECK VALVE
SHIFT VALVE E
SERVO CONTROL VALVE

LOCK-UP CONTROL VALVE
Regulator Valve Body

The regulator valve body contains the regulator valve, the torque converter check valve, the lock-up shift valve, and
the 1st and 3rd accumulators.
＊０３
REGULATOR VALVE
TORQUE CONVERTER
CHECK VALVE
LOCK-UP SHIFT VALVE
14-56
06/09/15 17:33:09 62SWA00A_140_0059
Regulator Valve
The regulator valve maintains a constant hydraulic pressure from the ATF pump to the hydraulic control system, while
also furnishing fluid to the lubrication system and torque converter. Fluid from the ATF pump flows through B and C.
Fluid entering from B flows through the valve orifice to the A cavity. This pressure of the A cavity pushes the regulator
valve to the right side, and this movement of the regulator valve uncovers the fluid port to the torque converter and
the relief valve. The fluid flows out to the torque converter and the relief valve, and the regulator valve returns under
spring force. According to the level of the hydraulic pressure through B, the position of the regulator valve changes,
and the amount of fluid from C through torque converter also changes. This operation is continued, maintaining the
line pressure.
＊０４
To TORQUE To LUBRICATION
CONVERTER To RELIEF VALVE
VALVE SPRING
VALVE ORIFICE
A
B C
From ATF PUMP
REGULATOR VALVE
Increases in hydraulic pressure according to torque are performed by the regulator valve using stator torque reaction.
The stator shaft is splined with the stator in the torque converter, and its arm end contacts the regulator spring cap.
When the vehicle is accelerating or climbing (torque converter range), stator torque reaction acts on the stator shaft,
and the stator arm pushes the regulator spring cap in the direction of the arrow in proportion to the reaction. The
stator reaction spring compresses, and the regulator valve moves to increase the line pressure which is regulated by
the regulator valve. The line pressure reaches its maximum when the stator torque reaction reaches its maximum.
＊０５
TORQUE CONVERTER
REGULATOR VALVE
REGULATOR
VALVE BODY
STATOR
REGULATOR SPRING CAP
STATOR SHAFT ARM END STATOR SHAFT
(cont’d)
14-57
06/09/15 17:33:09 62SWA00A_140_0060

Hydraulic Controls (cont’d)
Servo Body
The servo body contains the servo valve, the shift valve D, accumulators for 2nd, 4th, and 5th, and shift solenoid
valves for A, B, C, D, and E.
＊０６
SHIFT SOLENOID SHIFT SOLENOID
VALVE A VALVE D
SHIFT SOLENOID
SHIFT SOLENOID VALVE E
VALVE B
SHIFT SOLENOID
VALVE C
SERVO BODY
SERVO VALVE SHIFT VALVE D
Accumulator
The accumulators are located in the regulator valve body and the servo body. The regulator valve body contains the
1st and 3rd accumulators, and the servo body contains the 2nd, 4th, and 5th accumulators.
＊０７
2ND ACCUMULATOR
5TH ACCUMULATOR
4TH ACCUMULATOR
3RD ACCUMULATOR
1ST ACCUMULATOR
SERVO BODY
14-58
06/09/15 17:33:37 62SWA00A_140_0061
Hydraulic Flow
Distribution of Hydraulic Pressure
As the engine turns, the ATF pump starts to operate. Automatic transmission fluid (ATF) is drawn through the ATF
strainer (filter) and discharged into the hydraulic circuit. Then, ATF flowing from the ATF pump becomes line pressure
that is regulated by the regulator valve. Torque converter pressure from the regulator valve enters the torque
converter through the lock-up shift valve, and it is discharged from the torque converter. The torque converter check
valve prevents torque converter pressure from rising.
The PCM controls the shift solenoid valves ON and OFF. The shift solenoid valve intercepts line pressure from the ATF
pump via the manual valve when the shift solenoid valve is OFF. When the shift solenoid valve is turned ON by the
PCM, line pressure changes to shift solenoid valve pressure at the shift solenoid valve, then the solenoid valve
pressure flows to the shift valve. Applying shift solenoid pressure to the shift valves moves the position of the shift
valve, and switches the port of the hydraulic circuit. The PCM also controls A/T clutch pressure control solenoid valves
A, B, and C. The A/T clutch pressure control solenoid valves regulate hydraulic pressure, and apply the pressure to the
clutches to engage smoothly. The clutches receive optimum clutch pressure which is regulated by the A/T clutch
pressure control solenoid valves for comfortable driving and shifting under all conditions.
Hydraulic Pressure at the Port for use in the hydraulic circuit

Port Hydraulic Pressure Port Hydraulic Pressure
1 Line SB Shift solenoid valve B
3 Line SC Shift solenoid valve C
3’ Line SD Shift solenoid valve D
4 Line SE Shift solenoid valve E
4’ Line 10 1st clutch
4’’ Line 20 2nd clutch
7 Line 30 3rd clutch
1A Line or A/T clutch pressure control solenoid 40 4th clutch
valve A
1B Line 50 5th clutch
3A Line 55 A/T clutch pressure control solenoid valve A
3B Line 55’ A/T clutch pressure control solenoid valve A
3C Line 56 A/T clutch pressure control solenoid valve B
5A Line 57 A/T clutch pressure control solenoid valve C
5B Line 90 Torque converter
5C Line 91 Torque converter
5D Line 92 Torque converter
5E Line or A/T clutch pressure control solenoid 93 ATF cooler
valve B
5F Line or A/T clutch pressure control solenoid 94 Torque converter
valve A or B
5G A/T clutch pressure control solenoid valve B 95 Lubrication
5H A/T clutch pressure control solenoid valve C 96 Torque converter
5J A/T clutch pressure control solenoid valve C 97 Torque converter
5K A/T clutch pressure control solenoid valve C 99 Suction
5L A/T clutch pressure control solenoid valve C X Drain
5N A/T clutch pressure control solenoid valve C HX High position drain
SA Shift solenoid valve A AX Air drain
(cont’d)
14-59
ＳＷＡ７Ｅ１ＰＥ１０４１０８０００００ＣＡＡＴ００
06/09/15 17:33:38 62SWA00A_140_0062

Hydraulic Flow (cont’d)
N Position
The PCM controls the shift solenoid valves. The conditions of the shift solenoid valves and positions of the shift valves
are as follows:
• Shift solenoid valve A: OFF, and shift valve A stays on the right side
• Shift solenoid valve B: ON, and shift valve B moves to the left side
• Shift solenoid valve C: ON, and shift valve C moves to the left side
• Shift solenoid valve D: OFF, and shift valve D stays on the left side
• Shift solenoid valve E: OFF, and shift valve E stays on the left side
Line pressure (1) flows to the shift solenoid valves and the A/T clutch pressure control solenoid valve A. Under this
condition, hydraulic pressure is not applied to the clutches.
NOTE: When used, ‘‘left’’ or ‘‘right’’ indicates direction on the hydraulic circuit.
＊０１
3RD CLUTCH 3RD 1ST 2ND
1ST 4TH 5TH 5TH CLUTCH 2ND CLUTCH
TRANSMISSION CLUTCH CLUTCH ACCUMULATOR CLUTCH CLUTCH
FLUID PRESSURE ACCUMULATOR TRANSMISSION
SWITCH FLUID PRESSURE
SWITCH
TORQUE
CONVERTER
95 30 10 95 40 50 95
30 3RD 10 40 4TH 50 20 2ND 20
30 ACCUMULATOR ACCUMULATOR ACCUMULATOR
20
SHIFT
SOLENOID
VALVES
X XX 5A X X 56 5E SA
10
SERVO CONTROL A: OFF
VALVE 1
57 5H 5C 5B 5G 4 SC 57
SHIFT X 4’ 4 3
91
VALVE
C B: ON
90 SB
94 SC
SHIFT C: ON
3C X
VALVE 1
B 5L 5H 5B 3C 5G 5E 5C SB SHIFT
VALVE E
SE X 3B 3’ 3 4
D: OFF
X 5N 5K 5J 10 X 40 5F
SD
SE
E: OFF
1
X 55’ 94 91 5K
LOCK-UP X 5N 55’
SHIFT VALVE 50 30 1A 55’ 5F SD 5L 5J 1A
SA SHIFT 55
55 96 92 93 SE SHIFT VALVE D
7
VALVE A X X 1B X 20 X 57 X 1 X X X AX
A
1
56
TORQUE X X AX
B
CONVERTER MANUAL VALVE 1B 5A 3 7 1 4
CHECK 4’’
90 96 55 97 AX
VALVE 90 90 57
HX X 3A
AX
HX X X AX
C
X 93 X 93 92 IDLER
X X SHAFT
4
LOCK-UP IDLER GEAR
COOLER 4’ 4’’
A/T CLUTCH PRESSURE
CHECK CONTROL MAINSHAFT CONTROL SOLENOID VALVES
VALVE VALVE COUNTERSHAFT X 3B 3A
93 FINAL DRIVE
GEAR 3’
SECONDARY
SHAFT
RELIEF VALVE 95 7
92 95
SERVO VALVE
ATF
X X
COOLER
REGULATOR 1 1
VALVE
99
ATF PUMP
14-60
06/09/15 17:33:39 62SWA00A_140_0063
D Position: 1st gear shifting from N position

Shift solenoid valves remain the same as in the N position when shifting to the D position from N. The manual valve is
moved to the D position, and switches the port of line pressure (4) leading to the A/T clutch pressure control solenoid
valve C. Hydraulic pressure to the 1st clutch from the A/T clutch pressure control solenoid valve A is created as shift
solenoid valve A is OFF, B and C remain ON. A/T clutch pressure control solenoid valve A pressure (55) changes to 1st
clutch pressure (10) at the shift valve B, and flows to the 1st clutch. The 1st clutch is engaged by the line pressure
mode when shifting to the D position from N.
＊０２
SWITCH
TORQUE
CONVERTER
95 30 10 95 40 50 95
30 3RD 10 40 4TH 50 20 2ND 20
20
SHIFT
SOLENOID
VALVES
10
VALVE 1
57 5H 5C 5B 5G 4 SC 57
SHIFT X 4’ 4 3
91
VALVE
C B: ON
90 SB
94 SC
SHIFT C: ON
3C X
VALVE 1
VALVE E
SE X 3B 3’ 3 4
D: OFF
X 5N 5K 5J 10 X 40 5F
SD
SE
E: OFF
1
X 55’ 94 91 5K
LOCK-UP X 5N 55’
SA SHIFT 55
7
A
1
56
TORQUE X X AX
B
CHECK 4’’
90 96 55 97 AX
VALVE 90 90 57
HX X 3A
AX
HX X X AX
C
X 93 X 93 92 IDLER
X X SHAFT
4
LOCK-UP IDLER GEAR
COOLER 4’ 4’’
A/T CLUTCH PRESSURE
93 FINAL DRIVE
GEAR 3’
SECONDARY
SHAFT
RELIEF VALVE 95 7
92 95
SERVO VALVE
ATF
X X
COOLER
REGULATOR 1 1
VALVE
99
ATF PUMP
(cont’d)
14-61
06/09/15 17:33:40 62SWA00A_140_0064

D Position: Driving in 1st gear
The PCM turns shift solenoid valve A ON, and keeps B and C ON, and D and E OFF. Shift solenoid valve A pressure
(SA) is applied to the right side of the shift valve A. Shift valve A is moved to the left side to uncover the line pressure
port leading to the 1st clutch, and to cover the A/T clutch pressure control solenoid valve pressure port.
Fluid flows to the 1st clutch by way of:

Line pressure (1) → Shift valve D−Line pressure (1A) → Shift valve A−Line pressure (1B) → Manual valve−Line
pressure (5A) → Shift valve C−Line pressure (5B) → Shift valve B−1st clutch pressure (10) → 1st clutch
The 1st clutch pressure (10) is applied to the 1st clutch, and the 1st clutch keeps on engaging with the line pressure
mode.
＊０３
SWITCH
TORQUE
CONVERTER
95 30 10 95 40 50 95
30 3RD 10 40 4TH 50 20 2ND 20
20
SHIFT
SOLENOID
VALVES
10
SERVO CONTROL A: ON
VALVE 1
57 5H 5C 5B 5G 4 SC 57
SHIFT X 4’ 4 3
91
VALVE
C B: ON
90 SB
94 SC
SHIFT C: ON
3C X
VALVE 1
VALVE E
SE X 3B 3’ 3 4
D: OFF
X 5N 5K 5J 10 X 40 5F
SD
SE
E: OFF
1
X 55’ 94 91 5K
LOCK-UP X 5N 55’
SA SHIFT 55
7
A
1
56
TORQUE X X AX
B
CHECK 4’’
90 96 55 97 AX
VALVE 90 90 57
HX X 3A
AX
HX X X AX
C
X 93 X 93 92 IDLER
X X SHAFT
4
LOCK-UP IDLER GEAR
COOLER 4’ 4’’
A/T CLUTCH PRESSURE
93 FINAL DRIVE
GEAR 3’
SECONDARY
SHAFT
RELIEF VALVE 95 7
92 95
SERVO VALVE
ATF
X X
COOLER
REGULATOR 1 1
VALVE
99
ATF PUMP
14-62
06/09/15 17:33:41 62SWA00A_140_0065
D Position: Shifting between 1st gear and 2nd gear

As the speed of the vehicle reaches the programmed value, the PCM turns shift solenoid valve A OFF, and keeps B and
C ON, and D and E OFF. Shift solenoid valve A pressure (SA) in the right side of shift valve A is released. Shift valve A
is moved to the right side to uncover the A/T clutch pressure control solenoid valve pressure port leading to the 1st
and 2nd clutches. The PCM controls the A/T clutch pressure control solenoid valves to regulate hydraulic pressure. A/T
clutch pressure control solenoid valve A pressure (55) changes to 1st clutch pressure (10) at shift valve B, and A/T
clutch pressure control solenoid valve B pressure (56) changes to 2nd clutch pressure (20) at shift valve A. The 1st and
2nd clutches are engaged by the A/T clutch pressure control solenoid valve pressure mode.
＊０４
SWITCH
TORQUE
CONVERTER
95 30 10 95 40 50 95
30 3RD 10 40 4TH 50 20 2ND 20
20
SHIFT
SOLENOID
VALVES
10
VALVE 1
57 5H 5C 5B 5G 4 SC 57
SHIFT X 4’ 4 3
91
VALVE
C B: ON
90 SB
94 SC
SHIFT C: ON
3C X
VALVE 1
VALVE E
SE X 3B 3’ 3 4
D: OFF
X 5N 5K 5J 10 X 40 5F
SD
SE
E: OFF
1
X 55’ 94 91 5K
LOCK-UP X 5N 55’
SA SHIFT 55
7
A
1
56
TORQUE X X AX
B
CHECK 4’’
90 96 55 97 AX
VALVE 90 90 57
HX X 3A
AX
HX X X AX
C
X 93 X 93 92 IDLER
X X SHAFT
4
LOCK-UP IDLER GEAR
COOLER 4’ 4’’
A/T CLUTCH PRESSURE
93 FINAL DRIVE
GEAR 3’
SECONDARY
SHAFT
RELIEF VALVE 95 7
92 95
SERVO VALVE
ATF
X X
COOLER
REGULATOR 1 1
VALVE
99
ATF PUMP
(cont’d)
14-63
06/09/15 17:33:43 62SWA00A_140_0066

D Position: Driving in 2nd gear
The PCM turns shift solenoid valves C OFF, D ON, and keeps A and E OFF, and B ON. Shift solenoid valve C pressure
(SC) in the right side of the shift valve C is released. Shift valve C is moved to the right side to switch the ports. This
movement covers the A/T clutch pressure control solenoid valve pressure ports to stop at shift valves C and A, and
uncover the line pressure port leading to the 2nd clutch.
Fluid flows to 2nd clutch by way of:

Line pressure (1) → Manual valve−Line pressure (4) → Shift valve C−Line pressure (5E) → Shift valve B−Line
pressure (5F) → Shift valve A−2nd clutch pressure (20) → 2nd clutch
The 2nd clutch pressure (20) is applied to the 2nd clutch, and the 2nd clutch keeps on engaging with line pressure
mode.
＊０５
SWITCH
TORQUE
CONVERTER
95 30 10 95 40 50 95
30 3RD 10 40 4TH 50 20 2ND 20
20
SHIFT
SOLENOID
VALVES
10
VALVE 1
57 5H 5C 5B 5G 4 SC 57
SHIFT X 4’ 4 3
91
VALVE
C B: ON
90 SB
94 SC
SHIFT C: OFF
3C X
VALVE 1
VALVE E
SE X 3B 3’ 3 4
D: ON
X 5N 5K 5J 10 X 40 5F
SD
SE
E: OFF
1
X 55’ 94 91 5K
LOCK-UP X 5N 55’
SA SHIFT 55
7
A
1
56
TORQUE X X AX
B
CHECK 4’’
90 96 55 97 AX
VALVE 90 90 57
HX X 3A
AX
HX X X AX
C
X 93 X 93 92 IDLER
X X SHAFT
4
LOCK-UP IDLER GEAR
COOLER 4’ 4’’
A/T CLUTCH PRESSURE
93 FINAL DRIVE
GEAR 3’
SECONDARY
SHAFT
RELIEF VALVE 95 7
92 95
SERVO VALVE
ATF
X X
COOLER
REGULATOR 1 1
VALVE
99
ATF PUMP
14-64
06/09/15 17:33:44 62SWA00A_140_0067
D Position: Shifting between 2nd gear and 3rd gear

As the speed of the vehicle reaches the programmed value, the PCM turns shift solenoid valves C ON, and keeps A
and E OFF, and B and D ON. Shift solenoid valve C pressure (SC) is applied to the right side of the shift valve C. Shift
valve C is moved to the left side to uncover the A/T clutch pressure control solenoid valve pressure ports leading to
the 2nd and 3rd clutches. The PCM controls the A/T clutch pressure control solenoid valves to regulate hydraulic
pressure. A/T clutch pressure control solenoid valve B pressure (56) changes to 2nd clutch pressure (20) at shift
valve A, and A/T clutch pressure control solenoid valve C pressure (57) changes to 3rd clutch pressure (30) at shift
valve A. The 2nd and 3rd clutches are engaged by the A/T clutch pressure control solenoid valve pressure mode.
＊０６
SWITCH
TORQUE
CONVERTER
95 30 10 95 40 50 95
30 3RD 10 40 4TH 50 20 2ND 20
20
SHIFT
SOLENOID
VALVES
10
VALVE 1
57 5H 5C 5B 5G 4 SC 57
SHIFT X 4’ 4 3
91
VALVE
C B: ON
90 SB
94 SC
SHIFT C: ON
3C X
VALVE 1
VALVE E
SE X 3B 3’ 3 4
D: ON
X 5N 5K 5J 10 X 40 5F
SD
SE
E: OFF
1
X 55’ 94 91 5K
LOCK-UP X 5N 55’
SA SHIFT 55
7
A
1
56
TORQUE X X AX
B
CHECK 4’’
90 96 55 97 AX
VALVE 90 90 57
HX X 3A
AX
HX X X AX
C
X 93 X 93 92 IDLER
X X SHAFT
4
LOCK-UP IDLER GEAR
COOLER 4’ 4’’
A/T CLUTCH PRESSURE
93 FINAL DRIVE
GEAR 3’
SECONDARY
SHAFT
RELIEF VALVE 95 7
92 95
SERVO VALVE
ATF
X X
COOLER
REGULATOR 1 1
VALVE
99
ATF PUMP
(cont’d)
14-65
06/09/15 17:33:45 62SWA00A_140_0068

D Position: Driving in 3rd gear
The PCM turns shift solenoid valves B and D OFF, and keeps A and E OFF, and C ON. Shift solenoid valve B pressure
(SB) in the right side of shift valve B is released, and shift valve B is moved to the right side. Shift solenoid valve D
pressure (SD) in the left side of the shift valve D is released, and shift valve D is moved to the left side. This valve
movement switches the A/T clutch pressure control solenoid valve C pressure port leading to the 3rd clutch.
A/T clutch pressure control solenoid valve C pressure (57) changes to (5J) at shift solenoid valve D and to (5K) at shift
valve B, and becomes 3rd clutch pressure (30) at shift valve A. The 3rd clutch pressure (30) is applied to the 3rd clutch,
and the 3rd clutch keeps on engaging with A/T clutch pressure control solenoid valve C pressure mode.
＊０７
SWITCH
TORQUE
CONVERTER
95 30 10 95 40 50 95
30 3RD 10 40 4TH 50 20 2ND 20
20
SHIFT
SOLENOID
VALVES
10
VALVE 1
57 5H 5C 5B 5G 4 SC 57
SHIFT X 4’ 4 3
91
VALVE
C B: OFF
90 SB
94 SC
SHIFT C: ON
3C X
VALVE 1
VALVE E
SE X 3B 3’ 3 4
D: OFF
X 5N 5K 5J 10 X 40 5F
SD
SE
E: OFF
1
X 55’ 94 91 5K
LOCK-UP X 5N 55’
SA SHIFT 55
7
A
1
56
TORQUE X X AX
B
CHECK 4’’
90 96 55 97 AX
VALVE 90 90 57
HX X 3A
AX
HX X X AX
C
X 93 X 93 92 IDLER
X X SHAFT
4
LOCK-UP IDLER GEAR
COOLER 4’ 4’’
A/T CLUTCH PRESSURE
93 FINAL DRIVE
GEAR 3’
SECONDARY
SHAFT
RELIEF VALVE 95 7
92 95
SERVO VALVE
ATF
X X
COOLER
REGULATOR 1 1
VALVE
99
ATF PUMP
14-66
06/09/15 17:33:46 62SWA00A_140_0069
D Position: Shifting between 3rd gear and 4th gear

As the speed of the vehicle reaches the programmed value, the PCM turns shift solenoid valves C OFF, and keeps A, B,
D, and E OFF. Shift solenoid valve C pressure (SC) in the right side of shift valve C is released. Shift valve C is moved
to the right side to uncover the A/T clutch pressure control solenoid valve B and C pressure ports leading to the 3rd
and 4th clutches. The PCM controls the A/T clutch pressure control solenoid valves to regulate hydraulic pressure. A/T
clutch pressure control solenoid valve C pressure (57) changes to 3rd clutch pressure (30) at shift valve A, and A/T
clutch pressure control solenoid valve B pressure (56) changes to 4th clutch pressure (40) at shift valve B. The 3rd and
4th clutches are engaged by the A/T clutch pressure control solenoid valve pressure mode.
＊０８
SWITCH
TORQUE
CONVERTER
95 30 10 95 40 50 95
30 3RD 10 40 4TH 50 20 2ND 20
20
SHIFT
SOLENOID
VALVES
10
VALVE 1
57 5H 5C 5B 5G 4 SC 57
SHIFT X 4’ 4 3
91
VALVE
C B: OFF
90 SB
94 SC
SHIFT C: OFF
3C X
VALVE 1
VALVE E
SE X 3B 3’ 3 4
D: OFF
X 5N 5K 5J 10 X 40 5F
SD
SE
E: OFF
1
X 55’ 94 91 5K
LOCK-UP X 5N 55’
SA SHIFT 55
7
A
1
56
TORQUE X X AX
B
CHECK 4’’
90 96 55 97 AX
VALVE 90 90 57
HX X 3A
AX
HX X X AX
C
X 93 X 93 92 IDLER
X X SHAFT
4
LOCK-UP IDLER GEAR
COOLER 4’ 4’’
A/T CLUTCH PRESSURE
93 FINAL DRIVE
GEAR 3’
SECONDARY
SHAFT
RELIEF VALVE 95 7
92 95
SERVO VALVE
ATF
X X
COOLER
REGULATOR 1 1
VALVE
99
ATF PUMP
(cont’d)
14-67
06/09/15 17:33:47 62SWA00A_140_0070

D Position: Driving in 4th gear
The PCM turns shift solenoid valve A ON, and keeps B, C, D, and E OFF. Shift solenoid valve A pressure (SA) is applied
to the right side of shift valve A. Shift valve A is moved to the left side to cover the A/T clutch pressure control solenoid
valve A and C pressure ports leading to the 2nd and 3rd clutches.
A/T clutch pressure control solenoid valve B pressure (56) changes to (5G) at shift valve C, and becomes 4th clutch
pressure (40) at shift valve B. The 4th clutch pressure (40) is held to high by the A/T clutch pressure control solenoid
valve B, and the 4th clutch keeps on engaging with A/T clutch pressure control solenoid valve B pressure mode.
＊０９
SWITCH
TORQUE
CONVERTER
95 30 10 95 40 50 95
30 3RD 10 40 4TH 50 20 2ND 20
20
SHIFT
SOLENOID
VALVES
10
SERVO CONTROL A: ON
VALVE 1
57 5H 5C 5B 5G 4 SC 57
SHIFT X 4’ 4 3
91
VALVE
C B: OFF
90 SB
94 SC
SHIFT C: OFF
3C X
VALVE 1
VALVE E
SE X 3B 3’ 3 4
D: OFF
X 5N 5K 5J 10 X 40 5F
SD
SE
E: OFF
1
X 55’ 94 91 5K
LOCK-UP X 5N 55’
SA SHIFT 55
7
A
1
56
TORQUE X X AX
B
CHECK 4’’
90 96 55 97 AX
VALVE 90 90 57
HX X 3A
AX
HX X X AX
C
X 93 X 93 92 IDLER
X X SHAFT
4
LOCK-UP IDLER GEAR
COOLER 4’ 4’’
A/T CLUTCH PRESSURE
93 FINAL DRIVE
GEAR 3’
SECONDARY
SHAFT
RELIEF VALVE 95 7
92 95
SERVO VALVE
ATF
X X
COOLER
REGULATOR 1 1
VALVE
99
ATF PUMP
14-68
06/09/15 17:33:48 62SWA00A_140_0071
D Position: Shifting between 4th gear and 5th gear

As the speed of the vehicle reaches the programmed value, the PCM turns shift solenoid valve D ON, and keeps A ON,
and B, C, and E OFF. Shift solenoid valve D pressure (SD) is applied to the left side of the shift valve D. Shift valve D is
moved to the right side to uncover the A/T clutch pressure control solenoid valve C pressure port leading to the 5th
clutch. A/T clutch pressure control solenoid valve B pressure (56) changes to 4th clutch pressure (40) at shift valve B.
A/T clutch pressure control solenoid valve C pressure (57) changes to (5L) at shift valve D and to (5N) at shift valve B,
and becomes 5th clutch pressure (50) at shift valve A. The 4th and 5th clutches are engaged by the A/T clutch pressure
control solenoid valve pressure mode.
＊１０
SWITCH
TORQUE
CONVERTER
95 30 10 95 40 50 95
30 3RD 10 40 4TH 50 20 2ND 20
20
SHIFT
SOLENOID
VALVES
10
SERVO CONTROL A: ON
VALVE 1
57 5H 5C 5B 5G 4 SC 57
SHIFT X 4’ 4 3
91
VALVE
C B: OFF
90 SB
94 SC
SHIFT C: OFF
3C X
VALVE 1
VALVE E
SE X 3B 3’ 3 4
D: ON
X 5N 5K 5J 10 X 40 5F
SD
SE
E: OFF
1
X 55’ 94 91 5K
LOCK-UP X 5N 55’
SA SHIFT 55
7
A
1
56
TORQUE X X AX
B
CHECK 4’’
90 96 55 97 AX
VALVE 90 90 57
HX X 3A
AX
HX X X AX
C
X 93 X 93 92 IDLER
X X SHAFT
4
LOCK-UP IDLER GEAR
COOLER 4’ 4’’
A/T CLUTCH PRESSURE
93 FINAL DRIVE
GEAR 3’
SECONDARY
SHAFT
RELIEF VALVE 95 7
92 95
SERVO VALVE
ATF
X X
COOLER
REGULATOR 1 1
VALVE
99
ATF PUMP
(cont’d)
14-69
06/09/15 17:33:49 62SWA00A_140_0072

D Position: Driving in 5th gear
The PCM turns shift solenoid valve C ON, and keeps A and D ON, and B and E turned OFF. Shift solenoid valve C
pressure (SC) is applied to the right side of shift valve C. Shift valve C is moved to the left side to switch the A/T clutch
pressure control solenoid valve B pressure port leading to the 4th clutch.
The 5th clutch pressure (50) is held to high by the A/T clutch pressure control solenoid valve C, and the 5th clutch
keeps on engaging with A/T clutch pressure control solenoid valve C pressure mode.
＊１１
SWITCH
TORQUE
CONVERTER
95 30 10 95 40 50 95
30 3RD 10 40 4TH 50 20 2ND 20
20
SHIFT
SOLENOID
VALVES
10
SERVO CONTROL A: ON
VALVE 1
57 5H 5C 5B 5G 4 SC 57 4’
SHIFT X 4 3
91
VALVE
C B: OFF
90 SB
94 SC
SHIFT C: ON
3C X
VALVE 1
VALVE E
SE X 3B 3’ 3 4
D: ON
X 5N 5K 5J 10 X 40 5F
SD
SE
E: OFF
1
X 55’ 94 91 5K
LOCK-UP X 5N 55’
SA SHIFT 55
7
A
1
56
TORQUE X X AX
B
CHECK 4’’
90 96 55 97 AX
VALVE 90 90 57
HX X 3A
AX
HX X X AX
C
X 93 X 93 92 IDLER
X X SHAFT
4
LOCK-UP IDLER GEAR
COOLER 4’ 4’’
A/T CLUTCH PRESSURE
93 FINAL DRIVE
GEAR 3’
SECONDARY
SHAFT
RELIEF VALVE 95 7
92 95
SERVO VALVE
ATF
X X
COOLER
REGULATOR 1 1
VALVE
99
ATF PUMP
14-70
06/09/15 17:33:50 62SWA00A_140_0073
2 Position
are as follows:
• Shift solenoid valve A: OFF, and shift valve A stays on the right side
• Shift solenoid valve C: OFF, and shift valve C stays on the right side
• Shift solenoid valve D: ON, and shift valve D moves to the right side
Line pressure (1) changes to line pressure (4) at the manual valve, and flows to shift valve C. Line pressure (4) flows to
shift valve A via shift valve B, and becomes the 2nd clutch pressure (20). The 2nd clutch pressure (20) is applied to the
2nd clutch, and the 2nd clutch is engaged.
＊１２
SWITCH
TORQUE
CONVERTER
95 30 10 95 40 50 95
30 3RD 10 40 4TH 50 20 2ND 20
20
SHIFT
SOLENOID
VALVES
10
VALVE 1
57 5H 5C 5B 5G 4 SC 57
SHIFT X 4’ 4 3
91
VALVE
C B: ON
90 SB
94 SC
SHIFT C: OFF
3C X
VALVE 1
VALVE E
SE X 3B 3’ 3 4
D: ON
X 5N 5K 5J 10 X 40 5F
SD
SE
E: OFF
1
X 55’ 94 91 5K
LOCK-UP X 5N 55’
SA SHIFT 55
7
A
1
56
TORQUE X X AX
B
CHECK 4’’
90 96 55 97 AX
VALVE 90 90 57
HX X 3A
AX
HX X X AX
C
X 93 X 93 92 IDLER
X X SHAFT
4
LOCK-UP IDLER GEAR
COOLER 4’ 4’’
A/T CLUTCH PRESSURE
93 FINAL DRIVE
GEAR 3’
SECONDARY
SHAFT
RELIEF VALVE 95 7
92 95
SERVO VALVE
ATF
X X
COOLER
REGULATOR 1 1
VALVE
99
ATF PUMP
(cont’d)
14-71
06/09/15 17:33:51 62SWA00A_140_0074

1 Position
are as follows:
• Shift solenoid valve A: ON, and shift valve A moves to the left side
• Shift solenoid valve C: ON, and shift valve C moves to the left side
• Shift solenoid valve D: OFF, and shift valve D stays on the left side
Line pressure (1) becomes the 1st clutch pressure (10) at shift valve B.
Fluid flows to 1st clutch by way of:

Line Pressure (1) → Shift Valve D − Line Pressure (1A) → Shift Valve A − Line Pressure (1B) → Manual Valve − Line
Pressure (5A) → Shift Valve C − Line Pressure (5B) → Shift Valve B − 1st Clutch Pressure (10) → 1st Clutch
The 1st clutch pressure (10) is applied to the 1st clutch, and the 1st clutch is engaged.
＊１３
SWITCH
TORQUE
CONVERTER
95 30 10 95 40 50 95
30 3RD 10 40 4TH 50 20 2ND 20
20
SHIFT
SOLENOID
VALVES
10
SERVO CONTROL A: ON
VALVE 1
57 5H 5C 5B 5G 4 SC 57
SHIFT X 4’ 4 3
91
VALVE
C B: ON
90 SB
94 SC
SHIFT C: ON
3C X
VALVE 1
VALVE E
SE X 3B 3’ 3 4
D: OFF
X 5N 5K 5J 10 X 40 5F
SD
SE
E: OFF
1
X 55’ 94 91 5K
LOCK-UP X 5N 55’
50 30 1A 55’ 5F SD 5L 5J 1A
SHIFT VALVE SA 55
SHIFT
7 55 96 92 93 SE SHIFT VALVE D
VALVE A XX 1B X 20 X 57 X 1 X X X AX
A
1
56
TORQUE X X AX
B
CHECK 4’’
90 96 55 97 AX
VALVE 90 90 57
HX X 3A
AX
HX X X AX
C
X 93 X 93 92 IDLER
X X SHAFT
4
LOCK-UP IDLER GEAR A/T CLUTCH PRESSURE
COOLER 4’ 4’’
93 FINAL DRIVE
GEAR 3’
SECONDARY
SHAFT
RELIEF VALVE 95 7
92 95
SERVO VALVE
ATF
COOLER X X
REGULATOR 1 1
VALVE
99
ATF PUMP
14-72
06/09/15 17:33:52 62SWA00A_140_0075
R Position: Shifting to R position from P or N position

When shifting in the R position, the PCM turns shift solenoid valves B and E ON, and A, C, and D OFF. Shift solenoid
valve B pressure (SB) is applied to the right side of shift valve B, and shift valve B is moved to left side. Shift solenoid
valve E pressure (SE) is applied to the left side of shift valve E, and shift valve E is moved to the right side. Line
pressure (1) changes to (3) at the manual valve, and flows to the servo valve via shift valve E. The servo valve is
moved to reverse range position. Movement of shift valves B and E, and servo valve creates 4th clutch pressure line
between the 4th clutch and the A/T clutch pressure control solenoid valve A. The 4th clutch pressure (40) is applied to
the 4th clutch, and the 4th clutch is engaged by the A/T clutch pressure control solenoid valve B pressure mode.
＊１４
SWITCH
TORQUE
CONVERTER
95 30 10 95 40 50 95
30 3RD 10 40 4TH 50 20 2ND 20
20
SHIFT
SOLENOID
VALVES
10
VALVE 1
57 5H 5C 5B 5G 4 SC 57
SHIFT X 4’ 4 3
91
VALVE
C B: ON
90 SB
94 SC
SHIFT C: OFF
3C X
VALVE 1
VALVE E
SE X 3B 3’ 3 4
D: OFF
X 5N 5K 5J 10 X 40 5F
SD
SE
E: ON
1
X 55’ 94 91 5K
LOCK-UP X 5N 55’
SA SHIFT 55
7
A
1
56
TORQUE X X AX
B
CHECK 4’’
90 96 55 97 AX
VALVE 90 90 57
HX X 3A
AX
HX X X AX
C
X 93 X 93 92 IDLER
X X SHAFT
4
LOCK-UP IDLER GEAR
COOLER 4’ 4’’
A/T CLUTCH PRESSURE
93 FINAL DRIVE
GEAR 3’
SECONDARY
SHAFT
RELIEF VALVE 95 7
92 95
SERVO VALVE
ATF
X X
COOLER
REGULATOR 1 1
VALVE
99
ATF PUMP
(cont’d)
14-73
06/09/15 17:33:53 62SWA00A_140_0076

R Position: Driving in reverse gear
After starting off in reverse gear, the PCM turns shift solenoid valve A ON, and keeps B and E ON, and C and D OFF.
Shift solenoid valve A pressure (SA) is applied to the right side of shift valve A to cover the A/T clutch pressure control
solenoid valve A pressure port, and to uncover the line pressure port leading to the 4th clutch creating full line
pressure. The 4th clutch is engaged with line pressure mode.
Reverse Inhibitor Control

While the vehicle is moving forward, the PCM keeps shift solenoid valve E remaining OFF. Shift valve E covers the port
of line pressure (3’) leading to the servo valve reverse position. The servo valve cannot be shifted to reverse position,
and hydraulic pressure is not applied to the 4th clutch from servo valve for reverse; as a result, power is not
transmitted to the reverse direction.
＊１５
SWITCH
TORQUE
CONVERTER
95 30 10 95 40 50 95
30 3RD 10 40 4TH 50 20 2ND 20
20
SHIFT
SOLENOID
VALVES
10
SERVO CONTROL A: ON
VALVE 1
57 5H 5C 5B 5G 4 SC 57
SHIFT X 4’ 4 3
91
VALVE
C B: ON
90 SB
94 SC
SHIFT C: OFF
3C X
VALVE 1
VALVE E
SE X 3B 3’ 3 4
D: OFF
X 5N 5K 5J 10 X 40 5F
SD
SE
E: ON
1
X 55’ 94 91 5K
LOCK-UP X 5N 55’
SA SHIFT 55
7
A
1
56
TORQUE X X AX
B
CHECK 4’’
90 96 55 97 AX
VALVE 90 90 57
HX X 3A
AX
HX X X AX
C
X 93 X 93 92 IDLER
X X SHAFT
4
LOCK-UP IDLER GEAR
COOLER 4’ 4’’
A/T CLUTCH PRESSURE
93 FINAL DRIVE
GEAR 3’
SECONDARY
SHAFT
RELIEF VALVE 95 7
92 95
SERVO VALVE
ATF
X X
COOLER
REGULATOR 1 1
VALVE
99
ATF PUMP
14-74
06/09/15 17:33:54 62SWA00A_140_0077
P Position
Shift solenoid valves B and E are turned ON, and A, C, and D are turned OFF by the PCM. Line pressure (1) flows to the
shift solenoid valves and the A/T clutch pressure control solenoid valve A. Line pressure (3) changes to (3’) at shift
valve E, and flows to the servo valve. The servo valve is moved to reverse/park position. Hydraulic pressure is not
applied to the clutches.
＊１６
SWITCH
TORQUE
CONVERTER
95 30 10 95 40 50 95
30 3RD 10 40 4TH 50 20 2ND 20
20
SHIFT
SOLENOID
VALVES
10
VALVE 1
57 5H 5C 5B 5G 4 SC 57 4’
SHIFT X 4 3
91
VALVE
C B: ON
90 SB
94 SC
SHIFT C: OFF
3C X
VALVE 1
VALVE E
SE X 3B 3’ 3 4
D: OFF
X 5N 5K 5J 10 X 40 5F
SD
SE
E: ON
1
X 55’ 94 91 5K
LOCK-UP X 5N 55’
SA SHIFT 55
7
A
1
56
TORQUE X X AX
B
CHECK 4’’
90 96 55 97 AX
VALVE 90 90 57
HX X 3A
AX
HX X X AX
C
X 93 X 93 92 IDLER
X X SHAFT
4
LOCK-UP IDLER GEAR
COOLER 4’ 4’’
A/T CLUTCH PRESSURE
93 FINAL DRIVE
GEAR 3’
SECONDARY
SHAFT
RELIEF VALVE 95 7
92 95
SERVO VALVE
ATF
X X
COOLER
REGULATOR 1 1
VALVE
99
ATF PUMP
14-75
06/09/15 17:33:55 62SWA00A_140_0078

Lock-up System
The lock-up mechanism of the torque converter clutch operates in D position (2nd, 3rd, 4th, and 5th), and in D position
D3 driving mode (2nd and 3rd). The pressurized fluid is drained from the back of the torque converter through a fluid
passage, causing the torque converter clutch piston to be held against the torque converter cover. As this takes place,
the mainshaft rotates at the same speed as the engine crankshaft. Together with the hydraulic control, the PCM
optimizes the timing and amount of the lock-up mechanism. When the shift solenoid valve E is turned on by the PCM,
shift solenoid valve E pressure switches the lock-up shift valve lock-up on and off. A/T clutch pressure control solenoid
valve A and the lock-up control valve control the amount of the lock-up.
Torque Converter Clutch Lock-up ON (Engaging Torque Converter Clutch)

Fluid in the chamber between the torque converter cover and the torque converter clutch piston is drained off, and
fluid entering from the chamber between the pump and stator exerts pressure through the torque converter clutch
piston against the torque converter cover. The torque converter clutch piston engages with the torque converter cover;
the torque converter clutch lock-up is ON, and the mainshaft rotates at the same speed as the engine.
＊０１
Power flow TORQUE CONVERTER
CLUTCH PISTON
DAMPER SPRING
The power flows by way of:
TURBINE
Engine
↓
Drive plate
↓ TORQUE To ATF cooler
Torque converter cover CONVERTER INLET OUTLET
↓ COVER
Torque converter clutch piston
↓
Damper spring
↓
Turbine
↓
Mainshaft
MAINSHAFT
Torque Converter Clutch Lock-up OFF (Disengaging Torque Converter Clutch)

Fluid entered from the chamber between the torque converter cover and the torque converter clutch piston passes
through the torque converter and goes out through the chambers between the turbine and the stator, and between the
pump and the stator. As a result, the torque converter clutch piston moves away from the torque converter cover, and
the torque converter lock-up clutch is released; torque converter clutch lock-up is OFF.
＊０２
Power flow TURBINE
PUMP
The power flows by way of:
STATOR
Engine
↓
Drive plate TORQUE To ATF cooler
↓ CONVERTER
Torque converter cover COVER INLET
↓
Pump
↓
Turbine
↓
Mainshaft
MAINSHAFT
14-76
ＳＷＡ７Ｅ１ＰＥ１０４７４００００００ＣＡＡＴ００
06/09/15 17:33:55 62SWA00A_140_0079
No Lock-up
Shift solenoid valve E is turned OFF by the PCM, and shift solenoid valve E pressure (SE) is not applied to the lock-up
shift valve. The lock-up shift valve stays to the right to uncover the torque converter pressure ports leading to the left
side of the torque converter and releasing pressure from the right side of the torque converter. Torque converter
pressure (92) changes to (94) at the lock-up shift valve, and enters into the left side of the torque converter to
disengage the torque converter clutch. This keeps the torque converter clutch piston keeps away from the torque
converter cover and the torque converter clutch is not engaged; this is the no lock-up condition.
＊０３
TORQUE
CONVERTER

SE
OFF
1 X
A/T CLUTCH PRESSURE CONTROL SOLENOID VALVE A
55
91
X X AX
90 1
94
SHIFT VALVE A and D

X 55’ 94 91
LOCK-UP
SHIFT VALVE
7 55 96 92 93 SE
MANUAL VALVE
TORQUE
CONVERTER
CHECK VALVE AX
90 90 96 55 97
HX
AX
HX
93 90 X 93 92
X X IDLER SHAFT
X
IDLER GEAR
COOLER LOCK-UP
CHECK CONTROL MAINSHAFT
VALVE VALVE COUNTERSHAFT

93 FINAL DRIVE
GEAR
SECONDARY
RELIEF VALVE SHAFT
95 7
92 95
ATF X
COOLER X
REGULATOR 1 1
VALVE
99
ATF PUMP
(cont’d)
14-77
06/09/15 17:33:56 62SWA00A_140_0080

Lock-up System (cont’d)
Partial Lock-up
As the speed of the vehicle reaches the prescribed value, shift solenoid valve E is turned ON by the PCM, and shift
solenoid valve E pressure (SE) is applied to the right side of the lock-up shift valve. The lock-up shift valve is moved to
the left side to switch the torque converter pressure (91) port, which goes to the right side of the torque converter, and
the port of torque converter pressure (94) is released from the left side of the torque converter. Torque converter
pressure (91) flows to the right side of the torque converter to engage the torque converter clutch. The PCM also
controls the A/T clutch pressure control solenoid valve A, and A/T clutch pressure control solenoid valve A pressure
(55) is applied to the lock-up shift valve and lock-up control valve. The position of the lock-up control valve depends on
A/T clutch pressure control solenoid valve A pressure (55) and torque converter pressure released from the torque
converter. Under this condition, the torque converter clutch is engaged by pressure entering into the front side of the
torque converter; this condition is partial lock-up.
＊０４
TORQUE
CONVERTER

SE
ON
1 X
55
91
X X AX
90 1
94
SHIFT VALVE A and D

X 55’ 94 91
LOCK-UP
SHIFT VALVE
7 55 96 92 93 SE
MANUAL VALVE
TORQUE
CONVERTER
CHECK VALVE AX
90 90 96 55 97
HX
AX
HX
93 90 X 93 92
X X IDLER SHAFT
X
IDLER GEAR
COOLER LOCK-UP

93 FINAL DRIVE
GEAR
SECONDARY
RELIEF VALVE SHAFT
95 7
92 95
ATF X
COOLER X
REGULATOR 1 1
VALVE
99
ATF PUMP
14-78
06/09/15 17:33:56 62SWA00A_140_0081
Full Lock-up
When the vehicle speed increases, the PCM sends a signal to A/T clutch pressure control solenoid valve A to increase
A/T clutch pressure control solenoid valve A pressure (55), and the lock-up control valve is moved to the left side by
the increased pressure. Then converter pressure (94) from the left side of the torque converter is completely released
at the lock-up control valve, and torque converter pressure (91) engages the torque converter clutch securely. The
torque converter clutch is fully engaged; this condition is full lock-up.
＊０５
TORQUE
CONVERTER

SE
ON
1 X
55
91
X X AX
90 1
94
SHIFT VALVE A and D

X 55’ 94 91
LOCK-UP
SHIFT VALVE
7 55 96 92 93 SE
MANUAL VALVE
TORQUE
CONVERTER
CHECK VALVE AX
90 90 96 55 97
HX
AX
HX
93 90 X 93 92
X X IDLER SHAFT
X
IDLER GEAR
COOLER LOCK-UP

93 FINAL DRIVE
GEAR
SECONDARY
RELIEF VALVE SHAFT
95 7
92 95
ATF X
COOLER X
REGULATOR 1 1
VALVE
99
ATF PUMP
14-79
06/09/15 17:33:57 62SWA00A_140_0082

Circuit Diagram - PCM A/T Control System K24Z1 Engine Model
＊０１
UNDER−HOOD FUSE/RELAY BOX UNDER−DASH FUSE/RELAY BOX

BATTERY
No. 1 (100 A) No. 2 (IG) (50 A) BAT IG1 No. 2 (15 A)
No. 10 (7.5 A)
IGNITION SWITCH
No. 12 (15 A)
GAUGE CONTROL MODULE
B36
YEL
P
POWERTRAIN CONTROL
R MODULE (PCM)
A/T GEAR To 12 V
POSITION
N INDICATOR
CAN A/T GEAR DIMMING To 5 V
CONTROLLER POSITION CIRCUIT IG1 C36
INDICATOR D BLK/RED LT BLU
DRIVER
CIRCUIT 2
A36 CAN H
1
WHT
D3 SCS A31 DATA LINK
DIMMING BRN BRN CONNECTOR
CIRCUIT A37 CAN L (DLC)
WHT
B34 RED
F−CAN
TRANSCEIVER RED
B33
ATP RVS B22
RED/WHT
SG B15 ATP FWD B28
BLU/YEL
PG B19 ATP 1 B15
RED
BLK BLK ATP 2 B16
GRN/RED
ATP D B21
YEL/GRN
ATP N STARTER
SHIFT LOCK B12 CUT
RED/BLK
SOLENOID ATP R B14 RELAY
1
RED YEL G501 ATP P B13
G502
A27 SLS WHT
2
BLK RED RED
BLU/BLK BLU/WHT BLK
5 4 9 3 8 2 6 10 7 1
D3 SWITCH
A41 D3 SW WHT PNK BRN WHT/RED BLK
5
WHT BLU BLU BLK/BLU RED/BLK BLU YEL/RED BLU/WHT
6 7 2 8 3 9 5 1 4 10 G101
6
WHT BLK FWD RVS ST E
N D
R 2
BRAKE PEDAL
POSITION SWITCH G503 P 1
A40 BK SW
WHT LT GRN LT GRN
MULTIPLEX INTEGRATED
CONTROL UNIT (MICU)
TRANSMISSION RANGE SWITCH
4 5 6 8 9 1 2 3 4 7 8 9 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9
(10) 14 15 16 17 18 19 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18
20 21 22 23 24 25 20 21 22 23 24 25 20 21 (22) 23
(26) 27 28 29 31 33 34 35 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 27 29 30 31 32
36 37 (39) 40 41 42 44 36 41 42 43 44 36 39 40 41 42 43 44
A (44P) B (44P) C (44P)

14-80
ＳＷＡ７Ｅ３ＰＥ１０４００００００００ＥＡＡＴ００
06/09/15 17:33:58 62SWA00A_140_0083
＊０２
POWERTRAIN CONTROL
B36 PG1 MODULE (PCM) To 12 V
BLK
B1 PG2 LS A B44 1
BLK RED/BLK A/T CLUTCH
PRESSURE
CONTROL
C40 LG1 SOLENOID
BRN/YEL 2
BLK VALVE A
C44 LG2
BRN/YEL
LS B B35 1
BRN A/T CLUTCH
PRESSURE
CONTROL
2 SOLENOID
G101 BLK VALVE B
To 5 V
LS C B25 1 A/T CLUTCH
BLU/YEL
PRESSURE
1 C13 VCC1 CONTROL
YEL/RED SOLENOID
2
BLK VALVE C
OUTPUT SHAFT 2 C43 NC
(COUNTERSHAFT) BLK/WHT
SPEED SENSOR
3 C14 SG1 2ND CLUTCH TRANSMISSION
GRN/WHT FLUID PRESSURE SWITCH
OP2SW B8 G101
BLU/RED
1
YEL/RED
MANIFOLD 3RD CLUTCH TRANSMISSION
ABSOLUTE 2 C11 MAP FLUID PRESSURE SWITCH
GRN/RED
PRESSURE
SENSOR 3 OP3SW B9
GRN/WHT BLU/WHT
1 B18 VCC2 SHIFT SOLENOID

YEL/BLU VALVE A
INPUT SHAFT 2 B17 NM SH A B10 5

(MAINSHAFT) WHT/RED BLU/BLK BLU
SPEED SENSOR
3 B33 SG2
GRN/BLK SHIFT SOLENOID
VALVE B
SH B B11 2
3 GRN/WHT ORN
YEL/BLU
1 B29 EGRP
WHT/BLK SHIFT SOLENOID
EGR VALVE VALVE C
POSITION 2
GRN/BLK
SENSOR SH C B20 1
4 B2 EGR GRN GRN
BLU/RED
6
BLK SHIFT SOLENOID
VALVE D
SH D B26 8
GRN/RED YEL
G101
SHIFT SOLENOID
VALVE E
SH E B24 3
YEL RED
ATF TEMPERATURE
SENSOR
ATFT B27 6
RED/YEL WHT
7
GRN/BLK WHT
4 5 6 8 9 1 2 3 4 7 8 9 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9
(10) 14 15 16 17 18 19 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18
20 21 22 23 24 25 20 21 22 23 24 25 20 21 (22) 23
(26) 27 28 29 31 33 34 35 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 27 29 30 31 32
36 37 (39) 40 41 42 44 36 41 42 43 44 36 39 40 41 42 43 44
A (44P) B (44P) C (44P)

14-81
06/09/15 17:33:58 62SWA00A_140_0084

Circuit Diagram - PCM A/T Control System R20A1 and R20A2 Engine Models
＊０１
BATTERY
No. 10 (7.5 A)
IGNITION SWITCH
No. 12 (15 A)
B36
YEL
P
POWERTRAIN CONTROL
R MODULE (PCM)
A/T GEAR To 12 V
POSITION
N INDICATOR
INDICATOR D BLK/YEL LT BLU
DRIVER
CIRCUIT 2
A36 CAN H
1
WHT
WHT
B34 RED
F−CAN
TRANSCEIVER RED
B33
ATP RVS B22
YEL
SG B15 ATP FWD B28
BLU/YEL
PG B19 ATP 1 B15
BRN
BLK BLK ATP 2 B16
RED
ATP D B21
YEL/GRN
ATP N B12 STARTER
SHIFT LOCK RED/BLK CUT
SOLENOID ATP R B14 RELAY
1
RED YEL G501 ATP P B13
G502
A27 SLS WHT/GRN
2
BLK RED RED
BLU/BLK BLU/WHT BLK
5 4 9 3 8 2 6 10 7 1
D3 SWITCH
A41 D3 SW WHT PNK BRN WHT/RED BLK
5
WHT BLU BLU BLK/BLU RED/BLK BLU YEL/RED BLU/WHT
6 7 2 8 3 9 5 1 4 10 G101
6
WHT BLK FWD RVS ST E
N D
R 2
BRAKE PEDAL
POSITION SWITCH G503 P 1
A40 BK SW
WHT LT GRN LT GRN
CONTROL UNIT (MICU)
4 5 6 8 9 1 2 3 4 7 8 9 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9
14 15 16 17 18 19 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18
20 21 23 24 25 20 21 22 23 24 25 20 21 22
27 28 29 31 33 34 35 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 27 29 30 31 32
36 37 (39) 40 41 42 44 36 37 38 39 41 42 43 44 36 (37) 39 40 42 43 44
A (44P) B (44P) C (44P)

14-82
ＳＷＡ７Ｅ２ＰＥ１０４００００００００ＥＡＡＴ００
06/09/15 17:33:59 62SWA00A_140_0085
＊０２
POWERTRAIN CONTROL
MODULE (PCM)
B36 PG1 To 12 V
BLK
B1 PG2 LS A B44 1
BLK WHT A/T CLUTCH
PRESSURE
CONTROL
C40 LG1 SOLENOID
BRN/YEL 2
BLK VALVE A
C44 LG2
BRN/YEL
LS B B35 1
BRN/WHT A/T CLUTCH
PRESSURE
To 5 V CONTROL
2 SOLENOID
G101 BLK VALVE B
1 C13 VCC1
YEL/RED
OUTPUT SHAFT LS C B25 1 A/T CLUTCH

2 C43 NC BLU/WHT
(COUNTERSHAFT) BLK/BLU PRESSURE
SPEED SENSOR CONTROL
3 C14 SG1 2 SOLENOID
GRN/WHT BLK VALVE C
1 2ND CLUTCH TRANSMISSION

YEL/RED FLUID PRESSURE SWITCH
MANIFOLD
ABSOLUTE 2 C11 MAP G101
GRN/RED OP2SW B8
PRESSURE BLU/YEL
SENSOR 3
GRN/WHT
3RD CLUTCH TRANSMISSION
FLUID PRESSURE SWITCH
1 B18 VCC2 OP3SW B9

YEL/BLU BLK/RED
INPUT SHAFT 2 B17 NM

(MAINSHAFT) WHT/RED
SPEED SENSOR SHIFT SOLENOID
3 B33 SG2 VALVE A
GRN/YEL
SH A B10 5
BLU BLU
1
YEL/BLU SHIFT SOLENOID
VALVE B
2 C22 POIL CS
EOP SENSOR WHT/BLK SH B B11 2
GRN/WHT ORN
3
GRN/YEL
SHIFT SOLENOID
VALVE C
1
YEL/BLU SH C B20 1
GRN GRN
3 B39 SV M
WHT
2 SHIFT SOLENOID
IMT VALVE GRN/YEL VALVE D
4 B37 SVS＋
BRN SH D B26 8
GRN/RED YEL
5 B38 SVS−
WHT/BLK
SHIFT SOLENOID
VALVE E
3
YEL/BLU SH E B24 3
YEL RED
1 B29 EGRP
WHT/BLK
EGR VALVE
POSITION 2 ATF TEMPERATURE
GRN/YEL SENSOR
SENSOR
4 B2 EGR
BLU/RED ATFT B27 6
BRN/RED WHT
6
BLK
7
GRN/YEL WHT
G101 PCM Harness Connector Terminal Locations
4 5 6 8 9 1 2 3 4 7 8 9 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9
14 15 16 17 18 19 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18
20 21 23 24 25 20 21 22 23 24 25 20 21 22
27 28 29 31 33 34 35 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 27 29 30 31 32
36 37 (39) 40 41 42 44 36 37 38 39 41 42 43 44 36 (37) 39 40 42 43 44
A (44P) B (44P) C (44P)

14-83
06/09/15 17:33:59 62SWA00A_140_0086
DTC Troubleshooting
DTC P0107: Manifold Absolute Pressure 8. Monitor the OBD STATUS for P0107 in the DTCs/
(MAP) Sensor Circuit Low Voltage Input Freeze Data in A/T Mode Menu for a pass/fail.
NOTE: Before you troubleshoot, record all freeze data Does the HDS indicate PASSED?
and any on-board snapshot, and review General
Troubleshooting Information (see page 14-5). YES−If the PCM was updated, troubleshooting is
complete. If the PCM was substituted, replace the
1. Clear the DTC with the HDS. original PCM; R20A1 and R20A2 engine models
2. Turn the ignition switch OFF, then turn it ON (II) 11-613). If any other DTCs were indicated on step 7,
again. go to the indicated DTC’s troubleshooting.
3. Check whether DTC P0107 is indicated in the DTCs/ NO−If the HDS indicates FAILED, check for poor
Freeze Data in PGM-FI Mode Menu with the HDS. connections and loose terminals at the MAP sensor
and the PCM. If the PCM was updated, substitute a
Is DT C P0107 indicated in the PGM-F I system? known-good PCM (see page 14-10), then recheck. If
the PCM was substituted, go to step 1. If the HDS
YES−Troubleshoot for DTC P0107 in the PGM-FI indicates NOT COMPLETED, keep idling until a
System; R20A1 and R20A2 engine models result comes on.
11-459).
NO−Go to step 4.
4. Check whether DTC P0107 is indicated in the DTCs/

Freeze Data in A/T Mode Menu with the HDS.
Is DT C P0107 indicated?
YES−Go to step 5.
NO−Intermittent failure, the system is OK at this

time.

software (see page 14-9), or substitute a known-
good PCM (see page 14-10).
6. Turn the ignition switch OFF, then turn it ON (II).
7. Check for DTC(s) in the DTCs/Freeze Data in A/T

Mode Menu with the HDS.
YES−Check for poor connections and loose

terminals at the MAP sensor and the PCM. If the
PCM was updated, substitute a known-good PCM
(see page 14-10), then recheck. If the PCM was
substituted, go to step 1.
NO−If DTC P0107 is not indicated, or if any other

DTCs are indicated, go to step 8.
14-84
ＳＷＡ７Ｅ１ＰＫ７７１０００９０１０７ＦＡＡＴ２０
06/09/15 17:33:59 62SWA00A_140_0087
DTC P0108: Manifold Absolute Pressure 8. Monitor the OBD STATUS for P0108 in the DTCs/
(MAP) Sensor Circuit High Voltage Input Freeze Data in A/T Mode Menu for a pass/fail.
2. Turn the ignition switch OFF, then turn it ON (II) 11-613). If any other DTCs were indicated on step 7,
again. go to the indicated DTC’s troubleshooting.
3. Check whether DTC P0108 is indicated in the DTCs/ NO−If the HDS indicates FAILED, check for poor
Freeze Data in PGM-FI Mode Menu with the HDS. connections and loose terminals at the MAP sensor
Is DT C P0108 indicated in the PGM-F I system? known-good PCM (see page 14-10), then recheck. If
the PCM was substituted, go to step 1. If the HDS
YES−Troubleshoot for DTC P0108 in the PGM-FI indicates NOT COMPLETED, keep idling until a
System; R20A1 and R20A2 engine models result comes on.
11-461).
NO−Go to step 4.

YES−Go to step 5.

time.

6. Turn the ignition switch OFF, then turn it ON (II).


terminals at the MAP sensor and the PCM. If the

14-85
ＳＷＡ７Ｅ１ＰＫ７７１０００９０１０８ＦＡＡＴ２０
06/09/15 17:34:00 62SWA00A_140_0088
DTC Troubleshooting (cont’d)

DTC P0335: Crankshaft Position (CKP) Sensor 8. Monitor the OBD STATUS for P0335 in the DTCs/
A No Signal Freeze Data in A/T Mode Menu for a pass/fail.
2. Start the engine. 11-613). If any other DTCs were indicated on step 7,
go to the indicated DTC’s troubleshooting.
Freeze Data in PGM-FI Mode Menu with the HDS. NO−If the HDS indicates FAILED, check for poor
connections and loose terminals at the CKP sensor
Is DT C P0335 indicated in the PGM-F I system? and the PCM. If the PCM was updated, substitute a
known-good PCM (see page 14-10), then recheck. If
YES−Troubleshoot for DTC P0335 in the PGM-FI the PCM was substituted, go to step 1. If the HDS
System; R20A1 and R20A2 engine models indicates NOT COMPLETED, keep idling until a
(see page 11-121), K24Z1 engine model (see page result comes on.
11-513).
NO−Go to step 4.

YES−Go to step 5.

time.

6. Start the engine.


terminals at the CKP sensor and the PCM. If the

14-86
ＳＷＡ７Ｅ１ＰＫ７７１０００９０３３５ＦＡＡＴ２０
06/09/15 17:34:00 62SWA00A_140_0089
DTC P0339: Crankshaft Position (CKP) Sensor 8. Monitor the OBD STATUS for P0339 in the DTCs/
A Intermittent Interruption Freeze Data in A/T Mode Menu for a pass/fail.
2. Start the engine, and run it idle for 10 seconds. 11-613). If any other DTCs were indicated on step 7,
connections and loose terminals at the CKP sensor
11-516).
NO−Go to step 4.

YES−Go to step 5.

time.

6. Start the engine, and run it idle for 10 seconds.


terminals at the CKP sensor and the PCM. If the

14-87
ＳＷＡ７Ｅ１ＰＫ７７１０００９０３３９ＦＡＡＴ２０
06/09/15 17:34:00 62SWA00A_140_0090

DTC P0365: Camshaft Position (CMP) Sensor 8. Monitor the OBD STATUS for P0365 in the DTCs/
B No Signal Freeze Data in A/T Mode Menu for a pass/fail.
2. Start the engine. 11-613). If any other DTCs were indicated on step 7,
connections and loose terminals at the CMP sensor
11-517).
NO−Go to step 4.

YES−Go to step 5.

time.



terminals at the CMP sensor and the PCM. If the

14-88
ＳＷＡ７Ｅ１ＰＫ７７１０００９０３６５ＦＡＡＴ２０
06/09/15 17:34:39 62SWA00A_140_0091
DTC P0369: Camshaft Position (CMP) Sensor 8. Monitor the OBD STATUS for P0369 in the DTCs/
B Intermittent Interruption Freeze Data in A/T Mode Menu for a pass/fail.
2. Start the engine, and run it idle for 10 seconds. 11-613). If any other DTCs were indicated on step 7,
connections and loose terminals at the CMP sensor
11-520).
NO−Go to step 4.

YES−Go to step 5.

time.

6. Start the engine, and run it idle for 10 seconds.


terminals at the CMP sensor and the PCM. If the

14-89
ＳＷＡ７Ｅ１ＰＫ７７１０００９０３６９ＦＡＡＴ２０
06/09/15 17:34:40 62SWA00A_140_0092

DTC P0705: Short in Transmission Range 7. Measure voltage between transmission range
Switch Circuit (Multiple Shift-position Input) switch connector terminals No. 6 and No. 10.
＊０１
NOTE: TRANSMISSION RANGE SWITCH CONNECTOR
• Before you troubleshoot, record all freeze data and
any on-board snapshot, and review General
Troubleshooting Information (see page 14-5).
• This code is caused by an electrical circuit problem
and cannot be caused by a mechanical problem in the
transmission.
ATP P (BLK/BLU) GND (BLK)
1. Clear the DTC with the HDS.

Wire side of female terminals
3. With the brake pedal pressed, move the shift lever
through all positions. Stop for at least 1 second in
each position, and monitor the OBD STATUS for Is there battery voltage?
P0705 in the DTCs/Freeze Data in A/T Mode Menu
for a pass/fail. YES−Go to step 13.
Does the HDS indicate F AILED? NO−Go to step 8.
YES−Go to step 4. 8. Turn the ignition switch OFF.
NO−Intermittent failure, the system is OK at this 9. Jump the SCS line with the HDS.
time. Check for an intermittent short in the wire
between the transmission range switch and the 10. Disconnect PCM connector B (44P).
PCM. If the HDS indicates NOT COMPLETED, return
to step 2 and recheck. 11. Check for continuity between PCM connector
terminal B13 and body ground.
4. Turn the ignition switch OFF. ＊０２
5. Inspect the transmission range switch (see page ATP P (BLU/BLK)
14-329).
Is the switch OK ?
YES−With the switch connector disconnected, go

to step 6.
NO−Replace the transmission range switch

(see page 14-331), then go to step 53.
6. Turn the ignition switch ON (II). Terminal side of female terminals
Is there continuity?
YES−Repair short in the wire between PCM

connector terminal B13 and the transmission range
switch, then go to step 53.
NO−Go to step 12.
14-90
ＳＷＡ７Ｅ１ＰＫ７７１０００９０７０５ＦＡＡＴ２０
06/09/15 17:34:40 62SWA00A_140_0093
12. Check for continuity between transmission range 14. Turn the ignition switch OFF.
switch connector terminal No. 10 and body ground.
＊０３ 15. Jump the SCS line with the HDS.
TRANSMISSION RANGE SWITCH CONNECTOR
16. Disconnect PCM connector B (44P).
17. Check for continuity between PCM connector

＊０５
GND (BLK)
ATP R (WHT) (K24Z1 engine model)
ATP R (WHT/GRN)
(R20A1 and R20A2 engine models)
YES−Go to step 48.
NO−Repair open in the wire between transmission

range switch connector terminal No. 10 and ground
(G101), or repair poor ground (G101), then go to Terminal side of female terminals
step 53.
13. Measure voltage between transmission range
switch connector terminals No. 7 and No. 10. YES−Repair short in the wire between PCM
＊０４ connector terminal B14 and the transmission range
TRANSMISSION RANGE SWITCH CONNECTOR switch, then go to step 53.
NO−Go to step 48.
ATP R (WHT) GND (BLK)
Is there battery voltage?
NO−Go to step 14.
(cont’d)
14-91
06/09/15 17:34:40 62SWA00A_140_0094

18. Measure voltage between transmission range 23. Measure voltage between transmission range
switch connector terminals No. 2 and No. 10. switch connector terminals No. 8 and No. 10.
＊０６＊０８
TRANSMISSION RANGE SWITCH CONNECTOR TRANSMISSION RANGE SWITCH CONNECTOR
ATP N (RED/BLK)
ATP D (PNK) GND (BLK)

GND (BLK)
Wire side of female terminals Wire side of female terminals
Is there about 5 V ? Is there battery voltage?
YES−Go to step 23. YES−Go to step 28.
NO−Go to step 19. NO−Go to step 24.
19. Turn the ignition switch OFF. 24. Turn the ignition switch OFF.
20. Jump the SCS line with the HDS. 25. Jump the SCS line with the HDS.
21. Disconnect PCM connector B (44P). 26. Disconnect PCM connector B (44P).
22. Check for continuity between PCM connector 27. Check for continuity between PCM connector
terminal B12 and body ground. terminal B21 and body ground.
＊０７＊０９
PCM CONNECTOR B (44P) PCM CONNECTOR B (44P)
ATP N (RED/BLK)
ATP D (YEL/GRN)
Terminal side of female terminals Terminal side of female terminals
Is there continuity? Is there continuity?
YES−Repair short in the wire between PCM YES−Repair short in the wire between PCM
connector terminal B12 and the transmission range connector terminal B21 and the transmission range
switch, then go to step 53. switch, then go to step 53.
14-92
06/09/15 17:34:41 62SWA00A_140_0095
＊１０＊１２
ATP 2 (BLU)
ATP 1 (BRN) GND (BLK)
GND (BLK)


NO−Go to step 34.
NO−Go to step 29.
32. Check for continuity between PCM connector terminal B15 and body ground.
terminal B16 and body ground. ＊１３
＊１１
ATP 1 (RED) (K24Z1 engine model)
ATP 2 (GRN/RED) (K24Z1 engine model) ATP 2 (BRN)
ATP 2 (RED) (R20A1 and R20A2 engine models)
(R20A1 and R20A2 engine models)

YES−Repair short in the wire between PCM connector terminal B15 and the transmission range
connector terminal B16 and the transmission range switch, then go to step 53.
switch, then go to step 53.
NO−Go to step 48.
NO−Go to step 48.
(cont’d)
14-93
06/09/15 17:34:41 62SWA00A_140_0096

＊１４＊１６
ATP FWD (YEL/RED) ATP RVS (WHT/RED)
GND (BLK) GND (BLK)
Wire side of female terminals Wire side of female terminals
Is there battery voltage? Is there battery voltage?
YES−Go to step 43. YES−Go to step 48.
40. Jump the SCS line with the HDS. 45. Jump the SCS line with the HDS.
41. Disconnect PCM connector B (44P). 46. Disconnect PCM connector B (44P).
42. Check for continuity between PCM connector 47. Check for continuity between PCM connector
terminal B28 and body ground. terminal B22 and body ground.
＊１５＊１７
PCM CONNECTOR B (44P) PCM CONNECTOR B (44P)
ATP FWD (BLU/YEL) ATP RVS (RED/WHT)

(K24Z1 engine model)
ATP RVS (YEL)
(R20A1 and R20A2
engine models)
Terminal side of female terminals Terminal side of female terminals
YES−Repair short in the wire between PCM YES−Repair short in the wire between PCM
connector terminal B28 and the transmission range connector terminal B22 and the transmission range
switch, then go to step 53. switch, then go to step 53.
14-94
06/09/15 17:34:41 62SWA00A_140_0097
48. Update the PCM if it does not have the latest 53. Clear the DTC with the HDS.
good PCM (see page 14-10). 54. Start the engine.
49. Start the engine. 55. With the brake pedal pressed, move the shift lever
through all position. Stop for at least 1 second in
50. With the brake pedal pressed, move the shift lever each position.
through all position. Stop for at least 1 second in
each position. 56. Check for DTC(s) in the DTCs/Freeze Data in A/T
Mode Menu with the HDS. Is DT C P07 05 indicated?
Is DT C P07 05 indicated? YES−Replace the transmission range switch

(see page 14-331), then return to step 53 and
YES−Check for poor connections and loose recheck.
terminals at the transmission range switch and the
PCM. If the PCM was updated, substitute a known- NO−If DTC P0705 is not indicated, or if any other
good PCM (see page 14-10), then recheck. If the DTCs are indicated, go to step 57.
PCM was substituted, go to step 1.
57. Monitor the OBD STATUS for P0705 in the DTCs/
NO−If DTC P0705 is not indicated, or if any other Freeze Data in A/T Mode Menu for a pass/fail.
Does the HDS indicate PASSED?
Freeze Data in A/T Mode Menu for a pass/fail. YES−Troubleshooting is complete. If any other
DTCs were indicated on step 56, go to the indicated
Does the HDS indicate PASSED? DTC’s troubleshooting.
YES−If the PCM was updated, troubleshooting is NO−If the HDS indicates FAILED, check for poor
complete. If the PCM was substituted, replace the connections and loose terminals at the
original PCM; R20A1 and R20A2 engine models transmission range switch and the PCM, then go to
(see page 11-226), K24Z1 engine model (see page step 1. If the HDS indicates NOT COMPLETED,
11-613). If any other DTCs were indicated on step return to the step 54 and recheck.
51, go to the indicated DTC’s troubleshooting.
NO−If the HDS indicates FAILED, check for poor

connections and loose terminals at the
transmission range switch and the PCM. If the PCM
was updated, substitute a known-good PCM
substituted, go to step 1. If the HDS indicates NOT
COMPLETED, keep idling until a result comes on.
14-95
06/09/15 17:34:42 62SWA00A_140_0098

DTC P0706: Open in Transmission Range 7. Install the transmission range switch correctly, and
Switch Circuit adjust the shift cable (see page 14-321).
NOTE: 8. Clear the DTC with the HDS.

any on-board snapshot, and review General 9. Start the engine, and turn the VSA off for model
Troubleshooting Information (see page 14-5). equipped with VSA (the light on the VSA OFF
• This code is caused by an electrical circuit problem switch comes on). Run the engine in the D position
and cannot be caused by a mechanical problem in the until the vehicle speed reaches 50 km/h (31 mph),
transmission. then slow down and stop the wheels.
1. Clear the DTC with the HDS. 10. Monitor the OBD STATUS for P0706 in the DTCs/
Freeze Data in A/T Mode Menu for a pass/fail.
2. 4WD model: Raise the vehicle on a lift, make sure it
is securely supported, and allow all four wheels to Does the HDS indicate F AILED?
rotate freely.
2WD model: Raise the front of the vehicle, make YES−Go to step 11.
sure it is securely supported, and allow the front
wheels to rotate freely. Or raise the vehicle. NO−Intermittent failure, the system is OK at this
time. Check for poor connections or loose terminals
3. Start the engine, and turn the VSA off for model at the transmission range switch and the PCM. If
equipped with VSA (the light on the VSA OFF the HDS indicates NOT COMPLETED, return to step
switch comes on). Run the engine in the D position 9 and recheck.
until the vehicle speed reaches 50 km/h (31 mph),
then slow down and stop the wheels. 11. Shift to the D position, and verify the ATP FWD and
ATP D inputs with the HDS in the A/T data list.
Freeze Data in A/T Mode Menu for a pass/fail. Is AT P F W D and AT P D ON?
Does the HDS indicate F AILED? YES−Go to step 12.
YES−Go to step 5. NO−Go to step 17.
NO−Intermittent failure, the system is OK at this 12. Shift to the 2 position, and verify the ATF FWD and
time. Check for poor connections or loose terminals ATP 2 inputs with the HDS in the A/T data list.
at the transmission range switch and the PCM. If
the HDS indicates NOT COMPLETED, return to step Is AT P F W D and AT P 2 ON?
3 and recheck.
NO−Go to step 17.
6. Inspect the transmission range switch (see page
14-329). 13. Shift to the 1 position, and verify the ATF FWD and
ATP 1 inputs with the HDS in the A/T data list.
Is the switch OK ?
Is AT P F W D and AT P 1 ON?
YES−Go to step 7.
(see page 14-331), then go to step 31. NO−Go to step 17.
14-96
ＳＷＡ７Ｅ１ＰＫ７７１０００９０７０６ＦＡＡＴ２０
06/09/15 17:34:42 62SWA00A_140_0099
14. Clear the DTC with the HDS. 17. Turn the ignition switch OFF.
15. Start the engine, and turn the VSA off for model 18. Disconnect the transmission range switch
equipped with VSA (the light on the VSA OFF connector.
switch comes on). Run the engine in the D position
until the vehicle speed reaches 50 km/h (31 mph), 19. Check for continuity between transmission range
then slow down and stop the wheels. switch connector terminal No. 10 and body ground.
＊０１
16. Monitor the OBD STATUS for P0706 in the DTCs/ TRANSMISSION RANGE SWITCH CONNECTOR
Does the HDS indicate F AILED?

GND (BLK)
at the transmission range switch and the PCM. If
the HDS indicates NOT COMPLETED, return to step
15 and recheck. Wire side of female terminals
NO−Repair open in the wire between the

transmission range switch and ground (G101), or
repair poor ground (G101), then go to step 31.
(cont’d)
14-97
06/09/15 17:34:42 62SWA00A_140_0100

20. Turn the ignition switch ON (II). 23. Measure voltage between transmission range
switch connector terminals No. 3 and No. 10.
21. Measure voltage between transmission range ＊０４
switch connector terminals No. 5 and No. 10. TRANSMISSION RANGE SWITCH CONNECTOR
＊０２
ATP 2 (BLU)
ATP FWD (YEL/RED)
GND (BLK)
GND (BLK)

Is there voltage?
Is there voltage? YES−Go to step 24.
YES−Go to step 22. NO−Repair open in the wire between the

transmission range switch and PCM connector
NO−Repair open in the wire between the terminal B16, then go to step 31.
terminal B28, then go to step 31. 24. Measure voltage between transmission range
22. Measure voltage between transmission range ＊０５
＊０３
ATP 1 (BRN) GND (BLK)
ATP D (PNK) GND (BLK)

Is there voltage?
Is there voltage? YES−Go to step 25.
YES−Go to step 23. NO−Repair open in the wire between the

NO−Repair open in the wire between the terminal B15, then go to step 31.
terminal B21, then go to step 31.
14-98
06/09/15 17:34:42 62SWA00A_140_0101
good PCM (see page 14-10). 32. Turn the ignition switch OFF.
26. Turn the ignition switch OFF. 33. 4WD model: Raise the vehicle on a lift, make sure it
is securely supported, and allow all four wheels to
27. 4WD model: Raise the vehicle on a lift, make sure it rotate freely.
is securely supported, and allow all four wheels to 2WD model: Raise the front of the vehicle, make
rotate freely. sure it is securely supported, and allow the front
2WD model: Raise the front of the vehicle, make wheels to rotate freely. Or raise the vehicle.
wheels to rotate freely. Or raise the vehicle. 34. Start the engine, and turn the VSA off for model
equipped with VSA (the light on the VSA OFF
28. Start the engine, and turn the VSA off for model switch comes on). Run the engine in the D position
equipped with VSA (the light on the VSA OFF until the vehicle speed reaches 50 km/h (31 mph),
switch comes on). Run the engine in the D position then slow down and stop the wheels.
until the vehicle speed reaches 50 km/h (31 mph),
then slow down and stop the wheels. 35. Check for DTC(s) in the DTCs/Freeze Data in A/T
Is DT C P07 06 indicated? YES−Check for poor connections and loose

YES−Check for poor connections and loose PCM, then go to step 1.
PCM. If the PCM was updated, substitute a known- NO−If DTC P0706 is not indicated, or if any other
good PCM (see page 14-10), then recheck. If the DTCs are indicated, go to step 36.
NO−If DTC P0706 is not indicated, or if any other Freeze Data in A/T Mode Menu for a pass/fail.
Freeze Data in A/T Mode Menu for a pass/fail. YES−Troubleshooting is complete. If any other
Does the HDS indicate PASSED? DTC’s troubleshooting.
YES−If the PCM was updated, troubleshooting is NO−If the HDS indicates FAILED, check for poor
complete. If the PCM was substituted, replace the connections and loose terminals at the
original PCM; R20A1 and R20A2 engine models transmission range switch and the PCM, then go to
(see page 11-226), K24Z1 engine model (see page step 1. If the HDS indicates NOT COMPLETED,
11-613). If any other DTCs were indicated on step return to step 34 and recheck.

14-99
06/09/15 17:34:43 62SWA00A_140_0102

DTC P0711: Problem in ATF Temperature 4. Check the ATF TEMP SENSOR with the HDS.
Sensor Circuit
Does the AT F temperature read about the same as
NOTE: the ECT SENSOR?
any on-board snapshot, and review General YES−Intermittent failure, the system is OK at this
Troubleshooting Information (see page 14-5). time. Check for poor connections or loose terminals
• This code is caused by an electrical circuit problem at the ATF temperature sensor and the PCM.
transmission. NO−Replace the ATF temperature sensor
1. Check the ATF temperature with the HDS in the A/T
data list. 5. Clear the DTC with the HDS.
Does the AT F temperature exceed the ambient-air 6. Test-drive the vehicle for several minutes in the D
temperature? position through all five gears.
YES−Record the ATF temperature. Leave the 7. Check for DTC(s) in the DTCs/Freeze Data in A/T
engine off for more than 30 minutes, and go to step Mode Menu with the HDS.
2.
Is DT C P07 11 indicated?
NO−Record the ATF temperature. Test the stall
speed RPM (see page 14-225) three times. Go to YES−Check for poor connections and loose
step 2 after stall speed testing. terminals at the ATF temperature sensor and the
PCM, then go to step 1.
2. Check the ATF temperature with the HDS.
Does the AT F temperature change? DTCs are indicated, go to step 8.
YES−Leave the engine off for more than 8. Monitor the OBD STATUS for P0711 in the DTCs/
30 minutes, and go to step 3. Freeze Data in A/T Mode Menu for a pass/fail.
NO−Replace the ATF temperature sensor Does the HDS indicate PASSED?
YES−Troubleshooting is complete. If any other
3. Check the ECT SENSOR with the HDS. DTCs were indicated on step 7, go to the indicated
DTC’s troubleshooting.
Is the ECT SENSOR equal to the ambient-air
temperature? NO−If the HDS indicates FAILED, check for poor
connections and loose terminals at the ATF
YES−Go to step 4. temperature sensor and the PCM, then go to step 1.
If the HDS indicates NOT COMPLETED, return to
NO−Leave the engine off until the ECT SENSOR step 6 and recheck.
reads the same as ambient-air temperature, then
go to step 4.
14-100
ＳＷＡ７Ｅ１ＰＫ７７１０００９０７１１ＦＡＡＴ２０
06/09/15 17:34:43 62SWA00A_140_0103
DTC P0712: Short in ATF Temperature Sensor 7. Check for continuity between shift solenoid
Circuit harness connector terminal No. 6 and body ground.
＊０１
NOTE: SHIFT SOLENOID HARNESS CONNECTOR
transmission. ATFT (RED/YEL)
1. Check the ATF temperature sensor voltage with the ATFT (BRN/RED)
(R20A1 and R20A2
HDS in the A/T data list. engine models)
Is the AT F T EMP SENSOR voltage 0.07 V or Wire side of female terminals

less?
YES−Go to step 2. Is there continuity?
NO−Intermittent failure, the system is OK at this YES−Repair short in the wire between PCM
time. Check for an intermittent short in the ATFT connector terminal B27 and shift solenoid harness
wire between the ATF temperature sensor and the connector terminal No. 6, then go to step 13.
PCM.
NO−Go to step 8.
2. Disconnect the shift solenoid harness connector at
the shift solenoid valve cover. 8. Check for continuity between shift solenoid
harness connector terminal No. 6 and body ground.
3. Check the ATF TEMP SENSOR voltage with the ＊０２
HDS. SHIFT SOLENOID HARNESS CONNECTOR
Is the AT F T EMP SENSOR voltage 0.07 V or

less?
YES−Go to step 4.
ATFT (WHT)
NO−Replace the ATF temperature sensor

Terminal side of male terminals
6. Disconnect PCM connector B (44P). Is there continuity?
YES−Replace the ATF temperature sensor-shift

solenoid harness and connector (see page 14-248),
then go to step 13.
NO−Go to step 9.
(cont’d)
14-101
ＳＷＡ７Ｅ１ＰＫ７７１０００９０７１２ＦＡＡＴ２０
06/09/15 17:34:43 62SWA00A_140_0104

good PCM (see page 14-10). 14. Test-drive the vehicle for several minutes in the D
position through all five gears.
10. Test-drive the vehicle for several minutes in the D
position through all five gears. 15. Check for DTC(s) in the DTCs/Freeze Data in A/T

terminals at the ATF temperature sensor and the
YES−If the PCM was updated, substitute a known- PCM, then go to step 1.
good PCM (see page 14-10), then recheck. If the
PCM was substituted, go to step 1. NO−If DTC P0712 is not indicated, or if any other
DTCs are indicated, go to step 12. 16. Monitor the OBD STATUS for P0712 in the DTCs/
Freeze Data in A/T Mode Menu for a pass/fail. Does the HDS indicate PASSED?
Does the HDS indicate PASSED? YES−Troubleshooting is complete. If any other

YES−If the PCM was updated, troubleshooting is DTC’s troubleshooting.
original PCM; R20A1 and R20A2 engine models NO−If the HDS indicates FAILED, go to step 1. If
(see page 11-226), K24Z1 engine model (see page the HDS indicates NOT COMPLETED, return to step
11-613). If any other DTCs were indicated on step 14 and recheck.

connections and loose terminals at the ATF
temperature sensor and the PCM. If the PCM was
updated, substitute a known-good PCM (see page
14-10), then recheck. If the PCM was substituted, go
to step 1. If the HDS indicates NOT COMPLETED,
keep idling until a result comes on.
14-102
06/09/15 17:34:43 62SWA00A_140_0105
DTC P0713: Open in ATF Temperature Sensor 6. Measure voltage between shift solenoid harness
Circuit connector terminals No. 6 and No. 7.
＊０２
NOTE: SHIFT SOLENOID HARNESS CONNECTOR
transmission. ATFT (RED/YEL) SG2 (GRN/BLK)
(K24Z1 engine model) (K24Z1 engine model)
1. Check the ATF TEMP SENSOR voltage with the ATFT (BRN/RED) SG2 (GRN/YEL)
(R20A1 and R20A2 (R20A1 and R20A2
HDS in the A/T data list. engine models) engine models)
Does the AT F T EMP SENSOR voltage exceed Wire side of female terminals
4.93 V ?
YES−Go to step 2. Is there about 5 V ?
NO−Intermittent failure, the system is OK at this YES−Replace the ATF temperature sensor-shift
time. Check for poor connections or loose terminals solenoid harness and connector (see page 14-248),
at the ATF temperature sensor and the PCM. then go to step 16.
2. Turn the ignition switch OFF. NO−Repair open in SG2 wire between PCM
connector terminal B33 and the shift solenoid
3. Disconnect the shift solenoid harness connector at harness connector, then go to step 16.
the shift solenoid valve cover.
5. Measure voltage between shift solenoid harness

connector terminal No. 6 and body ground.
＊０１
SHIFT SOLENOID HARNESS CONNECTOR
ATFT (RED/YEL)
ATFT (BRN/RED)
(R20A1 and R20A2
engine models)
Is there about 5 V ?
YES−Go to step 6.
NO−Go to step 7.
(cont’d)
14-103
ＳＷＡ７Ｅ１ＰＫ７７１０００９０７１３ＦＡＡＴ２０
06/09/15 17:34:44 62SWA00A_140_0106

7. Turn the ignition switch OFF. 11. Connect the shift solenoid harness connector.
8. Jump the SCS line with the HDS. 12. Update the PCM if it does not have the latest
9. Disconnect PCM connector B (44P). good PCM (see page 14-10).
10. Check for continuity between PCM connector 13. Test-drive the vehicle for several minutes in the D
terminal B27 and shift solenoid harness connector position through all five gears.
terminal No. 6.
＊０３ 14. Check for DTC(s) in the DTCs/Freeze Data in A/T
SHIFT SOLENOID PCM CONNECTOR B (44P)
HARNESS CONNECTOR Mode Menu with the HDS.
YES−If the PCM was updated, substitute a known-

ATFT (RED/YEL)
(K24Z1 engine model) NO−If DTC P0713 is not indicated, or if any other
ATFT (RED/YEL) ATFT (BRN/RED)
(R20A1 and R20A2 DTCs are indicated, go to step 15.
ATFT (BRN/RED) engine models)
(R20A1 and R20A2 15. Monitor the OBD STATUS for P0713 in the DTCs/
engine models) Freeze Data in A/T Mode Menu for a pass/fail.
Wire side of Terminal side of
female terminals female terminals Does the HDS indicate PASSED?
Is there continuity? YES−If the PCM was updated, troubleshooting is

YES−Go to step 11. original PCM; R20A1 and R20A2 engine models
NO−Repair open in the wire between PCM 11-613). If any other DTCs were indicated on step
connector terminal B27 and the shift solenoid 14, go to the indicated DTC’s troubleshooting.
harness connector, then go to step 16.
connections and loose terminals at the shift
solenoid harness connector (ATF temperature
sensor) and the PCM. If the PCM was updated,
substitute a known-good PCM (see page 14-10),
then recheck. If the PCM was substituted, go to step
1. If the HDS indicates NOT COMPLETED, keep
idling until a result comes on.
14-104
06/09/15 17:34:44 62SWA00A_140_0107
16. Connect the shift solenoid harness connector.



terminals at the shift solenoid harness connector
(ATF temperature sensor) and the PCM, then go to
step 1.




connections and loose terminals at the shift
solenoid harness connector (ATF temperature
sensor) and the PCM, then go to step 1. If the HDS
indicates NOT COMPLETED, return to step 18 and
recheck.
14-105
06/09/15 17:34:44 62SWA00A_140_0108

DTC P0716: Problem in Input Shaft 6. Turn the ignition switch OFF.
(Mainshaft) Speed Sensor Circuit
NOTE:
• Before you troubleshoot, record all freeze data and 8. Disconnect PCM connector C (44P).
Troubleshooting Information (see page 14-5). 9. Check for continuity between PCM connector
• This code is caused by an electrical circuit problem terminals C40 and body ground, and between C44
and cannot be caused by a mechanical problem in the and body ground.
transmission. ＊０１
2. Check for proper input shaft (mainshaft) speed

sensor installation (see page 14-246).

is securely supported, and allow all four wheels to LG1 (BRN/YEL) LG2 (BRN/YEL)
rotate freely.
2WD model: Raise the front of the vehicle, make
wheels to rotate freely. Or raise the vehicle.
4. Start the engine, and turn the VSA off for model
equipped with VSA (the light on the VSA OFF Is there continuity?
switch comes on). Run the engine in the D position,
and hold the vehicle at speeds over 50 km/h YES−Go to step 10.
(31 mph) for more than 10 seconds. Slow down and
stop the wheel. NO−Repair open in the wires between PCM
connector terminals C40, C44 and ground (G101),
5. Monitor the OBD STATUS for P0716 in the DTCs/ or repair poor ground (G101), then go to step 36.
YES−Go to step 6.

at the input shaft (mainshaft) speed sensor and the
to step 4 and recheck.
14-106
ＳＷＡ７Ｅ１ＰＫ７７１０００９０７１６ＦＡＡＴ２０
06/09/15 17:34:44 62SWA00A_140_0109
10. Connect PCM connector C (44P). 14. Turn the ignition switch OFF.
11. Disconnect the input shaft (mainshaft) speed 15. Disconnect PCM connector B (44P).
sensor connector.
12. Turn the ignition switch ON (II). terminal B18 and input shaft (mainshaft) speed
sensor connector terminal No. 1.
13. Measure voltage between input shaft (mainshaft) ＊０３
PCM CONNECTOR B (44P) INPUT SHAFT
speed sensor connector terminal No. 1 and body (MAINSHAFT)
ground. SPEED SENSOR
＊０２ CONNECTOR
INPUT SHAFT (MAINSHAFT)

SPEED SENSOR CONNECTOR VCC2 (YEL/BLU)
VCC2 (YEL/BLU)
VCC2 (YEL/BLU)
Terminal side of Wire side of

female terminals female terminals
Wire side of female terminals Is there continuity?

NO−Repair open in the wire between PCM
YES−Go to step 18. connector terminal B18 and the input shaft
(mainshaft) speed sensor, then go to step 36.
NO−Go to step 14.
＊０４
VCC2 (YEL/BLU)

connector terminal B18 and the input shaft
NO−Go to step 32.
(cont’d)
14-107
06/09/15 17:34:45 62SWA00A_140_0110

18. Turn the ignition switch OFF. 21. Check for continuity between PCM connector
terminal B33 and input shaft (mainshaft) speed
19. Disconnect PCM connector B (44P). sensor connector terminal No. 3.
＊０６
20. Check for continuity between input shaft (MAINSHAFT)
(mainshaft) speed sensor connector terminal No. 2 SPEED SENSOR
and body ground. CONNECTOR
＊０５
SPEED SENSOR CONNECTOR
SG2 (GRN/BLK)
(K24Z1 engine model) SG2 (GRN/BLK)
SG2 (GRN/YEL) (K24Z1 engine model)
NM (WHT/RED) (R20A1 and R20A2 SG2 (GRN/YEL)
engine models) (R20A1 and R20A2
engine models)


NO−Repair open in the wire between the input
YES−Repair short in the wire between PCM shaft (mainshaft) speed sensor connector and PCM
connector terminal B17 and the input shaft connector terminal B33, then go to step 36.
(mainshaft) speed sensor connector, then go to
step 36. 22. Connect PCM connector B (44P).
NO−Go to step 21. 23. Turn the ignition switch ON (II).
24. Measure voltage between input shaft (mainshaft)

speed sensor connector terminals No. 2 and No. 3.
＊０７
NM (WHT/RED) SG2 (GRN/BLK)

SG2 (GRN/YEL)
(R20A1 and R20A2
engine models)
NO−Go to step 29.
14-108
06/09/15 17:34:45 62SWA00A_140_0111
25. Connect the input shaft (mainshaft) speed sensor 29. Turn the ignition switch OFF.
connector.
27. Start the engine, and turn the VSA off for model terminal B17 and input shaft (mainshaft) speed
equipped with VSA (the light on the VSA OFF sensor connector terminal No. 2.
switch comes on). Run the engine in the D position, ＊０８
and hold the vehicle at speeds over 50 km/h (MAINSHAFT)
(31 mph) for more than 10 seconds. Slow down and SPEED SENSOR
stop the wheel. CONNECTOR
28. Monitor the OBD STATUS for P0716 in the DTCs/ NM (WHT/RED)
Freeze Data in A/T Mode Menu for a pass/fail. NM
(WHT/RED)
YES−Replace the input shaft (mainshaft) speed

sensor (see page 14-246), then go to step 36.
NO−Go to step 32. female terminals female terminals

(cont’d)
14-109
06/09/15 17:34:45 62SWA00A_140_0112

good PCM (see page 14-10). 37. Start the engine, and turn the VSA off for model
33. Start the engine, and turn the VSA off for model switch comes on). Run the engine in the D position,
equipped with VSA (the light on the VSA OFF and hold the vehicle at speeds over 50 km/h
switch comes on). Run the engine in the D position, (31 mph) for more than 10 seconds. Slow down and
and hold the vehicle at speeds over 50 km/h stop the wheel.
stop the wheel. 38. Check for DTC(s) in the DTCs/Freeze Data in A/T

terminals at the input shaft (mainshaft) speed
YES−If the PCM was updated, substitute a known- sensor and the PCM, then go to step 1.

original PCM; R20A1 and R20A2 engine models NO−If the HDS indicates FAILED, check for poor
(see page 11-226), K24Z1 engine model (see page connections and loose terminals at the input shaft
11-613). If any other DTCs were indicated on step (mainshaft) speed sensor and the PCM, then go to
34, go to the indicated DTC’s troubleshooting. step 1. If the HDS indicates NOT COMPLETED,
return to step 37 and recheck.
connections and loose terminals at the input shaft
(mainshaft) speed sensor and the PCM. If the PCM
14-110
06/09/15 17:34:45 62SWA00A_140_0113
DTC P0717: Problem in Input Shaft 6. Turn the ignition switch OFF.
(Mainshaft) Speed Sensor Circuit (No Signal
Input) 7. Jump the SCS line with the HDS.
NOTE: 8. Disconnect PCM connector C (44P).

any on-board snapshot, and review General 9. Check for continuity between PCM connector
Troubleshooting Information (see page 14-5). terminals C40 and body ground, and between C44
• This code is caused by an electrical circuit problem and body ground.
and cannot be caused by a mechanical problem in the ＊０１
transmission.
2. Check for proper input shaft (mainshaft) speed

3. 4WD model: Raise the vehicle on a lift, make sure it LG1 (BRN/YEL) LG2 (BRN/YEL)
rotate freely.
wheels to rotate freely. Or raise the vehicle. Terminal side of female terminals
4. Start the engine, and turn the VSA off for model Is there continuity?
switch comes on). Run the engine in the D position, YES−Go to step 10.
and hold the vehicle at speeds over 50 km/h
(31 mph) for more than 10 seconds. Slow down and NO−Repair open in the wires between PCM
stop the wheel. connector terminals C40, C44 and ground (G101),
or repair poor ground (G101), then go to step 36.
YES−Go to step 6.

at the input shaft (mainshaft) speed sensor and the
(cont’d)
14-111
ＳＷＡ７Ｅ１ＰＫ７７１０００９０７１７ＦＡＡＴ２０
06/09/15 17:34:46 62SWA00A_140_0114

sensor connector.
12. Turn the ignition switch ON (II). terminal B18 and input shaft (mainshaft) speed
speed sensor connector terminal No. 1 and body (MAINSHAFT)
ground. SPEED SENSOR
＊０２ CONNECTOR

SPEED SENSOR CONNECTOR VCC2 (YEL/BLU)
VCC2
(YEL/BLU)
VCC2 (YEL/BLU)


YES−Go to step 18. connector terminal B18 and the input shaft
NO−Go to step 14.
＊０４
VCC2 (YEL/BLU)

NO−Go to step 32.
14-112
06/09/15 17:34:46 62SWA00A_140_0115
terminal B33 and input shaft (mainshaft) speed
19. Disconnect PCM connector B (44P). sensor connector terminal No. 3.
＊０６
20. Check for continuity between input shaft (MAINSHAFT)
(mainshaft) speed sensor connector terminal No. 2 SPEED SENSOR
and body ground. CONNECTOR
＊０５
SG2 (GRN/BLK)
(K24Z1 engine model) SG2 (GRN/BLK)
SG2 (GRN/YEL) (K24Z1 engine model)
NM (WHT/RED) (R20A1 and R20A2 SG2 (GRN/YEL)
engine models)

NO−Repair open in the wire between the input
YES−Repair short in the wire between PCM shaft (mainshaft) speed sensor connector and PCM
connector terminal B17 and the input shaft connector terminal B33, then go to step 36.
step 36. 22. Connect PCM connector B (44P).
NO−Go to step 21. 23. Turn the ignition switch ON (II).
24. Measure voltage between input shaft (mainshaft)

speed sensor connector terminals No. 2 and No. 3.
＊０７
NM (WHT/RED) SG2 (GRN/BLK)

SG2 (GRN/YEL)
(R20A1 and R20A2
engine models)
NO−Go to step 29.
(cont’d)
14-113
06/09/15 17:34:46 62SWA00A_140_0116

25. Connect the input shaft (mainshaft) speed sensor 29. Turn the ignition switch OFF.
connector.
27. Start the engine, and turn the VSA off for model terminal B17 and input shaft (mainshaft) speed
switch comes on). Run the engine in the D position, ＊０８
and hold the vehicle at speeds over 50 km/h (MAINSHAFT)
(31 mph) for more than 10 seconds. Slow down and SPEED SENSOR
stop the wheel. CONNECTOR
28. Monitor the OBD STATUS for P0717 in the DTCs/ NM (WHT/RED)
Freeze Data in A/T Mode Menu for a pass/fail. NM
(WHT/RED)
YES−Replace the input shaft (mainshaft) speed

NO−Go to step 32. female terminals female terminals

14-114
06/09/15 17:34:46 62SWA00A_140_0117
33. Start the engine, and turn the VSA off for model switch comes on). Run the engine in the D position,
equipped with VSA (the light on the VSA OFF and hold the vehicle at speeds over 50 km/h
switch comes on). Run the engine in the D position, (31 mph) for more than 10 seconds. Slow down and
and hold the vehicle at speeds over 50 km/h stop the wheel.
stop the wheel. 38. Check for DTC(s) in the DTCs/Freeze Data in A/T


14-115
06/09/15 17:34:47 62SWA00A_140_0118

DTC P0718: Input Shaft (Mainshaft) Speed 6. Connect the input shaft (mainshaft) speed sensor
Sensor Intermittent Failure connector.
NOTE: 7. Test-drive the vehicle for several minutes in the D

• Before you troubleshoot, record all freeze data and position through all five gears.
Troubleshooting Information (see page 14-5). 8. Monitor the OBD STATUS for P0718 in the DTCs/
• This code is caused by an electrical circuit problem Freeze Data in A/T Mode Menu for a pass/fail.
transmission. Does the HDS indicate F AILED?
1. Clear the DTC with the HDS. YES−Go to step 9.
2. Test-drive the vehicle for several minutes in the D NO−Troubleshooting is complete. If the HDS
position through all five gears. indicates NOT COMPLETED, return to step 7 and
recheck.
Freeze Data in A/T Mode Menu for a pass/fail. 9. Turn the ignition switch OFF.
Does the HDS indicate F AILED? 10. Jump the SCS line with the HDS.
YES−Go to step 4. 11. Disconnect PCM connector C (44P).
NO−Intermittent failure, the system is OK at this 12. Check for continuity between PCM connector
time. Check for poor connections or loose terminals terminals C40 and body ground, and between C44
at the input shaft (mainshaft) speed sensor and the and body ground.
PCM. If the HDS indicates NOT COMPLETED, return ＊０１
5. Disconnect the input shaft (mainshaft) speed

sensor connector, and inspect the connector and
connector terminals to be sure they are making
good contact. LG1 (BRN/YEL) LG2 (BRN/YEL)
Are the connector terminals OK ?
YES−Go to step 6.
NO−Repair the connector terminals, then go to
step 6. Is there continuity?
NO−Repair open in the wires between PCM

14-116
ＳＷＡ７Ｅ１ＰＫ７７１０００９０７１８ＦＡＡＴ２０
06/09/15 17:34:47 62SWA00A_140_0119
sensor connector.
19. Check for continuity between input shaft
15. Turn the ignition switch ON (II). (mainshaft) speed sensor connector terminal No. 2
and body ground.
speed sensor connector terminal No. 1 and body INPUT SHAFT (MAINSHAFT)
ground. SPEED SENSOR CONNECTOR
＊０２
NM (WHT/RED)
VCC2 (YEL/BLU)

Is there about 5 V ? connector terminal B17 and the input shaft
YES−Go to step 17. step 34.
20. Connect PCM connector B (44P).
(cont’d)
14-117
06/09/15 17:34:48 62SWA00A_140_0120

22. Measure voltage between input shaft (mainshaft) 26. Turn the ignition switch OFF.
speed sensor connector terminal No. 2 and body
ground. 27. Disconnect PCM connector B (44P).
＊０４
INPUT SHAFT (MAINSHAFT) 28. Check for continuity between PCM connector
SPEED SENSOR CONNECTOR terminal B18 and input shaft (mainshaft) speed
＊０６
(MAINSHAFT)
SPEED SENSOR
NM (WHT/RED) CONNECTOR
VCC2 (YEL/BLU)
VCC2 (YEL/BLU)
YES−Replace the input shaft (mainshaft) speed female terminals female terminals
NO−Go to step 23.
24. Disconnect PCM connector B (44P). connector terminal B18 and the input shaft
terminal B17 and input shaft (mainshaft) speed 29. Check for continuity between PCM connector
sensor connector terminal No. 2. terminal B18 and body ground.
＊０５＊０７
PCM CONNECTOR B (44P) INPUT SHAFT PCM CONNECTOR B (44P)
(MAINSHAFT)
SPEED SENSOR VCC2 (YEL/BLU)
CONNECTOR
NM (WHT/RED)
NM
(WHT/RED)

female terminals female terminals Terminal side of female terminals
YES−Go to step 30. YES−Repair short in the wire between PCM

NO−Repair open in the wire between PCM (mainshaft) speed sensor, then go to step 34.
(mainshaft) speed sensor, then go to step 34. NO−Go to step 30.
14-118
06/09/15 17:35:45 62SWA00A_140_0121


14-119
06/09/15 17:35:46 62SWA00A_140_0122

DTC P0721: Problem in Output Shaft 6. Turn the ignition switch OFF.
(Countershaft) Speed Sensor Circuit
NOTE:
• Before you troubleshoot, record all freeze data and 8. Disconnect PCM connector C (44P).
Troubleshooting Information (see page 14-5). 9. Check for continuity between PCM connector
• This code is caused by an electrical circuit problem terminals C40 and body ground, and between C44
and cannot be caused by a mechanical problem in the and body ground.
transmission. ＊０１
2. Check for proper output shaft (countershaft) speed


is securely supported, and allow all four wheels to LG1 (BRN/YEL) LG2 (BRN/YEL)
rotate freely.
4. Start the engine, and turn the VSA off for model
equipped with VSA (the light on the VSA OFF Is there continuity?
switch comes on). Run the vehicle in the D position
with engine speed 2,000 rpm (min−1) or higher for YES−Go to step 10.
more than 10 seconds. Slow down and stop the
wheel. NO−Repair open in the wires between PCM
5. Monitor the OBD STATUS for P0721 in the DTCs/ or repair poor ground (G101), then go to step 36.
YES−Go to step 6.

at the output shaft (countershaft) speed sensor and
the PCM. If the HDS indicates NOT COMPLETED,
14-120
ＳＷＡ７Ｅ１ＰＫ７７１０００９０７２１ＦＡＡＴ２０
06/09/15 17:35:46 62SWA00A_140_0123
11. Disconnect the output shaft (countershaft) speed 15. Disconnect PCM connector C (44P).
sensor connector.
12. Turn the ignition switch ON (II). terminal C13 and output shaft (countershaft) speed
13. Measure voltage between output shaft ＊０３
OUTPUT SHAFT PCM CONNECTOR C (44P)
(countershaft) speed sensor connector terminal (COUNTERSHAFT)
No. 1 and body ground. SPEED SENSOR
＊０２ CONNECTOR
OUTPUT SHAFT (COUNTERSHAFT)

SPEED SENSOR CONNECTOR VCC1 (YEL/RED)
VCC1 (YEL/RED)
VCC1 (YEL/RED)


YES−Go to step 18. connector terminal C13 and the output shaft
(countershaft) speed sensor, then go to step 36.
NO−Go to step 14.
terminal C13 and body ground.
＊０４
VCC1 (YEL/RED)

connector terminal C13 and the output shaft
NO−Go to step 32.
(cont’d)
14-121
06/09/15 17:35:46 62SWA00A_140_0124

terminal C14 and output shaft (countershaft) speed
19. Disconnect PCM connector C (44P). sensor connector terminal No. 3.
＊０６
20. Check for continuity between output shaft (COUNTERSHAFT)
(countershaft) speed sensor connector terminal SPEED SENSOR
No. 2 and body ground. CONNECTOR
＊０５ SG1
OUTPUT SHAFT (COUNTERSHAFT) (GRN/WHT)
SG1 (GRN/WHT)
NC (BLK/WHT)
NC (BLK/BLU) Wire side of Terminal side of
(R20A1 and R20A2 female terminals female terminals
engine models)
Is there continuity? NO−Repair open in the wire between the output

shaft (countershaft) speed sensor connector and
YES−Repair short in the wire between PCM PCM connector terminal C14, then go to step 36.
(countershaft) speed sensor connector, then go to 22. Connect PCM connector C (44P).
step 36.
NO−Go to step 21.
24. Measure voltage between output shaft
(countershaft) speed sensor connector terminals
No. 2 and No. 3.
＊０７
NC (BLK/WHT) SG1 (GRN/WHT)

NC (BLK/BLU)
(R20A1 and R20A2
engine models)
NO−Go to step 29.
14-122
06/09/15 17:35:47 62SWA00A_140_0125
25. Connect the output shaft (countershaft) speed 29. Turn the ignition switch OFF.
sensor connector.
30. Disconnect PCM connector C (44P).
27. Start the engine, and turn the VSA off for model terminal C43 and output shaft (countershaft) speed
switch comes on). Run the vehicle in the D position ＊０８
PCM CONNECTOR C (44P) OUTPUT SHAFT
with engine speed 2,000 rpm (min−1) or higher for (COUNTERSHAFT)
more than 10 seconds. Slow down and stop the SPEED SENSOR
wheel. CONNECTOR


NC (BLK/WHT)
(K24Z1 engine model) NC (BLK/WHT)
YES−Replace the output shaft (countershaft) NC (BLK/BLU) (K24Z1 engine model)
speed sensor (see page 14-246), then go to step 36. (R20A1 and R20A2 NC (BLK/BLU)
engine models)
NO−Go to step 32.

(cont’d)
14-123
06/09/15 17:35:47 62SWA00A_140_0126

33. Start the engine, and turn the VSA off for model switch comes on). Run the vehicle in the D position
equipped with VSA (the light on the VSA OFF with engine speed 2,000 rpm (min−1) or higher for
switch comes on). Run the vehicle in the D position more than 10 seconds. Slow down and stop the
with engine speed 2,000 rpm (min−1) or higher for wheel.
wheel. 38. Check for DTC(s) in the DTCs/Freeze Data in A/T

terminals at the output shaft (countershaft) speed

(see page 11-226), K24Z1 engine model (see page connections and loose terminals at the output shaft
11-613). If any other DTCs were indicated on step (countershaft) speed sensor and the PCM, then go
34, go to the indicated DTC’s troubleshooting. to step 1. If the HDS indicates NOT COMPLETED,
connections and loose terminals at the output shaft
(countershaft) speed sensor and the PCM. If the
14-124
06/09/15 17:35:47 62SWA00A_140_0127
DTC P0722: Problem in Output Shaft 6. Turn the ignition switch OFF.
(Countershaft) Speed Sensor Circuit (No
Signal Input) 7. Jump the SCS line with the HDS.
NOTE: 8. Disconnect PCM connector C (44P).

any on-board snapshot, and review General 9. Check for continuity between PCM connector
Troubleshooting Information (see page 14-5). terminals C40 and body ground, and between C44
• This code is caused by an electrical circuit problem and body ground.
transmission.
2. Check for proper output shaft (countershaft) speed

3. 4WD model: Raise the vehicle on a lift, make sure it LG1 (BRN/YEL) LG2 (BRN/YEL)
rotate freely.
wheels to rotate freely. Or raise the vehicle. Terminal side of female terminals
4. Start the engine, and turn the VSA off for model Is there continuity?
switch comes on). Run the vehicle in the D position YES−Go to step 10.
with engine speed 2,000 rpm (min−1) or higher for
more than 10 seconds. Slow down and stop the NO−Repair open in the wires between PCM
wheel. connector terminals C40, C44 and ground (G101),
YES−Go to step 6.

at the output shaft (countershaft) speed sensor and
the PCM. If the HDS indicates NOT COMPLETED,
(cont’d)
14-125
ＳＷＡ７Ｅ１ＰＫ７７１０００９０７２２ＦＡＡＴ２０
06/09/15 17:35:47 62SWA00A_140_0128

sensor connector.
12. Turn the ignition switch ON (II). terminal C13 and output shaft (countershaft) speed
(countershaft) speed sensor connector terminal (COUNTERSHAFT)
No. 1 and body ground. SPEED SENSOR
＊０２ CONNECTOR

SPEED SENSOR CONNECTOR VCC1 (YEL/RED)
VCC1 (YEL/RED)
VCC1 (YEL/RED)


NO−Go to step 14.
terminal C13 and body ground.
＊０４
VCC1 (YEL/RED)

NO−Go to step 32.
14-126
06/09/15 17:35:48 62SWA00A_140_0129
terminal C14 and output shaft (countershaft) speed
19. Disconnect PCM connector C (44P). sensor connector terminal No. 3.
＊０６
20. Check for continuity between output shaft (COUNTERSHAFT)
(countershaft) speed sensor connector terminal SPEED SENSOR
No. 2 and body ground. CONNECTOR
＊０５ SG1
OUTPUT SHAFT (COUNTERSHAFT) (GRN/WHT)
SG1 (GRN/WHT)
NC (BLK/WHT)
NC (BLK/BLU) Wire side of Terminal side of
(R20A1 and R20A2 female terminals female terminals
engine models)
Is there continuity? NO−Repair open in the wire between the output

shaft (countershaft) speed sensor connector and
YES−Repair short in the wire between PCM PCM connector terminal C14, then go to step 36.
(countershaft) speed sensor connector, then go to 22. Connect PCM connector C (44P).
step 36.
NO−Go to step 21.
24. Measure voltage between output shaft
(countershaft) speed sensor connector terminals
No. 2 and No. 3.
＊０７
NC (BLK/WHT) SG1 (GRN/WHT)

NC (BLK/BLU)
(R20A1 and R20A2
engine models)
NO−Go to step 29.
(cont’d)
14-127
06/09/15 17:35:48 62SWA00A_140_0130

25. Connect the output shaft (countershaft) speed 29. Turn the ignition switch OFF.
sensor connector.
30. Disconnect PCM connector C (44P).
27. Start the engine, and turn the VSA off for model terminal C43 and output shaft (countershaft) speed
switch comes on). Run the vehicle in the D position ＊０８
PCM CONNECTOR C (44P) OUTPUT SHAFT
with engine speed 2,000 rpm (min−1) or higher for (COUNTERSHAFT)
more than 10 seconds. Slow down and stop the SPEED SENSOR
wheel. CONNECTOR


NC (BLK/WHT)
YES−Replace the output shaft (countershaft) NC (BLK/BLU) (K24Z1 engine model)
speed sensor (see page 14-246), then go to step 36. (R20A1 and R20A2 NC (BLK/BLU)
engine models)
NO−Go to step 32.

14-128
06/09/15 17:35:48 62SWA00A_140_0131
33. Start the engine, and turn the VSA off for model switch comes on). Run the vehicle in the D position
equipped with VSA (the light on the VSA OFF with engine speed 2,000 rpm (min−1) or higher for
switch comes on). Run the vehicle in the D position more than 10 seconds. Slow down and stop the
with engine speed 2,000 rpm (min−1) or higher for wheel.
wheel. 38. Check for DTC(s) in the DTCs/Freeze Data in A/T


14-129
06/09/15 17:35:49 62SWA00A_140_0132

DTC P0723: Output Shaft (Countershaft) 6. Connect the output shaft (countershaft) speed
Speed Sensor Intermittent Failure sensor connector.
NOTE: 7. Test-drive the vehicle for several minutes in the D

• Before you troubleshoot, record all freeze data and position through all five gears.
Troubleshooting Information (see page 14-5). 8. Monitor the OBD STATUS for P0723 in the DTCs/
• This code is caused by an electrical circuit problem Freeze Data in A/T Mode Menu for a pass/fail.
transmission. Does the HDS indicate F AILED?
1. Clear the DTC with the HDS. YES−Go to step 9.
2. Test-drive the vehicle for several minutes in the D NO−Troubleshooting is complete. If the HDS
position through all five gears. indicates NOT COMPLETED, return to step 7 and
recheck.
Freeze Data in A/T Mode Menu for a pass/fail. 9. Turn the ignition switch OFF.
Does the HDS indicate F AILED? 10. Jump the SCS line with the HDS.
YES−Go to step 4. 11. Disconnect PCM connector C (44P).
NO−Intermittent failure, the system is OK at this 12. Check for continuity between PCM connector
time. Check for poor connections and loose terminals C40 and body ground, and between C44
terminals at the output shaft (countershaft) speed and body ground.
sensor and the PCM. If the HDS indicates NOT ＊０１
COMPLETED, return to step 2 and recheck.
5. Disconnect the output shaft (countershaft) speed

sensor connector, and inspect the connector and
connector terminals to be sure they are making
good contact. LG1 (BRN/YEL) LG2 (BRN/YEL)
Are the connector terminals OK ?
YES−Go to step 6.
NO−Repair the connector terminals, then go to
step 6. Is there continuity?
NO−Repair open in the wires between PCM

14-130
ＳＷＡ７Ｅ１ＰＫ７７１０００９０７２３ＦＡＡＴ２０
06/09/15 17:35:49 62SWA00A_140_0133
sensor connector.
19. Check for continuity between output shaft
15. Turn the ignition switch ON (II). (countershaft) speed sensor connector terminal
No. 2 and body ground.
(countershaft) speed sensor connector terminal OUTPUT SHAFT (COUNTERSHAFT)
No. 1 and body ground. SPEED SENSOR CONNECTOR
＊０２
NC (BLK/WHT)
NC (BLK/BLU)
(R20A1 and R20A2
VCC1 (YEL/RED) engine models)

Is there about 5 V ? connector terminal C43 and the output shaft
(countershaft) speed sensor connector, then go to
YES−Go to step 17. step 34.
20. Connect PCM connector C (44P).
(cont’d)
14-131
06/09/15 17:35:49 62SWA00A_140_0134

22. Measure voltage between output shaft 26. Turn the ignition switch OFF.
(countershaft) speed sensor connector terminal
No. 2 and body ground. 27. Disconnect PCM connector C (44P).
＊０４
OUTPUT SHAFT (COUNTERSHAFT) 28. Check for continuity between PCM connector
SPEED SENSOR CONNECTOR terminal C13 and output shaft (countershaft) speed
＊０６
(COUNTERSHAFT)
SPEED SENSOR
NC (BLK/WHT) CONNECTOR
NC (BLK/BLU)
(R20A1 and R20A2
engine models) VCC1 (YEL/RED)
VCC1 (YEL/RED)
YES−Replace the output shaft (countershaft) female terminals female terminals
speed sensor (see page 14-246), then go to step 34.
NO−Go to step 23.
24. Disconnect PCM connector C (44P). connector terminal C13 and the output shaft
terminal C43 and output shaft (countershaft) speed 29. Check for continuity between PCM connector
sensor connector terminal No. 2. terminal C13 and body ground.
＊０５＊０７
PCM CONNECTOR C (44P) OUTPUT SHAFT PCM CONNECTOR C (44P)
(COUNTERSHAFT)
SPEED SENSOR VCC1 (YEL/RED)
CONNECTOR
NC (BLK/WHT)
NC (BLK/BLU) (K24Z1 engine model)
(R20A1 and R20A2 NC (BLK/BLU)
engine models)
connector terminal C43 and the output shaft NO−Go to step 30.
14-132
06/09/15 17:35:50 62SWA00A_140_0135


14-133
06/09/15 17:35:50 62SWA00A_140_0136

DTC P0747: A/T Clutch Pressure Control 9. Choose Clutch Pressure Control (Linear) Solenoid A
Solenoid Valve A Stuck ON in the Miscellaneous Test Menu, and test A/T clutch
pressure control solenoid valve A with the HDS.
NOTE: Before you troubleshoot, record all freeze data
and any on-board snapshot, and review General Does the HDS indicate NORMAL?
YES−Intermittent failure, the system is OK at this
1. Warm up the engine to normal operating time.
temperature (the radiator fan comes on).
NO−Follow the instructions indicated on the HDS
2. Make sure that the transmission is filled to the by the test result, but if the HDS has not determined
proper level, and check for fluid leaks. the cause of the failure, go to step 10. If any part is
replaced, go to step 11.
3. Drain the ATF (see step 3 on page 14-252) through a
strainer. Inspect the strainer for metal debris or 10. Inspect A/T clutch pressure control solenoid
excessive clutch material. valve A (see page 14-238).
Does the strainer have metal debris or excessive Does A/ T clutch pressure control solenoid valve A
clutch material? work properly?
YES−Replace the transmission, then go to step 11. YES−Repair the hydraulic system related with shift
valve A, or replace the transmission, then go to
NO−Replace the ATF (see step 5 on page 14-252), step 11.
then go to step 4.
NO−Replace A/T clutch pressure control solenoid
4. Clear the DTC with the HDS. valve A (see page 14-240), then go to step 11.
5. Test-drive the vehicle in the D position through all 11. Clear the DTC with the HDS.
five gears at speeds over 20 km/h (12 mph) for
more than 20 seconds, then slow down to a stop. 12. Test-drive the vehicle in the D position through all
6. Test-drive the vehicle again in the D position more than 20 seconds, then slow down to a stop.
through all five gears at speeds over 20 km/h
(12 mph) for more than 20 seconds, then slow 13. Test-drive the vehicle again in the D position
down to a stop. through all five gears at speeds over 20 km/h
(12 mph) for more than 20 seconds, then slow
7. Monitor the OBD STATUS for P0747 in the DTCs/ down to a stop.
Does the HDS indicate F AILED? Freeze Data in A/T Mode Menu for a pass/fail.
YES−Go to step 8. Does the HDS indicate PASSED?
NO−Intermittent failure, the system is OK at this YES−Troubleshooting is complete.

time. If the HDS indicates NOT COMPLETED, return
to step 5 and recheck. NO−If the HDS indicates FAILED, return to step 11
and recheck. If the HDS indicates NOT COMPLETED,
8. Clear the DTC with the HDS. return to step 12 and recheck.
14-134
ＳＷＡ７Ｅ１ＰＫ７７１０００９０７４７ＦＡＡＴ２０
06/09/15 17:35:50 62SWA00A_140_0137
DTC P0752: Shift Solenoid Valve A Stuck ON 9. Choose Shift Solenoid A in the Miscellaneous Test
Menu, and make sure shift solenoid valve A
NOTE: Before you troubleshoot, record all freeze data operates with the HDS.
Troubleshooting Information (see page 14-5). Is a clicking sound heard?
1. Warm up the engine to normal operating YES−Go to step 10.

NO−Replace shift solenoid valve A (see page
2. Make sure that the transmission is filled to the 14-235), then go to step 13.
proper level, and check for fluid leaks.
10. Test-drive the vehicle in the D position through all
3. Drain the ATF (see step 3 on page 14-252) through a five gears at speeds over 20 km/h (12 mph) for
strainer. Inspect the strainer for metal debris or more than 20 seconds, then slow down to a stop.
excessive clutch material.
11. Test-drive the vehicle again in the D position
Does the strainer have metal debris or excessive through all five gears at speeds over 20 km/h
clutch material? (12 mph) for more than 20 seconds, then slow
down to a stop.
YES−Replace the transmission, then go to step 13.
NO−Replace the ATF (see step 5 on page 14-252), Freeze Data in A/T Mode Menu for a pass/fail.
then go to step 4.
YES−Repair shift valve A, or replace the
5. Test-drive the vehicle in the D position through all transmission, then go to step 13.
more than 20 seconds, then slow down to a stop. NO−Intermittent failure, the system is OK at this
6. Test-drive the vehicle again in the D position to step 10 and recheck.
(12 mph) for more than 20 seconds, then slow 13. Clear the DTC with the HDS.
down to a stop.
7. Monitor the OBD STATUS for P0752 in the DTCs/ five gears at speeds over 20 km/h (12 mph) for
Freeze Data in A/T Mode Menu for a pass/fail. more than 20 seconds, then slow down to a stop.
Does the HDS indicate F AILED? 15. Test-drive the vehicle again in the D position
YES−Go to step 8. (12 mph) for more than 20 seconds, then slow
down to a stop.
time. If the HDS indicates NOT COMPLETED, return 16. Monitor the OBD STATUS for P0752 in the DTCs/
to step 5 and recheck. Freeze Data in A/T Mode Menu for a pass/fail.
8. Clear the DTC with the HDS. Does the HDS indicate PASSED?
YES−Troubleshooting is complete.
NO−If the HDS indicates FAILED, return to step 13

14-135
ＳＷＡ７Ｅ１ＰＫ７７１０００９０７５２ＦＡＡＴ２０
06/09/15 17:35:50 62SWA00A_140_0138

DTC P0756: Shift Solenoid Valve B Stuck OFF 9. Choose Shift Solenoid B in the Miscellaneous Test
Menu, and make sure shift solenoid valve B

NO−Replace shift solenoid valve B (see page
down to a stop.
then go to step 4.
YES−Repair shift valve B, or replace the
down to a stop.
down to a stop.

14-136
ＳＷＡ７Ｅ１ＰＫ７７１０００９０７５６ＦＡＡＴ２０
06/09/15 17:35:50 62SWA00A_140_0139
DTC P0757: Shift Solenoid Valve B Stuck ON 9. Choose Shift Solenoid B in the Miscellaneous Test
Menu, and make sure shift solenoid valve B

NO−Replace shift solenoid valve B (see page
down to a stop.
then go to step 4.
YES−Repair shift valve B, or replace the
down to a stop.
down to a stop.

14-137
ＳＷＡ７Ｅ１ＰＫ７７１０００９０７５７ＦＡＡＴ２０
06/09/15 17:35:51 62SWA00A_140_0140

DTC P0761: Shift Solenoid Valve C Stuck OFF 9. Choose Shift Solenoid C in the Miscellaneous Test
Menu, and make sure shift solenoid valve C

NO−Replace shift solenoid valve C (see page
down to a stop.
then go to step 4.
YES−Repair shift valve C, or replace the
down to a stop.
down to a stop.

14-138
ＳＷＡ７Ｅ１ＰＫ７７１０００９０７６１ＦＡＡＴ２０
06/09/15 17:35:51 62SWA00A_140_0141
DTC P0771: Shift Solenoid Valve E Stuck OFF 9. Choose Shift Solenoid E in the Miscellaneous Test
Menu, and make sure shift solenoid valve E

NO−Replace shift solenoid valve E (see page
down to a stop.
then go to step 4.
YES−Repair shift valve E, or replace the
down to a stop.
down to a stop.

14-139
ＳＷＡ７Ｅ１ＰＫ７７１０００９０７７１ＦＡＡＴ２０
06/09/15 17:35:51 62SWA00A_140_0142

DTC P0776: A/T Clutch Pressure Control 8. Clear the DTC with the HDS.
Solenoid Valve B Stuck OFF
9. Choose Clutch Pressure Control (Linear) Solenoid B
NOTE: Before you troubleshoot, record all freeze data in the Miscellaneous Test Menu, and test A/T clutch
and any on-board snapshot, and review General pressure control solenoid valve B with the HDS.
Does the HDS indicate NORMAL?
1. Warm up the engine to normal operating
temperature (the radiator fan comes on). YES−Intermittent failure, the system is OK at this
time.
2. Make sure that the transmission is filled to the
proper level, and check for fluid leaks. NO−Follow the instructions indicated on the HDS
by the test result, but if the HDS has not determined
3. Drain the ATF (see step 3 on page 14-252) through a the cause of the failure, go to step 10. If any part is
strainer. Inspect the strainer for metal debris or replaced, go to step 11.
10. Inspect A/T clutch pressure control solenoid
Does the strainer have metal debris or excessive valve B (see page 14-241).
clutch material?
Does A/ T clutch pressure control solenoid valve B
YES−Replace the transmission, then go to step 11. work properly?
NO−Replace the ATF (see step 5 on page 14-252), YES−Repair the hydraulic system related with shift
then go to step 4. valve B, or replace the transmission, then go to
step 11.
5. Test-drive the vehicle in the D position through all valve B (see page 14-245), then go to step 11.
more than 20 seconds, then slow down to a stop. 11. Clear the DTC with the HDS.
6. Test-drive the vehicle again in the D position 12. Test-drive the vehicle in the D position through all
through all five gears at speeds over 20 km/h five gears at speeds over 20 km/h (12 mph) for
(12 mph) for more than 20 seconds, then slow more than 20 seconds, then slow down to a stop.
down to a stop.
7. Monitor the OBD STATUS for P0776 in the DTCs/ through all five gears at speeds over 20 km/h
Freeze Data in A/T Mode Menu for a pass/fail. (12 mph) for more than 20 seconds, then slow
down to a stop.
YES−Go to step 8. Freeze Data in A/T Mode Menu for a pass/fail.
NO−Intermittent failure, the system is OK at this Does the HDS indicate PASSED?
to step 5 and recheck. YES−Troubleshooting is complete.

14-140
ＳＷＡ７Ｅ１ＰＫ７７１０００９０７７６ＦＡＡＴ２０
06/09/15 17:35:51 62SWA00A_140_0143
Solenoid Valve B Stuck ON
and any on-board snapshot, and review General pressure control solenoid valve B with the HDS.
time.
Does the strainer have metal debris or excessive valve B (see page 14-241).
clutch material?
Does A/ T clutch pressure control solenoid valve B
then go to step 4. valve B, or replace the transmission, then go to
step 11.
5. Test-drive the vehicle in the D position through all valve B (see page 14-245), then go to step 11.
down to a stop.
down to a stop.

14-141
ＳＷＡ７Ｅ１ＰＫ７７１０００９０７７７ＦＡＡＴ２０
06/09/15 17:35:51 62SWA00A_140_0144

DTC P0780: Shift Control System 4. Monitor the OBD STATUS for P0780 in the DTCs/
and any on-board snapshot, and review General Does the HDS indicate PASSED?
YES−If the PCM was updated, troubleshooting is
1. Check for other DTCs indicated simultaneous with complete. If the PCM was substituted, replace the
DTC P0780. original PCM; R20A1 and R20A2 engine models
NOTE: DTC P0780 means there is one or more A/T 11-613). If any other DTCs were indicated on step 3,
DTCs about the shift control system. go to the indicated DTC’s troubleshooting.
Are there other DT Cs? NO−If the HDS indicates FAILED, check for poor
connections and loose terminals at shift solenoid
YES−Troubleshoot indicated DTC(s): valves, A/T clutch pressure control solenoid valves,
• P1730 (see page 14-204) known-good PCM (see page 14-10), then recheck. If
• P1731 (see page 14-206) the PCM was substituted, go to step 1. If the HDS
• P1732 (see page 14-208) indicates NOT COMPLETED, keep idling until a
• P1733 (see page 14-210) result comes on.
• P1734 (see page 14-212)
NO−Go to step 2.




14-142
ＳＷＡ７Ｅ１ＰＫ７７１０００９０７８０ＦＡＡＴ２０
06/09/15 17:35:51 62SWA00A_140_0145
Solenoid Valve C Stuck OFF
9. Choose Clutch Pressure Control (Linear) Solenoid C
and any on-board snapshot, and review General pressure control solenoid valve C with the HDS.
time.
Does the strainer have metal debris or excessive valve C (see page 14-243).
clutch material?
Does A/ T clutch pressure control solenoid valve C
then go to step 4. valve C, or replace the transmission, then go to
step 11.
5. Test-drive the vehicle in the D position through all valve C (see page 14-245), then go to step 11.
down to a stop.
down to a stop.

14-143
ＳＷＡ７Ｅ１ＰＫ７７１０００９０７９６ＦＡＡＴ２０
06/09/15 17:35:52 62SWA00A_140_0146

Solenoid Valve C Stuck ON
and any on-board snapshot, and review General pressure control solenoid valve C with the HDS.
time.
Does the strainer have metal debris or excessive valve C (see page 14-243).
clutch material?
Does A/ T clutch pressure control solenoid valve C
then go to step 4. valve C, or replace the transmission, then go to
step 11.
5. Test-drive the vehicle in the D position through all valve C (see page 14-245), then go to step 11.
down to a stop.
down to a stop.

14-144
ＳＷＡ７Ｅ１ＰＫ７７１０００９０７９７ＦＡＡＴ２０
06/09/15 17:35:52 62SWA00A_140_0147
DTC P0842: Short in 2nd Clutch Transmission 6. Turn the ignition switch OFF.
Fluid Pressure Switch Circuit, or 2nd Clutch
Transmission Fluid Pressure Switch Stuck 7. Disconnect the 2nd clutch transmission fluid
ON pressure switch connector.
NOTE: 8. Turn the ignition switch ON (II).

any on-board snapshot, and review General 9. Check the 2nd PRESSURE SWITCH signal with the
Troubleshooting Information (see page 14-5). HDS in the A/T data list.
and cannot be caused by a mechanical problem in the Is the 2nd PRESSURE SW IT CH OF F ?
transmission.
YES−Replace the 2nd clutch transmission fluid
1. Clear the DTC with the HDS. pressure switch (see page 14-247), then go to step
18.
2. Check the 2nd PRESSURE SWITCH signal with the
HDS in the A/T data list when not in 2nd gear. NO−Go to step 10.
Is the 2nd PRESSURE SW IT CH OF F ? 10. Turn the ignition switch OFF.
YES−Go to step 3. 11. Jump the SCS line with the HDS.
NO−Go to step 6. 12. Disconnect PCM connector B (44P).
3. Start the engine, and warm it up to normal 13. Check for continuity between PCM connector
operating temperature (the radiator fan comes on). terminal B8 and body ground.
＊０１
4. Drive the vehicle in 2nd gear in the 2 position for
more than 5 seconds, then shift to the D position, OP2SW (BLU/RED)
and drive in 3rd gear for more than 5 seconds. (K24Z1 engine model)
OP2SW (BLU/YEL)
Slow down and stop the wheels. (R20A1 and R20A2 engine models)

YES−Go to step 6.

time. Check the OP2SW wire for an intermittent
short to ground between the 2nd clutch
transmission fluid pressure switch and the PCM. If Terminal side of female terminals
the HDS indicates NOT COMPLETED, return to step
4 and recheck. Is there continuity?

connector terminal B8 and the 2nd clutch
transmission fluid pressure switch, then go to step
18.
NO−Go to step 14.
(cont’d)
14-145
ＳＷＡ７Ｅ１ＰＫ７７１０００９０８４２ＦＡＡＴ２０
06/09/15 17:35:52 62SWA00A_140_0148

good PCM (see page 14-10). 19. Drive the vehicle in 2nd gear in the 2 position for
more than 5 seconds, then shift to the D position,
15. Drive the vehicle in 2nd gear in the 2 position for and drive in 3rd gear for more than 5 seconds.
more than 5 seconds, then shift to the D position, Slow down and stop the wheels.
and drive in 3rd gear for more than 5 seconds.
Slow down and stop the wheels. 20. Check for DTC(s) in the DTCs/Freeze Data in A/T
Mode Menu with the HDS. Is DT C P0842 indicated?
Is DT C P0842 indicated? YES−Check for poor connections and loose

terminals at the 2nd clutch transmission fluid
YES−If the PCM was updated, substitute a known- pressure switch and the PCM, then go to step 1.

(see page 11-226), K24Z1 engine model (see page connections and loose terminals at the 2nd clutch
11-613). If any other DTCs were indicated on step transmission fluid pressure switch and the PCM,
16, go to the indicated DTC’s troubleshooting. then go to step 1. If the HDS indicates NOT
connections and loose terminals at the 2nd clutch
transmission fluid pressure switch and the PCM. If
the PCM was updated, substitute a known-good
PCM (see page 14-10), then recheck. If the PCM was
14-146
06/09/15 17:35:52 62SWA00A_140_0149
DTC P0843: Open in 2nd Clutch Transmission 5. Drive the vehicle in 2nd gear in the 2 position for
Fluid Pressure Switch Circuit, or 2nd Clutch more than 5 seconds, then shift to the D position,
Transmission Fluid Pressure Switch Stuck and drive in 3rd gear for more than 5 seconds.
OFF Slow down and stop the wheels.
NOTE: 6. Monitor the OBD STATUS for P0843 in the DTCs/

• Before you troubleshoot, record all freeze data and Freeze Data in A/T Mode Menu for a pass/fail.
Troubleshooting Information (see page 14-5). Does the HDS indicate F AILED?
and cannot be caused by a mechanical problem in the YES−Go to step 7.
transmission.
1. Clear the DTC with the HDS. time. Check for poor connections and loose
2. Start the engine, and warm it up to normal pressure switch and the PCM. If the HDS indicates
operating temperature (the radiator fan comes on). NOT COMPLETED, return to step 5 and recheck.
3. Shift into the 2 position while pressing the brake

pedal, and verify with the HDS in the A/T data list
that the SHIFT COMMAND indicates 2nd.
4. Check the 2nd PRESSURE SWITCH signal with the

HDS in the A/T data list.
Is the 2nd PRESSURE SW IT CH ON?
YES−Go to step 5.
NO−Go to step 7.
(cont’d)
14-147
ＳＷＡ７Ｅ１ＰＫ７７１０００９０８４３ＦＡＡＴ２０
06/09/15 17:35:52 62SWA00A_140_0150

8. Disconnect the 2nd clutch transmission fluid 12. Jump the SCS line with the HDS.
pressure switch connector.
10. Measure voltage between the 2nd clutch terminal B8 and the 2nd clutch transmission fluid
transmission fluid pressure switch connector pressure switch connector terminal.
terminal and body ground. ＊０２
＊０１ 2ND CLUTCH
TRANSMISSION FLUID
2ND CLUTCH TRANSMISSION FLUID PRESSURE
PRESSURE SWITCH CONNECTOR PCM CONNECTOR B (44P) SWITCH CONNECTOR
OP2SW (BLU/RED)
OP2SW (BLU/YEL)
OP2SW (BLU/RED) (R20A1 and R20A2
(K24Z1 engine model) engine models)
OP2SW (BLU/YEL)
OP2SW (BLU/RED) (R20A1 and R20A2
OP2SW (BLU/YEL)
(R20A1 and R20A2
engine models)
Is there about 5 V ? Terminal side of Wire side of

YES−Replace the 2nd clutch transmission fluid Is there continuity?

pressure switch (see page 14-247), then go to step
19. YES−Check for poor connections and loose
NO−Go to step 11. pressure switch and the PCM. If the connections
are OK, go to step 15.

connector terminal B8 and the 2nd clutch
19.
14-148
06/09/15 17:36:43 62SWA00A_140_0151
good PCM (see page 14-10). 20. Drive the vehicle in 2nd gear in the 2 position for
more than 5 seconds, then shift to the D position,
16. Drive the vehicle in 2nd gear in the 2 position for and drive in 3rd gear for more than 5 seconds.
more than 5 seconds, then shift to the D position, Slow down and stop the wheels.
and drive in 3rd gear for more than 5 seconds.
Slow down and stop the wheels. 21. Check for DTC(s) in the DTCs/Freeze Data in A/T


(see page 11-226), K24Z1 engine model (see page connections and loose terminals at the 2nd clutch
connections and loose terminals at the 2nd clutch
14-149
06/09/15 17:36:44 62SWA00A_140_0152

DTC P0847: Short in 3rd Clutch Transmission 6. Turn the ignition switch OFF.
Fluid Pressure Switch Circuit, or 3rd Clutch
Transmission Fluid Pressure Switch Stuck 7. Disconnect the 3rd clutch transmission fluid
ON pressure switch connector.
NOTE: 8. Turn the ignition switch ON (II).

any on-board snapshot, and review General 9. Check the 3rd PRESSURE SWITCH signal with the
Troubleshooting Information (see page 14-5). HDS in the A/T data list.
and cannot be caused by a mechanical problem in the Is the 3rd PRESSURE SW IT CH OF F ?
transmission.
YES−Replace the 3rd clutch transmission fluid
1. Clear the DTC with the HDS. pressure switch (see page 14-247), then go to step
18.
2. Check the 3rd PRESSURE SWITCH signal with the
HDS in the A/T data list when not in 3rd gear. NO−Go to step 10.
Is the 3rd PRESSURE SW IT CH OF F ? 10. Turn the ignition switch OFF.
YES−Go to step 3. 11. Jump the SCS line with the HDS.
NO−Go to step 6. 12. Disconnect PCM connector B (44P).
3. Start the engine, and warm it up to normal 13. Check for continuity between PCM connector
operating temperature (the radiator fan comes on). terminal B9 and body ground.
＊０１
4. Drive the vehicle in 3rd gear in the D position D3
driving mode for more than 5 seconds, then release OP3SW (BLU/WHT)
the D3 driving mode by pushing the D3 switch, and (K24Z1 engine model)
OP3SW (BLK/RED)
drive in 4th gear for more than 5 seconds. Slow (R20A1 and R20A2 engine models)
down and stop the wheels.

YES−Go to step 6.

time. Check the OP3SW wire for an intermittent
short to ground between the 3rd clutch Terminal side of female terminals
the HDS indicates NOT COMPLETED, return to step Is there continuity?
4 and recheck.
connector terminal B9 and the 3rd clutch
18.
NO−Go to step 14.
14-150
ＳＷＡ７Ｅ１ＰＫ７７１０００９０８４７ＦＡＡＴ２０
06/09/15 17:36:44 62SWA00A_140_0153
good PCM (see page 14-10). 19. Drive the vehicle in 3rd gear in the D position D3
driving mode for more than 5 seconds, then release
15. Drive the vehicle in 3rd gear in the D position D3 the D3 driving mode by pushing the D3 switch, and
driving mode for more than 5 seconds, then release drive in 4th gear for more than 5 seconds. Slow
the D3 driving mode by pushing the D3 switch, and down and stop the wheels.
drive in 4th gear for more than 5 seconds. Slow
down and stop the wheels. 20. Check for DTC(s) in the DTCs/Freeze Data in A/T

terminals at the 3rd clutch transmission fluid

(see page 11-226), K24Z1 engine model (see page connections and loose terminals at the 3rd clutch
connections and loose terminals at the 3rd clutch
14-151
06/09/15 17:36:44 62SWA00A_140_0154

DTC P0848: Open in 3rd Clutch Transmission 5. Drive the vehicle in 3rd gear in the D position D3
Fluid Pressure Switch Circuit, or 3rd Clutch driving mode for more than 5 seconds, then release
Transmission Fluid Pressure Switch Stuck the D3 driving mode by pushing the D3 switch, and
OFF drive in 4th gear for more than 5 seconds. Slow
down and stop the wheels.
NOTE:
• Before you troubleshoot, record all freeze data and 6. Monitor the OBD STATUS for P0848 in the DTCs/
any on-board snapshot, and review General Freeze Data in A/T Mode Menu for a pass/fail.
• This code is caused by an electrical circuit problem Does the HDS indicate F AILED?
transmission. YES−Go to step 7.
1. Clear the DTC with the HDS. NO−Intermittent failure, the system is OK at this
2. Start the engine, and warm it up to normal at the 3rd clutch transmission fluid pressure switch
operating temperature (the radiator fan comes on). and the PCM. If the HDS indicates NOT
3. Drive the vehicle in 3rd gear in the D position D3
driving mode, and verify with the HDS in the A/T
data list that the SHIFT COMMAND indicates 3rd.
4. Check the 3rd PRESSURE SWITCH signal with the

HDS in the A/T data list.
Is the 3rd PRESSURE SW IT CH ON?
YES−Go to step 5.
NO−Go to step 7.
14-152
ＳＷＡ７Ｅ１ＰＫ７７１０００９０８４８ＦＡＡＴ２０
06/09/15 17:36:44 62SWA00A_140_0155
8. Disconnect the 3rd clutch transmission fluid 12. Jump the SCS line with the HDS.
pressure switch connector.
10. Measure voltage between the 3rd clutch terminal B9 and the 3rd clutch transmission fluid
transmission fluid pressure switch connector pressure switch connector terminal.
terminal and body ground. ＊０２
＊０１ 3RD CLUTCH
TRANSMISSION FLUID
3RD CLUTCH TRANSMISSION FLUID PRESSURE
PRESSURE SWITCH CONNECTOR PCM CONNECTOR B (44P) SWITCH CONNECTOR
OP3SW (BLU/WHT)
OP3SW (BLK/RED)
OP3SW (BLU/WHT) (R20A1 and R20A2
OP3SW (BLK/RED)
OP3SW (BLU/WHT) (R20A1 and R20A2
OP3SW (BLK/RED)
(R20A1 and R20A2
engine models)
Is there about 5 V ? Terminal side of Wire side of

YES−Replace the 3rd clutch transmission fluid Is there continuity?

pressure switch (see page 14-247), then go to step
19. YES−Check for poor connections and loose
NO−Go to step 11. pressure switch and the PCM. If the connections
are OK, go to step 15.

connector terminal B9 and the 3rd clutch
19.
(cont’d)
14-153
06/09/15 17:36:44 62SWA00A_140_0156

good PCM (see page 14-10). 20. Drive the vehicle in 3rd gear in the D position D3
driving mode for more than 5 seconds, then release
16. Drive the vehicle in 3rd gear in the D position D3 the D3 driving mode by pushing the D3 switch, and
driving mode for more than 5 seconds, then release drive in 4th gear for more than 5 seconds. Slow
the D3 driving mode by pushing the D3 switch, and down and stop the wheels.
drive in 4th gear for more than 5 seconds. Slow
down and stop the wheels. 21. Check for DTC(s) in the DTCs/Freeze Data in A/T


(see page 11-226), K24Z1 engine model (see page connections and loose terminals at the 3rd clutch
connections and loose terminals at the 3rd clutch
14-154
06/09/15 17:36:45 62SWA00A_140_0157
DTC P0962: Problem in A/T Clutch Pressure 6. Turn the ignition switch OFF.
Control Solenoid Valve A Circuit
7. Disconnect the A/T clutch pressure control solenoid
NOTE: valve A connector.
any on-board snapshot, and review General 8. Measure resistance between A/T clutch pressure
Troubleshooting Information (see page 14-5). control solenoid valve A connector terminals No. 1
• This code is caused by an electrical circuit problem and No. 2.
transmission. A/T CLUTCH PRESSURE CONTROL
SOLENOID VALVE A CONNECTOR
2. Check that DTC P0962 recurs.
YES−Go to step 6.
NO−Go to step 3.
3. Choose Clutch Pressure Control (Linear) Solenoid A
in the Miscellaneous Test Menu, and test A/T clutch
pressure control solenoid valve A with the HDS. Is there 3−10 ?
Does the HDS indicate NORMAL? YES−Go to step 9.
YES−Go to step 4. NO−Replace A/T clutch pressure control solenoid

valve A (see page 14-240), then go to step 16.
NO−Go to step 6.
4. Choose Clutch Pressure Control Solenoid Control

in the Miscellaneous Test Menu, and command A/T
clutch pressure control solenoid valve A at 1.0 A
with the HDS.

YES−Go to step 6.

time. Check for poor connections and loose
terminals at A/T clutch pressure control solenoid
valve A and the PCM. If the HDS indicates NOT
(cont’d)
14-155
ＳＷＡ７Ｅ１ＰＫ７７１０００９０９６２ＦＡＡＴ２０
06/09/15 17:36:45 62SWA00A_140_0158

9. Check for continuity between A/T clutch pressure 10. Turn the ignition switch ON (II).
control solenoid valve A connector terminal No. 2
and body ground. 11. Measure voltage between A/T clutch pressure
＊０２ control solenoid valve A connector terminals No. 1
A/T CLUTCH PRESSURE CONTROL and No. 2.
SOLENOID VALVE A CONNECTOR ＊０３
A/T CLUTCH PRESSURE CONTROL
GND (BLK)
LS A (RED/BLK) GND (BLK)

LS A (WHT)
(R20A1 and R20A2
engine models)

YES−Go to step 10. Is there voltage?
NO−Repair open in the wire between A/T clutch YES−Go to step 12.
pressure control solenoid valve A and ground
(G101), or repair poor ground (G101), then go to NO−Repair open or short in the wire between PCM
step 16. connector terminal B44 and A/T clutch pressure
control solenoid valve A, then go to step 16.
14-156
06/09/15 17:36:45 62SWA00A_140_0159

YES−If the PCM was updated, substitute a known- valve A and the PCM, then go to step 1.

(see page 11-226), K24Z1 engine model (see page connections and loose terminals at A/T clutch
11-613). If any other DTCs were indicated on step pressure control solenoid valve A and the PCM,
connections and loose terminals at A/T clutch
pressure control solenoid valve A and the PCM. If
14-157
06/09/15 17:36:45 62SWA00A_140_0160

DTC P0963: Problem in A/T Clutch Pressure 8. Measure resistance between A/T clutch pressure
Control Solenoid Valve A control solenoid valve A connector terminals No. 1
and No. 2.
NOTE: ＊０１
• Before you troubleshoot, record all freeze data and A/T CLUTCH PRESSURE CONTROL
any on-board snapshot, and review General SOLENOID VALVE A CONNECTOR
transmission.
Is DT C P0963 indicated? Terminal side of male terminals
YES−Go to step 6.
Is there 3−10 ?
NO−Go to step 3.
YES−Go to step 9.
in the Miscellaneous Test Menu, and test A/T clutch NO−Replace A/T clutch pressure control solenoid
pressure control solenoid valve A with the HDS. valve A (see page 14-240), then go to step 14.
Does the HDS indicate NORMAL? 9. Check for continuity between A/T clutch pressure
control solenoid valve A connector terminal No. 2
YES−Go to step 4. and body ground.
＊０２
NO−Go to step 6. A/T CLUTCH PRESSURE CONTROL
clutch pressure control solenoid valve A at 0.2 A
with the HDS.
GND (BLK)


YES−Go to step 6.
NO−Intermittent failure, the system is OK at this Is there continuity?

terminals at A/T clutch pressure control solenoid YES−Go to step 10.
valve A and the PCM. If the HDS indicates NOT
COMPLETED, return to step 3 and recheck. NO−Repair open in the wire between A/T clutch
pressure control solenoid valve A and ground
6. Turn the ignition switch OFF. (G101), or repair poor ground (G101), then go to
step 10.
valve A connector.
14-158
ＳＷＡ７Ｅ１ＰＫ７７１０００９０９６３ＦＡＡＴ２０
06/09/15 17:36:45 62SWA00A_140_0161

YES−If the PCM was updated, substitute a known- valve A and the PCM, then go to step 1.

11-613). If any other DTCs were indicated on step pressure control solenoid valve A and the PCM,
pressure control solenoid valve A and the PCM. If
14-159
06/09/15 17:36:46 62SWA00A_140_0162

Control Solenoid Valve B Circuit
NOTE: valve B connector.
Troubleshooting Information (see page 14-5). control solenoid valve B connector terminals No. 1
SOLENOID VALVE B CONNECTOR
YES−Go to step 6.
NO−Go to step 3.
pressure control solenoid valve B with the HDS. Is there 3−10 ?

valve B (see page 14-245), then go to step 16.
NO−Go to step 6.

clutch pressure control solenoid valve B at 1.0 A
with the HDS.

YES−Go to step 6.

valve B and the PCM. If the HDS indicates NOT
14-160
ＳＷＡ７Ｅ１ＰＫ７７１０００９０９６６ＦＡＡＴ２０
06/09/15 17:36:46 62SWA00A_140_0163
control solenoid valve B connector terminal No. 2
＊０２ control solenoid valve B connector terminals No. 1
SOLENOID VALVE B CONNECTOR ＊０３
GND (BLK)
LS B (BRN) GND (BLK)

LS B (BRN/WHT)
(R20A1 and R20A2
engine models)

pressure control solenoid valve B and ground
control solenoid valve B, then go to step 16.
(cont’d)
14-161
06/09/15 17:36:46 62SWA00A_140_0164


YES−If the PCM was updated, substitute a known- valve B and the PCM, then go to step 1.

11-613). If any other DTCs were indicated on step pressure control solenoid valve B and the PCM,
pressure control solenoid valve B and the PCM. If
14-162
06/09/15 17:36:46 62SWA00A_140_0165
Control Solenoid Valve B control solenoid valve B connector terminals No. 1
and No. 2.
NOTE: ＊０１
any on-board snapshot, and review General SOLENOID VALVE B CONNECTOR
transmission.
Is DT C P0967 indicated? Terminal side of male terminals
YES−Go to step 6.
Is there 3−10 ?
NO−Go to step 3.
YES−Go to step 9.
pressure control solenoid valve B with the HDS. valve B (see page 14-245), then go to step 14.
control solenoid valve B connector terminal No. 2
＊０２
clutch pressure control solenoid valve B at 0.2 A
with the HDS.
GND (BLK)


YES−Go to step 6.

valve B and the PCM. If the HDS indicates NOT
pressure control solenoid valve B and ground
step 14.
valve B connector.
(cont’d)
14-163
ＳＷＡ７Ｅ１ＰＫ７７１０００９０９６７ＦＡＡＴ２０
06/09/15 17:36:46 62SWA00A_140_0166


YES−If the PCM was updated, substitute a known- valve B and the PCM, then go to step 1.

11-613). If any other DTCs were indicated on step pressure control solenoid valve B and the PCM,
pressure control solenoid valve B and the PCM. If
14-164
06/09/15 17:36:47 62SWA00A_140_0167
Control Solenoid Valve C Circuit
NOTE: valve C connector.
Troubleshooting Information (see page 14-5). control solenoid valve C connector terminals No. 1
SOLENOID VALVE C CONNECTOR
YES−Go to step 6.
NO−Go to step 3.
pressure control solenoid valve C with the HDS. Is there 3−10 ?

valve C (see page 14-245), then go to step 16.
NO−Go to step 6.

clutch pressure control solenoid valve C at 1.0 A
with the HDS.

YES−Go to step 6.

valve C and the PCM. If the HDS indicates NOT
(cont’d)
14-165
ＳＷＡ７Ｅ１ＰＫ７７１０００９０９７０ＦＡＡＴ２０
06/09/15 17:36:47 62SWA00A_140_0168

control solenoid valve C connector terminal No. 2
＊０２ control solenoid valve C connector terminals No. 1
SOLENOID VALVE C CONNECTOR ＊０３
GND (BLK)
LS C (BLU/YEL) GND (BLK)

LS C (BLU/WHT)
(R20A1 and R20A2
engine models)

pressure control solenoid valve C and ground
control solenoid valve C, then go to step 16.
14-166
06/09/15 17:36:47 62SWA00A_140_0169

YES−If the PCM was updated, substitute a known- valve C and the PCM, then go to step 1.

11-613). If any other DTCs were indicated on step pressure control solenoid valve C and the PCM,
pressure control solenoid valve C and the PCM. If
14-167
06/09/15 17:36:48 62SWA00A_140_0170

Control Solenoid Valve C control solenoid valve C connector terminals No. 1
and No. 2.
NOTE: ＊０１
any on-board snapshot, and review General SOLENOID VALVE C CONNECTOR
transmission.
Is DT C P097 1 indicated? Terminal side of male terminals
YES−Go to step 6.
Is there 3−10 ?
NO−Go to step 3.
YES−Go to step 9.
pressure control solenoid valve C with the HDS. valve C (see page 14-245), then go to step 14.
control solenoid valve C connector terminal No. 2
＊０２
clutch pressure control solenoid valve C at 0.2 A
with the HDS.
GND (BLK)


YES−Go to step 6.

valve C and the PCM. If the HDS indicates NOT
pressure control solenoid valve C and ground
step 10.
valve C connector.
14-168
ＳＷＡ７Ｅ１ＰＫ７７１０００９０９７１ＦＡＡＴ２０
06/09/15 17:36:48 62SWA00A_140_0171

YES−If the PCM was updated, substitute a known- valve C and the PCM, then go to step 1.

11-613). If any other DTCs were indicated on step pressure control solenoid valve C and the PCM,
pressure control solenoid valve C and the PCM. If
14-169
06/09/15 17:36:48 62SWA00A_140_0172

DTC P0973: Short in Shift Solenoid Valve A 7. Turn the ignition switch OFF.
Circuit
NOTE:
• Before you troubleshoot, record all freeze data and 9. Disconnect PCM connectors B (44P) and C (44P).
Troubleshooting Information (see page 14-5). 10. Measure resistance between PCM connector
• This code is caused by an electrical circuit problem terminals B10 and C40 or C44.
PCM CONNECTORS
transmission.
SH A (BLU/BLK) (K24Z1 engine model)
1. Clear the DTC with the HDS. SH A (BLU) (R20A1 and R20A2 engine models)
2. Start the engine, and shift to the D position. B (44P) C (44P)
YES−Go to step 7.
LG1 (BRN/YEL) LG2
(BRN/
NO−Go to step 4. YEL)

4. Choose Shift Solenoid A in the Miscellaneous Test
Menu, and test shift solenoid valve A with the HDS. Is there less than 12 ?
Is a clicking sound heard? YES−Go to step 11.
NO−Go to step 7.
5. Start the engine, and shift to the D position.

YES−Go to step 7.

time. Check the SH A wire for an intermittent short
to ground between shift solenoid valve A and the
14-170
ＳＷＡ７Ｅ１ＰＫ７７１０００９０９７３ＦＡＡＴ２０
06/09/15 17:36:48 62SWA00A_140_0173
11. Disconnect the shift solenoid harness connector. 14. Update the PCM if it does not have the latest
12. Check for continuity between PCM connector good PCM (see page 14-10).
terminals B10 and C40 or C44.
＊０２ 15. Start the engine, and shift to the D position.
PCM CONNECTORS
SH A (BLU/BLK) (K24Z1 engine model) 16. Check for DTC(s) in the DTCs/Freeze Data in A/T
SH A (BLU) (R20A1 and R20A2 engine models) Mode Menu with the HDS.
B (44P) C (44P) Is DT C P097 3 indicated?


LG1 (BRN/YEL) LG2
(BRN/ DTCs are indicated, go to step 17.
YEL)

connector terminal B10 and the shift solenoid YES−If the PCM was updated, troubleshooting is
harness connector, then go to step 18. complete. If the PCM was substituted, replace the
original PCM; R20A1 and R20A2 engine models
NO−Go to step 13. (see page 11-226), K24Z1 engine model (see page
11-613). If any other DTCs were indicated on step
13. Inspect shift solenoid valve A (see page 14-230). 16, go to the indicated DTC’s troubleshooting.
Is shif t solenoid valve A OK ? NO−If the HDS indicates FAILED, check for poor
YES−Go to step 14. valve A and the PCM. If the PCM was updated,
NO−Replace shift solenoid valve A or the shift then recheck. If the PCM was substituted, go to step
solenoid harness (see page 14-235), then go to step 1. If the HDS indicates NOT COMPLETED, keep
18. idling until a result comes on.
(cont’d)
14-171
06/09/15 17:36:48 62SWA00A_140_0174



terminals at shift solenoid valve A and the PCM,
then go to step 1.




valve A and the PCM, then go to step 1. If the HDS
recheck.
14-172
06/09/15 17:36:49 62SWA00A_140_0175
DTC P0974: Open in Shift Solenoid Valve A 7. Turn the ignition switch OFF.
Circuit
NOTE:
PCM CONNECTORS
transmission.
SH A (BLU/BLK) (K24Z1 engine model)
1. Clear the DTC with the HDS. SH A (BLU) (R20A1 and R20A2 engine models)
2. Start the engine in the P position. B (44P) C (44P)
YES−Go to step 7.
LG1 (BRN/YEL) LG2
(BRN/
NO−Go to step 4. YEL)

4. Choose Shift Solenoid A in the Miscellaneous Test
Menu, and test shift solenoid valve A with the HDS. Is there 12−25 ?
Is a clicking sound heard? YES−Go to step 15.
NO−Go to step 7.
5. Start the engine in the P position.

YES−Go to step 7.

at shift solenoid valve A and the PCM. If the HDS
recheck.
(cont’d)
14-173
ＳＷＡ７Ｅ１ＰＫ７７１０００９０９７４ＦＡＡＴ２０
06/09/15 17:36:49 62SWA00A_140_0176

11. Disconnect the shift solenoid harness connector. 13. Remove the shift solenoid harness (see page
14-230).
terminal B10 and shift solenoid harness connector 14. Check for continuity between shift solenoid
terminal No. 5. harness connector terminal No. 5 and the shift
＊０２ solenoid valve A connector terminal.
HARNESS CONNECTOR ＊０３
SH A (BLU/BLK) VALVE A HARNESS CONNECTOR
(K24Z1 engine model) CONNECTOR
SH A (BLU)
(R20A1 and R20A2
engine models)
SH A (BLU)
SH A (BLU)
SH A (BLU/BLK)
SH A (BLU) Wire side of Terminal side of
(R20A1 and R20A2 engine models) female terminals male terminals
female terminals female terminals Is there continuity?
Is there continuity? YES−Replace shift solenoid valve A (see page

14-235), then go to step 19.
NO−Replace the shift solenoid harness (see page
NO−Repair open in the wire between PCM 14-235), then go to step 19.
14-174
06/09/15 17:36:49 62SWA00A_140_0177
good PCM (see page 14-10). 20. Start the engine in the P position.
16. Start the engine in the P position. 21. Check for DTC(s) in the DTCs/Freeze Data in A/T

terminals at shift solenoid valve A and the PCM,
YES−If the PCM was updated, substitute a known- then go to step 1.

(see page 11-226), K24Z1 engine model (see page connections and loose terminals at shift solenoid
11-613). If any other DTCs were indicated on step valve A and the PCM, then go to step 1. If the HDS
17, go to the indicated DTC’s troubleshooting. indicates NOT COMPLETED, return to step 20 and
recheck.
valve A and the PCM. If the PCM was updated,
14-175
06/09/15 17:36:49 62SWA00A_140_0178

DTC P0976: Short in Shift Solenoid Valve B 7. Turn the ignition switch OFF.
Circuit
NOTE:
PCM CONNECTORS
transmission.
SH B (GRN/WHT)
B (44P) C (44P)
LG1 (BRN/YEL) LG2
(BRN/
YES−Go to step 7. YEL)
NO−Go to step 4. Terminal side of female terminals
4. Choose Shift Solenoid B in the Miscellaneous Test Is there less than 12 ?

Menu, and test shift solenoid valve B with the HDS.
Is a clicking sound heard?
NO−Go to step 14.
YES−Go to step 5.
NO−Go to step 7.

YES−Go to step 7.

time. Check the SH B wire for an intermittent short
to ground between shift solenoid valve B and the
14-176
ＳＷＡ７Ｅ１ＰＫ７７１０００９０９７６ＦＡＡＴ２０
06/09/15 17:36:49 62SWA00A_140_0179
＊０２ 15. Start the engine in the P position.
PCM CONNECTORS
SH B (GRN/WHT) 16. Check for DTC(s) in the DTCs/Freeze Data in A/T
B (44P) C (44P)

LG1 (BRN/YEL) LG2
(BRN/
YEL) NO−If DTC P0976 is not indicated, or if any other
Is there continuity? Freeze Data in A/T Mode Menu for a pass/fail.
YES−Repair short in the wire between PCM Does the HDS indicate PASSED?
harness connector, then go to step 18. YES−If the PCM was updated, troubleshooting is
NO−Go to step 13. original PCM; R20A1 and R20A2 engine models
13. Inspect shift solenoid valve B (see page 14-230). 11-613). If any other DTCs were indicated on step
Is shif t solenoid valve B OK ?
YES−Go to step 14. connections and loose terminals at shift solenoid
valve B and the PCM. If the PCM was updated,
NO−Replace shift solenoid valve B or the shift substitute a known-good PCM (see page 14-10),
solenoid harness (see page 14-235), then go to step then recheck. If the PCM was substituted, go to step
18. 1. If the HDS indicates NOT COMPLETED, keep
(cont’d)
14-177
06/09/15 17:36:50 62SWA00A_140_0180



terminals at shift solenoid valve B and the PCM,
then go to step 1.




valve B and the PCM, then go to step 1. If the HDS
recheck.
14-178
06/09/15 17:38:01 62SWA00A_140_0181
DTC P0977: Open in Shift Solenoid Valve B 7. Turn the ignition switch OFF.
Circuit
NOTE:
PCM CONNECTORS
transmission.
SH B (GRN/WHT)
B (44P) C (44P)
2. Test-drive the vehicle for several minutes in 1st
thru 3rd gears in the D position D3 driving mode.
Is DT C P097 7 indicated? LG1 (BRN/YEL) LG2

(BRN/
YEL)
YES−Go to step 7.
NO−Go to step 4.
Is there 12−25 ?
4. Choose Shift Solenoid B in the Miscellaneous Test
Menu, and test shift solenoid valve B with the HDS. YES−Go to step 15.
Is a clicking sound heard? NO−Go to step 11.
YES−Go to step 5.
NO−Go to step 7.


YES−Go to step 7.

at shift solenoid valve B and the PCM. If the HDS
recheck.
(cont’d)
14-179
ＳＷＡ７Ｅ１ＰＫ７７１０００９０９７７ＦＡＡＴ２０
06/09/15 17:38:02 62SWA00A_140_0182

14-230).
＊０２ solenoid valve B connector terminal.
VALVE B HARNESS CONNECTOR
CONNECTOR
SH B (GRN/WHT)
SH B (GRN/WHT)
SH B (ORN)
SH B (ORN)

female terminals female terminals Wire side of Terminal side of
female terminals male terminals
YES−Replace shift solenoid valve B (see page
harness connector, then go to step 15. NO−Replace the shift solenoid harness (see page
14-180
06/09/15 17:38:02 62SWA00A_140_0183
good PCM (see page 14-10). 20. Test-drive the vehicle for several minutes in 1st
thru 3rd gears in the D position D3 driving mode. 21. Check for DTC(s) in the DTCs/Freeze Data in A/T

terminals at shift solenoid valve B and the PCM,

11-613). If any other DTCs were indicated on step valve B and the PCM, then go to step 1. If the HDS
recheck.
valve B and the PCM. If the PCM was updated,
14-181
06/09/15 17:38:03 62SWA00A_140_0184

DTC P0979: Short in Shift Solenoid Valve C 7. Turn the ignition switch OFF.
Circuit
NOTE:
PCM CONNECTORS
transmission.
SH C (GRN)
B (44P) C (44P)
LG1 (BRN/YEL) LG2
(BRN/
4. Choose Shift Solenoid C in the Miscellaneous Test Is there less than 12 ?

Menu, and test shift solenoid valve C with the HDS.
NO−Go to step 14.
YES−Go to step 5.
NO−Go to step 7.

YES−Go to step 7.

time. Check the SH C wire for an intermittent short
to ground between shift solenoid valve C and the
14-182
ＳＷＡ７Ｅ１ＰＫ７７１０００９０９７９ＦＡＡＴ２０
06/09/15 17:38:03 62SWA00A_140_0185
＊０２ 15. Start the engine, and shift to the D position.
PCM CONNECTORS
SH C (GRN) 16. Check for DTC(s) in the DTCs/Freeze Data in A/T
B (44P) C (44P)

LG1 (BRN/YEL) LG2
(BRN/
13. Inspect shift solenoid valve C (see page 14-230). 11-613). If any other DTCs were indicated on step
Is shif t solenoid valve C OK ?
valve C and the PCM. If the PCM was updated,
NO−Replace shift solenoid valve C or the shift substitute a known-good PCM (see page 14-10),
(cont’d)
14-183
06/09/15 17:38:03 62SWA00A_140_0186



terminals at shift solenoid valve C and the PCM,
then go to step 1.




valve C and the PCM, then go to step 1. If the HDS
recheck.
14-184
06/09/15 17:38:03 62SWA00A_140_0187
DTC P0980: Open in Shift Solenoid Valve C 7. Turn the ignition switch OFF.
Circuit
NOTE:
PCM CONNECTORS
transmission.
SH C (GRN)
B (44P) C (44P)
LG1 (BRN/YEL) LG2
(BRN/
4. Choose Shift Solenoid C in the Miscellaneous Test Is there 12−25 ?

Menu, and test shift solenoid valve C with the HDS.
NO−Go to step 11.
YES−Go to step 5.
NO−Go to step 7.

YES−Go to step 7.

at shift solenoid valve C and the PCM. If the HDS
recheck.
(cont’d)
14-185
ＳＷＡ７Ｅ１ＰＫ７７１０００９０９８０ＦＡＡＴ２０
06/09/15 17:38:04 62SWA00A_140_0188

14-230).
＊０２ solenoid valve C connector terminal.
VALVE C HARNESS CONNECTOR
CONNECTOR
SH C (GRN)
SH C (GRN)
SH C (GRN)
SH C (GRN)

female terminals female terminals Wire side of Terminal side of
female terminals male terminals
YES−Replace shift solenoid valve C (see page
14-186
06/09/15 17:38:04 62SWA00A_140_0189

terminals at shift solenoid valve C and the PCM,

11-613). If any other DTCs were indicated on step valve C and the PCM, then go to step 1. If the HDS
recheck.
valve C and the PCM. If the PCM was updated,
14-187
06/09/15 17:38:04 62SWA00A_140_0190

DTC P0982: Short in Shift Solenoid Valve D 7. Turn the ignition switch OFF.
Circuit
NOTE:
PCM CONNECTORS
transmission.
B (44P) C (44P)
2. Test-drive the vehicle for several minutes in 1st and

2nd gears in the D position.
3. Check that DTC P0982 recurs. SH D (GRN/RED) LG1 (BRN/YEL) LG2

(BRN/
Is DT C P0982 indicated? YEL)
YES−Go to step 7.
NO−Go to step 4.
Is there less than 12 ?
4. Choose Shift Solenoid D in the Miscellaneous Test
Menu, and test shift solenoid valve D with the HDS. YES−Go to step 11.
YES−Go to step 5.
NO−Go to step 7.


YES−Go to step 7.

time. Check the SH D wire for an intermittent short
to ground between shift solenoid valve D and the
14-188
ＳＷＡ７Ｅ１ＰＫ７７１０００９０９８２ＦＡＡＴ２０
06/09/15 17:38:04 62SWA00A_140_0191
＊０２ 15. Test-drive the vehicle for several minutes in 1st and
PCM CONNECTORS
B (44P) C (44P)
SH D (GRN/RED) LG1 (BRN/YEL) LG2 YES−If the PCM was updated, substitute a known-
(BRN/ good PCM (see page 14-10), then recheck. If the
YEL) PCM was substituted, go to step 1.

Terminal side of female terminals DTCs are indicated, go to step 17.
Is there continuity? 17. Monitor the OBD STATUS for P0982 in the DTCs/
connector terminal B26 and the shift solenoid Does the HDS indicate PASSED?
NO−Go to step 13. complete. If the PCM was substituted, replace the
13. Inspect shift solenoid valve D (see page 14-230). (see page 11-226), K24Z1 engine model (see page
Is shif t solenoid valve D OK ? 16, go to the indicated DTC’s troubleshooting.
YES−Go to step 14. NO−If the HDS indicates FAILED, check for poor
NO−Replace shift solenoid valve D or the shift valve D and the PCM. If the PCM was updated,
solenoid harness (see page 14-235), then go to step substitute a known-good PCM (see page 14-10),
18. then recheck. If the PCM was substituted, go to step
(cont’d)
14-189
06/09/15 17:38:04 62SWA00A_140_0192




terminals at shift solenoid valve D and the PCM,
then go to step 1.




valve D and the PCM, then go to step 1. If the HDS
recheck.
14-190
06/09/15 17:38:05 62SWA00A_140_0193
DTC P0983: Open in Shift Solenoid Valve D 7. Turn the ignition switch OFF.
Circuit
NOTE:
PCM CONNECTORS
transmission.
B (44P) C (44P)

SH D (GRN/RED) LG1 (BRN/YEL) LG2
Is DT C P0983 indicated? (BRN/
YEL)
YES−Go to step 7.
4. Choose Shift Solenoid D in the Miscellaneous Test Is there 12−25 ?

Menu, and test shift solenoid valve D with the HDS.
NO−Go to step 11.
YES−Go to step 5.
NO−Go to step 7.

YES−Go to step 7.

at shift solenoid valve D and the PCM. If the HDS
recheck.
(cont’d)
14-191
ＳＷＡ７Ｅ１ＰＫ７７１０００９０９８３ＦＡＡＴ２０
06/09/15 17:38:05 62SWA00A_140_0194

14-230).
＊０２ solenoid valve D connector terminal.
HARNESS CONNECTOR VALVE D
CONNECTOR
SH D (GRN/RED)
SH D (GRN/RED) SH D (YEL)
SH D (YEL)

female terminals female terminals Terminal side of Wire side of
male terminals female terminals
YES−Replace shift solenoid valve D (see page
14-192
06/09/15 17:38:05 62SWA00A_140_0195

terminals at shift solenoid valve D and the PCM,

11-613). If any other DTCs were indicated on step valve D and the PCM, then go to step 1. If the HDS
recheck.
valve D and the PCM. If the PCM was updated,
14-193
06/09/15 17:38:06 62SWA00A_140_0196

DTC P0985: Short in Shift Solenoid Valve E 7. Turn the ignition switch OFF.
Circuit
NOTE:
PCM CONNECTORS
transmission.
SH E (YEL)
B (44P) C (44P)
LG1 (BRN/YEL) LG2
(BRN/
4. Choose Shift Solenoid E in the Miscellaneous Test Is there less than 12 ?

Menu, and test shift solenoid valve E with the HDS.
NO−Go to step 14.
YES−Go to step 5.
NO−Go to step 7.

YES−Go to step 7.

time. Check the SH E wire for an intermittent short
to ground between shift solenoid valve E and the
14-194
ＳＷＡ７Ｅ１ＰＫ７７１０００９０９８５ＦＡＡＴ２０
06/09/15 17:38:06 62SWA00A_140_0197
＊０２ 15. Start the engine in the P position.
PCM CONNECTORS
SH E (YEL) 16. Check for DTC(s) in the DTCs/Freeze Data in A/T
B (44P) C (44P)

LG1 (BRN/YEL) LG2
(BRN/
13. Inspect shift solenoid valve E (see page 14-230). 11-613). If any other DTCs were indicated on step
Is shif t solenoid valve E OK ?
valve E and the PCM. If the PCM was updated,
NO−Replace shift solenoid valve E or the shift substitute a known-good PCM (see page 14-10),
(cont’d)
14-195
06/09/15 17:38:06 62SWA00A_140_0198



terminals at shift solenoid valve E and the PCM,
then go to step 1.




valve E and the PCM, then go to step 1. If the HDS
recheck.
14-196
06/09/15 17:38:06 62SWA00A_140_0199
DTC P0986: Open in Shift Solenoid Valve E 7. Turn the ignition switch OFF.
Circuit
NOTE:
PCM CONNECTORS
transmission.
SH E (YEL)
B (44P) C (44P)
Is DT C P0986 indicated? LG1 (BRN/YEL) LG2

(BRN/
YEL)
YES−Go to step 7.
NO−Go to step 4.
Is there 12−25 ?
4. Choose Shift Solenoid E in the Miscellaneous Test
Menu, and test shift solenoid valve E with the HDS. YES−Go to step 15.
YES−Go to step 5.
NO−Go to step 7.


YES−Go to step 7.

at shift solenoid valve E and the PCM. If the HDS
recheck.
(cont’d)
14-197
ＳＷＡ７Ｅ１ＰＫ７７１０００９０９８６ＦＡＡＴ２０
06/09/15 17:38:07 62SWA00A_140_0200

14-230).
＊０２ solenoid valve E connector terminal.
PCM CONNECTOR B (44P) SHIFT SOLENOID
HARNESS CONNECTOR VALVE E CONNECTOR
SH E (RED)
SH E (RED)
SH E (RED)
SH E (RED)

female terminals female terminals Terminal side of Wire side of
male terminals female terminals
YES−Replace shift solenoid valve E (see page
14-198
06/09/15 17:38:07 62SWA00A_140_0201
good PCM (see page 14-10). 20. Test-drive the vehicle for several minutes in 1st and
2nd gears in the D position. 21. Check for DTC(s) in the DTCs/Freeze Data in A/T

terminals at shift solenoid valve E and the PCM,

11-613). If any other DTCs were indicated on step valve E and the PCM, then go to step 1. If the HDS
recheck.
valve E and the PCM. If the PCM was updated,
14-199
06/09/15 17:38:07 62SWA00A_140_0202

DTC P16C0: PCM A/T Control System
Incomplete Updated
NOTE:
• This code is indicated when PCM updating is
incomplete.
1. Update the PCM (see page 14-9).
2. Check whether the DTC P16C0 is indicated in the

DTCs/Freeze Data in A/T Mode Menu with the HDS.
Is DT C P16C0 indicated?
YES−Replace the original PCM; R20A1 and R20A2

NO−PCM updating is complete.
14-200
ＳＷＡ７Ｅ１ＰＫ７７１０００９１６Ｃ０ＦＡＡＴ２０
06/09/15 17:38:07 62SWA00A_140_0203
DTC P1717: Open in Transmission Range 4. Turn the ignition switch OFF.
Switch ATP RVS Switch Circuit
5. Disconnect the transmission range switch
NOTE: connector.
any on-board snapshot, and review General 6. Check for continuity between transmission range
Troubleshooting Information (see page 14-5). switch connector terminal No. 10 and body ground.
• This code is caused by an electrical circuit problem ＊０１
and cannot be caused by a mechanical problem in the TRANSMISSION RANGE SWITCH CONNECTOR
transmission.
2. Shift to the R position, and verify the A/T R SWITCH

signal with the HDS in the A/T data list. GND (BLK)
Is the A/ T R SW IT CH ON?
YES−Go to step 3.
NO−Check for proper transmission range switch
installation (see page 14-329), adjust the shift cable
(see page 14-321), then recheck. Is there continuity?
3. Check the REVERSE SWITCH signal with the HDS. YES−Go to step 7.
Is the REV ERSE SW IT CH ON? NO−Repair open in the wire between transmission
range switch connector terminal No. 10 and ground
YES−Intermittent failure, the system is OK at this (G101), or repair poor ground (G101), then go to
time. step 14.
NO−Go to step 4.
(cont’d)
14-201
ＳＷＡ７Ｅ１ＰＫ７７１０００９１７１７ＦＡＡＴ２０
06/09/15 17:38:08 62SWA00A_140_0204

7. Turn the ignition switch ON (II). 9. Check for continuity between the No. 1 and No. 10
terminals at the transmission range switch.
8. Measure voltage between transmission range ＊０３
＊０２
ATP RVS
ATP RVS (WHT/RED)
GND
GND (BLK)

Is there continuity while the shif t lever is in the R
position, and no continuity when the shif t lever is
Is there voltage? shif ted to any position other than R?
YES−Go to step 9. YES−Check for poor connections and loose

NO−Repair open in the wire between PCM PCM. If the connections are OK, go to step 10.
switch, then go to step 14. NO−Replace the transmission range switch
14-202
06/09/15 17:38:08 62SWA00A_140_0205
good PCM (see page 14-10). 15. Test-drive the vehicle in the R position at speeds
below 5 km/h (3 mph) for more than 2 seconds,
11. Test-drive the vehicle in the R position at speeds then increase the speed and test-drive at speeds
below 5 km/h (3 mph) for more than 2 seconds, over 5 km/h (3 mph) for more than 2 seconds, then
then increase the speed and test-drive at speeds slow down to a stop.
over 5 km/h (3 mph) for more than 2 seconds, then
slow down to a stop. 16. Check for DTC(s) in the DTCs/Freeze Data in A/T

YES−If the PCM was updated, substitute a known- PCM, then go to step 1.

(see page 11-226), K24Z1 engine model (see page connections and loose terminals at the
11-613). If any other DTCs were indicated on step transmission range switch and the PCM, then go to
14-203
06/09/15 17:38:08 62SWA00A_140_0206

DTC P1730: Problem in Shift Control System: 8. Clear the DTC with the HDS.
• Shift Solenoid Valves A or D Stuck OFF 9. Choose Shift Solenoid A in the Miscellaneous Test
• Shift Solenoid Valve B Stuck ON Menu, and check that shift solenoid valve A
• Shift Valves A, B, or D Stuck operates with the HDS.
NOTE: Before you troubleshoot, record all freeze data Is a clicking sound heard?
Troubleshooting Information (see page 14-5). YES−Go to step 10.
1. Warm up the engine to normal operating NO−Replace shift solenoid valve A (see page
temperature (the radiator fan comes on). 14-235), then go to step 15.
2. Make sure that the transmission is filled to the 10. Choose Shift Solenoid B in the Miscellaneous Test
proper level, and check for fluid leaks. Menu, and check that shift solenoid valve B
operates with the HDS.
3. Drain the ATF (see step 3 on page 14-252) through a
strainer. Inspect the strainer for metal debris or Is a clicking sound heard?
Does the strainer have metal debris or excessive
clutch material? NO−Replace shift solenoid valve B (see page
11. Choose Shift Solenoid D in the Miscellaneous Test
NO−Replace the ATF (see step 5 on page 14-252), Menu, and check that shift solenoid valve D
then go to step 4. operates with the HDS.
4. Clear the DTC with the HDS. Is a clicking sound heard?
5. Test-drive the vehicle in the D position through all YES−Go to step 12.
more than 20 seconds, then slow down to a stop. NO−Replace shift solenoid valve D (see page
down to a stop.

YES−Go to step 8.

14-204
ＳＷＡ７Ｅ１ＰＫ７７１０００９１７３０ＦＡＡＴ２０
06/09/15 17:38:08 62SWA00A_140_0207

more than 20 seconds, then slow down to a stop.

down to a stop.

YES−Repair hydraulic system related with shift

valves A, B, and D, or replace the transmission,
then go to step 15.



down to a stop.


14-205
06/09/15 17:38:08 62SWA00A_140_0208

• Shift Solenoid Valve E Stuck OFF 9. Choose Shift Solenoid E in the Miscellaneous Test
• Shift Valve E Stuck Menu, and check that shift solenoid valve E
• A/T Clutch Pressure Control Solenoid Valve A Stuck operates with the HDS.
OFF
and any on-board snapshot, and review General YES−Go to step 10.
NO−Replace shift solenoid valve E (see page
1. Warm up the engine to normal operating 14-235), then go to step 15.
2. Make sure that the transmission is filled to the in the Miscellaneous Test Menu, and test A/T clutch
proper level, and check for fluid leaks. pressure control solenoid valve A with the HDS.
3. Drain the ATF (see step 3 on page 14-252) through a Does the HDS indicate NORMAL?
strainer. Inspect the strainer for metal debris or
excessive clutch material. YES−Intermittent failure, the system is OK at this
time.
Does the strainer have metal debris or excessive
clutch material? NO−Follow the instructions indicated on the HDS
YES−Replace the transmission, then go to step 12. the cause of the failure, go to step 11. If any part is
replaced, go to step 12.
NO−Replace the ATF (see step 5 on page 14-252),
then go to step 4. 11. Inspect A/T clutch pressure control solenoid
valve A (see page 14-238).
Does A/ T clutch pressure control solenoid valve A
5. Test-drive the vehicle in the D position through all work properly?
more than 20 seconds, then slow down to a stop. YES−Repair the hydraulic system related with shift
valve E, or replace the transmission, then go to step
6. Test-drive the vehicle again in the D position 12.
(12 mph) for more than 20 seconds, then slow NO−Replace A/T clutch pressure control solenoid
down to a stop. valve A (see page 14-240), then go to step 12.

YES−Go to step 8.

14-206
ＳＷＡ７Ｅ１ＰＫ７７１０００９１７３１ＦＡＡＴ２０
06/09/15 17:38:08 62SWA00A_140_0209


down to a stop.


14-207
06/09/15 17:38:09 62SWA00A_140_0210

• Shift Solenoid Valves B or C Stuck ON 9. Choose Shift Solenoid B in the Miscellaneous Test
• Shift Valves B or C Stuck Menu, and check that shift solenoid valve B
and any on-board snapshot, and review General Is a clicking sound heard?
temperature (the radiator fan comes on). NO−Replace shift solenoid valve B (see page
proper level, and check for fluid leaks. 10. Choose Shift Solenoid C in the Miscellaneous Test
Menu, and check that shift solenoid valve C
3. Drain the ATF (see step 3 on page 14-252) through a operates with the HDS.
excessive clutch material. Is a clicking sound heard?
Does the strainer have metal debris or excessive YES−Go to step 11.
clutch material?
YES−Replace the transmission, then go to step 14. 14-235), then go to step 14.
NO−Replace the ATF (see step 5 on page 14-252), 11. Test-drive the vehicle in the D position through all
then go to step 4. five gears at speeds over 20 km/h (12 mph) for
5. Test-drive the vehicle in the D position through all through all five gears at speeds over 20 km/h
five gears at speeds over 20 km/h (12 mph) for (12 mph) for more than 20 seconds, then slow
more than 20 seconds, then slow down to a stop. down to a stop.
6. Test-drive the vehicle again in the D position 13. Monitor the OBD STATUS for P1732 in the DTCs/
through all five gears at speeds over 20 km/h Freeze Data in A/T Mode Menu for a pass/fail.
down to a stop. Does the HDS indicate F AILED?
7. Monitor the OBD STATUS for P1732 in the DTCs/ YES−Repair hydraulic system related with shift
Freeze Data in A/T Mode Menu for a pass/fail. valves B and C, or replace the transmission, then
go to step 14.
YES−Go to step 8. time. If the HDS indicates NOT COMPLETED, return
14-208
ＳＷＡ７Ｅ１ＰＫ７７１０００９１７３２ＦＡＡＴ２０
06/09/15 17:39:18 62SWA00A_140_0211


down to a stop.


14-209
06/09/15 17:39:18 62SWA00A_140_0212

• Shift Solenoid Valve D Stuck ON 9. Choose Shift Solenoid D in the Miscellaneous Test
• Shift Valve D Stuck Menu, and check that shift solenoid valve D
• A/T Clutch Pressure Control Solenoid Valve C Stuck operates with the HDS.
OFF
and any on-board snapshot, and review General YES−Go to step 10.
NO−Replace shift solenoid valve D (see page
1. Warm up the engine to normal operating 14-235), then go to step 15.
2. Make sure that the transmission is filled to the in the Miscellaneous Test Menu, and test A/T clutch
proper level, and check for fluid leaks. pressure control solenoid valve A with the HDS.
3. Drain the ATF (see step 3 on page 14-252) through a Does the HDS indicate NORMAL?
excessive clutch material. YES−Go to step 11.
Does the strainer have metal debris or excessive NO−Follow the instructions indicated on the HDS
clutch material? by the test result, but if the HDS has not determined
the cause of the failure, go to step 14. If any part is
YES−Replace the transmission, then go to step 15. replaced, go to step 15.
Freeze Data in A/T Mode Menu for a pass/fail. valve D, or replace the transmission, then go to
step 14.
14-210
ＳＷＡ７Ｅ１ＰＫ７７１０００９１７３３ＦＡＡＴ２０
06/09/15 17:39:18 62SWA00A_140_0213

valve A (see page 14-238).
Does A/ T clutch pressure control solenoid valve A

work properly?
YES−Repair the hydraulic system related to shift

valve E, or replace the transmission, then go to step
15.

valve A (see page 14-240), then go to step 15.


down to a stop.


14-211
06/09/15 17:39:18 62SWA00A_140_0214

• Shift Solenoid Valves B or C Stuck OFF 9. Choose Shift Solenoid B in the Miscellaneous Test
• Shift Valves B or C Stuck Menu, and make sure shift solenoid valve B
and any on-board snapshot, and review General Is a clicking sound heard?
temperature (the radiator fan comes on). NO−Replace shift solenoid valve B (see page
proper level, and check for fluid leaks. 10. Choose Shift Solenoid C in the Miscellaneous Test
Menu, and check that shift solenoid valve C
3. Drain the ATF (see step 3 on page 14-252) through a operates with the HDS.
excessive clutch material. Is a clicking sound heard?
Does the strainer have metal debris or excessive YES−Go to step 11.
clutch material?
YES−Replace the transmission, then go to step 14. 14-235), then go to step 14.
Freeze Data in A/T Mode Menu for a pass/fail. valves B and C, or replace the transmission, then
go to step 14.
14-212
ＳＷＡ７Ｅ１ＰＫ７７１０００９１７３４ＦＡＡＴ２０
06/09/15 17:39:19 62SWA00A_140_0215


down to a stop.


14-213
06/09/15 17:39:19 62SWA00A_140_0216

DTC P2122: Accelerator Pedal Position (APP) 5. Update the PCM if it does not have the latest
Sensor A (Throttle Position Sensor D) Circuit software (see page 14-9), or substitute a known-
Low Voltage Input good PCM (see page 14-10).
NOTE: Before you troubleshoot, record all freeze data 6. Turn the ignition switch ON (II).
Troubleshooting Information (see page 14-5). 7. Check for DTC(s) in the DTCs/Freeze Data in A/T
3. Check whether DTC P2122 is indicated in the DTCs/ good PCM (see page 14-10), then recheck. If the
Freeze Data in PGM-FI Mode Menu with the HDS. PCM was substituted, go to step 1.
Is DT C P2122 indicated in the PGM-F I system? NO−If DTC P2122 is not indicated, or if any other
YES−Troubleshoot for DTC P2122 in the PGM-FI
System; R20A1 and R20A2 engine models 8. Monitor the OBD STATUS for P2122 in the DTCs/
(see page 11-252), K24Z1 engine model (see page Freeze Data in A/T Mode Menu for a pass/fail.
11-639).
NO−Go to step 4.
4. Check whether DTC P2122 is indicated in the DTCs/ complete. If the PCM was substituted, replace the
Freeze Data in A/T Mode Menu with the HDS. original PCM; R20A1 and R20A2 engine models
Is DT C P2122 indicated? 11-613). If any other DTCs were indicated on step 7,
YES−Go to step 5.
NO−Intermittent failure, the system is OK at this connections and loose terminals at accelerator
time. pedal position sensor A and the PCM. If the PCM
14-214
ＳＷＡ７Ｅ１ＰＫ７７１０００９２１２２ＦＡＡＴ２０
06/09/15 17:39:19 62SWA00A_140_0217
DTC P2123: Accelerator Pedal Position (APP) 5. Update the PCM if it does not have the latest
Sensor A (Throttle Position Sensor D) Circuit software (see page 14-9), or substitute a known-
High Voltage Input good PCM (see page 14-10).
NOTE: Before you troubleshoot, record all freeze data 6. Turn the ignition switch ON (II).
Troubleshooting Information (see page 14-5). 7. Check for DTC(s) in the DTCs/Freeze Data in A/T
3. Check whether DTC P2123 is indicated in the DTCs/ good PCM (see page 14-10), then recheck. If the
Freeze Data in PGM-FI Mode Menu with the HDS. PCM was substituted, go to step 1.
Is DT C P2123 indicated in the PGM-F I system? NO−If DTC P2123 is not indicated, or if any other
YES−Troubleshoot for DTC P2123 in the PGM-FI
System; R20A1 and R20A2 engine models 8. Monitor the OBD STATUS for P2123 in the DTCs/
(see page 11-255), K24Z1 engine model (see page Freeze Data in A/T Mode Menu for a pass/fail.
11-642).
NO−Go to step 4.
4. Check whether the DTC P2123 is indicated in the complete. If the PCM was substituted, replace the
DTCs/Freeze Data in A/T Mode Menu with the HDS. original PCM; R20A1 and R20A2 engine models
Is DT C P2123 indicated? 11-613). If any other DTCs were indicated on step 7,
YES−Go to step 5.
NO−Intermittent failure, the system is OK at this connections and loose terminals at accelerator
time. pedal position sensor A and the PCM. If the PCM
14-215
ＳＷＡ７Ｅ１ＰＫ７７１０００９２１２３ＦＡＡＴ２０
06/09/15 17:39:19 62SWA00A_140_0218

DTC U0028: F-CAN Communication Circuit 5. Update the PCM if it does not have the latest
Error (F-CAN Bus OFF) software (see page 14-9), or substitute a known-
and any on-board snapshot, and review General 6. Turn the ignition switch ON (II).
1. Clear the DTC with the HDS. Mode Menu with the HDS.
2. Turn the ignition switch ON (II). Is DT C U0028 indicated?
3. Check whether DTC U0155 is indicated in the DTCs/ YES−If the PCM was updated, substitute a known-
Freeze Data in PGM-FI Mode Menu with the HDS. good PCM (see page 14-10), then recheck. If the
Is DT C U0155 indicated in the PGM-F I system?
NO−If DTC U0028 is not indicated, or if any other
YES−Troubleshoot for DTC U0155 in the PGM-FI DTCs are indicated, go to step 8.
System; R20A1 and R20A2 engine models
(see page 11-184), K24Z1 engine model (see page 8. Monitor the OBD STATUS for U0028 in the DTCs/
11-576). Freeze Data in A/T Mode Menu for a pass/fail.
NO−Go to step 4. Does the HDS indicate PASSED?
4. Check whether DTC U0028 is indicated in the DTCs/ YES−If the PCM was updated, troubleshooting is
Freeze Data in A/T Mode Menu with the HDS. complete. If the PCM was substituted, replace the
Is DT C U0028 indicated? (see page 11-226), K24Z1 engine model (see page
11-613). If any other DTCs were indicated on step 7,
YES−Go to step 5. go to the indicated DTC’s troubleshooting.
NO−Intermittent failure, the system is OK at this NO−If the HDS indicates FAILED, check for poor
time. connections and loose terminals at the PCM and
the connectors on the F-CAN circuit. If the PCM was
14-216
ＳＷＡ７Ｅ１ＰＫ７７１０００Ｕ００２８ＦＡＡＴ２０
06/09/15 17:39:19 62SWA00A_140_0219
DTC U0121: Lost Communication with ABS 5. Turn the ignition switch OFF.
Control Unit
and any on-board snapshot, and review General 7. Disconnect PCM connector A (44P).
8. Disconnect the ABS modulator-control unit 25P
1. Clear the DTC with the HDS. connector.
2. Turn the ignition switch ON (II). 9. Check for continuity between PCM connector
terminal A36 and ABS modulator-control unit 25P
3. Check that DTC U0121 recurs. connector terminal No. 1, and between PCM
connector terminal A37 and ABS modulator-control
Is DT C U0121 indicated? unit 25P connector terminal No. 17.
＊０１
ABS MODULATOR-CONTROL UNIT 25P CONNECTOR
YES−Go to step 4.
CAN H (WHT)
time.
4. Check whether any DTC is indicated in the DTCs/ CAN L Wire side of female terminals
Freeze Data in ABS Mode Menu with the HDS. (RED)
Is any DT C indicated in the ABS?

YES−Troubleshoot for indicated DTC in the ABS
system (see page 19-65).
NO−Go to step 5.
CAN H (WHT) CAN L (RED)
NO−Go to step 14.
(cont’d)
14-217
ＳＷＡ７Ｅ１ＰＫ７７１０００Ｕ０１２１ＦＡＡＴ２０
06/09/15 17:39:20 62SWA00A_140_0220

10. Update the PCM if it does not have the latest 14. Check the communication line between the ABS
software (see page 14-9), or substitute a known- modulator-control unit and the gauge control
good PCM (see page 14-10). module with the HDS.
11. Turn the ignition switch ON (II). Is there malf unction in the F -CAN line between the
ABS modulator-control unit and gauge control
12. Check for DTC(s) in the DTCs/Freeze Data in A/T module?
YES−Repair open in the wires between the ABS
Is DT C U0121 indicated? modulator-control unit connector and CAN
communication lines.
good PCM (see page 14-10), then recheck. If the NO−Substitute a known-good ABS modulator-
PCM was substituted, go to step 1. control unit (see page 19-99), then recheck. If the
symptom/indication goes away with a known-good
NO−If DTC U0121 is not indicated, or if any other ABS modulator-control unit, replace the original
DTCs are indicated, go to step 13. ABS modulator-control unit.
13. Monitor the OBD STATUS for U0121 in the DTCs/



connections and loose terminals at the ABS
modulator-control unit and the PCM. If the PCM
14-218
06/09/15 17:39:20 62SWA00A_140_0221
DTC U0122: Lost Communication with VSA 5. Turn the ignition switch OFF.
Control Unit
and any on-board snapshot, and review General 7. Disconnect PCM connector A (44P).
8. Disconnect the VSA modulator-control unit
1. Clear the DTC with the HDS. connector.
2. Turn the ignition switch ON (II). 9. Check for continuity between PCM connector
terminal A36 and VSA modulator-control unit
3. Check that DTC U0122 recurs. connector terminal No. 39, and between PCM
connector terminal A37 and VSA modulator-control
Is DT C U0122 indicated? unit connector terminal No. 38.
＊０１
YES−Go to step 4.

time.
4. Check whether any DTC is indicated in the DTCs/

Freeze Data in VSA Mode Menu with the HDS. CAN H (WHT) CAN L (RED)
Terminal side of
Is any DT C indicated in the V SA? female terminals VSA MODULATOR-
CONTROL UNIT
YES−Troubleshoot for indicated DTC in the VSA CONNECTOR
system (see page 19-105). CAN L (RED)
NO−Go to step 5.
CAN H (WHT)
NO−Go to step 14.
(cont’d)
14-219
ＳＷＡ７Ｅ１ＰＫ７７１０００Ｕ０１２２ＦＡＡＴ２０
06/09/15 17:39:20 62SWA00A_140_0222

10. Update the PCM if it does not have the latest 14. Check the communication line between the VSA
software (see page 14-9), or substitute a known- modulator-control unit and the gauge control
good PCM (see page 14-10). module with the HDS.
11. Turn the ignition switch ON (II). Is there malf unction in the F -CAN line between the
V SA modulator-control unit and gauge control
12. Check for DTC(s) in the DTCs/Freeze Data in A/T module?
YES−Repair open in the wires between the VSA
Is DT C U0122 indicated? modulator-control unit connector and CAN
communication lines.
good PCM (see page 14-10), then recheck. If the NO−Substitute a known-good VSA modulator-
PCM was substituted, go to step 1. control unit (see page 19-169), then recheck. If the
symptom/indication goes away with a known-good
NO−If DTC U0122 is not indicated, or if any other VSA modulator-control unit, replace the original
DTCs are indicated, go to step 13. VSA modulator-control unit.
13. Monitor the OBD STATUS for U0122 in the DTCs/



connections and loose terminals at the VSA
modulator-control unit and the PCM. If the PCM
14-220
06/09/15 17:39:20 62SWA00A_140_0223
DTC U0155: Lost Communication with Gauge 5. Update the PCM if it does not have the latest
Control Module software (see page 14-9), or substitute a known-
and any on-board snapshot, and review General 6. Turn the ignition switch ON (II).
1. Clear the DTC with the HDS. Mode Menu with the HDS.
2. Turn the ignition switch ON (II). Is DT C U0155 indicated?
3. Check whether DTC U0155 is indicated in the DTCs/ YES−If the PCM was updated, substitute a known-
Freeze Data in PGM-FI Mode Menu with the HDS. good PCM (see page 14-10), then recheck. If the
Is DT C U0155 indicated in the PGM-F I system?
NO−If DTC U0155 is not indicated, or if any other
YES−Troubleshoot for DTC U0155 in the PGM-FI DTCs are indicated, go to step 8.
System; R20A1 and R20A2 engine models
(see page 11-184), K24Z1 engine model (see page 8. Monitor the OBD STATUS for U0155 in the DTCs/
11-576). Freeze Data in A/T Mode Menu for a pass/fail.
NO−Go to step 4. Does the HDS indicate PASSED?
4. Check whether the DTC U0155 is indicated in the YES−If the PCM was updated, troubleshooting is
DTCs/Freeze Data in A/T Mode Menu with the HDS. complete. If the PCM was substituted, replace the
Is DT C U0155 indicated? (see page 11-226), K24Z1 engine model (see page
11-613). If any other DTCs were indicated on step 7,
YES−Go to step 5. go to the indicated DTC’s troubleshooting.
NO−Intermittent failure, the system is OK at this NO−If the HDS indicates FAILED, check for poor
time. connections and loose terminals at the gauge
control module and the PCM. If the PCM was
14-221
ＳＷＡ７Ｅ１ＰＫ７７１０００Ｕ０１５５ＦＡＡＴ２０
06/09/15 17:39:21 62SWA00A_140_0224
Road Test
1. Warm up the engine to normal operating 5. Prepare the HDS to take a HIGH SPEED SNAPSHOT
temperature (the radiator fan comes on). (refer to the HDS user’s guide for more details if
needed):
2. Apply the parking brake, and block both rear
wheels. Start the engine, then shift to the D position • Select High Speed icon.
while pressing the brake pedal. Press the • Select these parameters:
accelerator pedal, and release it suddenly. The – VSS veh speed
engine should not stall. – Output Shaft (Countershaft) Speed
– Input Shaft (Mainshaft) Speed (rpm)
3. Repeat step 2 in all shift lever positions. – RPM engine speed
– Relative TP Sensor
4. Connect the HDS to the DLC (A), and go to the A/T – APP Sensor A
data list. If the HDS does not communicate with the – ATF Temp sensor
PCM, troubleshoot the DLC circuit; R20A1 and – Battery voltage
R20A2 engine models (see page 11-199), K24Z1 – Shift control
engine model (see page 11-589). – Brake Switch
＊０１ • Set the Trigger Type to Parameter.
• Adjust the Parameter setting to APP Sensor A
above 0.75 V.
• Set the recording time to 60 seconds.
• Set the Trigger point to −30 seconds.
6. Find a suitable level road. When you are ready to

do the test, press OK on the HDS.
7. Monitor the HDS and accelerate quickly until the

APP Sensor A reads 0.75 V. Maintain a steady
throttle until the transmission shifts to 5th gear,
then slow the vehicle and come to a stop.
A
8. Save the snapshot if the entire event was recorded
or increase the recording time setting as necessary
and repeat step 7.
9. Adjust the parameter setting to 2.25 V. Test-drive

the vehicle again. While monitoring the HDS
accelerate quickly until the APP Sensor A reads
2.25 V. Maintain a steady throttle until the
transmission shifts to 5th gear (or reasonable
speed), then slow the vehicle and come to a stop.
10. Save the snapshot if the entire event was recorded

or increase the recording time setting as necessary
and repeat step 9.
11. Accelerate quickly until the accelerator pedal is to

the floor. Maintain a steady pedal until the
transmission shifts to 3rd gear, then slow to a stop,
and save the snapshot.
14-222
ＳＷＡ７Ｅ１ＰＥ１０４００００００００ＦＥＡＴ００
06/09/15 17:39:21 62SWA00A_140_0225
12. Review each snapshot individually, and compare Downshift: D Position (reference)
the Shift Command, the APP Sensor A voltage, and Accelerator pedal position sensor voltage:
the Vehicle Speed to the table below. 0.8 V
Lock-up OFF 49−57 km/h (30−35 mph)
K24Z1 Engine Model 5th→4th 49−59 km/h (30−37 mph)
Upshift: D Position 4th→3rd 33−39 km/h (21−24 mph)
Accelerator pedal position sensor voltage: 3rd→1st 7−13 km/h (4−8 mph)
0.8 V Accelerator pedal position sensor voltage:
1st→2nd 16−20 km/h (10−12 mph) 2.25 V
2nd→3rd 27−33 km/h (17−21 mph) Lock-up OFF 89−101 km/h (55−63 mph)
3rd→4th 40−48 km/h (25−30 mph) Fully-opened throttle
4th→5th 59−69 km/h (37−43 mph) Accelerator pedal position sensor voltage:
Lock-up ON 50−58 km/h (31−36 mph) 4.5 V
Accelerator pedal position sensor voltage: 5th→4th 182−198 km/h (113−123 mph)
2.25 V 4th→3rd 133−147 km/h (83−91 mph)
1st→2nd 32−38 km/h (20−24 mph) 3rd→2nd 82−94 km/h (51−58 mph)
2nd→3rd 54−64 km/h (34−40 mph) 2nd→1st 40−50 km/h (25−31 mph)
3rd→4th 83−95 km/h (52−59 mph)
4th→5th 131−145 km/h (81−90 mph)
Lock-up ON 121−135 km/h (75−84 mph)
Fully-opened throttle
Accelerator pedal position sensor voltage:
4.5 V
1st→2nd 58−68 km/h (36−42 mph)
2nd→3rd 103−115 km/h (64−72 mph)
3rd→4th 159−175 km/h (99−108 mph)
(cont’d)
14-223
06/09/15 17:39:21 62SWA00A_140_0226
Road Test (cont’d)

R20A1 and R20A2 Engine Models Downshift: D Position (reference)
Upshift: D Position Accelerator pedal position sensor voltage:
Accelerator pedal position sensor voltage: 0.8 V
0.8 V Lock-up OFF 47−55 km/h (29−34 mph)
1st→2nd 17−21 km/h (11−13 mph) 5th→4th 47−57 km/h (29−35 mph)
2nd→3rd 29−35 km/h (18−22 mph) 4th→3rd 29−35 km/h (18−22 mph)
3rd→4th 39−47 km/h (24−29 mph) 3rd→1st 7−13 km/h (4−8 mph)
4th→5th 59−69 km/h (37−43 mph) Accelerator pedal position sensor voltage:
Lock-up ON 48−56 km/h (30−35 mph) 2.25 V
Accelerator pedal position sensor voltage: Lock-up OFF 85−97 km/h (53−60 mph)
2.25 V Fully-opened throttle
1st→2nd 30−36 km/h (19−22 mph) Accelerator pedal position sensor voltage:
2nd→3rd 55−65 km/h (34−40 mph) 4.5 V
3rd→4th 82−94 km/h (51−58 mph) Lock-up OFF 185−201 km/h (115−125 mph)
4th→5th 117−131 km/h (73−81 mph) 5th→4th 182−198 km/h (113−123 mph)
Lock-up ON 105−117 km/h (65−73 mph) 4th→3rd 138−152 km/h (86−94 mph)
Fully-opened throttle 3rd→2nd 84−96 km/h (52−60 mph)
Accelerator pedal position sensor voltage: 2nd→1st 40−50 km/h (25−31 mph)
4.5 V
1st→2nd 58−68 km/h (36−42 mph) 13. Drive the vehicle in 4th or 5th gear in the D position,
2nd→3rd 103−115 km/h (64−71 mph) then shift to the 2 position. The vehicle should
3rd→4th 159−175 km/h (99−109 mph) immediately begin to slow down from engine
braking.
14. Shift to the R position, briefly accelerate from a

stop at full throttle, and check for abnormal noise
and clutch slippage.
15. Park the vehicle on a slope (about 16 degrees),

apply the parking brake, and shift into the P
position. Release the brake; the vehicle should not
move.
NOTE: Always use the brake to hold the vehicle,

when stopped on an incline in gear. Depending on
the grade of the incline, the vehicle could roll
backwards if the brake is released.
14-224
06/09/15 17:39:21 62SWA00A_140_0227
Stall Speed Test

1. Make sure the transmission fluid is filled to the 7. Allow 2 minutes for cooling, then repeat the test in
proper level (see page 14-251). the 2, 1, and R positions.
2. Apply the parking brake, and block all four wheels. NOTE:
• Do not test stall speed for more than 10 seconds
3. Connect the HDS to the DLC (A), and go to the A/T at a time.
data list. If the HDS does not communicate with the • Stall speed tests should be used for diagnostic
PCM, troubleshoot the DLC circuit; R20A1 and purposes only.
R20A2 engine models (see page 11-199), K24Z1 • Stall speed should be the same in the D, 2, 1, and
engine model (see page 11-589). R positions.
＊０１ • Do not test stall speed with the A/T pressure
gauges installed.
Stall Speed rpm

K24Z1 Engine Model:
Specification: 2,245 rpm (min−1)
Service Limit: 2,295−2,595 rpm (min−1)
R20A1 and R20A2 Engine Models:

Specification: 2,540 rpm (min−1)
Service Limit: 2,490−2,590 rpm (min−1)
8. If the stall speeds are out of the service limit, the

possible problems and probable causes are listed
A
in the table.

Problem Probable causes
Stall speed rpm high • ATF pump output
4. Make sure the A/C switch OFF. in the D, 2, 1, and R low
positions • Clogged ATF strainer
5. After the engine has warmed up to normal • Regulator valve stuck
operating temperature (the radiator fan comes on), • Slipping clutch
shift to the D position. Stall speed rpm high Slippage of 1st clutch
in the 1 position
6. Firmly press and hold the brake pedal, and then Stall speed rpm high Slippage of 2nd clutch
firmly press the accelerator pedal for 6 to 8 seconds, in the 2 position
and note engine speed. Do not move the shift lever Stall speed rpm high Slippage of 4th clutch
while raising engine speed. in the R position
Stall speed rpm low • Engine output low
in the D, 2, 1, and R • Engine throttle valve
positions closed
• Torque converter
one-way clutch
slipping
14-225
ＳＷＡ７Ｅ１ＰＥ１０４７４００００００ＦＥＡＴ００
06/09/15 17:39:22 62SWA00A_140_0228
Pressure Test
Special Tools Required 5. Start the engine, and warm it up to normal
A/T oil clutch pressure gauge set 07406-0020004 operating temperature (the radiator fan comes on).
1. Make sure the transmission fluid is filled to the 6. Turn off the engine, and connect the HDS to the
proper level (see page 14-251). DLC (A).
2. 4WD model: Raise the vehicle on a lift, make sure it NOTE: If the HDS does not communicate with the
is securely supported, and allow all four wheels to PCM, troubleshoot the DLC circuit; R20A1 and
rotate freely. R20A2 engine models (see page 11-199), K24Z1
2WD model: Raise the front of the vehicle, make engine model (see page 11-589).
sure it is securely supported, and allow the front ＊０３
3. Remove the splash shield.
4. Connect the oil pressure gauge to the line pressure

inspection hole (A). Do not allow dust or other
foreign particles to enter the hole while connecting
the gauge.
＊０１
A/T OIL PRESSURE GAUGE SET
07406-0020004
7. Measure the line pressure at the line pressure

inspection port in the P or N position while holding
the engine speed at 2,000 rpm (min−1).
NOTE: Higher pressure may be indicated if

measurements are made in the shift lever position
＊０２ other than P or N.
K24Z1 Engine Model

Pressure Fluid Pressure
Standard Service Limit
Line 930−980 kPa 840 kPa
A
(9.5−10.0 kgf/cm2, (8.7 kgf/cm2,
140−142 psi) 120 psi)
R20A1 and R20A2 Engine Models

Line 907−956 kPa 830 kPa
(9.25−9.75 kgf/cm2, (8.5 kgf/cm2,
132−139 psi) 120 psi)
14-226
ＳＷＡ７Ｅ１ＰＥ１０４１０８０００００ＦＥＡＴ００
06/09/15 17:39:22 62SWA00A_140_0229
8. Turn the engine off, then disconnect the oil 12. Start the engine.
pressure gauge from the line pressure inspection
port. 13. Shift to the 1 position, and measure the 1st clutch
pressure at the 1st clutch pressure inspection port
9. Install the sealing bolt to the line pressure (B) while holding the engine speed at 2,000 rpm
inspection port with a new sealing washer, and (min−1).
tighten the bolt to 18 N·m (1.8 kgf·m, 13 lbf·ft). Do
not reuse the old sealing washer. 14. Shift to the 2 position, and measure the 2nd clutch
pressure at the 2nd clutch pressure inspection port
10. Connect the oil pressure gauge to the 1st clutch (C) while holding the engine speed at 2,000 rpm
pressure inspection port (B). (min−1).
＊０４
K24Z1 Engine Model
B
1st clutch 930−980 kPa 840 kPa
(B) (9.5−10.0 kgf/cm2, (8.6 kgf/cm2,
2nd clutch 140−142 psi) 120 psi)
(C)

1st clutch 907−956 kPa 830 kPa
(B) (9.25−9.75 kgf/cm2, (8.5 kgf/cm2,
2nd clutch 132−139 psi) 120 psi)
(C)
11. Remove the air cleaner housing and intake air duct, 15. Turn the engine off, remove the air cleaner housing
and connect the oil pressure gauge to the 2nd and intake air duct, then disconnect the oil pressure
clutch pressure inspection port (C). Then gauges from the 1st clutch pressure and 2nd clutch
temporarily install the air cleaner housing and pressure inspection ports.
intake air duct.
＊０５ 16. Install the sealing bolts in the 1st clutch pressure
and 2nd clutch pressure inspection ports with new
sealing washers, and tighten the bolts to 18 N·m
(1.8 kgf·m, 13 lbf·ft). Do not reuse the old sealing
C washers.
17. Install the air cleaner housing and intake air duct.
(cont’d)
14-227
06/09/15 17:39:23 62SWA00A_140_0230
Pressure Test (cont’d)

18. Connect the oil pressure gauge to the 3rd clutch 20. Cancel the transmission 2nd-hold control mode
pressure inspection port (D) and the 5th clutch with the HDS; choose Pressure Test Assistance
pressure inspection port (F). Mode in the Miscellaneous Test Menu of the A/T
＊０６ Mode Menu.
D
21. Start the engine, shift to the D position, and select
the D3 driving mode by pressing the D3 switch.
22. Measure the 3rd clutch pressure at the 3rd clutch

pressure inspection port (D) while holding the
engine speed at 2,000 rpm (min−1).
23. Release the D3 driving mode by pressing the D3

switch, and measure the 4th clutch pressure at the
4th clutch pressure inspection port (E) while
holding the engine speed at 2,000 rpm (min−1).
24. Measure the 5th clutch pressure at the 5th clutch

F
pressure inspection port (F) while holding the
engine speed at 2,000 rpm (min−1).
19. Connect the oil pressure gauge to the 4th clutch
pressure inspection port (E). K24Z1 Engine Model
＊０７ Pressure Fluid Pressure
3rd clutch 930−980 kPa 840 kPa
E (D) (9.5−10.0 kgf/cm2, (8.6 kgf/cm2,
4th clutch 140−142 psi) 120 psi)
(E)
5th clutch
(F)

3rd clutch 907−956 kPa 830 kPa
(D) (9.25−9.75 kgf/cm2, (8.5 kgf/cm2,
4th clutch 132−139 psi) 120 psi)
(E)
5th clutch
(F)
14-228
06/09/15 17:39:23 62SWA00A_140_0231
25. Bring the engine back to an idle, then apply the 29. If the pressure pressure measurements are out of
brake pedal to stop the wheels from rotating. the service limit, the possible problems and
probable causes are listed in the table.
26. Shift to the R position, then release the brake pedal.
Raise the engine speed to 2,000 rpm (min−1), and Problem Probable causes
measure the 4th clutch pressure at the 4th clutch No or low line • Torque converter
pressure inspection port (E). pressure • ATF pump
• Regulator valve
K24Z1 Engine Model • Torque converter
Pressure Fluid Pressure check valve
Standard Service Limit • Clogged ATF strainer
4th clutch 930−980 kPa 840 kPa No or low 1st clutch • 1st clutch
(E) in R (9.5−10.0 kgf/cm2, (8.6 kgf/cm2, pressure • O-rings
140−142 psi) 120 psi) No or low 2nd clutch • 2nd clutch
pressure • O-rings
R20A1 and R20A2 Engine Models No or low 3rd clutch • 3rd clutch
Pressure Fluid Pressure pressure • O-rings
Standard Service Limit No or low 4th clutch • 4th clutch
4th clutch 907−956 kPa 830 kPa pressure • O-rings
(E) in R (9.25−9.75 kgf/cm2, (8.5 kgf/cm2, No or low 5th clutch • 5th clutch
132−139 psi) 120 psi) pressure • O-rings
No or low 4th clutch • Servo valve
27. Turn the engine off, then disconnect the oil pressure in the R • 4th clutch
pressure gauges from the 3rd, 4th, and 5th clutch position • O-rings
pressure inspection ports.
30. Install the splash shield.
28. Install the sealing bolts in the 3rd, 4th, and 5th
clutch pressure inspection ports with new sealing
washers, and tighten the bolts to 18 N·m (1.8 kgf·m,
13 lbf·ft). Do not reuse the old sealing washers.
14-229
06/09/15 17:39:24 62SWA00A_140_0232
Shift Solenoid Valve Test

1. Connect the HDS to the DLC (A). 6. Disconnect the shift solenoid harness connector.
＊０１＊０２
2. Choose Shift Solenoid A, B, C, D, and E in the

Miscellaneous Test Menu on the HDS.

R20A2 engine models (see page 11-199), K24Z1 7. Measure shift solenoid valve resistance between
engine model (see page 11-589). shift solenoid harness connector terminals below
and body ground:
3. Check that shift solenoid valves A, B, C, D, and E
operate with the HDS. A clicking sound should be • No. 1 terminal: Shift solenoid valve C
heard. • No. 2 terminal: Shift solenoid valve B
• No. 3 terminal: Shift solenoid valve E
• If a clicking sound is heard, the valves are OK. • No. 5 terminal: Shift solenoid valve A
The test is complete, disconnect the HDS. • No. 8 terminal: Shift solenoid valve D
• If no clicking sound is heard, go to step 4, and
test the solenoid valves. Standard: 12−25
4. Raise the vehicle up on a lift, or apply the parking • If the resistance is within the standard, go to step
brake, block the rear wheels, and raise the front of 8 and check solenoid valve for clicking sound.
the vehicle. Make sure it is securely supported. • If the resistance is out of standard, go to step 9
and test shift solenoid valves.
8. Connect a jumper wire from the negative battery
terminal to body ground, and connect another
jumper wire from the positive battery terminal to
each shift solenoid harness connector terminals
individually. A clicking sound should be heard.
• If a clicking sound is heard, the valves are OK.

The test is complete, connect the connector.
• If no clicking sound is heard, go to step 9 and test
shift solenoid valves.
14-230
ＳＷＡ７Ｅ１ＰＥ１０４１０６５４８０１ＦＥＡＴ００
06/09/15 17:39:24 62SWA00A_140_0233
9. Remove the drain plug (A), and drain the 16. For K24Z1 engine model: Remove the ATF dipstick,
transmission fluid (ATF). and remove the bolts securing the ATF cooler line
＊０３ (A). Remove the harness clamp (B), and remove the
B
ATF dipstick guide tube (C).
＊０４
C
6 x 1.0 mm
12 N·m
(1.2 kgf·m,
8.7 lbf·ft)
A
A
18 x 1.5 mm
49 N·m (5.0 kgf·m, 36 lbf·ft)
10. Reinstall the drain plug with the new sealing

washer (B).
B
11. Get the customer’s radio (and navigation) anti-theft 17. For R20A1 and R20A2 engine models: Remove the
codes if equipped, and write down the radio ATF dipstick, remove the harness clamp (A) from
presets. its bracket (B), and remove the bracket. Remove the
bolts securing the ATF cooler line (C). Remove the
12. Disconnect the negative terminal from the battery, harness clamp (D), and remove the ATF dipstick
then disconnect the positive terminal. guide tube (E).
＊０５
6 x 1.0 mm
13. Remove the battery hold-down bracket, and 12 N·m (1.2 kgf·m, 8.7 lbf·ft)
remove the battery cover, battery, and battery tray. A
14. Remove the battery base. B
6 x 1.0 mm
15. Remove the air cleaner housing and intake air duct. 12 N·m
(1.2 kgf·m,
8.7 lbf·ft)
(cont’d)
14-231
06/09/15 17:39:25 62SWA00A_140_0234
Shift Solenoid Valve Test (cont’d)

18. Remove the shift solenoid valve cover (A), dowel 19. Disconnect the connectors from shift solenoid
pins (B), and gasket (C). valve A, shift solenoid valve B, shift solenoid valve
＊０６ C, shift solenoid valve D, and shift solenoid valve E.
＊０７
C
B
B
C
D A
6 x 1.0 mm
12 N·m
A (1.2 kgf·m,
8.7 lbf·ft)
20. Measure the resistance of each shift solenoid valve

between the connector terminals and body ground.
Standard: 12−25
• If the resistance is out of standard, go to step 23

and replace shift solenoid valve.
• If the resistance is within the standard, go to step
21 and check solenoid valve for a clicking sound.

terminal to body ground, and connect another
jumper wire from the positive battery terminal to
each solenoid valve terminal individually.
• If a clicking sound is heard, go to step 22 and

replace the shift solenoid harness.
• If no clicking sound is heard, go to step 23 and
replace shift solenoid valve.
14-232
06/09/15 17:39:26 62SWA00A_140_0235
22. Remove the shift solenoid harness connector (A), 24. Install new O-rings (two O-rings per solenoid valve)
and replace it. Install a new O-ring (B) on the shift (F) on the reused solenoid valves.
solenoid harness connector, and install the
connector in the transmission housing, then go to NOTE: A new solenoid valve comes with new
step 28. O-rings. If you install a new solenoid valve, use the
＊０８ O-rings provided on it.
25. Install shift solenoid valve C (brown connector),

shift solenoid valve D (black connector), and shift
solenoid valve E (black connector) by holding the
shift solenoid valve body; make sure the mounting
bracket contacts the servo body.
NOTE: Do not hold the solenoid valve by the

connector when installing the solenoid valve. Be
sure to hold the solenoid valve body.
B
6 x 1.0 mm 26. Install shift solenoid valve A (brown connector) by
12 N·m
(1.2 kgf·m, holding the shift solenoid valve body; make sure
A 8.7 lbf·ft) the mounting bracket contacts the bracket of shift
solenoid valve D.
23. Remove the mounting bolts, then remove the
solenoid valves. NOTE: Do not install shift solenoid valve A before
＊０９ installing shift solenoid valve D. If shift solenoid
F valve A is installed before installing shift solenoid
valve D, it may damage the hydraulic control
system.
C
27. Install shift solenoid valve B (brown connector) by

holding the shift solenoid valve body; make sure
the mounting bracket contacts the bracket of shift
solenoid valve E.
NOTE: Do not install shift solenoid valve B before

installing shift solenoid valve E. If shift solenoid
F F valve B is installed before installing shift solenoid
E
valve E, it may damage the hydraulic control
system.
F
D B
28. Connect the RED harness terminal to shift solenoid
valve E, the GRN harness terminal to shift solenoid
F 6 x 1.0 mm valve C, the ORN harness terminal to shift solenoid
12 N·m
(1.2 kgf·m, valve B, the BLU harness terminal to shift solenoid
A 8.7 lbf·ft) valve A, and the YEL, WHT, WHT harness terminal
to shift solenoid valve D.
(cont’d)
14-233
06/09/15 17:39:26 62SWA00A_140_0236
Shift Solenoid Valve Test (cont’d)

29. Install the shift solenoid valve cover, dowel pins,
and a new gasket.
30. Install the new O-ring on the ATF dipstick guide

tube, and install the guide tube then secure it with
the bolts.
31. Check the connector for rust, dirt, or oil, clean or

repair if necessary, then connect the connector
securely. Install the harness clamp in its clamp
bracket on the ATF dipstick guide tube.
32. Secure the ATF cooler line with the bolts.
33. For R20A1 and R20A2 engine models: Install the

harness clamp bracket, and install the harness
clamp on its bracket.
34. Refill the transmission with ATF (see step 5 on page

14-252).
35. Install the intake air duct and air cleaner housing.
36. Install the battery base.
37. Install the battery tray, battery, battery cover, and

battery hold-down bracket, then connect battery
terminals.
39. Enter the radio (and navigation) anti-theft codes if

equipped, then enter the radio presets, and set the
clock.
40. Do the power window control unit reset procedure

(see page 22-458).
14-234
06/09/15 17:39:26 62SWA00A_140_0237
Shift Solenoid Valve, Shift Solenoid Harness Replacement

1. Get the customer’s radio (and navigation) anti-theft 10. For K24Z1 engine model: Remove the ATF dipstick,
codes if equipped, and write down the radio and remove the bolts securing the ATF cooler line
presets. (A). Remove the harness clamp (B), and remove the
2. Raise the vehicle up on a lift, or apply the parking ＊０２
brake, block the rear wheels, and raise the front of C
the vehicle. Make sure it is securely supported. 6 x 1.0 mm
12 N·m
(1.2 kgf·m,
3. Remove the splash shield. 8.7 lbf·ft)
4. Remove the drain plug (A), and drain the

transmission fluid (ATF).
＊０１
B
11. For R20A1 and R20A2 engine models: Remove the

ATF dipstick, remove the harness clamp (A) from
its bracket (B), and remove the bracket. Remove the
A
18 x 1.5 mm harness clamp (D), and remove the ATF dipstick
49 N·m (5.0 kgf·m, 36 lbf·ft) guide tube (E).
＊０３
6 x 1.0 mm
5. Reinstall the drain plug with the new sealing 12 N·m (1.2 kgf·m, 8.7 lbf·ft)
washer (B). A
6. Disconnect the negative terminal from the battery, B

then disconnect the positive terminal. 6 x 1.0 mm
12 N·m
7. Remove the battery hold-down bracket, and (1.2 kgf·m,
8.7 lbf·ft)
remove the battery cover, battery, and battery tray.
E
8. Remove the battery base.
9. Remove the air cleaner housing and intake air duct.
(cont’d)
14-235
ＳＷＡ７Ｅ１ＰＥ１０４１０６５４８０１ＫＢＡＴ００
06/09/15 17:39:27 62SWA00A_140_0238
Shift Solenoid Valve, Shift Solenoid Harness Replacement (cont’d)

12. Remove the shift solenoid valve cover (A), dowel 13. Disconnect the shift solenoid valve connectors.
pins (B), and gasket (C).
＊０４ • If replacing shift solenoid valve(s), go to step 14.
• If replacing the shift solenoid harness, remove
the shift solenoid harness connector (A), and
replace it. Install a new O-ring (B) on the shift
solenoid harness connector, and install the
connector in the transmission housing, then go
to step 19.
B ＊０５
6 x 1.0 mm
12 N·m
A (1.2 kgf·m,
8.7 lbf·ft)
B
6 x 1.0 mm
12 N·m
(1.2 kgf·m,
A 8.7 lbf·ft)
14-236
06/09/15 17:39:27 62SWA00A_140_0239
14. Remove the mounting bolts, then remove the 18. Install shift solenoid valve B (brown connector) by
solenoid valves. holding the shift solenoid valve body; make sure
＊０６ the mounting bracket contacts the bracket of shift
F solenoid valve E.
NOTE: Do not install shift solenoid valve B before

C
installing shift solenoid valve E. If shift solenoid
valve B is installed before installing shift solenoid
valve E, it may damage the hydraulic control
system.

valve C, the ORN harness terminal to shift solenoid
F F valve B, the BLU harness terminal to shift solenoid
E
valve A, and the YEL, WHT, WHT harness terminal
F
D B
and a new gasket.
F 6 x 1.0 mm
12 N·m
(1.2 kgf·m, 21. Install the new O-ring on the ATF dipstick guide
A 8.7 lbf·ft) tube, and install the guide tube then secure it with
the bolts.
15. Install new O-rings (two O-rings per solenoid valve)
(F) on the reused solenoid valves. 22. Check the connector for rust, dirt, or oil, then
connect the connector securely. Install the harness
NOTE: A new solenoid valve comes with new clamp in its clamp bracket on the ATF dipstick
O-rings. If you install a new solenoid valve, use the guide tube.
O-rings provided on it.
16. Install shift solenoid valve C (brown connector),
shift solenoid valve D (black connector), and shift 24. For R20A1 and R20A2 engine models: Install the
solenoid valve E (black connector) by holding the harness clamp bracket, and install the harness
shift solenoid valve body; make sure the mounting clamp on its bracket.
NOTE: Do not hold the solenoid valve by the 14-252).
connector when installing the solenoid valve. Be
sure to hold the solenoid valve body. 26. Install the intake air duct and air cleaner housing.
17. Install shift solenoid valve A (brown connector) by 27. Install the battery base.
holding the shift solenoid valve body; make sure
the mounting bracket contacts the bracket of shift 28. Install the battery tray, battery, battery cover, and
solenoid valve D. battery hold-down bracket, then connect battery
terminals.
NOTE: Do not install shift solenoid valve A before
installing shift solenoid valve D. If shift solenoid 29. Install the splash shield.
valve A is installed before installing shift solenoid
valve D, it may damage the hydraulic control 30. Enter the radio (and navigation) anti-theft codes if
system. equipped, then enter the radio presets, and set the
clock.

(see page 22-458).
14-237
06/09/15 17:39:28 62SWA00A_140_0240
A/T Clutch Pressure Control Solenoid Valve A Test

1. Connect the HDS to the DLC (A). 5. Disconnect the A/T clutch pressure control solenoid
＊０１ valve A connector.
＊０２

6. Measure A/T clutch pressure control solenoid valve
2. Choose Clutch Pressure Control (Linear) Solenoid A A resistance at the connector terminals.
in the Miscellaneous Test Menu on the HDS.
Standard: 3−10
PCM, troubleshoot the DLC circuit; R20A1 and • If the resistance is out of standard, replace A/T
R20A2 engine models (see page 11-199), K24Z1 clutch pressure control solenoid valve A
engine model (see page 11-589). (see page 14-240).
• If the resistance is within the standard, go to step
3. Test A/T clutch pressure control solenoid valve A 7.
with the HDS.
• If the valve tests OK, the test is complete. terminal to the solenoid valve A connector terminal
Disconnect the HDS. No. 2, and connect another jumper wire from the
• If the valve does not test OK, follow the positive battery terminal to the connector terminal
instructions on the HDS. No. 1.
• If the valve does not test OK, and the HDS does
not determine the cause, go to step 4. • If a clicking sound is heard, the valve is OK.
Reconnect the connector, and install all removed
4. Remove the air cleaner housing and intake air duct. parts.
• If no clicking sound is heard, go to step 8.
14-238
ＳＷＡ７Ｅ１ＰＥ１０４１０６１２２２３ＦＥＡＴ１０
06/09/15 17:41:16 62SWA00A_140_0241
8. For R20A1 and R20A2 engine models: Remove the 12. Connect a jumper wire from the negative battery
harness clamp (A) from its bracket (B), and remove terminal to A/T clutch pressure control solenoid
the bracket. Remove the bolts securing the ATF valve A connector terminal No. 2, and connect
cooler line (C). another jumper wire from the positive battery
＊０３ terminal to the connector terminal No. 1. Make sure
6 x 1.0 mm
12 N·m (1.2 kgf·m, 8.7 lbf·ft) A/T clutch pressure control solenoid valve A moves.
A ＊０５
6 x 1.0 mm
12 N·m
(1.2 kgf·m, 8.7 lbf·ft)
C 13. Disconnect one of the jumper wires and check

valve movement at the fluid passage in valve body
mounting surface. If the valve binds or moves
sluggishly, or if the solenoid valve does not operate,
9. Remove the mounting bolts and A/T clutch replace A/T clutch pressure control solenoid valve
pressure control solenoid valve A. A.
＊０４
6 x 1.0 mm 14. Clean the mounting surface and fluid passage of
12 N·m the solenoid valve body and transmission housing.
(1.2 kgf·m,
8.7 lbf·ft)
15. Install the new gasket on the transmission housing,
B and install the ATF pipe and ATF joint pipes. Install
the new O-rings over the ATF joint pipes.
D
16. Install A/T clutch pressure control solenoid valve A.

A
C securely.
E 18. For R20A1 and R20A2 engine models: Secure the

ATF cooler line with the bolts. Install the harness
clamp bracket, and install the harness clamp on its
bracket.
10. Remove the ATF pipe (B), ATF joint pipes (C),
O-rings (D), and gasket (E).
11. Check the fluid passage of the solenoid valve for

contamination.
14-239
06/09/15 17:41:16 62SWA00A_140_0242
A/T Clutch Pressure Control Solenoid Valve A Replacement

1. Remove the air cleaner housing and intake air duct. 4. Remove the mounting bolts and A/T clutch
pressure control solenoid valve A.
2. For R20A1 and R20A2 engine models: Remove the ＊０２
harness clamp (A) from its bracket (B), and remove 6 x 1.0 mm
the bracket. Remove the bolts securing the ATF 12 N·m
(1.2 kgf·m,
cooler line (C). 8.7 lbf·ft)
＊０１
6 x 1.0 mm
12 N·m (1.2 kgf·m, 8.7 lbf·ft) B
A D
6 x 1.0 mm
12 N·m
(1.2 kgf·m, 8.7 lbf·ft)
A
C
5. Remove the ATF pipe (B), ATF joint pips (C),
O-rings (D), and gasket (E).
3. Disconnect the A/T clutch pressure control solenoid 6. Clean the mounting surface and fluid passage of
valve A connector. the solenoid valve body and transmission housing.

and install the ATF pipe and ATF joint pipes. Install
the new O-rings over the ATF joint pipes.
8. Install A/T clutch pressure control solenoid valve A.
9. Check the connector for rust, dirt, or oil, then

connect the connector securely.
10. For R20A1 and R20A2 engine models: Secure the

ATF cooler line with the bolts. Install the harness
clamp bracket, and install the harness clamp on its
bracket.
14-240
ＳＷＡ７Ｅ１ＰＥ１０４１０６１２２２３ＫＢＡＴ１０
06/09/15 17:41:17 62SWA00A_140_0243
A/T Clutch Pressure Control Solenoid Valve B Test

＊０６ valve B connector.
＊０７

in the Miscellaneous Test Menu on the HDS. 7. Measure A/T clutch pressure control solenoid valve
B resistance at the connector terminals.
PCM, troubleshoot the DLC circuit; R20A1 and Standard: 3−10
engine model (see page 11-589). • If the resistance is out of standard, replace A/T
clutch pressure control solenoid valve B
3. Test A/T clutch pressure control solenoid valve B (see page 14-245).
with the HDS. • If the resistance is within the standard, go to step
8.
• If the valve tests OK, the test is complete.
Disconnect the HDS. 8. Connect a jumper wire from the negative battery
• If the valve does not test OK, follow the terminal to the solenoid valve B connector terminal
instructions on the HDS. No. 2, and connect another jumper wire from the
• If the valve does not test OK, and the HDS does positive battery terminal to the connector terminal
not determine the cause, go to step 4. No. 1.
4. Raise the vehicle up on a lift, or apply the parking • If a clicking sound is heard, the valve is OK.
brake, block the rear wheels, and raise the front of Reconnect the connector, and install the splash
the vehicle. Make sure it is securely supported. shield.
• If no clicking sound is heard, go to step 9.
(cont’d)
14-241
ＳＷＡ７Ｅ１ＰＥ１０４１０６１２２２３ＦＥＡＴ２０
06/09/15 17:41:17 62SWA00A_140_0244
A/T Clutch Pressure Control Solenoid Valve B Test (cont’d)

9. Disconnect the connector from A/T clutch pressure 13. Connect a jumper wire from the negative battery
control solenoid valve C. terminal to A/T clutch pressure control solenoid
＊０８ valve B connector terminal No. 2, and connect
6 x 1.0 mm another jumper wire from the positive battery
12 N·m
(1.2 kgf·m, terminal to the connector terminal No. 1. Make sure
8.7 lbf·ft) A/T clutch pressure control solenoid valve B moves.
C ＊０９
E 14. Disconnect one of the jumper wires and check

10. Remove A/T clutch pressure control solenoid valve sluggishly, or if the solenoid valve does not operate,
B and C. replace A/T clutch pressure control solenoid valve
B and C.
11. Remove the ATF joint pipes (A), O-rings (D), and
gasket (E). 15. Clean the mounting surface and fluid passage of
the solenoid valve body and solenoid valve cover.
contamination. 16. Install the new gasket on the transmission housing,
and install the ATF joint pipes.
17. Install the new O-rings over the ATF joint pipes.
18. Install A/T clutch pressure control solenoid valve B

and C.
19. Check the connectors for rust, dirt, or oil, clean or

repair if necessary, then connect the connectors
securely.
14-242
06/09/15 17:41:18 62SWA00A_140_0245
A/T Clutch Pressure Control Solenoid Valve C Test

＊１０ valve C connector.
＊１１
2. Choose Clutch Pressure Control (Linear) Solenoid C 7. Measure A/T clutch pressure control solenoid valve
in the Miscellaneous Test Menu on the HDS. C resistance at the connector terminals.
NOTE: If the HDS does not communicate with the Standard: 3−10
R20A2 engine models (see page 11-199), K24Z1 • If the resistance is out of standard, replace A/T
engine model (see page 11-589). clutch pressure control solenoid valve C
(see page 14-245).
3. Test A/T clutch pressure control solenoid valve C • If the resistance is within the standard, go to step
with the HDS. 8.
• If the valve tests OK, the test is complete. 8. Connect a jumper wire from the negative battery
Disconnect the HDS. terminal to the solenoid valve C connector terminal
• If the valve does not test OK, follow the No. 2, and connect another jumper wire from the
instructions on the HDS. positive battery terminal to the connector terminal
• If the valve does not test OK, and the HDS does No. 1.
not determine the cause, go to step 4.
• If a clicking sound is heard, the valve is OK.
4. Raise the vehicle up on a lift, or apply the parking Reconnect the connector, and install the splash
brake, block the rear wheels, and raise the front of shield.
the vehicle. Make sure it is securely supported. • If no clicking sound is heard, go to step 9.
(cont’d)
14-243
ＳＷＡ７Ｅ１ＰＥ１０４１０６１２２２３ＦＥＡＴ３０
06/09/15 17:41:18 62SWA00A_140_0246
A/T Clutch Pressure Control Solenoid Valve C Test (cont’d)

9. Disconnect the connector from A/T clutch pressure 13. Connect a jumper wire from the negative battery
control solenoid valve B. terminal to A/T clutch pressure control solenoid
＊１２ valve C connector terminal No. 2, and connect
6 x 1.0 mm another jumper wire from the positive battery
12 N·m
(1.2 kgf·m, terminal to the connector terminal No. 1. Make sure
8.7 lbf·ft) A/T clutch pressure control solenoid valve B moves.
C ＊１３
E 14. Disconnect one of the jumper wires and check

10. Remove A/T clutch pressure control solenoid valve sluggishly, or if the solenoid valve does not operate,
B and C. replace A/T clutch pressure control solenoid valve
B and C.
gasket (E). 15. Clean the mounting surface and fluid passage of
the solenoid valve body and solenoid valve cover.
contamination. 16. Install the new gasket on the transmission housing,
and install the ATF joint pipes.
17. Install the new O-rings over the ATF joint pipes.
18. Install A/T clutch pressure control solenoid valve B

and C.
19. Check the connectors for rust, dirt, or oil, clean or

repair if necessary, then connect the connectors
securely.
14-244
06/09/15 17:41:19 62SWA00A_140_0247
A/T Clutch Pressure Control Solenoid Valve B and C Replacement

1. Raise the vehicle up on a lift, or apply the parking 6. Clean the mounting surface and fluid passage of
brake, block the rear wheels, and raise the front of the solenoid valve body and solenoid valve cover.
the vehicle. Make sure it is securely supported.
2. Remove the splash shield. and install the ATF joint pipes.
3. Disconnect the connectors from A/T clutch 8. Install the new O-rings over the ATF joint pipes.
pressure control solenoid valve B and C.
＊０３ 9. Install A/T clutch pressure control solenoid valve B
6 x 1.0 mm and C.
12 N·m
(1.2 kgf·m,
8.7 lbf·ft) 10. Check the connectors for rust, dirt, or oil, then
C connect the connectors securely.

B
4. Remove A/T clutch pressure control solenoid valve

B and C.

gasket (E).
14-245
ＳＷＡ７Ｅ１ＰＥ１０４１０６１２２２３ＫＢＡＴ２０
06/09/15 17:41:19 62SWA00A_140_0248
Input Shaft (Mainshaft) Speed Output Shaft (Countershaft) Speed

Sensor Replacement Sensor Replacement
1. Remove the air cleaner housing and intake air duct. 1. Remove the air cleaner housing and intake air duct.
2. Disconnect the input shaft (mainshaft) speed 2. Disconnect the output shaft (countershaft) speed
sensor connector, and remove the input shaft sensor connector, and remove the output shaft
(mainshaft) speed sensor (A). (countershaft) speed sensor (A) and sensor washer
＊０１ (B) (only for K24Z1 engine model).
6 x 1.0 mm
12 N·m (1.2 kgf·m, 8.7 lbf·ft)
NOTE: The sensor washer is equipped on K24Z1
engine model; R20A1 and R20A2 engine models do
not have a sensor washer.
＊０１
6 x 1.0 mm
12 N·m (1.2 kgf·m, 8.7 lbf·ft)
A
B
B
A
3. Install the new O-ring (B) on the new input shaft
(mainshaft) speed sensor, then install the input C
shaft (mainshaft) speed sensor in the transmission
housing.
4. Check the connector for rust, dirt, or oil, then 3. Install the new O-ring (C) on the new output shaft
connect the connector securely. (countershaft) speed sensor, then install the output
shaft (countershaft) speed sensor and sensor
5. Install the intake air duct and air cleaner housing. washer (only for K24Z1 engine model) in the
4. Check the connector for rust, dirt, or oil, then

connect the connector securely.
14-246
ＳＷＡ７Ｅ１ＰＥ１０４１０６３４６１５ＫＢＡＴ００ＳＷＡ７Ｅ１ＰＥ１０４１０６４３８２１ＫＢＡＴ００
06/09/15 17:41:20 62SWA00A_140_0249
2nd Clutch Transmission Fluid 3rd Clutch Transmission Fluid

Pressure Switch Replacement Pressure Switch Replacement
1. Remove the air cleaner housing and intake air duct. 1. Raise the vehicle up on a lift, or apply the parking
brake, block the rear wheels, and raise the front of
2. Disconnect the 2nd clutch transmission fluid the vehicle. Make sure it is securely supported.
pressure switch connector, and remove the switch.
3. Install the new 2nd clutch transmission fluid
pressure switch (A) and a new sealing washer (B), 3. Disconnect the 3rd clutch transmission fluid
and tighten the switch. pressure switch connector, and remove the switch.
＊０１
4. Install the new 3rd clutch transmission fluid
B pressure switch (A) and a new sealing washer (B),
and tighten the switch.
＊０１
A
20 N·m
(2.0 kgf·m, 14 lbf·ft)
A
20 N·m
4. Make sure there is no water, oil, dust, or foreign

particles inside the connector. 5. Make sure there is no water, oil, dust, or foreign
particles inside the connector.
5. Connect the connector securely.
6. Connect the connector securely.
14-247
ＳＷＡ７Ｅ１ＰＥ１０４１０６１０１０１ＫＢＡＴ００ＳＷＡ７Ｅ１ＰＥ１０４１０６１０１１１ＫＢＡＴ００
06/09/15 17:41:20 62SWA00A_140_0250
ATF Temperature Sensor Test and Replacement

1. Raise the vehicle up on a lift, or apply the parking 6. Remove the drain plug (A), and drain the
brake, block the rear wheels, and raise the front of transmission fluid (ATF).
the vehicle. Make sure it is securely supported. ＊０２
B
3. Disconnect the shift solenoid harness connector.

＊０１
A
18 x 1.5 mm
49 N·m (5.0 kgf·m, 36 lbf·ft)

washer (B).
8. Get the customer’s radio (and navigation) anti-theft

codes if equipped, and write down the radio
presets.
9. Disconnect the negative terminal from the battery,

then disconnect the positive terminal.
10. Remove the battery hold-down bracket, and
4. Measure the ATF temperature sensor resistance remove the battery cover, battery, and battery tray.
between shift solenoid harness connector
terminals No. 6 and No. 7. 11. Remove the battery base.
Standard: 50 −25 k 12. Remove the air cleaner housing and intake air duct.
5. If the resistance is out of standard, replace the ATF

temperature sensor and solenoid harness; go to
step 6. The ATF temperature sensor is not available
separately from the solenoid harness.
If the measurement is within the standard, connect
the connector securely, and install the splash shield.
14-248
ＳＷＡ７Ｅ１ＰＥ１０４１０６１３０４１ＦＨＡＴ００
06/09/15 17:41:21 62SWA00A_140_0251
13. For K24Z1 engine model: Remove the ATF dipstick, 15. Remove the shift solenoid valve cover (A), dowel
and remove the bolts securing the ATF cooler line pins (B), and gasket (C).
(A). Remove the harness clamp (B), and remove the ＊０５
＊０３
C
6 x 1.0 mm
12 N·m
(1.2 kgf·m,
8.7 lbf·ft)
B
C
A
6 x 1.0 mm
12 N·m
A (1.2 kgf·m,
8.7 lbf·ft)
B
14. For R20A1 and R20A2 engine models: Remove the

ATF dipstick, remove the harness clamp (A) from
its bracket (B), and remove the bracket. Remove the
harness clamp (D), and remove the ATF dipstick
guide tube (E).
＊０４
6 x 1.0 mm
12 N·m (1.2 kgf·m, 8.7 lbf·ft)
A
6 x 1.0 mm
12 N·m
(1.2 kgf·m,
8.7 lbf·ft)
(cont’d)
14-249
06/09/15 17:41:21 62SWA00A_140_0252
ATF Temperature Sensor Test and Replacement (cont’d)

16. Remove the shift solenoid harness connector (A), 24. For R20A1 and R20A2 engine models: Install the
and replace it. harness clamp bracket, and install the harness
＊０６ clamp on its bracket.

14-252).
27. Install the battery base.
28. Install the battery tray, battery, battery cover, and

battery hold-down bracket, then connect battery
B terminals.
6 x 1.0 mm
12 N·m
(1.2 kgf·m, 29. Install the splash shield.
A 8.7 lbf·ft)
30. Enter the radio (and navigation) anti-theft codes if
17. Install a new O-ring (B) on the shift solenoid equipped, then enter the radio presets, and set the
harness connector, and install the connector in the clock.
18. Connect WHT harnesses and YEL harness (see page 22-458).
connector to shift solenoid valve D. The ATF
temperature sensor is assembled in the connector
with WHT harnesses.

valve B, and the BLU harness terminal to shift
solenoid valve A.

and a new gasket.
21. Install the new O-ring on the ATF dipstick guide

tube, and install the guide tube then secure it with
the bolts.

securely. Install the harness clamp in its clamp
bracket on the ATF dipstick guide tube.
14-250
06/09/15 17:41:22 62SWA00A_140_0253
ATF Level Check

NOTE: Keep all foreign particles out of the transmission. 6. If the level is below the lower mark, check for fluid
leaks at the transmission, and hose and line joints.
1. Park the vehicle on the level ground. If a problem is found, fix it before filling the
transmission.
temperature (the radiator fan comes on), and turn NOTE: If the vehicle is driven when the ATF level is
the engine off. Do not allow the engine to warm up below the lower mark:
longer than the time it takes for the radiator fan to • Transmission damage will result.
come on twice. • Vehicle does not move in any gear.
• Vehicle accelerates poorly, and flares when
NOTE: Check the fluid level within 60−90 seconds starting off in the D and R positions.
after turning the engine off. Higher fluid level may • The engine vibrates at idle.
be indicated if the radiator fan comes on twice or
more. 7. If the level is above the upper mark, drain the ATF
to proper level (see step 3 on page 14-252).
3. Remove the dipstick (yellow loop) (A) from the
dipstick guide tube, and wipe it with a clean cloth. NOTE: If the vehicle is driven when the ATF level is
＊０１ above the upper mark, the vehicle may creep
A forward while in the N position, or have a shifting
problem.
8. If necessary, fill the transmission with ATF through

the dipstick guide tube opening (A) to bring the
fluid level midway between the upper mark and
lower mark of the dipstick. Do not fill past the upper
B mark. Always use genuine Honda ATF-Z1
Automatic Transmission Fluid (ATF). Using a non-
Honda ATF can affect shift quality.
＊０３
C
4. Insert the dipstick into the guide tube aligning the

notch (B) with the guide tab (C).
5. Remove the dipstick and check the fluid level. It

should be between the upper mark (A) and lower
mark (B).
＊０２ A
A
notch with the guide tab.
14-251
ＳＷＡ７Ｅ１ＰＥ１０４０００１３００１ＭＡＡＴ００
06/09/15 17:41:22 62SWA00A_140_0254
ATF Replacement
NOTE: Keep all foreign particles out of the transmission. 5. Refill the transmission through the dipstick guide
tube opening (A) to bring the fluid level up to about
1. Park the vehicle on the level ground. midway between the upper mark and lower mark
of the dipstick with the recommended fluid. Do not
2. Warm up the engine to normal operating fill the fluid to excess of the upper mark. Always
temperature (the radiator fan comes on), and turn use genuine Honda ATF-Z1 Automatic
the engine off. Transmission Fluid (ATF). Using a non-Honda ATF
can affect shift quality.
transmission fluid (ATF). Automatic Transmission Fluid Capacity
＊０１ 4WD Model:
B
2.5 L (2.6 US qt, 2.2 lmp qt) at change
7.2 L (7.6 US qt, 6.3 lmp qt) at overhaul
2WD Model:
2.6 L (2.7 US qt, 2.3 lmp qt) at change
7.0 L (7.4 US qt, 6.2 lmp qt) at overhaul
＊０２
A
18 x 1.5 mm
49 N·m (5.0 kgf·m, 36 lbf·ft)
4. Reinstall the drain plug with a new sealing washer

(B).
A
14-252
ＳＷＡ７Ｅ１ＰＥ１０４０００１３００１ＫＢＡＴ００
06/09/15 17:41:23 62SWA00A_140_0255
6. Insert the dipstick (A) into the guide tube (B) 8. Remove the dipstick (A) and check the fluid level. It
aligning the notch (C) with the guide tab (D). should be between the upper mark (B) and lower
＊０３ mark (C).
A ＊０４
B
C

notch with the guide tab.
temperature (the radiator fan comes on), and turn
the engine off. Do not allow the engine to warm up
longer than the time it takes for the radiator fan to
come on twice.
NOTE: Check the fluid level within 60−90 seconds

after turning the engine off. Higher fluid level may
be indicated if the radiator fan comes on twice or
more.
14-253
06/09/15 17:41:23 62SWA00A_140_0256
Transfer Assembly Inspection

1. Raise the vehicle, and make sure it is supported 6. If the measurement is out of standard, remove the
securely. transfer assembly, and adjust the transfer gear
backlash (see page 14-457).
2. Shift the transmission into the N position.
7. Check for fluid leaks between the mating faces of
3. Make a reference mark (A) across the propeller the transfer assembly and transmission.
shaft (B) and the transfer companion flange (C).
＊０１ 8. If there is leak, remove the transfer assembly, and
B 8 x 1.25 mm
32 N·m replace the O-ring. Also check for fluid leaks
(3.3 kgf·m, 24 lbf·ft) between the mating surfaces of the transfer
housing and transfer cover. If there is a leak,
remove the transfer cover, and replace the O-ring.
C 9. Check for leaks between the transfer companion

flange and transfer oil seal.
10. If there is a leak, remove the transfer assembly

from the transmission, and replace the transfer oil
seal and O-ring on the transfer output shaft (hypoid
gear). If oil seal and O-ring replacement is required,
you will need to check and adjust the transfer gear
tooth contact, transfer gear backlash, the tapered
roller bearing starting torque, and the total starting
torque (see page 14-457). Do not replace the oil seal
A with the transfer assembly on the transmission.
4. Separate the propeller shaft from the transfer

assembly.
5. Set a dial indicator (A) on the transfer companion

flange (B), and measure the transfer gear backlash.
Standard: 0.06−0.16 mm (0.002−0.006 in.)

＊０２
B
14-254
ＳＷＡ７Ｅ１ＰＥ１０４７４５０００００ＭＡＡＴ１０
06/09/15 17:41:24 62SWA00A_140_0257
Transfer Assembly Removal

1. Raise the vehicle, and make sure it is supported 6. For K24Z1 engine model: Remove the sensor
securely. harnesses from the harness clamps.
＊０３
2. Shift the transmission into the N position.

＊０１
B
7. For K24Z1 engine model: Remove the three-way

catalytic converter.
＊０４
A
18 x 1.5 mm
49 N·m (5.0 kgf·m, 36 lbf·ft)

(B).
5. For K24Z1 engine model: Disconnect the A/F sensor

connector and the secondary heated oxygen
sensor connector.
NOTE: Steps 5 thru 7 describe three-way catalytic

converter removal for K24Z1 engine model, go to
step 8 and remove exhaust pipe A for R20A1 and
R20A2 engine models.
＊０２
(cont’d)
14-255
ＳＷＡ７Ｅ１ＰＥ１０４７４５０００００ＫＡＡＴ００
06/09/15 17:41:24 62SWA00A_140_0258
Transfer Assembly Removal (cont’d)

8. For R20A1 and R20A2 engine models: Remove 11. Remove the transfer assembly mounting bolts (A)
exhaust pipe A. (4), and pull out the bolt (B) to the limit of travel.
＊０５＊０７
A B
C
9. Make a reference mark (A) across the propeller
shaft (B) and the transfer companion flange (C). 12. Remove the transfer assembly (C) and dowel pin
＊０６ (D) from the transmission.
B
10. Separate the propeller shaft from the transfer

companion flange.
14-256
06/09/15 17:41:25 62SWA00A_140_0259
Transfer Assembly Installation

1. Clean the areas where the transfer assembly 5. Install the propeller shaft (A) to the transfer
contacts the transmission with solvent, and dry companion flange (B) by aligning the reference
with compressed air. Then apply transmission fluid mark (C).
to the contact area. ＊０２
A 8 x 1.25 mm
32 N·m
2. Install the new O-ring (A) on the transfer assembly (3.3 kgf·m, 24 lbf·ft)
(B).
＊０１
C
C
10 x 1.25 mm
44 N·m 6. For K24Z1 engine model: Install the three-way
(4.5 kgf·m,
33 lbf·ft) catalytic converter (A) with the bolts, the new self-
locking nuts, and new gaskets (B) (C).
D
B A NOTE: Steps 6 thru 8 describe three-way catalytic
converter installation for K24Z1 engine model, go
3. Install the dowel pin (C) in the transmission. to step 9 and install exhaust pipe A for R20A1 and
R20A2 engine models.
4. Install the one bolt (D) part-way in the rear lower of ＊０３
the transfer housing, and install the transfer 10 x 1.25 mm
33 N·m
assembly on the transmission. (3.4 kgf·m,
25 lbf·ft)
Replace.
8 x 1.25 mm A
22 N·m
(2.2 kgf·m, 16 lbf·ft) C
(cont’d)
14-257
ＳＷＡ７Ｅ１ＰＥ１０４７４５０００００ＫＣＡＴ００
06/09/15 17:41:25 62SWA00A_140_0260
Transfer Assembly Installation (cont’d)

7. For K24Z1 engine model: Connect the A/F sensor 9. For R20A1 and R20A2 engine models: Install
connector and the secondary heated oxygen exhaust pipe A with the bolts, the new self-locking
sensor connector. nuts, and new gaskets (B) (C).
＊０４＊０６
B
10 x 1.25 mm
33 N·m
(3.4 kgf·m,
25 lbf·ft)
Replace.
A
8 x 1.25 mm
22 N·m
8. For K24Z1 engine model: Install the sensor 10. Refill the transmission with ATF (see step 5 on page
harnesses in the harness clamps. 14-252).
＊０５
14-258
06/09/15 17:41:26 62SWA00A_140_0261
Transmission Removal
Special Tools Required 11. Remove the drain plug (A), and drain the
Engine support hanger AAR-T1256-J00 transmission fluid (ATF).
This special tool is available from Snap-on Tools ＊０１
B
International, LLC.
NOTE:
• Use fender covers to avoid damaging painted
surfaces.
• Engine support hanger (AAR-T1256-J00) must be
used with the side engine mount installed.
K24Z1 Engine Model

1. Remove the windshield wiper arms (see page
22-309).
A
2. Remove the cowl cover (see page 20-205). 18 x 1.5 mm
49 N·m (5.0 kgf·m, 36 lbf·ft)
3. Remove the front bulkhead cover.
4. Make sure you have the customer’s radio (and (B).
navigation) anti-theft codes if equipped, and write
down the radio presets. 13. Fix the hood in the vertical position.
5. Make sure the ignition switch is OFF. Disconnect 14. Remove the harness clamp from the clamp bracket,
the negative cable from the battery, then and remove the air cleaner housing bracket.
disconnect the positive cable. ＊０２
6. Remove the battery hold-down bracket, and

7. Remove the intake air duct and air cleaner housing.
9. Raise the vehicle, and make sure it is securely

supported.
(cont’d)
14-259
ＳＷＡ７Ｅ３ＰＥ１０４１０４０００００ＫＡＡＴ００
06/09/15 17:41:27 62SWA00A_140_0262
Transmission Removal (cont’d)

15. Disconnect the A/T clutch pressure control solenoid 18. Disconnect the 3rd clutch transmission fluid
valve A connector and 2nd clutch transmission pressure switch connector (A), and remove the
fluid pressure switch connector (B), and remove the harness clamp (B) from its bracket (C).
harness clamps (C) from the clamp brackets (D). ＊０５
＊０３
C
D
B
A
C
D B
16. Disconnect the transmission range switch 19. Disconnect the A/T clutch pressure control solenoid
connector (A), and remove the connector from its valve C connector (A), A/T clutch pressure control
bracket. solenoid valve B connector (B), and shift solenoid
＊０４ harness connector (C), then remove the harness
A clamp (D) from the clamp bracket (E).
＊０６
C
A
E
D B
E D

C
sensor connector (B) and input shaft (mainshaft)
speed sensor connector (C), and remove the
harness clamp (D) from the clamp bracket (E).
14-260
06/09/15 17:41:28 62SWA00A_140_0263
20. Disconnect the ATF cooler hoses (A) from the ATF 23. Install the engine support hanger (AAR-T1256-J00)
lines (B). Turn the end of the ATF cooler hoses up to to the vehicle, and attach the hook (A) to the hanger
prevent ATF from flowing out, then plug the hoses plate chain (B). Tighten the wing nut (C) by hand,
and lines. and lift and support the engine.
＊０７＊０９
B AAR-T1256-J00
C
B
A
B A
A
21. Remove the air cleaner housing mounting bracket

(A).
＊０８
22. Install the hanger plate (B) to the stud nut (C) with
8 x 1.25 mm−16 mm bolt (D).
(cont’d)
14-261
06/09/15 17:41:28 62SWA00A_140_0264

24. Insert a 6 mm Allen wrench (A) in the top of the ball 27. Remove the sensor harnesses from the harness
joint pin (B), and remove the nuts (C), then separate clamps.
the stabilizer link (D) from the stabilizer (E). ＊１２
＊１０
B C
E
28. Remove the three-way catalytic converter.
＊１３
I
G
H
25. Remove the nuts (F) and bolt (G) securing the lower
arm (H) and ball joint (I), and separate the lower
arms from the ball joints.
26. Disconnect the A/F sensor connector and the

secondary heated oxygen sensor connector.
＊１１
14-262
06/09/15 17:41:29 62SWA00A_140_0265
29. For 4WD model: Make a reference mark (A) across 31. Remove the steering gearbox bracket mounting
the propeller shaft (B) and the transfer companion bolts.
flange (C). Separate the propeller shaft from the
transfer companion flange. NOTE: The illustration shows the LHD model; RHD
＊１４ is similar.
B ＊１６
30. Remove the steering gearbox bracket mounting

bolts.
NOTE: The illustration shows the LHD model; RHD

is similar. 32. Remove the bolt (A) securing the power steering
＊１５ fluid line clamp.
＊１７
B
B A
33. Remove the power steering fluid line from the line
clamps (B).
(cont’d)
14-263
06/09/15 17:41:29 62SWA00A_140_0266

34. Remove the bolt securing the ATF filter on the front 36. Remove the shift cable cover (A).
subframe. ＊２０
＊１８
E
G
B
D
F
A H
35. Remove the lower torque rod bolts.

＊１９
37. Remove the spring clip (B) and control pin (C), and
separate the shift cable end (D) from the control
lever (E).
38. Remove the bolts securing the shift cable brackets

(F) (G). Do not bend the shift cable excessively.
39. Check synthetic resin bushing (H) in the shift cable

end for a proper fit and wear. If the bushing is loose
or worn, replace the shift cable (see page 14-319).
14-264
06/09/15 17:41:30 62SWA00A_140_0267
40. Remove the shift cable holder bracket from the 42. Remove both mid-bracket bolts.
transmission. ＊２３
＊２１
41. For 4WD model: Remove the propeller shaft 43. Make reference marks (A) on the body across the
protector. marks (B) on the edge of the front subframe (C).
＊２２＊２４
C
(cont’d)
14-265
06/09/15 17:41:31 62SWA00A_140_0268

44. Support the front subframe with a wood piece and 47. Remove the torque converter cover (A), and
a jack. remove the drive plate bolts (B) (8) while rotating
＊２５ the crankshaft pulley.
＊２７
45. Remove the six bolts securing the front subframe,

and lower the subframe.
＊２６ A
48. Remove the driveshafts from the differential and

intermediate shaft. Coat all precision machined
surfaces with clean engine oil, then put plastic bags
over driveshaft ends.
＊２８
46. Hang the steering gearbox to the body with a strap.
14-266
06/09/15 17:41:31 62SWA00A_140_0269
49. Remove the intermediate shaft. Coat all precision 51. Remove the transmission mount bracket bolts.
machined surfaces with clean engine oil, then put ＊３１
plastic bags over intermediate shaft ends.
＊２９
50. Remove the upper transmission housing mounting 52. Remove the front transmission housing mounting
bolts. bolts.
＊３０＊３２
(cont’d)
14-267
06/09/15 17:41:32 62SWA00A_140_0270

53. Remove the rear transmission housing mounting 59. For 4WD model: Install the propeller shaft protector.
bolts. ＊３５
＊３３
54. Lower the transmission by loosening the wing nut

of the engine support hanger, and tilt the engine
just enough for the transmission to clear the side
frame.
55. Place a jack under the transmission.
56. Slide the transmission away from the engine to

remove it from the vehicle.
57. Remove the torque converter and dowel pins.

＊３４
58. Inspect the drive plate, and replace it if it’s

damaged.
14-268
06/09/15 17:42:07 62SWA00A_140_0271
Special Tools Required 11. Remove the drain plug (A), and drain the
Engine support hanger AAR-T1256-J00 transmission fluid (ATF).
This special tool is available from Snap-on Tools ＊０１
B
International, LLC.
NOTE:
• Use fender covers to avoid damaging painted
surfaces.
• Engine support hanger (AAR-T1256-J00) must be
used with the side engine mount installed.

1. Remove the windshield wiper arms (see page
22-309).
A
2. Remove the cowl cover (see page 20-205). 18 x 1.5 mm
49 N·m (5.0 kgf·m, 36 lbf·ft)
3. Remove the front bulkhead cover.
4. Make sure you have the customer’s radio (and (B).
navigation) anti-theft codes if equipped, and write
down the radio presets. 13. Fix the hood in the vertical position.
5. Make sure the ignition switch is OFF. Disconnect 14. Disconnect the A/T clutch pressure control solenoid
the negative cable from the battery, then valve A connector.
disconnect the positive cable. ＊０２
B
6. Remove the battery hold-down bracket, and B
7. Remove the intake air duct and air cleaner housing. A
9. Raise the vehicle, and make sure it is securely

supported.
15. Remove the harness clamps (B) from the clamp

brackets (C), and remove the bolt securing the
harness clamp.
(cont’d)
14-269
ＳＷＡ７Ｅ２ＰＥ１０４１０４０００００ＫＡＡＴ００
06/09/15 17:42:08 62SWA00A_140_0272

16. Disconnect the connector from the 2nd clutch 19. Disconnect the 3rd clutch transmission fluid
transmission fluid pressure switch (A), and remove pressure switch connector (A), and remove the
the bolts securing the harness clamp brackets (B). harness clamp (B) from its bracket (C).
＊０３＊０５
B
A
B
A C
B

connector (A), and remove the connector from its
bracket. 20. Disconnect the A/T clutch pressure control solenoid
＊０４ valve C connector (A), A/T clutch pressure control
solenoid valve B connector (B), and shift solenoid
harness connector (C), then remove the harness
B A clamp (D) from the clamp bracket (E).
＊０６
C
E

sensor connector (B) and input shaft (mainshaft)
speed sensor connector (C).
14-270
06/09/15 17:42:08 62SWA00A_140_0273
21. Disconnect the ATF cooler hoses (A) from the ATF 23. Disconnect the connectors (A), remove the ACG
lines (B). Turn the end of the ATF cooler hoses up to terminal (B), and remove the harness clamp (C)
prevent ATF from flowing out, then plug the hoses from its bracket (D).
and lines. ＊０９
C
＊０７
B
A
B
A
22. Remove the engine cover.

＊０８
24. Remove the bolts securing the harness covers on

the engine.
＊１０
(cont’d)
14-271
06/09/15 17:42:09 62SWA00A_140_0274

25. Disconnect the connectors (A) and vacuum tube (B). 28. Remove the harness cover bracket (A), and install
＊１１ the hanger plate (B) to the bolt hole (C) of the
B
harness cover bracket with 8 x 1.25−16 mm bolt
(D).
＊１２
A
B D A
26. Remove the bolts securing the harness cover (C),

and remove the harness cover from its bracket.
C
27. Remove the bolts securing the connector bracket
(D).
29. Install the engine support hanger (AAR-T1256-J00)

to the vehicle, and attach the hook (A) to the hanger
plate chain (B). Tighten the wing nut (C) by hand,
and lift and support the engine.
＊１３
AAR-T1256-J00
C
A
14-272
06/09/15 17:42:10 62SWA00A_140_0275
30. Insert a 6 mm Allen wrench (A) in the top of the ball 33. For 4WD model: Make a reference mark (A) across
joint pin (B), and remove the nuts (C), then separate the propeller shaft (B) and the transfer companion
the stabilizer link (D) from the stabilizer (E). flange (C). Separate the propeller shaft from the
＊１４ transfer companion flange.
B C
＊１６
A B
D C
I A
G
H
F 34. Remove the steering gearbox bracket mounting

bolts.
31. Remove the nuts (F) and bolt (G) securing the lower
arm (H) and ball joint (I), and separate the lower NOTE: The illustration shows the LHD model; RHD
arms from the ball joints. is similar.
＊１７
32. Remove exhaust pipe A.
＊１５
(cont’d)
14-273
06/09/15 17:42:11 62SWA00A_140_0276

35. Remove the steering gearbox bracket mounting 37. Remove the lower torque rod bolts.
bolts. ＊２０

is similar.
＊１８
38. Remove the shift cable cover (A).

＊２１
E
C
36. Remove the bolts securing the ATF cooler line on
the front subframe.
＊１９
G
B
D
F
separate the shift cable end (D) from the control
lever (E).
40. Remove the bolts securing the shift cable brackets

(F) (G). Do not bend the shift cable excessively.
41. Check synthetic resin bushing (H) in the shift cable

end for a proper fit and wear. If the bushing is loose
or worn, replace the shift cable (see page 14-319).
14-274
06/09/15 17:42:11 62SWA00A_140_0277
42. Remove the shift cable holder bracket from the 44. Remove both mid-bracket bolts.
transmission. ＊２４
＊２２
45. Make reference marks (A) on the body across the

marks (B) on the edge of the front subframe (C).
＊２５
43. For 4WD model: Remove the propeller shaft
protector. C
＊２３
(cont’d)
14-275
06/09/15 17:42:12 62SWA00A_140_0278

46. Support the front subframe with a wood piece and 49. Remove the torque converter cover (A), and
a jack. remove the drive plate bolts (B) (8) while rotating
＊２６ the crankshaft pulley.
＊２８
47. Remove the six bolts securing the front subframe,

and lower the subframe.
＊２７
50. Remove the driveshafts from the differential and

intermediate shaft. Coat all precision machined
surfaces with clean engine oil, then put plastic bags
over driveshaft ends.
＊２９
48. Hang the steering gearbox to the body with a strap.
14-276
06/09/15 17:42:13 62SWA00A_140_0279
51. Remove the lower torque rod mounting bracket (A). 54. Remove the transmission mount bracket bolts.
＊３０＊３２
A 55. Remove the front transmission housing mounting

bolts.
＊３３
52. Remove the intermediate shaft (B). Coat all

precision machined surfaces with clean engine oil,
then put plastic bags over intermediate shaft ends.
53. Remove the upper transmission housing mounting

bolts.
＊３１
(cont’d)
14-277
06/09/15 17:42:13 62SWA00A_140_0280

56. Remove the rear transmission housing mounting 61. Remove the torque converter and dowel pins.
bolts. ＊３６
＊３４
57. Remove the lower transmission housing mounting

bolts.
＊３５
62. Inspect the drive plate, and replace it if it’s
damaged.
63. For 4WD model: Install the propeller shaft protector.

＊３７
58. Lower the transmission by loosening the wing nut

of the engine support hanger, and tilt the engine
just enough for the transmission to clear the side
frame.
59. Place a jack under the transmission.
60. Slide the transmission away from the engine to

remove it from the vehicle.
14-278
06/09/15 17:42:14 62SWA00A_140_0281
Transmission Installation
Special Tools Required 2. Install the torque converter (A) on the mainshaft (B)
Engine support hanger AAR-T1256-J00 with the new O-ring (C).
This special tool is available from Snap-on Tools ＊０２
B
International, LLC.
D
NOTE: Use fender covers to avoid damaging painted
surfaces.
K24Z1 Engine Model

protector. A
＊０１
C
D
3. Install the 14 x 20 mm dowel pins (D) in the torque

converter housing.
4. Place the transmission on the jack, and raise the

transmission to the engine level.
5. Install the rear transmission housing mounting

bolts.
＊０３
12 x 1.25 mm
64 N·m (6.5 kgf·m, 47 lbf·ft)
(cont’d)
14-279
ＳＷＡ７Ｅ３ＰＥ１０４１０４０００００ＫＣＡＴ００
06/09/15 17:42:15 62SWA00A_140_0282
Transmission Installation (cont’d)

6. Install the front transmission housing mounting 8. Secure the transmission mount bracket on the
bolts. transmission housing with the new mounting bolts.
＊０４＊０６
12 x 1.25 mm 12 x 1.25 mm
64 N·m 74 N·m (7.5 kgf·m, 54 lbf·ft)
(6.5 kgf·m, 47 lbf·ft) Replace.
7. Install the upper transmission housing mounting

bolts. 9. Install the new set ring (A) on the intermediate shaft
＊０５ (B).
＊０７
B
12 x 1.25 mm
64 N·m
(6.5 kgf·m, 47 lbf·ft) 10 x 1.25 mm
39 N·m
C (4.0 kgf·m, 29 lbf·ft)
10. Clean the areas where the intermediate shaft

contacts the transmission (differential) with solvent,
and dry with compressed air. Apply intermediate
shaft splines (C) with ATF, then install the
intermediate shaft, be sure not to allow dust or
other foreign particles to enter the transmission.
14-280
06/09/15 17:42:15 62SWA00A_140_0283
11. Install the new set ring (A) on the left driveshaft (B). 15. Attach the torque converter to the drive plate with
＊０８ eight bolts (A). Rotate the crankshaft pulley as
necessary to tighten the bolts to 1/2 of the specified
torque, then to the final torque, in a crisscross
pattern. After tightening the last bolt, check that the
crankshaft rotate freely.
＊０９
A
6 x 1.0 mm
12 N·m
(1.2 kgf·m,
8.7 lbf·ft)
B
12. Clean the areas where the left driveshaft contacts

the transmission (differential) with solvent, and dry
with compressed air. Then install the left driveshaft,
be sure not to allow dust or other foreign particles
to enter the transmission. Turn the steering knuckle
fully outward, and slide the driveshaft into the
differential until you feel its set ring fully engage
the side gear. 6 x 1.0 mm
12 N·m
(1.2 kgf·m, 8.7 lbf·ft) B
13. Apply right driveshaft inboard-joint splines with the
recommended grease.
16. Install the torque converter cover (B).
14. Slide the right driveshaft over the intermediate
shaft splines until you feel the driveshaft fully 17. Support the front subframe with a wood piece and
engage the intermediate shaft set ring. a jack, and lift it up to the body.
＊１０
(cont’d)
14-281
06/09/15 17:42:16 62SWA00A_140_0284

18. Loosely install the new subframe mounting bolts. 20. Install both mid-bracket bolts with new ones.
＊１１＊１３
12 x 1.25 mm
64 N·m
(6.5 kgf·m,
47 lbf·ft)
Replace.
14 x 1.5 mm 14 x 1.5 mm
103 N·m 103 N·m
(10.5 kgf·m, 75.9 lbf·ft) (10.5 kgf·m, 75.9 lbf·ft) 21. Secure the lower torque rod with the new bolts.
Replace. Replace. ＊１４
19. Align all reference marks (A) on the front subframe

(B) with the body, then tighten the mounting bolts
on the subframe to the specified torque.
＊１２
B
12 x 1.25 mm
88 N·m (9.0 kgf·m, 65 lbf·ft)
Replace.
A A
14-282
06/09/15 17:42:17 62SWA00A_140_0285
22. For 4WD model: Install the propeller shaft protector. 24. Loosely install the steering gearbox bracket
＊１５ mounting bolts.

is similar.
＊１７
10 x 1.25 mm
66 N·m
8 x 1.25 mm
22 N·m
23. For 4WD model: Install the propeller shaft (A) to the
transfer companion flange (B) by aligning the
reference mark (C).
＊１６
A 8 x 1.25 mm
32 N·m
25. Loosely install the steering gearbox bracket
mounting bolts.

B
is similar.
＊１８
10 x 1.25 mm
66 N·m
(cont’d)
14-283
06/09/15 17:42:17 62SWA00A_140_0286

26. Tighten the steering gearbox bracket mounting 30. Install the three-way catalytic converter (A) with the
bolts to the specified torque. bolts, the new self-locking nuts, and new gaskets
(B) (C).
27. Install both lower arms (A) to both ball joints (B), ＊２０
and loosely install the new mounting nuts and bolts. 10 x 1.25 mm
33 N·m
＊１９ (3.4 kgf·m,
G 25 lbf·ft)
12 x 1.25 mm Replace.
78 N·m
I (8.0 kgf·m, 58 lbf·ft)
8 x 1.25 mm A
22 N·m
B E
10 x 1.25 mm 31. Connect the A/F sensor connector and the
59 N·m
A (6.0 kgf·m, secondary heated oxygen sensor connector.
43 lbf·ft) ＊２１
Replace.
D C
10 x 1.25 mm 10 x 1.25 mm
59 N·m 59 N·m
(6.0 kgf·m, 43 lbf·ft) (6.0 kgf·m, 43 lbf·ft)
Replace. Replace.
28. Tighten the nuts and bolts to 59 N·m (6.0 kgf·m,

43 lbf·ft) in the following order; the nut on the front
(C), the nut on the rear (D), then the bolt (E).
29. Install the stabilizer links (F) to the stabilizer, and

install the nuts (G). Insert a 6 mm Allen wrench (H)
in the ball joint pin (I), and tighten the nuts.
14-284
06/09/15 17:42:18 62SWA00A_140_0287
32. Install the sensor harnesses in the harness clamps. 34. Apply molybdenum grease to the bore hole of the
＊２２ synthetic resin bushing (A) in the shift cable end (B),
and attach the shift cable end to the control lever
(C). Insert the control pin (D) into the control lever
hole through the shift cable end, and secure the
control pin with the spring clip (E). Do not bend the
shift cable excessively.
＊２４
F
G
33. Install the shift cable holder bracket on the E

transmission.
＊２３ 6 x 1.0 mm B
12 N·m
(1.2 kgf·m,
8.7 lbf·ft)
H
6 x 1.0 mm
12 N·m (1.2 kgf·m, 8.7 lbf·ft)
35. Secure the shift cable brackets (F) (G) with the bolts.
36. Install the shift cable cover (H).
6 x 1.0 mm
12 N·m
(1.2 kgf·m, 8.7lbf·ft)
(cont’d)
14-285
06/09/15 17:42:19 62SWA00A_140_0288

37. Secure the ATF filter with the bolt on the front 40. Remove the hanger plate (A) and bolt (B), and
subframe. install the air cleaner housing mounting bracket (C)
＊２５ on the engine.
6 x 1.0 mm ＊２７
12 N·m (1.2 kgf·m, 8.7 lbf·ft) 8 x 1.25 mm
26 N·m (2.7 kgf·m, 20 lbf·ft)
38. Secure the power steering fluid line clamp (A) with B
the bolt.
＊２６ 41. Remove the engine support hanger.
6 x 1.0 mm
9.8 N·m
C (1.0 kgf·m, 7.2 lbf·ft) 42. Connect the ATF cooler hoses (A) to the ATF cooler
C lines (B), and secure the hoses with the clips (C)
(see page 14-302).
＊２８
B
C
B
B A
39. Secure the power steering fluid line (B) with the
C
clamps (C).
14-286
06/09/15 17:42:20 62SWA00A_140_0289
43. Connect the shift solenoid harness connector (A), 45. Connect the output shaft (countershaft) speed
A/T clutch pressure control solenoid valve C sensor connector (A) and input shaft (mainshaft)
connector (B), and A/T clutch pressure control speed sensor connector (B), and install the harness
solenoid valve B connector (C), and install the clamp (C) on its clamp bracket (D).
harness clamp (D) on the clamp bracket (E). ＊３１
＊２９ E
C
E
B A
D
D C
A
46. Install the transmission range switch connector (E)
on the connector bracket, and connect the
connector.
44. Connect the 3rd clutch transmission fluid pressure
switch connector (A), and install the harness clamp 47. Connect the A/T clutch pressure control solenoid
(B) on its clamp bracket (C). valve A connector (A) and 2nd clutch transmission
＊３０ fluid pressure switch connector (B), and install the
harness clamps (C) on the clamp brackets (D).
＊３２
C
D
B
A
C
C
B
D
(cont’d)
14-287
06/09/15 17:42:20 62SWA00A_140_0290

48. Install the air cleaner housing mounting bracket, 55. Install the battery tray, battery, and battery cover,
and install the harness clamp on the harness clamp then secure the battery with its hold-down bracket.
bracket.
＊３３ 56. Connect the battery terminals, and apply grease
8 x 1.25 mm around the battery terminals.
22 N·m
(2.2 kgf·m,
16 lbf·ft) 57. Set the parking brake. Start the engine, and shift
the transmission through all positions three times.
58. Check the shift lever operation, A/T gear position

indicator operation, and shift cable adjustment.
59. Check and adjust the front wheel alignment

(see page 18-7).

fan comes on). Turn off the engine, and check the
ATF level (see page 14-251).
62. Enter the radio (and navigation) anti-theft code if

epuipped, then enter the radio presets, and set the
49. Refill the transmission with ATF (see step 5 on page clock.
14-252).
50. Install the battery base. (see page 22-458).
51. Install the air cleaner housing and intake air duct. 64. Perform the road test (see page 14-222).
52. Install the bulkhead cover. 65. After the road test, raise the vehicle on a hoist, and
make sure it is securely supported.
53. Install the cowl cover (see page 20-205).
54. Install the windshield wiper arms (see page 22-309).
14-288
06/09/15 17:42:20 62SWA00A_140_0291
66. Loosen the upper torque rod bolt (A). 68. Loosen the lower torque rod bolts (A) (B).
＊３４＊３６
A
54 N·m (5.5 kgf·m, 40 lbf·ft)
A
93 N·m
B (9.5 kgf·m,
88 N·m 69 lbf·ft)
67. Loosen the transmission mount base bracket bolt
(A) and nuts (B). 69. Retighten the lower torque rod bolts (B) to the
＊３５ specified torque, then retighten the bolt (A) to the
A
B 74 N·m (7.5 kgf·m, 54 lbf·ft) specified torque.
74 N·m
(7.5 kgf·m, 70. Tighten the transmission mount base bracket bolt
54 lbf·ft)
and nuts to the specified torque.
71. Tighten the upper torque rod bolt to the specified

torque.
14-289
06/09/15 17:42:21 62SWA00A_140_0292

Special Tools Required 2. Install the torque converter (A) on the mainshaft (B)
Engine support hanger AAR-T1256-J00 with the new O-ring (C).
This special tool is available from Snap-on Tools ＊０２
B
International, LLC.
D
NOTE: Use fender covers to avoid damaging painted
surfaces.

protector.
＊０１
C D
A
3. Install the 14 x 20 mm dowel pins (D) in the torque

converter housing.
4. Place the transmission on the jack, and raise the

transmission to the engine level.
5. Install the lower transmission housing mounting

bolts.
＊０３
12 x 1.25 mm
64 N·m (6.5 kgf·m, 47 lbf·ft)
14-290
ＳＷＡ７Ｅ２ＰＥ１０４１０４０００００ＫＣＡＴ００
06/09/15 17:42:22 62SWA00A_140_0293
6. Install the rear transmission housing mounting 8. Install the upper transmission housing mounting
bolts. bolts.
＊０４＊０６
12 x 1.25 mm
64 N·m
12 x 1.25 mm
7. Install the front transmission housing mounting 64 N·m (6.5 kgf·m, 47 lbf·ft)
bolts.
＊０５ 9. Secure the transmission mount bracket on the
12 x 1.25 mm
64 N·m transmission housing with the new mounting bolts.
(6.5 kgf·m, 47 lbf·ft) ＊０７
12 x 1.25 mm
74 N·m (7.5 kgf·m, 54 lbf·ft)
Replace.
(cont’d)
14-291
06/09/15 17:42:22 62SWA00A_140_0294

10. Install the new set ring (A) on the intermediate shaft 13. Install the new set ring (A) on the left driveshaft (B).
(B). ＊０９
＊０８
10 x 1.25 mm
39 N·m
(4.0 kgf·m,
29 lbf·ft)
A
B
14. Clean the areas where the left driveshaft contacts

the transmission (differential) with solvent, and dry
B
with compressed air. Then install the left driveshaft,
be sure not to allow dust or other foreign particles
D D to enter the transmission. Turn the steering knuckle
12 x 1.25 mm fully outward, and slide the driveshaft into the
81 N·m
(8.3 kgf·m, differential until you feel its set ring fully engage
60 lbf·ft) the side gear.
Replace.
E
12 x 1.25 mm 15. Apply right driveshaft inboard-joint splines with the
81 N·m
(8.3 kgf·m, recommended grease.
C
60 lbf·ft)
Replace. 16. Slide the right driveshaft over the intermediate
shaft splines until you feel the driveshaft fully
11. Clean the areas where the intermediate shaft engage the intermediate shaft set ring.
contacts the transmission (differential) with solvent,
and dry with compressed air. Apply intermediate
shaft splines with ATF, then install the intermediate
shaft, be sure not to allow dust or other foreign
particles to enter the transmission.
12. Install the lower torque rod mounting bracket (C),

and secure it with the new bolts (D) and the new
bolt (E).
14-292
06/09/15 17:42:23 62SWA00A_140_0295
17. Attach the torque converter to the drive plate with 20. Loosely install the new subframe mounting bolts.
eight bolts (A). Rotate the crankshaft pulley as ＊１２
necessary to tighten the bolts to 1/2 of the specified
torque, then to the final torque, in a crisscross
pattern. After tightening the last bolt, check that the
crankshaft rotate freely.
＊１０
A
6 x 1.0 mm
12 N·m
(1.2 kgf·m,
8.7 lbf·ft)
14 x 1.5 mm 14 x 1.5 mm
103 N·m 103 N·m
B (10.5 kgf·m, 75.9 lbf·ft) (10.5 kgf·m, 75.9 lbf·ft)
Replace. Replace.
21. Align all reference marks (A) on the front subframe

(B) with the body, then tighten the mounting bolts
on the subframe to the specified torque.
6 x 1.0 mm ＊１３
12 N·m (1.2 kgf·m, 8.7 lbf·ft)
B
18. Install the torque converter cover (B).
19. Support the front subframe with a wood piece and

a jack, and lift it up to the body.
＊１１
A A
(cont’d)
14-293
06/09/15 17:42:24 62SWA00A_140_0296

22. Install both mid-bracket bolts with new ones. 24. For 4WD model: Install the propeller shaft protector.
＊１４＊１６
12 x 1.25 mm
64 N·m
(6.5 kgf·m,
47 lbf·ft) 8 x 1.25 mm
Replace. 22 N·m
23. Secure the lower torque rod with the new bolts. 25. For 4WD model: Install the propeller shaft (A) to the
＊１５ transfer companion flange (B) by aligning the
reference mark (C).
＊１７
A 8 x 1.25 mm
32 N·m
12 x 1.25 mm
88 N·m (9.0 kgf·m, 65 lbf·ft) C
Replace.
14-294
06/09/15 17:42:24 62SWA00A_140_0297
26. Loosely install the steering gearbox bracket 28. Tighten the steering gearbox bracket mounting
mounting bolts. bolts to the specified torque.
NOTE: The illustration shows the LHD model; RHD 29. Install both lower arms (A) to both ball joints (B),
is similar. and loosely install the new mounting nuts and bolts.
＊１８＊２０
10 x 1.25 mm G
66 N·m (6.7 kgf·m, 48 lbf·ft) 12 x 1.25 mm
78 N·m
I (8.0 kgf·m, 58 lbf·ft)
B E
10 x 1.25 mm
59 N·m
A (6.0 kgf·m,
27. Loosely install the steering gearbox bracket 43 lbf·ft)
mounting bolts. Replace.
D C
NOTE: The illustration shows the LHD model; RHD 10 x 1.25 mm 10 x 1.25 mm
is similar. 59 N·m 59 N·m
(6.0 kgf·m, 43 lbf·ft) (6.0 kgf·m, 43 lbf·ft)
＊１９ Replace. Replace.
10 x 1.25 mm
66 N·m
(6.7 kgf·m, 30. Tighten the nuts and bolts to 59 N·m (6.0 kgf·m,
48 lbf·ft) 43 lbf·ft) in the following order; the nut on the front
(C), the nut on the rear (D), then the bolt (E).
31. Install the stabilizer links (F) to the stabilizer, and

install the nuts (G). Insert a 6 mm Allen wrench (H)
in the ball joint pin (I), and tighten the nuts.
(cont’d)
14-295
06/09/15 17:42:25 62SWA00A_140_0298

32. Install exhaust pipe A with the bolts, the new self- 34. Apply molybdenum grease to the bore hole of the
locking nuts, and new gaskets (B) (C). synthetic resin bushing (A) in the shift cable end (B),
＊２１ and attach the shift cable end to the control lever
B (C). Insert the control pin (D) into the control lever
10 x 1.25 mm
33 N·m hole through the shift cable end, and secure the
(3.4 kgf·m, control pin with the spring clip (E). Do not bend the
25 lbf·ft) shift cable excessively.
Replace.
＊２３
G
E
A
8 x 1.25 mm B
22 N·m 6 x 1.0 mm
(2.2 kgf·m, 16 lbf·ft) 12 N·m F
C (1.2 kgf·m,
8.7 lbf·ft)
33. Install the shift cable holder bracket on the

transmission. A
＊２２
H
6 x 1.0 mm
12 N·m (1.2 kgf·m, 8.7 lbf·ft)
36. Install the shift cable cover (H).
6 x 1.0 mm
12 N·m
(1.2 kgf·m, 8.7 lbf·ft)
14-296
06/09/15 17:42:26 62SWA00A_140_0299
37. Secure the ATF cooler line with the bolts on the 40. Install the harness cover (A) on its bracket, and
front subframe. secure it with the bolts.
＊２４＊２６
6 x 1.0 mm D
12 N·m (1.2 kgf·m, 8.7 lbf·ft)
C 6 x 1.0 mm
9.8 N·m
B (1.0 kgf·m,
7.2 lbf·ft)
6 x 1.0 mm
38. Remove the hanger plate (A) and bolt (B), and 9.8 N·m (1.0 kgf·m, 7.2 lbf·ft)
install the harness cover bracket (C) on the engine.
＊２５ 41. Secure the connector bracket (B).
42. Connect disconnected connectors (C) and vacuum

A tube (D), and secure the tube with the clip.
B C
43. Install the ACG terminal (A), connect the
connectors (B), and install the harness clamp (C) on
its bracket (D).
＊２７
C
A
9 N·m
(0.9 kgf·m,
6.5 lbf·ft)
D
8 x 1.25 mm
26 N·m
(2.7 kgf·m,
20 lbf·ft)
B
39. Remove the engine support hanger.
(cont’d)
14-297
06/09/15 17:42:27 62SWA00A_140_0300

44. Secure the harness cover with the bolts. 46. Connect the ATF cooler hoses (A) to the ATF cooler
＊２８ lines (B), and secure the hoses with the clips (C)
6 x 1.0 mm
9.8 N·m (see page 14-303).
(1.0 kgf·m, ＊３０
7.2 lbf·ft)
C
A
45. Install the engine cover. C B

＊２９ A
47. Connect the shift solenoid harness connector (A),

A/T clutch pressure control solenoid valve B
connector (B), and A/T clutch pressure control
solenoid valve C connector (C), and install the
harness clamp (D) on the clamp bracket (E).
＊３１
14-298
06/09/15 17:43:19 62SWA00A_140_0301
48. Connect the 3rd clutch transmission fluid pressure 51. Connect the connector to the 2nd clutch
switch connector (A), and install the harness clamp transmission fluid pressure switch (A), and secure
(B) on its clamp bracket (C). the harness clamp brackets with the bolts.
＊３２＊３４
6 x 1.0 mm
12 N·m
(1.2 kgf·m,
8.7 lbf·ft)
C 8 x 1.25 mm
B 22 N·m
52. Connect the A/T clutch pressure control solenoid

49. Connect the output shaft (countershaft) speed valve A connector (A).
sensor connector (A) and input shaft (mainshaft) ＊３５
C
speed sensor connector (B).
6 x 1.0 mm
＊３３ 12 N·m C
(1.2 kgf·m,
8.7 lbf·ft)
A C A
53. Secure the harness clamp brackets (B) with the bolt,
50. Install the transmission range switch connector (C) and install the harness clamps (C) on the clamp
on the connector bracket, and connect the brackets.
connector.
(cont’d)
14-299
06/09/15 17:43:20 62SWA00A_140_0302

54. Refill the transmission with ATF (see step 5 on page 71. Loosen the upper torque rod bolt (A).
14-252). ＊３６
A
54 N·m
55. Install the battery base. (5.5 kgf·m, 40 lbf·ft)
56. Install the air cleaner housing and intake air duct.
57. Install the front bulkhead cover.
58. Install the cowl cover (see page 20-205).
59. Install the windshield wiper arms (see page 22-309).
60. Install the battery tray, battery, and battery cover,

then secure the battery with its hold-down bracket.
61. Connect the battery terminals, and apply grease

around the battery terminals.
62. Set the parking brake. Start the engine, and shift 72. Loosen the transmission mount base bracket bolt
the transmission through all positions three times. (A) and nuts (B).
＊３７
B A
63. Check the shift lever operation, A/T gear position 74 N·m (7.5 kgf·m, 54 lbf·ft) 74 N·m
indicator operation, and shift cable adjustment. (7.5 kgf·m,
54 lbf·ft)
64. Check and adjust the front wheel alignment
(see page 18-7).

fan comes on). Turn off the engine, and check the
ATF level (see page 14-251).
67. Enter the radio (and navigation) anti-theft code if

equipped, then enter the radio presets, and set the
clock.

(see page 22-458).
69. Perform the road test (see page 14-222).
70. After the road test, raise the vehicle on a hoist, and
make sure it is securely supported.
14-300
06/09/15 17:43:20 62SWA00A_140_0303
73. Loosen the lower torque rod bolts (A) (B).

＊３８
A
93 N·m
B (9.5 kgf·m,
88 N·m 69 lbf·ft)
74. Retighten the lower torque rod bolts (B) to the

specified torque, then retighten the bolt (A) to the
specified torque.
75. Tighten the transmission mount base bracket bolt

and nuts to the specified torque.
76. Tighten the upper torque rod bolt to the specified

torque.
14-301
06/09/15 17:43:20 62SWA00A_140_0304
Drive Plate Removal and ATF Cooler Hose Replacement

Installation
K24Z1 Engine Model
1. Remove the transmission assembly: 1. Slide the ATF cooler/filter hose (A) on the ATF filter
(B) until the hose end is 5−7 mm (0.20−0.28 in.)
• K24Z1 engine model (see page 14-259) (C) away from the filter housing, and secure the
• R20A1 and R20A2 engine models (see page hose with the clip (D) at 10−12 mm (0.39−0.47 in.)
14-269) (E) from the filter housing. Install the cooler hose
(F) on the other side of the ATF filter in the same
2. Remove the drive plate (A) and washer (B) from the manner.
engine crankshaft. ＊０１
B E D
NOTE: The illustration shows K24Z1 engine model;
C A
R20A1 and R20A2 engine models are similar. F
＊０１
A
H
12 x 1.0 mm
74 N·m (7.5 kgf·m, 54 lbf·ft) I K
G P
J M L
N
3. Install the drive plate and washer on the engine O
crankshaft, and tighten the eight bolts in a
crisscross pattern in two or more steps. 2. Slide the ATF cooler/filter hose (G) over the ATF
cooler line (H) until the hose end contacts the bulge
4. Install the transmission assembly: (I), and secure the hoses with the clip (J) at
2−4 mm (0.08−0.16 in.) (K) from the hose end.
• K24Z1 engine model (see page 14-279)
• R20A1 and R20A2 engine models (see page 3. Slide the ATF cooler hoses (L) over the ATF lines
14-290) (M) until the hose ends contact the bulge (N), and
secure the hoses with the clip (O) at 6−8 mm
(0.24−0.31 in.) (P) from the hose end.
14-302
ＳＷＡ７Ｅ１ＰＥ１０４０００２２２５１ＫＤＡＴ００ＳＷＡ７Ｅ３ＰＥ１０４０００１３０１２ＫＢＡＴ００
06/09/15 17:43:21 62SWA00A_140_0305
R20A1 and R20A2 Engine Models 5. Slide the ATF cooler hose (T) over the ATF cooler
line (U) until the hose end contacts the mark (V),
1. Slide the ATF cooler hose (A) on the ATF filter (B) and secure the hose with the clip (W) at 2−4 mm
until the hose end contacts the filter housing, and (0.08−0.16 in.) (X) from the hose end.
secure the hose with the clip (C) at 6−8 mm
(0.24−0.31 in.) (D) from the filter housing. Install 6. Slide the ATF cooler hose (Y) over the ATF cooler
the cooler hose on the other side of the ATF filter in line (Z) until the hose end contacts the bulge (AA)
the same manner. with the white dot (BB) facing up, and secure the
＊０１ hose with the clip (CC) at 6−8 mm (0.24−0.31 in.)
Y CC
(DD) from the hose end.
BB
AA C
Z M D A
J
DD
N
B
K
S
F
U T I
V W E
O
H
R
P Q
2. Slide the ATF cooler hoses (E) over the ATF lines (F)
until the hose ends contact the bulge (G), and
secure the hoses with the clip (H) at 6−8 mm
(0.24−0.31 in.) (I) from the hose end.
3. Slide the ATF cooler hose (J) over the ATF line (K)
until the hose end contacts the line bracket (L), and
secure the hose with the clip (M) at 6−8 mm
(0.24−0.31 in.) (N) from the hose end.
4. Slide the ATF cooler hose (O) over the ATF cooler
line (P) until the hose end contacts the bulge (Q),
and secure the hose with the clip (R) at 2−4 mm
(0.08−0.16 in.) (S) from the hose end.
14-303
ＳＷＡ７Ｅ２ＰＥ１０４０００１３０１２ＫＢＡＴ００
06/09/15 17:43:21 62SWA00A_140_0306
ATF Filter Replacement

K24Z1 Engine Model 5. Disconnect the ATF cooler hoses (A) from the ATF
filter (B).
1. Raise the vehicle up on a lift, or apply the parking ＊０２
C 6 x 1.0 mm
brake, block the rear wheels, and raise the front of
12 N·m
the vehicle. Make sure it is securely supported. A (1.2 kgf·m,
B 8.7 lbf·ft)
A
＊０１
B
F
D
A
18 x 1.5 mm E
49 N·m (5.0 kgf·m, 36 lbf·ft)

washer (B). 6. Remove the ATF filter holder (C), and remove the
ATF filter.
7. Install the new ATF filter, and secure it with its

holder and bolt.
8. Slide the ATF cooler hose on the ATF filter until the
hose end is 5−7 mm (0.20−0.28 in.) (D) away from
the filter housing, and secure the hose with the clip
(E) at 10−12 mm (0.39−0.47 in.) (F) from the filter
housing. Install the cooler hose on the other side of
the ATF filter in the same manner.

14-252).
14-304
ＳＷＡ７Ｅ３ＰＥ１０４０００１３０１５ＫＢＡＴ００
06/09/15 17:43:21 62SWA00A_140_0307

1. Remove the intake air duct and air cleaner housing.
2. Disconnect the ATF cooler hoses (A) from the ATF

filter (B).
＊０１
C
6 x 1.0 mm
12 N·m
B (1.2 kgf·m, 8.7 lbf·ft)
F F
A
E
D
A
3. Remove the ATF filter holder (C).
4. Remove the ATF filter, and replace it.
5. Install the new ATF filter on the filter mounting

bracket (D), and secure it with its holder and bolt.
6. Slide the ATF cooler hoses on the ATF filter until

the hose ends contact the filter housing, and secure
the hose with the clips (E) at 6−8 mm
(0.24−0.31 in.) (F) from the filter housing. Install
the cooler hose on the other side of the ATF filter in
the same manner.
14-305
ＳＷＡ７Ｅ２ＰＥ１０４０００１３０１５ＫＢＡＴ００
06/09/15 17:43:22 62SWA00A_140_0308
Shift Lever Removal

1. Remove the following parts: 5. Rotate the socket holder retainer (A)
counterclockwise (B) until it stops, and push the
• Heater control panel; HVAC control unit (without retainer lock (C) into the socket holder retainer to
climate control) (see page 21-51) or Climate lock the retainer.
control unit (with climate control) (see page ＊０３
21-140)
• Dashboard center panel (see page 20-124)
• Center lower covers (see page 20-127)
2. Shift the shift lever into the R position.
3. Remove the nut securing the shift cable end. B

＊０１ C
A
6. Lower the socket holder (A), then slide it to remove

the shift cable (B) from the shift cable bracket (C).
Do not remove the shift cable by pulling the shift
4. Unlock the retainer (A). cable guide (D).
＊０２＊０４
14-306
ＳＷＡ７Ｅ１ＰＥ１０４１１４１２２８２ＫＡＡＴ００
06/09/15 17:43:22 62SWA00A_140_0309
7. Cover around the opening of the dashboard with

tape to prevent damage to the dashboard.
8. Remove the shift lever mounting bolt and nuts.
9. Disconnect the shift lock solenoid connector (A)

and D3 switch/park pin switch/A/T gear position
indicator panel light connector (B), and remove the
shift lever assembly (C).

model is similar.
＊０５
B
A
14-307
06/09/15 17:43:23 62SWA00A_140_0310
Shift Lever Installation

1. Cover around the opening of the dashboard with
tape to prevent damage to the dashboard.
2. Install the shift lever assembly (A) in the dashboard.

model is similar.
＊０１
8 x 1.25 mm
22 N·m
(2.2 kgf·m,
16 lbf·ft)
3. Connect the shift lock solenoid connector (B) and

D3 switch/park pin switch/A/T gear position
indicator panel light connector (C).
4. Install the shift cable on the shift lever, and adjust

the shift cable (see step 7 on page 14-322).
14-308
ＳＷＡ７Ｅ１ＰＥ１０４１１４１２２８２ＫＣＡＴ００
06/09/15 17:43:23 62SWA00A_140_0311
Shift Lever Disassembly and Reassembly

LHD Model
＊０１
SHIFT LEVER
KNOB COVER SHIFT LEVER BUTTON
SPRING
SHIFT LEVER KNOB
SCREW 5 x 0.8 mm
3 N·m (0.3 kgf·m, 2 lbf·ft)
D3 SWITCH Apply non-hardening
thread lock sealant.
SHIFT LEVER RING
SHIFT LOCK
RELEASE LID
SHIFT LEVER ROD
A/T GEAR POSITION
INDICATOR PANEL
SILICONE GREASE
A/T GEAR POSITION

INDICATOR PANEL
LIGHT BULB
LEVER COVER
SHIFT LEVER/
SHIFT CABLE
BRACKET ASSEMBLY
HARNESS A/T GEAR POSITION

BAND INDICATOR PANEL BASE
SHIFT LOCK
RELEASE SHAFT
SHIFT LOCK
RELEASE
SHIFT LOCK
RELEASE SPRING 0.3 N·m
(0.03 kgf·m, 0.2 lbf·ft)
SHIFT LOCK Apply non-hardening
STOP CUSHION thread lock sealant.
SHIFT LOCK 8 x 1.25 mm

STOP 22 N·m
PARK PIN HARNESS (2.2 kgf·m, 16 lbf·ft)
SWITCH BAND
SILICONE GREASE SHIFT LEVER
SHIFT LOCK MOUNTING
SHIFT LOCK SOLENOID
SOLENOID CONNECTOR BRACKET
PLUNGER CLAMP
CONNECTOR
CLAMP
PLUNGER
SPRING
14-309
ＳＷＡ７Ｅ１ＵＥ１０４１１４１２２８２ＭＦＡＴ００
06/09/15 17:43:24 62SWA00A_140_0312
Shift Lever Disassembly and Reassembly (cont’d)

RHD Model
＊０１
SHIFT LEVER KNOB SCREW
5 x 0.8 mm
3 N·m (0.3 kgf·m, 2 lbf·ft)
Apply non-hardening
SHIFT LEVER ROD D3 SWITCH thread lock sealant.
SPRING
SILICONE GREASE SHIFT LEVER BUTTON
SHIFT LEVER
SHIFT LEVER RING KNOB COVER
SHIFT LEVER/
SHIFT CABLE A/T GEAR POSITION
BRACKET INDICATOR PANEL
ASSEMBLY
SHIFT LOCK
RELEASE LID
SHIFT LOCK
RELEASE LEVER COVER
A/T GEAR POSITION

INDICATOR PANEL
LIGHT BULB
SHIFT LOCK A/T GEAR POSITION
RELEASE INDICATOR PANEL BASE
SPRING
HARNESS
BAND
SHIFT LOCK
RELEASE
EXTENSION
SHIFT LOCK
STOP
SHIFT LOCK
STOP CUSHION
8 x 1.25 mm
22 N·m
SILICONE GREASE (2.2 kgf·m,
16 lbf·ft)
CONNECTOR HARNESS
PLUNGER CLAMP BAND SHIFT LEVER
SPRING MOUNTING
SHIFT LOCK 0.3 N·m BRACKET
SOLENOID CONNECTOR SHIFT LOCK (0.03 kgf·m, 0.2 lbf·ft)
PLUNGER CLAMP SOLENOID Apply non-hardening
thread lock sealant.
PARK PIN SWITCH
14-310
ＳＷＡ７Ｅ１ＷＥ１０４１１４１２２８２ＭＦＡＴ００
06/09/15 17:43:24 62SWA00A_140_0313
Shift Lever/Shift Cable Bracket Assembly Replacement

NOTE: 3. Remove the screws (A), shift lever button (B), and
• Refer to the Shift Lever Disassembly and Reassembly spring (C).
LHD model (see page 14-309), RHD model (see page ＊０２
A F
14-310) as needed during the following procedures. C
• The illustration shows the LHD model; RHD model is
similar. B
1. Remove the shift lever (see page 14-306).
2. Wrap the end of a flat-tip screwdriver (A) with tape,

pry the shift lever knob cover locks (B), and remove
the shift lever knob cover (C).
＊０１
A
C
E
E
D
B
4. Remove the D3 switch (D) by expanding its locks

(E) from the shift lever knob, and remove the shift
B B lever knob (F).
5. Remove the shift lock solenoid connector and D3

switch/park pin switch/A/T gear position indicator
panel light connector from the shift lever.
6. Remove the harness bands, and disconnect the D3

switch 2P connector.
＊０３
7. Remove the D3 switch harness and shift lever ring.
(cont’d)
14-311
ＳＷＡ７Ｅ１ＰＥ１０４１１４１２２７ＮＫＢＡＴ００
06/09/15 17:43:25 62SWA00A_140_0314
Shift Lever/Shift Cable Bracket Assembly Replacement (cont’d)

8. Remove the A/T gear position indicator panel light 12. Insert a 6 mm pin (A) into the guide hole (B), and
socket from the indicator panel, and remove the push the shift lock solenoid (C) out.
indicator panel. ＊０６
D
E
9. For LHD model: Remove the shift lock release,
release spring, and release shaft (see page 14-357).
For RHD model: Remove the shift lock release, C
release spring, and release extension (see page F
14-358).
10. Remove the shift lever mounting bracket, and

remove the park pin switch.
＊０４
13. Remove the shift lock solenoid plunger (D), plunger

spring (E), and shift lock stop and stop cushion (F).
14. Replace the shift lever/shift cable bracket assembly.
15. Install the shift lock stop and stop cushion.
16. Apply silicone grease to joint of the shift lock

solenoid plunger and shift lock stop, if necessary.
11. Release the lock tabs retaining the shift lock
solenoid using thin blade screwdrivers. 17. Install the shift lock solenoid plunger and plunger
＊０５ spring in the shift lock solenoid.
18. Install the shift lock solenoid by aligning the joint of

the shift lock solenoid plunger with the tip of the
shift lock stop, then push the shift lock solenoid into
the shift lever securely.
14-312
06/09/15 17:43:26 62SWA00A_140_0315
19. Apply non-hardening thread lock sealant to the 25. Route the park pin switch harness, D3 switch
screw threads. Install the park pin switch (A), and harness, and indicator panel light harness. Take a
secure the switch with the screw. slack out of the harnesses, and secure the
＊０７ harnesses (A) with the band (B) at the guide (C).
＊０９
0.3 N·m
(0.03 kgf·m,
0.2 lbf·ft)
B
26. Install the shift lock solenoid connector and D3

20. Install the shift lever mounting bracket. switch/park pin switch/A/T gear position indicator
panel light connector on the shift lever.
21. Install the A/T gear position indicator panel, shift
lever ring, and D3 switch harness. 27. For LHD model: Install the shift lock release, release
spring, and release shaft (see page 14-357).
22. Route the D3 switch harness (A), connect the D3 For RHD model: Install the shift lock release,
switch 2P connector (B), and install the connector in release spring, and release extension (see page
the holder. 14-358).
＊０８
A
B
23. Tie the harnesses of the D3 switch and park pin

switch at the guide (C) with the band (D).
24. Install the A/T gear position indicator panel light

socket in the indicator panel.
(cont’d)
14-313
06/09/15 17:43:26 62SWA00A_140_0316
Shift Lever/Shift Cable Bracket Assembly Replacement (cont’d)

28. Apply silicone grease to the top of the shift lever
rod (A), to the shift lever button spring (B), and to
the area of the shift lever button (C) connected with
the shift lever rod.
＊１０
E
3 N·m
(0.3 kgf·m, 2 lbf·ft) D
29. Install the shift lever button spring and button in

the shift lever knob (D), and install the shift lever
knob over the shift lever.
30. Apply non-hardening thread lock sealant to the

screw threads, and secure the shift lever knob with
the screws (E).
31. Install the D3 switch (F) and shift lever knob cover
(G) on the shift lever knob.
32. Install the shift lever (see page 14-308).
14-314
06/09/15 17:43:27 62SWA00A_140_0317
Shift Lever Knob Replacement

NOTE: The illustration shows the LHD model; RHD is 5. Apply silicone grease to the top of the shift lever
symmetrical. rod (A), to the shift lever button spring (B), and to
1. Remove the shift lever (see page 14-306). the shift lever rod.
＊０３
2. Wrap the end of a flat-tip screwdriver (A) with tape, E
3 N·m
pry the shift lever knob cover locks (B), and remove (0.3 kgf·m, 2 lbf·ft) D
＊０１
A B
C
C
B
A
B B
F

3. Remove the screws (A), shift lever button (B), and 7. Apply non-hardening thread lock sealant to the
spring (C). screw threads, and secure the shift lever knob with
＊０２ the screws (E).
A F
C
B (G) on the shift lever knob.
E
D

lever knob (F).
14-315
ＳＷＡ７Ｅ１ＰＥ１０４１１４１２２８７ＫＢＡＴ００
06/09/15 17:43:27 62SWA00A_140_0318
Shift Lever Knob Cover Replacement

NOTE: The illustration shows the LHD model; RHD is
symmetrical.

＊０１
A
C
B B
2. Replace the shift lever knob cover, and install the

new cover on the shift lever knob.
14-316
ＳＷＡ７Ｅ１ＰＥ１０４１１４１２２８３ＫＢＡＴ００
06/09/15 17:43:27 62SWA00A_140_0319
Shift Lever Ring Replacement

A F
similar. B

＊０１
A
C
E
E
D
B

B B lever knob (F).
5. Remove the harness band, and disconnect the D3

＊０３
6. Remove the D3 switch and shift lever ring.
(cont’d)
14-317
ＳＷＡ７Ｅ１ＰＥ１０４１１４１２２８６ＫＢＡＴ００
06/09/15 17:43:28 62SWA00A_140_0320
Shift Lever Ring Replacement (cont’d)

7. Replace the shift lever ring, and install the D3 11. Apply silicone grease to the top of the shift lever
switch harness through the shift lever ring. rod (A), to the shift lever button spring (B), and to
＊０４ the area of the shift lever button (C) connected with
＊０６
E
3 N·m
8. Install the shift lever ring over the shift lever.

9. Route the D3 switch harness (A), connect the D3 the shift lever knob (D), and install the shift lever
switch 2P connector (B), and install the connector in knob over the shift lever.
the holder.
＊０５ 13. Apply non-hardening thread lock sealant to the
A screw threads, and secure the shift lever knob with
B
the screws (E).
C 15. Install the shift lever (see page 14-308).

14-318
06/09/15 17:43:29 62SWA00A_140_0321
Shift Cable Replacement

1. Lift the vehicle up on a lift or apply the parking 6. Rotate the socket holder retainer (A)
brake, block rear wheels, and raise the front of the counterclockwise (B) until it stops, and push the
vehicle. Make sure it is securely supported. retainer lock (C) into the socket holder retainer to
lock the retainer.
2. Remove the following parts: ＊０３
• Heater control panel; HVAC control unit (without

climate control) (see page 21-51) or Climate
control unit (with climate control) (see page
21-140)
• Center lower covers (see page 20-127) B
C
3. Shift the shift lever into the R position. A
4. Remove the nut securing the shift cable end.

＊０１

＊０４
5. Unlock the retainer (A).

＊０２
A
B
(cont’d)
14-319
ＳＷＡ７Ｅ１ＰＥ１０４１１４１２２８１ＫＢＡＴ００
06/09/15 17:43:29 62SWA00A_140_0322
Shift Cable Replacement (cont’d)

8. Remove the shift cable cover (A). 12. Insert the new shift cable through the grommet
hole (C), and install the grommet in its hole. Do not
NOTE: The illustration shows K24Z1 engine model; bend the shift cable excessively.
R20A1 and R20A2 engine models are similar.
＊０５ 13. Secure the shift cable grommet with the nuts.
14. Apply molybdenum grease to the bore hole of the

synthetic resin bushing (A) in the shift cable end (B),
and attach the shift cable end to the control lever
C
(C). Insert the control pin (D) into the control lever
hole through the shift cable end, and secure the
E control pin with the spring clip (E). Do not bend the
G shift cable excessively.
B
NOTE: The illustration shows the K24Z1 engine
D model; R20A1 and R20A2 engine models are
F
similar.
＊０７
F
A G
C
separate the shift cable end (D) from the control E
lever (E). Remove the bolts securing the shift cable
brackets (F) (G). 6 x 1.0 mm B
12 N·m
(1.2 kgf·m,
10. Remove the nuts securing the shift cable grommet 8.7 lbf·ft)
(A).
＊０６
B
A
A C
H
6 x 1.0 mm
12 N·m
(1.2 kgf·m, 8.7 lbf·ft)
6 x 1.0 mm
9.8 N·m
(1.0 kgf·m, 16. Install the shift cable cover (H).
7.2 lbf·ft)
17. Install the shift cable on the shift lever, and adjust
the shift cable (see step 7 on page 14-322).
11. Remove the shift cable grommet, and pull out the
shift cable (B).
14-320
06/09/15 17:43:30 62SWA00A_140_0323
Shift Cable Adjustment

1. Remove the following parts: 5. Rotate the socket holder retainer (A)
counterclockwise (B) until it stops, and push the
• Heater control panel; HVAC control unit (without retainer lock (C) into the socket holder retainer to
climate control) (see page 21-51) or Climate lock the retainer.
control unit (with climate control) (see page ＊０３
21-140)
2. Shift the shift lever into the R position.
3. Remove the nut securing the shift cable end. B

＊０１ C
A

Do not remove the shift cable by pulling the shift
4. Unlock the retainer (A). cable guide (D).
＊０２＊０４
(cont’d)
14-321
ＳＷＡ７Ｅ１ＰＥ１０４１１４１２２８１ＭＢＡＴ００
06/09/15 17:43:31 62SWA00A_140_0324
Shift Cable Adjustment (cont’d)

7. Push the shift cable (A) until it stops, then release it. 10. Place the shift lever in the R position, then insert a
Pull the shift cable back one step so that the shift 6.0 mm (0.24 in.) pin (A) into the positioning hole
position is in R. Do not hold the shift cable guide (B) (B) on the shift lever, through the positioning hole
to adjust the shift cable. on the shift lever, and into the positioning hole on
＊０５ the bracket. Use only the 6.0 mm pin with removed-
burrs ends.
A
＊０７
8. Turn the ignition switch ON (II), and verify that the 11. Verify that the shift lever is secured in the R
R position indicator comes on. position.
＊０６
12. Unhinge the retainer lock (A).
＊０８
14-322
06/09/15 17:43:31 62SWA00A_140_0325
13. Rotate the socket holder retainer (A) 14. Align the clearance (A) between the socket holder
counterclockwise (B) until it stops to create (B) and the socket holder retainer (C) with the
clearance (C) between the socket holder (D) and opening (D) in the shift cable bracket (E), then slide
holder retainer, and push the retainer lock (E) into the holder into the bracket with installing the shift
the socket holder retainer to lock the retainer. cable end (F) over the mounting stud (G) by
＊０９ aligning its square hole (H) with the square fitting
(I) at the bottom of the stud. Do not install the shift
cable by holding the shift cable guide (J).
NOTE: When the socket holder is installed in the

shift cable bracket, the retainer lock is unhinged
B and releases the holder retainer lock, then the
E holder retainer returns under spring force to secure
the shift cable.
A ＊１０
F
G
C
H
I
D
E D
(cont’d)
14-323
06/09/15 17:43:32 62SWA00A_140_0326
Shift Cable Adjustment (cont’d)

15. Push the retainer lock (A) fully to lock the socket 18. Install and tighten the nut on the shift cable end.
holder retainer (B), and make sure that the retainer ＊１３
lock fits into the hinged-joint (C). If the retainer lock
does not fit with the edge of the hinged-joint, rotate
the holder retainer counterclockwise while pushing
the retainer lock until it locks.
＊１１
B
8 x 1.25 mm
22 N·m (2.2 kgf·m, 16 lbf·ft)
A 19. Remove the 6.0 mm (0.24 in.) pin that was installed
to hold the shift lever.
C
20. Turn the ignition switch ON (II). Move the shift lever
to each position, and verify that the A/T gear
position indicator follows the transmission range
switch.
16. Verify that the shift cable end is properly installed
on the mounting stud. 21. Shift to the P position, and check that the shift lock
＊１２ works properly. Push the shift lock release, and
Improperly installed:
verify that the shift lever releases, and also check
Cable end Cable end rides that the shift lever locks when it is shifted back to
positions on the bottom the P position.
out of the of the mounting Properly
mounting stud. stud. installed:
22. Install the following parts:

• Heater control panel; HVAC control unit (without
climate control) (see page 21-51) or Climate
control unit (with climate control) (see page
21-140)
17. If the cable end is out of position on the mounting

stud, remove the shift cable from the bracket, and
reinstall the shift cable. Do not install the shift cable
end on the mounting stud while the shift cable is on
the bracket.
If the cable end rides on the bottom of the
mounting stud, rotate the stud and align the square
fitting with the hole.
14-324
06/09/15 17:43:35 62SWA00A_140_0327
A/T Gear Position Indicator
Component Location Index

LHD Model
＊０１
A/T GEAR POSITION INDICATOR
D3 INDICATOR
F-CAN Communication Circuit
Troubleshooting, page 22-210
Gauge Control Module Self-diagnostic Function
Indicator Drive Circuit Check, page 22-198
Communication Line Check, page 22-199
DATA LINK CONNECTOR (DLC) D3 SWITCH A/T GEAR POSITION INDICATOR

Circuit Troubleshooting, page 14-340 PANEL LIGHT HARNESS
Test, page 14-342 Replacement, page 14-333
Replacement, page 14-343 A/T GEAR POSITION INDICATOR PANEL
Replacement, page 14-338
＊０２

Test, page 14-329
14-325
ＳＷＡ７Ｅ１ＵＥ１０４１０７０００００ＤＡＡＴ００
06/09/15 17:43:39 62SWA00A_140_0328
Component Location Index (cont’d)

RHD Model
＊０１
D3 INDICATOR
F-CAN Communication Circuit
Gauge Control Module Self-diagnostic Function
Indicator Drive Circuit Check, page 22-198
Communication Line Check, page 22-199
DATA LINK CONNECTOR (DLC)

A/T GEAR POSITION INDICATOR D3 SWITCH
PANEL LIGHT HARNESS Circuit Troubleshooting, page 14-340
Replacement, page 14-333 Test, page 14-342
A/T GEAR POSITION INDICATOR PANEL Replacement, page 14-343
＊０２

Test, page 14-329
14-326
ＳＷＡ７Ｅ１ＷＥ１０４１０７０００００ＤＡＡＴ００
06/09/15 17:43:40 62SWA00A_140_0329
Circuit Diagram
K24Z1 Engine Model
＊０１
BATTERY
No. 10 (7.5 A)
IGNITION SWITCH
No. 14 (7.5 A)
CONTROL UNIT (MICU)
B36
YEL
P
POWERTRAIN CONTROL
R MODULE (PCM)
A/T GEAR To 12 V
POSITION
N INDICATOR
D BLK/RED LT BLU
INDICATOR
DRIVER
CIRCUIT 2
A36 CAN H
1
WHT
WHT
B34 RED
F−CAN
TRANSCEIVER RED
B33
ATP RVS B22
RED/WHT
SG B15 ATP FWD B28
BLU/YEL
PG B19 ATP 1 B15
RED
BLK BLK ATP 2 B16
GRN/RED
ATP D B21
YEL/GRN
ATP N B12 STARTER
RED/BLK CUT
A/T GEAR 3 RELAY
BLK GRY ATP R B14
POSITION G501
INDICATOR G502 ATP P B13
PANEL 4
LIGHT BLK RED MULTIPLEX INTEGRATED
CONTROL UNIT (MICU) WHT
D3 SWITCH BLU/BLK BLU/WHT BLK
5 A41 D3 SW
WHT BLU BLU 5 4 9 3 8 2 6 10 7 1
6
WHT BLK WHT PNK BRN WHT/RED BLK
BLK/BLU RED/BLK BLU YEL/RED BLU/WHT
6 7 2 8 3 9 5 1 4 10 G101
G503
FWD RVS ST E
B36 PG1 N D
BLK R 2
B1 PG2 P 1
BLK
C40 LG1
BRN/YEL
C44 LG2
BRN/YEL
G101
4 5 6 8 9 1 2 3 4 7 8 9 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9
(10) 14 15 16 17 18 19 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18
20 21 22 23 24 25 20 21 22 23 24 25 20 21 (22) 23
(26) 27 28 29 31 33 34 35 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 27 29 30 31 32
36 37 (39) 40 41 42 44 36 41 42 43 44 36 39 40 41 42 43 44
A (44P) B (44P) C (44P)

14-327
ＳＷＡ７Ｅ３ＰＥ１０４１０７０００００ＥＡＡＴ００
06/09/15 17:43:41 62SWA00A_140_0330
Circuit Diagram (cont’d)

＊０１
BATTERY
No. 10 (7.5 A)
IGNITION SWITCH
No. 14 (7.5 A)
CONTROL UNIT (MICU)
B36
YEL
P
POWERTRAIN CONTROL
R MODULE (PCM)
A/T GEAR To 12 V
POSITION
N INDICATOR
D BLK/RED LT BLU
INDICATOR
DRIVER
CIRCUIT 2
A36 CAN H
1
WHT
WHT
B34 RED
F−CAN
TRANSCEIVER RED
B33
ATP RVS B22
YEL
SG B15 ATP FWD B28
BLU/YEL
PG B19 ATP 1 B15
BRN
BLK BLK ATP 2 B16
RED
ATP D B21
YEL/GRN
ATP N B12 STARTER
RED/BLK CUT
A/T GEAR 3 RELAY
BLK GRY ATP R B14
POSITION G501
INDICATOR G502 ATP P B13
PANEL 4
LIGHT BLK RED MULTIPLEX INTEGRATED
CONTROL UNIT (MICU) WHT/GRN
D3 SWITCH BLU/BLK BLU/WHT BLK
5 A41 D3 SW
WHT BLU BLU 5 4 9 3 8 2 6 10 7 1
6
WHT BLK WHT PNK BRN WHT/RED BLK
G101
6 7 2 8 3 9 5 1 4 10
G503
FWD RVS ST E
B36 PG1 N D
BLK R 2
B1 PG2 P 1
BLK
C40 LG1
BRN/YEL
C44 LG2
BRN/YEL
G101
4 5 6 8 9 1 2 3 4 7 8 9 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9
14 15 16 17 18 19 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18
20 21 23 24 25 20 21 22 23 24 25 20 21 22 23
27 28 29 31 33 34 35 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 27 29 30 31 32
36 37 (39) 40 41 42 44 36 37 38 39 41 42 43 44 36 (37) 39 40 42 43 44
A (44P) B (44P) C (44P)

14-328
ＳＷＡ７Ｅ２ＰＥ１０４１０７０００００ＥＡＡＴ００
06/09/15 17:44:29 62SWA00A_140_0331
Transmission Range Switch Test

1. Lift the vehicle up on a lift, or apply the parking 4. Transmission range switch test is finished if the
brake, block rear wheels, and raise the front of the test results are OK.
vehicle. Make sure it is securely supported. If there is no continuity between any terminals, go
to step 5.
2. Disconnect the transmission range switch harness
connector (A), and remove the connector from the 5. Remove the transmission range switch cover.
connector bracket. ＊０３
＊０１
6 x 1.0 mm
12 N·m
(1.2 kgf·m,
8.7 lbf·ft)

connector.
Terminal side of male terminals ＊０４
3. Check for continuity between terminals at the

harness connector. There should be continuity
between the terminals in the following table for
each switch position.
Transmission Range Switch Harness Connector

＊０２
Position/Connector Terminal/Signal Connections
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10
ATP ATP ATP ATP
GND
1
D R P FWD NP 2 N ATP
RVS
P
R
N
D
2
(cont’d)
14-329
ＳＷＡ７Ｅ１ＰＥ１０４１０７５９８１１ＦＥＡＴ００
06/09/15 17:44:30 62SWA00A_140_0332
Transmission Range Switch Test (cont’d)

7. Check for continuity between terminals at the 9. If there is no continuity between any terminals,
switch connector. There should be continuity remove the transmission range switch, and check
between the terminals in the following table for the end of the selector control shaft (A).
each switch position.
Selector Control Shaft Specification
Transmission Range Switch Connector Width (B): 6.1−6.2 mm (0.240−0.244 in.)
＊０５ End Gap (C): 1.8−2.0 mm (0.07−0.08 in.)
Position/Connector Terminal/Signal Connections ＊０７
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10
ATP ATP ATP ATP D ATP GND
N 2 P R
RVS NP FWD 1
P
R
N
D
A
2 C
1
8. If the transmission range switch continuity check is

OK, remove the harness clamps (A) from the clamp
B
bracket (B), and replace the faulty transmission
range switch harness (C).
＊０６
B 10. If measurement of the selector control shaft end is
within the specification, replace the transmission
range switch. If the measurement is out of
specification, repair the selector control shaft end,
and recheck the transmission range switch
continuity.
A
C
14-330
06/09/15 17:44:31 62SWA00A_140_0333
Transmission Range Switch Replacement

1. Lift the vehicle up on a lift, or apply the parking 5. Make sure the control shaft is in the N position. If
brake, block rear wheels, and raise the front of the necessary, move the shift lever to the N position.
vehicle. Make sure it is securely supported.
NOTE: Do not use the selector control shaft to
2. Shift the N position. adjust the shift position. If the control shaft tips are
squeezed together it will cause a faulty signal or
3. Remove the transmission range switch cover. position due to play between the selector control
＊０１ shaft and switch.
＊０３
4. Remove the transmission range switch. 6. Align the cutouts (A) on the rotary-frame with the
＊０２ neutral positioning cutouts (B) on the transmission
range switch (C), then put a 2.0 mm (0.08 in.) feeler
gauge blade (D) in the cutouts to hold the switch in
the N position.
NOTE: Be sure to use a 2.0 mm (0.08 in.) blade or

equivalent to hold the switch in the N position.
＊０４
C
B
A
(cont’d)
14-331
ＳＷＡ７Ｅ１ＰＥ１０４１０７５９８１１ＫＢＡＴ００
06/09/15 17:44:32 62SWA00A_140_0334
Transmission Range Switch Replacement (cont’d)

7. Install the transmission range switch (A) gently on 9. Check the connectors for rust, dirt, or oil, then
the selector control shaft (B) while holding it in the connect the connector securely.
N position with the 2.0 mm (0.08 in.) blade (C).
＊０５ 10. Turn the ignition switch ON (II). Move the shift lever
through all positions, and make sure the
transmission range switch is synchronized with the
A/T gear position indicator.
11. Make sure that the engine will start in the P and N
positions, and will not start in any other shift lever
position.
A
12. Make sure that the back-up lights come on when

the shift lever is in the R position.
13. Allow the all four wheels (4WD model) or the front
wheels (2WD model) to rotate freely, then start the
engine, and check the shift lever operation.
B C
14. Install the transmission range switch cover.
＊０７
8. Tighten the bolts on the transmission range switch

while you continue to hold the N position. Do not
move the transmission range switch when
tightening the bolts. Remove the feeler gauge.
＊０６
6 x 1.0 mm
12 N·m
(1.2 kgf·m,
8.7 lbf·ft)
6 x 1.0 mm
12 N·m (1.2 kgf·m, 8.7 lbf·ft)
14-332
06/09/15 17:44:33 62SWA00A_140_0335
A/T Gear Position Indicator Panel Light Harness Replacement

• The A/T gear position indicator panel light harness is spring (C).
not available from the park pin switch and D3 switch ＊０２
A F
connector harness; replace the A/T gear position C
indicator panel light harness, park pin switch, D3
switch connector harness, and the connector as a set. B
• Refer to the Shift Lever Disassembly and Reassembly
LHD model (see page 14-309), RHD model (see page
14-310) as needed during the following procedures.

the shift lever knob cover (C). E
＊０１
A
C
E
D

B (E) from the shift lever knob, and remove the shift
lever knob (F).
5. Remove the D3 switch/park pin switch/A/T gear

B B position indicator panel light connector from the
shift lever.

＊０３
(cont’d)
14-333
ＳＷＡ７Ｅ１ＰＥ１０４１０７１２２５０ＫＢＡＴ００
06/09/15 17:44:33 62SWA00A_140_0336
A/T Gear Position Indicator Panel Light Harness Replacement (cont’d)

8. Remove the A/T gear position indicator panel light 11. Remove the shift lever mounting bracket, and
socket from the indicator panel, and remove the remove the park pin switch.
9. For LHD model: Release the lock (A) of the shift lock
release, and remove the shift lock release and
release spring (B).
＊０４
12. Remove the A/T gear position indicator panel light

harness, park pin switch, D3 switch connector
harness, and connector assembly, and replace it.
10. For RHD model: Release the lock (A) of the shift
lock release extension, and remove the shift lock 13. Apply non-hardening thread lock sealant to the
release extension (B). screw threads. Install the park pin switch (A), and
＊０５ secure the switch with the screw.
＊０７
A 0.3 N·m
(0.03 kgf·m,
0.2 lbf·ft)
14. Install the shift lever mounting bracket.

lever ring, and D3 switch harness.
14-334
06/09/15 17:44:34 62SWA00A_140_0337
16. Route the D3 switch harness (A), connect the D3 18. Install the A/T gear position indicator panel light
switch 2P connector (B), and install the connector in socket in the indicator panel.
the holder.
＊０８ LHD Model
A ＊０９
B
17. Tie the harnesses of the D3 switch and park pin RHD Model
switch at the guide (C) with the band (D). ＊１０
(cont’d)
14-335
06/09/15 17:44:35 62SWA00A_140_0338
A/T Gear Position Indicator Panel Light Harness Replacement (cont’d)

19. Route the park pin switch harness, D3 switch 23. For LHD model: Make sure that the release spring
harness, and indicator panel light harness. Take a end (A) is installed in the shift lock release (B), and
slack out of the harnesses, and secure the the hooked end (C) is hitched on the catch (D).
harnesses (A) with the band (B) at the guide (C). ＊１３
B
＊１１
A
A
24. For RHD model: Install the shift lock release
20. Install the shift lock solenoid connector and D3 extension.
switch/park pin switch/A/T gear position indicator ＊１４
21. For LHD model: Install the shift lock release spring
(A) in the shift lock release (B).
NOTE: Steps 21 thru 23 describe shift lock release

installation for the LHD model; go to step 24 for
RHD model.
＊１２
A
B
22. For LHD model: Install the shift lock release and
release spring on the release shaft end.
14-336
06/09/15 17:44:35 62SWA00A_140_0339

＊１５
E
3 N·m


the screws (E).
14-337
06/09/15 17:44:36 62SWA00A_140_0340
A/T Gear Position Indicator Panel Replacement

A F
similar. B

＊０１
A
C
E
E
D
B

B B lever knob (F).

＊０３

socket from the indicator panel.
14-338
ＳＷＡ７Ｅ１ＰＥ１０４１０７１２２４７ＫＢＡＴ００
06/09/15 17:44:36 62SWA00A_140_0341
8. Remove the A/T gear position indicator panel, and 12. Tie the harnesses of the D3 switch and park pin
disassemble the indicator panel (A), panel base (B), switch at the guide (C) with the band (D).
and lever cover (C).
＊０４ 13. Install the A/T gear position indicator panel light
A socket in the indicator panel.

＊０６
B E
3 N·m
B
D
C
G
D
C A
9. Replace the indicator panel, panel base, or lever

cover, and assemble the A/T gear position indicator
F
panel; install the lever cover in the panel base with
the marks (D) point toward the front.
10. Install the A/T gear position indicator panel, and the shift lever knob (D), and install the shift lever
install the shift lever ring and D3 switch harness. knob over the shift lever.
11. Route the D3 switch harness (A), connect the D3 16. Apply non-hardening thread lock sealant to the
switch 2P connector (B), and install the connector in screw threads, and secure the shift lever knob with
the holder. the screws (E).
＊０５
A 17. Install the D3 switch (F) and shift lever knob cover
B
14-339
06/09/15 17:44:37 62SWA00A_140_0342
D3 Switch Circuit Troubleshooting

1. Remove the shift lever (see page 14-306). 5. Turn the ignition switch OFF.
2. Turn the ignition switch ON (II). 6. Jump the SCS line with the HDS.
3. Measure voltage between D3 switch/park pin 7. Disconnect PCM connector A (44P).

switch/A/T gear position indicator panel light
connector terminals No. 5 and No. 6. 8. Check for continuity between PCM connector
＊０１ terminal A41 and D3 switch/park pin switch/A/T
gear position indicator panel light connector
D3 SWITCH/PARK PIN SWITCH/
A/T GEAR POSITION INDICATOR terminal No. 5.
PANEL LIGHT CONNECTOR ＊０３
D3 SWITCH/ PCM CONNECTOR A (44P)
PARK PIN SWITCH/
A/T GEAR POSITION
INDICATOR PANEL
LIGHT CONNECTOR
D3 SW (BLU) GND (BLK)
D3 SW (BLU)
Wire side of female terminals D3 SW

(BLU)
Is there about 5 V ? Wire side of Terminal side of

NO−Go to step 4.
YES−Go to step 9.
4. Measure voltage between D3 switch/park pin
switch/A/T gear position indicator panel light NO−Repair open in the wire between PCM
connector terminal No. 5 and body ground. connector terminal A41 and the D3 switch/park pin
＊０２ switch/A/T gear position indicator panel light
connector.
PANEL LIGHT CONNECTOR
D3 SW (BLU)
YES−Repair open in the wire between D3 switch/

park pin switch/A/T gear position indicator panel
light connector terminal No. 6 and ground (G503),
and repair poor ground (G503).
NO−Go to step 5.
14-340
ＳＷＡ７Ｅ１ＰＥ１０４１０７１２２４２ＦＡＡＴ００
06/09/15 17:44:37 62SWA00A_140_0343
9. Check for continuity between D3 switch/park pin 10. Check for continuity between D3 switch/park pin
switch/A/T gear position indicator panel light switch/A/T gear position indicator panel light
connector terminal No. 5 and body ground. connector terminals No. 5 and No. 6 while pressing
＊０４ the D3 switch several times.
＊０５
A/T GEAR POSITION INDICATOR D3 SWITCH/PARK PIN SWITCH/
PANEL LIGHT CONNECTOR A/T GEAR POSITION INDICATOR
D3 SW (BLU)
D3 SW (WHT) GND (WHT)

Is there alternating continuity and no continuity
YES−Repair short in the wire between PCM every time the switch is pushed?
connector terminal A41 and the D3 switch/park pin
switch/A/T gear position indicator panel light YES−Check for loose or poor connection at PCM
connector. connector terminal A41. If the connection is OK,
substitute a known-good PCM (see page 14-10) and
NO−Check for loose or poor connection at PCM recheck. If the symptom goes away with a known-
connector terminal A41. If the connection is OK, good PCM, replace the original PCM; R20A1 and
substitute a known-good PCM (see page 14-10) and R20A2 engine models (see page 11-226), K24Z1
recheck. If the symptom goes away with a known- engine model (see page 11-613).
good PCM, replace the original PCM; R20A1 and
R20A2 engine models (see page 11-226), K24Z1 NO−Replace the D3 switch (see page 14-343).
14-341
06/09/15 17:44:38 62SWA00A_140_0344
D3 Switch Test
1. Remove the center lower covers (see page 20-127). 6. Remove the D3 switch 2P connector from the
connector holder, and disconnect it.
2. Disconnect the D3 switch/park pin switch/A/T gear ＊０２
position indicator panel light connector.
＊０１
7. Push the D3 switch several times, and check the

Terminal side of male terminals switch for continuity between D3 switch 2P
connector terminals No. 1 and No. 2. There should
3. Push the D3 switch several times, and check the be toggled continuity and no continuity between
switch for continuity between D3 switch/park pin terminals every time the D3 switch is pushed.
switch/A/T gear position indicator panel light
connector terminals No. 5 and No. 6. There should 8. Replace the D3 switch (see page 14-343) if the
be toggled continuity and no continuity between switch works incorrectly.
terminals every time the D3 switch is pushed.
9. Replace the D3 switch connector harness, A/T gear
4. D3 switch test is finished if the test result is OK. If position indicator panel light harness, and park pin
the D3 switch works incorrectly at the D3 switch/ switch as a set (see page 14-333) if the switch is OK.
park pin switch/A/T gear position indicator panel The D3 switch connector harness is not available
light connector, test the D3 switch at the D3 switch from the A/T gear position indicator panel light
2P connector. harness and park pin switch.
5. Remove the shift lever (see page 14-306). 10. Connect the 2P connector, and install it in the
holder.
12. Install the center lower covers (see page 20-127).
14-342
ＳＷＡ７Ｅ１ＰＥ１０４１０７１２２４１ＦＥＡＴ００
06/09/15 17:44:38 62SWA00A_140_0345
D3 Switch Replacement
A F
similar. B

＊０１
A
C
E
E
B D

B B (E) from the shift lever knob, and remove the shift
lever knob (F).

＊０３
6. Remove the D3 switch and shift lever ring.
(cont’d)
14-343
ＳＷＡ７Ｅ１ＰＥ１０４１０７１２２４１ＫＢＡＴ００
06/09/15 17:44:39 62SWA00A_140_0346
D3 Switch Replacement (cont’d)

7. Replace the D3 switch, and install the D3 switch 11. Apply silicone grease to the top of the shift lever
harness through the shift lever ring. rod (A), to the shift lever button spring (B), and to
＊０４ the area of the shift lever button (C) connected with
＊０６
E
3 N·m
8. Install the shift lever ring over the shift lever.

9. Route the D3 switch harness (A), connect the D3 the shift lever knob (D), and install the shift lever
switch 2P connector (B), and install the connector in knob over the shift lever.
the holder.
＊０５ 13. Apply non-hardening thread lock sealant to the
A screw threads, and secure the shift lever knob with
B
the screws (E).
C 15. Install the shift lever (see page 14-308).

14-344
06/09/15 17:44:42 62SWA00A_140_0347
A/T Interlock System

LHD Model
＊０１
PARK PIN SWITCH

DATA LINK SHIFT LOCK SOLENOID Key Interlock System Circuit
CONNECTOR (DLC) Shift Lock System Circuit Troubleshooting, page 14-352
Troubleshooting, page 14-347 Test, page 14-359
STEERING LOCK ASSEMBLY
KEY INTERLOCK SOLENOID
Key Interlock System Circuit
RHD Model
＊０２
DATA LINK
CONNECTOR (DLC)
PARK PIN SWITCH

SHIFT LOCK SOLENOID Key Interlock System Circuit
Shift Lock System Circuit Troubleshooting, page 14-352
Troubleshooting, page 14-347 Test, page 14-359
STEERING LOCK ASSEMBLY
KEY INTERLOCK SOLENOID
Key Interlock System Circuit
14-345
ＳＷＡ７Ｅ１ＰＥ１０４３６４０００００ＤＡＡＴ００
06/09/15 17:44:44 62SWA00A_140_0348
Circuit Diagram
＊０１
No. 12 (15 A)
BATTERY
No. 10 (7.5 A)
IGNITION SWITCH
GAUGE CONTROL MODULE WHT

B36
YEL
P POWERTRAIN CONTROL
MODULE (PCM) To 12 V BRAKE
R A/T GEAR PEDAL
POSITION POSITION
N INDICATOR IG1 C36 SWITCH
CAN A/T GEAR DIMMING To 5 V BLK/RED LT BLU
CONTROLLER POSITION D CIRCUIT
INDICATOR SCS A31 DATA LINK
DRIVER BRN BRN CONNECTOR
CIRCUIT 2 (DLC)
A36 CAN H
VCC4 A25 3 LT GRN
1
WHT BRN
APSA A17 1
D3 ORN
DIMMING SG4 A35 2
CIRCUIT A37 CAN L LT BLU ACCELERATOR
WHT
B34 RED PEDAL
POSITION
VCC5 A24 6 SENSOR
F−CAN LT GRN
TRANSCEIVER RED APSB A18 4
PUR
B33
SG5 A34 5
BLU
SG B15
PG B19
BK SW A40
BLK BLK LT GRN
1 ATP RVS B22

RED YEL RED/WHT or YEL
SHIFT G501 ATP FWD B28
LOCK G502 BLU/YEL
SOLENOID 2 A27 SLS ATP 1 B15
BLK RED RED RED or BRN
ATP 2 B16
GRN/RED or RED LT GRN
ATP D B21 STARTER
1 B36 PG1 YEL/GRN CUT
GRN BLK
PARK ATP N B12 RELAY
RED/BLK
PIN ATP R B14
SWITCH 2 B1 PG2
GRN BLK B13
ATP P
WHT or
BLU/BLK WHT/GRN
C40 LG1
BLK BRN/YEL BLU/BLK BLU/WHT BLK
5 4 9 3 8 2 6 10 7 1
C44 LG2
BRN/YEL
RED WHT PNK BRN WHT/RED BLK
G503 G101 MULTIPLEX INTEGRATED
CONTROL UNIT (MICU) 6 7 2 8 3 9 5 1 4 10 G101
LT GRN P−PIN ATP P
FWD RVS ST E
UNDER−DASH N D
4 FUSE/RELAY R 2
ORN
KEY BOX
No. 35 (7.5 A) P 1
INTERLOCK
SOLENOID 3
BLU KEY SOL
1
GRY KEY SW
KEY
SWITCH
2 TRANSMISSION RANGE SWITCH
BLK
BK SW
G501
4 5 6 8 9 1 2 3 4 7 8 9 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9
(10) 14 15 16 17 18 19 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18
20 21 (22) 23 24 25 20 21 22 23 24 25 20 21 (22) (23)
(26) 27 28 29 31 33 34 35 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 27 29 30 31 32
36 37 (39) 40 41 42 44 36 (37) (38) (39) 41 42 43 44 36 (37) 39 40 (41) 42 43 44
A (44P) B (44P) C (44P)

14-346
ＳＷＡ７Ｅ１ＰＥ１０４３６４０００００ＥＡＡＴ００
06/09/15 17:44:44 62SWA00A_140_0349
Shift Lock System Circuit Troubleshooting

1. Connect the HDS to the DLC. 7. Shift the shift lever into the P position, and press
the brake pedal. Do not press the accelerator.
2. Select Shift Lock Solenoid Test in the
Miscellaneous Test Menu, and check that the shift 8. Measure voltage between shift lock solenoid
lock solenoid operates with the HDS. connector terminals No. 1 and No. 2 while pressing
the brake pedal.
NOTE: If the HDS does not communicate with the ＊０２
PCM, troubleshoot the DLC circuit; R20A1 and SHIFT LOCK SOLENOID CONNECTOR
Does the shif t lock solenoid work properly?

IG1 (YEL) SLS (RED)
NO−Go to step 3.
3. Remove the center lower covers (see page 20-127).

4. Disconnect the shift lock solenoid connector.
5. Turn the ignition switch ON (II). Is there battery voltage?
6. Measure voltage between shift lock solenoid YES−Go to step 9.

connector terminal No. 1 and body ground.
＊０１ NO−Go to step 10.
SHIFT LOCK SOLENOID CONNECTOR
IG1 (YEL)
YES−Go to step 7.
NO−Check for a blown No. 10 (7.5 A) fuse in the

under-dash fuse/relay box. If the fuse is OK, repair
open or short in the wire between shift lock
solenoid connector terminal No. 1 and the under-
dash fuse/relay box.
(cont’d)
14-347
ＳＷＡ７Ｅ１ＰＥ１０４３６４５５２０１ＦＡＡＴ００
06/09/15 17:44:44 62SWA00A_140_0350
Shift Lock System Circuit Troubleshooting (cont’d)

9. Release the brake pedal, and measure voltage 10. Turn the ignition switch OFF.
between shift lock solenoid connector terminals
No. 1 and No. 2. The shift lever must be in the 11. Jump the SCS line with the HDS.
P position.
＊０３ 12. Disconnect PCM connector A (44P).
SHIFT LOCK SOLENOID CONNECTOR
terminal A27 and shift lock solenoid connector
terminal No. 2.
＊０４
SHIFT LOCK PCM CONNECTOR A (44P)
IG1 (YEL) SLS (RED) SOLENOID
CONNECTOR
Wire side of female terminals SLS (RED)
SLS (RED)
YES−Repair short in the wire between PCM Wire side of Terminal side of
connector terminal A27 and the shift lock female terminals female terminals
solenoid.
NO−Check the shift lock mechanism. If the
mechanism is OK, replace the shift lock solenoid YES−Substitute a known-good PCM (see page
(see page 14-355). 14-10) and recheck.

connector terminal A27 and the shift lock
solenoid.
14-348
06/09/15 17:44:45 62SWA00A_140_0351
14. Press the brake pedal. 19. Check for continuity between PCM connector
terminal A40 and brake pedal position switch 4P
Are the brake lights ON? connector terminal No. 2.
＊０６
BRAKE PEDAL PCM CONNECTOR A (44P)
YES−Go to step 15. POSITION SWITCH
4P CONNECTOR
NO−Repair faulty brake light circuit.
BK SW
(LT GRN)
17. Disconnect PCM connector A (44P).

BK SW
(LT GRN)
18. Measure voltage between PCM connector terminal
A40 and body ground while pressing the brake Wire side of Terminal side of
pedal and when the brake pedal is released. female terminals female terminals
＊０５
YES−Substitute a known-good PCM (see page

14-10) and recheck.

connector terminal A40 and the brake pedal
BK SW (LT GRN) position switch.
Is there battery voltage while the brake pedal is

pressed, and no voltage when the pedal is
released?
NO−Go to step 19.
(cont’d)
14-349
06/09/15 17:44:46 62SWA00A_140_0352
Shift Lock System Circuit Troubleshooting (cont’d)

20. Connect PCM connector A (44P). 26. Check for continuity between PCM connector
21. Disconnect the transmission range switch ＊０８
connector. PCM CONNECTOR B (44P)
22. Turn the ignition switch ON (II). ATP P (BLU/BLK)
23. Measure voltage between transmission range

＊０７
ATP P (BLK/BLU) GND (BLK) Is there continuity?

Wire side of female terminals switch connector.
NO−Go to step 27.

YES−Go to step 28. terminal B13 and transmission range switch
connector terminal No. 6.
NO−Go to step 24. ＊０９
PCM CONNECTOR B (44P) TRANSMISSION RANGE
SWITCH CONNECTOR
25. Disconnect PCM connector B (44P). ATP P (BLU/BLK)
ATP P (BLK/BLU)


switch connector.
14-350
06/09/15 17:44:46 62SWA00A_140_0353
28. Check for continuity between transmission range 29. Test the transmission range switch (see page
switch connector terminal No. 10 and body ground. 14-329).
＊１０
TRANSMISSION RANGE SWITCH CONNECTOR Is the switch OK ?

(see page 14-331).
GND (BLK)
30. Connect the HDS to the DLC.
31. Check the accelerator pedal position sensor 1 in the

data list with the HDS. Do not press the accelerator.
Is the accelerator pedal position sensor 1 opening
11 % and above, or the sensor 1 voltage 0.90 V
Is there continuity? and above?
YES−Substitute a known-good PCM (see page YES−Check the throttle body; R20A1 and R20A2
14-10) and recheck. engine models (see page 11-340), K24Z1 engine
NO−Repair open in the wire between transmission
range switch connector terminal No. 10 and ground NO−Substitute a known-good PCM (see page
(G101), or repair poor ground (G101). 14-10) and recheck.
14-351
06/09/15 17:44:46 62SWA00A_140_0354
Key Interlock System Circuit Troubleshooting

SRS components are located in this area. Review the 8. Check for continuity between D3 switch/park pin
SRS component locations (see page 24-14) and the switch/A/T gear position indicator panel light
precautions and procedures (see page 24-16) before connector terminal No. 1 and body ground.
doing repair or service. ＊０２
1. Turn the ignition switch to ACC (I). The shift lever A/T GEAR POSITION INDICATOR
must be in the P position. PANEL LIGHT CONNECTOR
2. Disconnect the steering lock assembly connector.
3. Check if the ignition switch can be turned to the P-PIN (LT GRN)
LOCK (0) position.
Can the ignition switch be turned the LOCK ( 0)

position?
YES−Go to step 4.
NO−Replace the ignition key cylinder/steering lock Is there continuity?

assembly (see page 17-15).
YES−Repair short in the wire between D3 switch/
4. Turn the ignition switch OFF. park pin switch/A/T gear position indicator panel
light connector terminal No. 1 and the MICU.
5. Shift the shift lever into any position other than P.
NO−Go to step 9.
6. Check for continuity between steering lock
assembly connector terminal No. 3 and body 9. Shift the shift lever into the P position.
ground.
＊０１ 10. Check for continuity between D3 switch/park pin
STEERING LOCK ASSEMBLY CONNECTOR switch/A/T gear position indicator panel light
connector terminals No. 1 and No. 2. Do not push
the shift lever button.
＊０３
KEY SOL (BLU) A/T GEAR POSITION INDICATOR
P-PIN (GRN) GND (GRN)

YES−Repair a short in the wire between the key
interlock solenoid and the MICU.
NO−Go to step 7.
YES−Replace the park pin switch (see page
7. Remove the shift lever (see page 14-306). 14-360).
NO−Go to step 11.
14-352
ＳＷＡ７Ｅ１ＰＥ１０４３６４３６０２１ＦＡＡＴ００
06/09/15 17:44:47 62SWA00A_140_0355
11. Disconnect the F (34P) connector from the under-

dash fuse/relay box.
13. Measure voltage between under-dash fuse/relay

box F (34P) connector terminal No. 27 and body
ground.
＊０４
UNDER-DASH FUSE/RELAY BOX F (34P) CONNECTOR
ATP P (RED)
Is there about 5 V when the shif t lever is in any

position other than the P position, and no voltage
when the shif t lever is in the P position?
YES−Substitute a known-good MICU and

recheck.
NO−Repair open or short in the wire between the

MICU and the transmission range switch.
14-353
06/09/15 17:44:47 62SWA00A_140_0356
Shift Lock Solenoid Test

1. Connect the HDS to the DLC (A).
＊０１
2. Select Shift Lock Solenoid Test in the

Miscellaneous Test Menu, and check that the shift
lock solenoid operates with the HDS.

3. Check that the shift lever can be moved out of the

P position when Shift Lock Solenoid: ON. Move the
shift lever back in the P position, and make sure it
locks with Shift Lock Solenoid: OFF.
4. Check that the shift lock releases when the shift

lock release is pushed, and check that it locks when
the shift lock release is released.
5. If the shift lock solenoid does not work properly,

perform shift lock system troubleshooting
(see page 14-347).
14-354
ＳＷＡ７Ｅ１ＰＥ１０４３６４５５１０１ＦＥＡＴ００
06/09/15 17:44:47 62SWA00A_140_0357
Shift Lock Solenoid Replacement

1. Remove the shift lever (see page 14-306). 4. Insert a 6 mm pin (A) into the guide hole (B), and
push the shift lock solenoid (C) out.
2. Remove the shift lock solenoid connector. ＊０２
D
E
3. Release the lock tabs retaining the shift lock
solenoid using thin blade screwdrivers. C
＊０１
A B
5. Replace the shift lock solenoid, solenoid plunger

(D), and plunger spring (E).
6. Apply silicone grease to the tip (F) of the shift lock

stop and solenoid plunger.
7. Install the shift lock solenoid by aligning the joint of

the shift lock solenoid plunger with the tip of the
shift lock stop, then push the shift lock solenoid into
the shift lever securely.
8. Install the shift lock solenoid connector.
14-355
ＳＷＡ７Ｅ１ＰＥ１０４３６４５５１０１ＫＢＡＴ００
06/09/15 17:44:48 62SWA00A_140_0358
Shift Lock Stop, Shift Lock Stop Cushion Replacement

1. Remove the shift lock solenoid (see page 14-355).
2. Remove the shift lock stop (A) and stop cushion (B),
and replace the shift lock stop or stop cushion.
＊０１
3. Install the shift lock stop cushion on the shift lock

stop.
4. Apply silicone grease to the pin (C) on the shift

lever bracket base, and install the shift lock stop
over the pin.
5. Install the shift lock solenoid (see page 14-355).
14-356
ＳＷＡ７Ｅ１ＰＥ１０４３６４５５１５１ＫＢＡＴ００
06/09/15 17:44:48 62SWA00A_140_0359
Shift Lock Release, Release Spring, Release Shaft Replacement

NOTE: This replacement applies for the LHD model. 6. Install the shift lock release spring (A) in the shift
lock release (B).
1. Remove the shift lever (see page 14-306). ＊０２
C
2. Remove the A/T gear position indicator panel from
the shift lever.
3. Release the lock (A) of the shift lock release, and

remove the shift lock release and release spring (B).
＊０１
A
C A
B
B
7. Install the shift lock release shaft (C) in the shift
lever, and install the shift lock release and release
spring on the release shaft end.
4. Release the lock (C) of the shift lock release shaft, 8. Make sure that the release spring end (A) is
and remove the shaft (D). installed in the shift lock release (B), and the
hooked end (C) is hitched on the catch (D).
5. Replace the shift lock release, release spring, or ＊０３
B
release shaft.
A
9. Install the A/T gear position indicator panel on the

shift lever.
14-357
ＳＷＡ７Ｅ１ＰＥ１０４３６４５５０７９ＫＢＡＴ１０
06/09/15 17:44:49 62SWA00A_140_0360
Shift Lock Release, Release Spring, Release Extension Replacement

NOTE: This replacement applies for the RHD model. 7. Install the shift lock release spring in the shift lock
release.
8. Install the shift lock release (A) while aligning the
2. Remove the A/T gear position indicator panel from tab (B) with the tab slot (C), while hooking the
the shift lever. release spring end (D) in the slot (E), and set the
stop lever (F) on the stop (G).
3. Release the lock (A) of the shift lock release ＊０６
A
extension, and remove the shift lock release
extension (B). H
＊０４
A
D
B F
E C
G
B
9. Install the shift lock release extension (H).
4. Push the stop lever (C) of the shift lock release, and 10. Install the A/T gear position indicator panel on the
remove the shift lock release (D). shift lever.
5. Remove the shift lock release spring (A) from the 11. Install the shift lever (see page 14-308).
release (B).
＊０５
B
6. Replace the shift lock release, release spring, or

release extension.
14-358
ＳＷＡ７Ｅ１ＰＥ１０４３６４５５０７９ＫＢＡＴ２０
06/09/15 17:45:28 62SWA00A_140_0361
Park Pin Switch Test

1. Remove the center lower covers (see page 20-127).
2. Disconnect the D3 switch/park pin switch/A/T gear

position indicator panel light connector.
＊０１
3. Shift the shift lever into the P position, and check

for continuity between D3 switch/park pin switch/
A/T gear position indicator panel light connector
terminals No. 1 and No. 2.
There should be no continuity.
4. Shift out of the P position, and check for continuity

between connector terminals No. 1 and No. 2.
There should be continuity.
5. If the park pin switch tests OK, connect the

connector and install the center lower covers
(see page 20-127).
If the park pin switch fails the test, replace the park
pin switch (see page 14-360).
14-359
ＳＷＡ７Ｅ１ＰＥ１０４３６４４５４０１ＦＥＡＴ００
06/09/15 17:45:28 62SWA00A_140_0362
Park Pin Switch Replacement

• The park pin switch is not available from the D3 spring (C).
switch connector harness and A/T gear position ＊０２
A F
indicator panel light harness; replace the park pin C
switch, D3 switch connector harness, A/T gear
position indicator panel light harness, and the B
connector as a set.
• Refer to the Shift Lever Disassembly and Reassembly
LHD model (see page 14-309), RHD model (see page
14-310) as needed during the following procedures.

pry the shift lever knob cover locks (B), and remove E
＊０１
A
E
C
D

B lever knob (F).
5. Remove the shift lock solenoid connector and D3

B B panel light connector from the shift lever.

＊０３
14-360
ＳＷＡ７Ｅ１ＰＥ１０４３６４４５４０１ＫＢＡＴ００
06/09/15 17:45:29 62SWA00A_140_0363
8. Remove the A/T gear position indicator panel light 11. Remove the shift lever mounting bracket, and
socket from the indicator panel, and remove the remove the park pin switch.
9. For LHD model: Release the lock (A) of the shift lock
release, and remove the shift lock release and
release spring (B).
＊０４

harness, park pin switch, D3 switch connector
harness, and connector assembly, and replace it.
10. For RHD model: Release the lock (A) of the shift
lock release extension, and remove the shift lock 13. Apply non-hardening thread lock sealant to the
release extension (B). screw threads. Install the new park pin switch (A),
＊０５ and secure the switch with the screw.
＊０７
A 0.3 N·m
(0.03 kgf·m,
0.2 lbf·ft)
14. Install the shift lever mounting bracket.

lever ring, and D3 switch harness.
(cont’d)
14-361
06/09/15 17:45:30 62SWA00A_140_0364
Park Pin Switch Replacement (cont’d)

16. Route the D3 switch harness (A), connect the D3 21. For LHD model: Install the shift lock release spring
switch 2P connector (B), and install the connector in (A) in the shift lock release (B).
the holder.
＊０８ NOTE: Steps 21 thru 23 describe shift lock release
A installation for the LHD model; go to step 24 for
B
RHD model.
＊１０

A
B
18. Install the A/T gear position indicator panel light

socket in the indicator panel.
19. Route the park pin switch harness, D3 switch 22. For LHD model: Install the shift lock release and
harness, and indicator panel light harness. Take a release spring on the release shaft end.
slack out of the harnesses, and secure the
harnesses (A) with the band (B) at the guide (C). 23. For LHD model: Make sure that the release spring
＊０９ end (A) is installed in the shift lock release (B), and
the hooked end (C) is hitched on the catch (D).
＊１１
B
C
B
20. Install the shift lock solenoid connector and D3

14-362
06/09/15 17:45:30 62SWA00A_140_0365
24. For RHD model: Install the shift lock release 25. Apply silicone grease to the top of the shift lever
extension. rod (A), to the shift lever button spring (B), and to
＊１２ the area of the shift lever button (C) connected with
＊１３
E
3 N·m


the screws (E).
14-363
06/09/15 17:45:31 62SWA00A_140_0366
Transmission End Cover
End Cover Removal

Mainshaft holder set 07PAB-0010000
K24Z1 Engine Model

NOTE: The illustration shows the 4WD transmission; the 2WD is similar.
1. Remove the cooler inlet line bolt (D), sealing washers, and line bracket bolts (E), and remove the ATF cooler inlet
line (F).
＊０１
K
M
O
L
B
C
E
F
E
E
14-364
ＳＷＡ７Ｅ３ＰＥ１０４１０４２４２５１ＫＡＡＴ００
06/09/15 17:45:32 62SWA00A_140_0367
2. Remove the ATF dipstick guide tube (G). 12. Cut the lock tab (A) of the each shaft locknut (B)
using a chisel (C). Then remove the locknuts and
3. Remove the cooler outlet line bolt (H), line bracket conical spring washers from each shaft.
bolt, and sealing washers, and remove the ATF
cooler outlet line (I). NOTE:
• Countershaft and secondary shaft locknuts have
4. Remove A/T clutch pressure control solenoid valve left-hand threads.
A, ATF joint pipes, O-rings, ATF pipe, and gasket. • Keep all of the chiseled particles out of the
transmission.
5. Remove A/T clutch pressure control solenoid valve • Clean the old mainshaft and countershaft
B and C, harness clamp bracket (J), ATF joint pipes, locknuts; they are used to install the press fit idler
O-rings, and gasket. gear on the mainshaft, and park gear on the
countershaft.
6. Remove the transmission range switch cover (K). ＊０３
7. Remove the transmission range switch harness

clamps (L) from the clamp bracket (M), and remove
the transmission range switch (N). C
B
8. Remove the harness clamp bracket from the end
cover (O).
9. Remove the end cover, dowel pins, O-rings, and

end cover gasket.
10. Slip the special tool onto the mainshaft.

＊０２
A
13. Remove the special tool from the mainshaft.
07PAB-0010000
11. Engage the park pawl with the park gear.
(cont’d)
14-365
06/09/15 17:45:32 62SWA00A_140_0368
End Cover Removal (cont’d)

14. Set a two-jaw (or three-jaw) puller (A) on the 15. Install a 6 x 1.0 mm bolts (A) on the mainshaft idler
countershaft (B) by putting a spacer (C) between gear (B). Set a puller (C) on the mainshaft (D) with
the puller and countershaft, then remove the park putting a spacer (E) between the puller and
gear (D). mainshaft, then remove the mainshaft idler gear.
＊０４＊０５
A
E
C
B
B
D
D
16. Remove the park pawl, park pawl spring, park pawl
shaft, and stop shaft.
17. Remove the park lever from the control shaft.
14-366
06/09/15 17:45:33 62SWA00A_140_0369

Mainshaft holder set 07PAB-0010000

1. Remove the cooler inlet line bolt (D), sealing washers, and line bracket bolts (E), and remove the ATF cooler inlet
line and ATF filter (F).
＊０１
K
M
O
L
B
C
E
D E
F
(cont’d)
14-367
ＳＷＡ７Ｅ２ＰＥ１０４１０４２４２５１ＫＡＡＴ００
06/09/15 17:45:34 62SWA00A_140_0370
End Cover Removal (cont’d)

2. Remove the ATF dipstick guide tube (G). 12. Cut the lock tab (A) of the each shaft locknut (B)
using a chisel (C). Then remove the locknuts and
3. Remove the cooler outlet line bolt (H), line bracket conical spring washers from each shaft.
bolt, and sealing washers, and remove the ATF
cooler outlet line (I). NOTE:
4. Remove A/T clutch pressure control solenoid valve left-hand threads.
A, ATF joint pipes, O-rings, ATF pipe, and gasket. • Keep all of the chiseled particles out of the
transmission.
5. Remove A/T clutch pressure control solenoid valve • Clean the old mainshaft and countershaft
B and C, harness clamp bracket (J), ATF joint pipes, locknuts; they are used to install the press fit idler
O-rings, and gasket. gear on the mainshaft, and park gear on the
countershaft.
6. Remove the transmission range switch cover (K). ＊０３
7. Remove the transmission range switch harness

clamps (L) from the clamp bracket (M), and remove
the transmission range switch (N). C
B
8. Remove the harness clamp bracket from the end
cover (O).
9. Remove the end cover, dowel pins, O-rings, and

end cover gasket.
10. Slip the special tool onto the mainshaft.

＊０２
A
07PAB-0010000
11. Engage the park pawl with the park gear.
14-368
06/09/15 17:45:34 62SWA00A_140_0371
14. Set a two-jaw (or three-jaw) puller (A) on the 15. Install a 6 x 1.0 mm bolts (A) on the mainshaft idler
countershaft (B) by putting a spacer (C) between gear (B). Set a puller (C) on the mainshaft (D) with
the puller and countershaft, then remove the park putting a spacer (E) between the puller and
gear (D). mainshaft, then remove the mainshaft idler gear.
＊０４＊０５
A
E
C
B
B
D
D
16. Remove the park pawl, park pawl spring, park pawl
shaft, and stop shaft.
17. Remove the park lever from the control shaft.
14-369
06/09/15 17:45:35 62SWA00A_140_0372
Park Lever Stop Inspection and Idler Gear Shaft Bearing

Adjustment Replacement
1. Set the park lever in the P position. Special Tools Required

• Adjustable bearing remover set 07JAC-PH80000
2. Measure the distance (A) between the park pawl • Handle driver 07749-0010000
shaft (B) and the park lever roller pin (C). • Driver attachment, 52 x 55 mm 07746-0010400
Standard: 57.7−58.7 mm (2.27−2.31 in.) 1. Remove the idler gear shaft bearing (A) from the
＊０１ end cover (B) with the special tool.
C ＊０１
07JAC-PH80000
A
3. If the measurement is out of standard, select and

install the appropriate park lever stop (A) from the
table.
＊０２ B
A
2. Install the new bearing in the end cover with the

special tools.
B C ＊０２
07749-0010000
PARK LEVER STOP

Mark Part Number B C
1 24537-PA9-003 11.00 mm 11.00 mm
(0.433 in.) (0.433 in.) 07746-0010400
2 24538-PA9-003 10.80 mm 10.65 mm
(0.425 in.) (0.419 in.)
3 24539-PA9-003 10.60 mm 10.30 mm
(0.417 in.) (0.406 in.)
4. After replacing the park lever stop, make sure the

distance is within tolerance.
14-370
ＳＷＡ７Ｅ１ＰＥ１０４１０４４５００１ＭＣＡＴ００ＳＷＡ７Ｅ１ＰＥ１０４１０４３４０８３ＫＢＡＴ００
06/09/15 17:45:36 62SWA00A_140_0373
Selector Control Shaft Oil Seal Selector Control Shaft Bearing

Replacement Replacement
Special Tools Required Special Tools Required

• Handle driver 07749-0010000 • Handle driver 07749-0010000
• Driver attachment, 22 x 24 mm 07746-0010800 • Driver attachment, 22 x 24 mm 07746-0010800
1. Remove the oil seal (A) from the end cover (B). 1. Remove the oil seal from the end cover, then
＊０１ remove the bearing.
＊０１
A
2. Install the new oil seal flush to the end cover with
the special tools.
＊０２
07749-0010000 2. Install the new bearing flush to the end cover with
the special tools.
＊０２
07749-0010000
07746-0010800
07746-0010800
3. Install the new oil seal.
14-371
ＳＷＡ７Ｅ１ＰＥ１０４１０４１７２５６ＫＢＡＴ００ＳＷＡ７Ｅ１ＰＥ１０４１０４１７２５３ＫＢＡＴ００
06/09/15 17:45:36 62SWA00A_140_0374
ATF Feed Pipe Replacement

1. Remove the snap rings (A), ATF feed pipes (B), and
feed pipe flanges (C) from the end cover (D).
NOTE: Replace the end cover, if the 1st clutch ATF

feed pipe (E) replacement is required.
＊０１
A
C
G
F
A
B
C
F
E
G
2. Install the new O-rings (F) over the ATF feed pipes.
3. Install the ATF feed pipes in the end cover by

aligning the feed pipe tabs with the indentations in
the end cover.
4. Install the new O-rings (G) in the end cover, then

install the feed pipe flanges over the ATF feed
pipes.
5. Secure the ATF feed pipes and feed pipe flanges

with the snap rings.
14-372
ＳＷＡ７Ｅ１ＰＥ１０４１０４１３０１３ＫＢＡＴ００
06/09/15 17:45:37 62SWA00A_140_0375
Transmission Housing
Housing and Shaft Assembly Removal

NOTE: The illustration shows the 4WD transmission; the 2WD does not have the transfer mechanism.
1. Remove the ATF feed pipe (A) from the idler gear shaft, and the ATF lubrication pipe (B) from the transmission
housing.
＊０１
A
B
J
G
C
L
H I
2. Remove the shift solenoid valve cover (C), dowel pins (D), and gasket (E).
3. Disconnect the connectors from shift solenoid valves, and remove the solenoid harness connector (F).
4. Remove the input shaft (mainshaft) speed sensor (G), and output shaft (countershaft) speed sensor (H) and sensor
washer (I) (only for K24Z1 engine model).
5. Remove the transmission housing mounting bolts (J) (20 bolts), transmission hanger (K), and harness clamp
brackets (L).
(cont’d)
14-373
ＳＷＡ７Ｅ１ＰＥ１０４１０４５９８０１ＫＡＡＴ００
06/09/15 17:45:39 62SWA00A_140_0376
Housing and Shaft Assembly Removal (cont’d)

6. Align the spring pin (A) on the selector control shaft 12. Remove the selector control shaft (A) from the
(B) with the transmission housing groove (C) by torque converter housing.
turning the control shaft with the control lever. ＊０４
NOTE: Do not squeeze the end of the control shaft

tips together when turning the shaft.
＊０２
A C
A B
13. Turn the detent arm (B) away from the countershaft
(C).
7. While expanding the snap ring of the secondary
shaft bearing using the snap ring pliers, lift the 14. Remove the mainshaft subassembly (A),
transmission housing. Release the snap ring pliers countershaft subassembly (B), and secondary shaft
and remove the transmission housing. subassembly (C) together. Do not bump the
countershaft on the baffle plate (D).
8. Remove the countershaft shaft reverse gear and ＊０５
A
needle bearing.
B
9. Remove the lock bolt securing the shift fork, then

remove the shift fork with the reverse selector C
together.
10. Remove the selector control lever from the selector

control shaft.
11. Unhook the detent spring (A) from the detent arm
(B).
＊０３
D
A
15. Remove the baffle plate.
16. Remove the differential assembly.
17. 4WD model: Remove the transfer assembly.
14-374
06/09/15 17:45:39 62SWA00A_140_0377
Bearing Removal
Special Tools Required 3. Expand the snap ring of the idler gear shaft bearing
• Driver attachment, 78 x 90 mm 07GAD-SD40101 with the snap ring pliers, then push the bearing out.
• Handle driver 07749-0010000 ＊０２
• Driver attachment, 42 x 47 mm 07746-0010300
• Snap ring pliers 07LGC-0010100
1. Remove the idler gear shaft when removing the

mainshaft bearing and idler gear shaft bearing.
NOTE: If you are only removing the countershaft

bearing, idler gear shaft removal is not needed.
2. To remove the mainshaft bearing (A) and

countershaft bearing (B) from the transmission
housing, expand each snap ring with the snap ring
pliers, then push the bearing out. 07LGC-0010100
NOTE: Do not remove the snap ring unless it’s

necessary to clean the grooves in the housing.
＊０１
07LGC-0010100
14-375
ＳＷＡ７Ｅ１ＰＥ１０４１０４３９５１１ＫＡＡＴ００
06/09/15 17:45:40 62SWA00A_140_0378
Bearing Installation
Special Tools Required 4. Expand the snap ring of the idler gear shaft (A) with
• Driver attachment, 78 x 90 mm 07GAD-SD40101 the snap ring pliers, and install the bearing part-
• Handle driver 07749-0010000 way into the housing.
• Driver attachment, 42 x 47 mm 07746-0010300 ＊０２
• Snap ring pliers 07LGC-0010100 A
1. Install the bearings in the direction shown.
2. Expand each snap ring with the snap ring pliers,

and install the mainshaft bearing (A) and
countershaft bearing (B) part-way into the housing.
＊０１
07LGC-0010100
A
07LGC-0010100
5. Release the pliers, then push the bearing down into

the housing until the snap ring snaps in place
around it.
B
6. After installing the bearings verify that the snap
rings (A) are seated in the bearing and housing
grooves, and that the ring end gaps (B) are correct.
＊０３
B: 0−7 mm (0−0.28 in.)
3. Release the pliers, then push the bearing down into

the housing until the snap ring snaps in place
around it.
7. Install the idler shaft.
14-376
ＳＷＡ７Ｅ１ＰＥ１０４１０４３９５１１ＫＣＡＴ００
06/09/15 17:45:40 62SWA00A_140_0379
Reverse Idler Gear Removal and Installation

Removal Installation
1. Remove the bolt (A) securing the reverse idler gear 1. Install the reverse idler gear in the transmission
shaft holder. housing.
＊０１
A
B 2. Lightly coat the reverse idler gear shaft (A), needle
bearing (B), and new O-rings (C) with lithium
grease.
＊０３
D D F
C
C E
2. Install a 5 x 0.8 mm bolt (B) in the reverse idler gear C

shaft, and pull it to remove the reverse idler gear
shaft (C) and gear shaft holder (D) together. 3. Assemble the new O-rings and needle bearing on
the reverse idler gear shaft, then install the reverse
3. Remove the reverse idler gear. idler gear shaft in the reverse idler gear shaft
＊０２ holder (D). Align the D-shaped cut out (E) of the
shaft with the D-shaped area (F) of the holder.
4. Install the reverse idler gear shaft/holder assembly

on the transmission housing.
＊０４
6 x 1.0 mm
12 N·m
(1.2 kgf·m,
8.7 lbf·ft)
14-377
ＳＷＡ７Ｅ１ＰＥ１０４１０４１２２７０ＫＤＡＴ００
06/09/15 17:45:41 62SWA00A_140_0380
Valve Body
Valve Body and ATF Strainer Removal

1. Remove the ATF feed pipes (A) and ATF joint pipes (B).
＊０１
6 x 1.0 mm (8)
6 x 1.0 mm (2) 6 x 1.0 mm (1)
A
D
V
W A F
B E
6 x 1.0 mm (12) H
O
L
M
I
N
K
8 x 1.25 mm (3)
P
S Q
J
Q
S
T
R
2. Remove the ATF strainer (C) (two bolts).
3. Remove the regulator valve body (D) (eight bolts).
14-378
ＳＷＡ７Ｅ１ＰＥ１０４８０１３９３０１ＫＡＡＴ００
06/09/15 17:45:41 62SWA00A_140_0381
4. Remove the stator shaft (E) and stator shaft stop (F), 11. Test the ATF strainer by pouring clean ATF through
then remove the regulator separator plate (G) and the inlet opening, and replace it if it is clogged or
two dowel pins (H). damaged.
5. Remove the servo body (I) (12 bolts), then remove 12. Remove the O-rings (V) (W) from the stator shaft
the separator plate (J) and two dowel pins (K). and ATF strainer. Install the new ones when
installing the valve bodies.
6. Remove the cooler check valve spring (L) and valve
(M), then remove the main valve body (N) (three
bolts). Do not let the check balls (O) fall out.
7. Remove the ATF pump driven gear shaft (P), then

remove the ATF pump gears (Q).
8. Remove the main separator plate (R) and two

dowel pins (S).
9. Remove the ATF magnet (T), clean and reinstall it in

the torque converter housing (U).
10. Clean the inlet opening (A) of the ATF strainer (B)
thoroughly with compressed air, then check that it
is in good condition and that the inlet opening is
not clogged.
＊０２
B
14-379
06/09/15 17:45:42 62SWA00A_140_0382
Valve Body
Valve Body Repair

NOTE: This repair is only necessary if one or more of 5. Remove the ＃600 paper. Thoroughly wash the
the valves in a valve body do not slide smoothly in their entire valve body in solvent, then dry it with
bores. Use this procedure to free the valves. compressed air.
1. Soak a sheet of ＃600 abrasive paper in ATF for 6. Coat the valve with ATF, then drop it into its bore. It
about 30 minutes. should drop to the bottom of the bore under its
own weight. If not, repeat step 4, then retest. If the
2. Carefully tap the valve body so the sticking valve valve still sticks, replace the valve body.
drops out of its bore. It may be necessary to use a ＊０２
small screwdriver to pry the valve free. Be careful
not to scratch the bore with the screwdriver.
3. Inspect the valve for any scuff marks. Use the ATF-
soaked ＃600 paper to polish off any burrs that are
on the valve, then wash the valve in solvent and
dry it with compressed air.
4. Roll up half a sheet of ATF-soaked ＃600 paper and

insert it in the valve bore of the sticking valve.
Twist the paper slightly, so that it unrolls and fits
the bore tightly, then polish the bore by twisting the
paper as you push it in and out.
NOTE: The valve body is aluminum and doesn’t

require much polishing to remove any burrs.
＊０１
7. Remove the valve, and thoroughly clean it and the
valve body with solvent. Dry all parts with
compressed air, then reassemble using ATF as a
lubricant.
14-380
ＳＷＡ７Ｅ１ＰＥ１０４８０１０００００ＬＢＡＴ００
06/09/15 17:45:42 62SWA00A_140_0383
Valve Body Valve Installation

1. Coat all parts with ATF before assembly.
2. Install the valves and springs in the sequence

shown for the main valve body (see page 14-382),
regulator valve body (see page 14-384), and servo
body (see page 14-385). Refer to the following
valve cap illustrations, and install each valve cap so
the end shown facing up will be facing the outside
of the valve body.
＊０１
3. Install all the springs and seats. Insert the spring (A)
in the valve, then install the valve in the valve body
(B). Push the spring in with a screwdriver, then
install the spring seat (C).
＊０２
A B
14-381
ＳＷＡ７Ｅ１ＰＥ１０４８０１６２９９１ＫＣＡＴ００
06/09/15 17:45:42 62SWA00A_140_0384
Valve Body
Main Valve Body Disassembly, Inspection, and Reassembly

1. Clean all parts thoroughly in solvent, and dry them with compressed air. Blow out all passages.
2. Do not use a magnet to remove the check balls, it may magnetize the balls.
3. Inspect the valve body for scoring and damage.
4. Check all valves for free movement. If any fail to slide freely, refer to valve body repair (see page 14-380).
5. Coat all parts with ATF during assembly.

＊０１
A SPRING SEAT
SHIFT VALVE A
B RELIEF VALVE
SHIFT VALVE B C
VALVE SLEEVE
SHIFT VALVE C
D
CHECK BALL
ROLLER
SERVO CONTROL VALVE
MANUAL VALVE
LOCK-UP
F E CONTROL
VALVE
COOLER CHECK
VALVE
VALVE CAP CHECK BALL

G SHIFT VALVE E
H MAIN VALVE BODY
VALVE CAP CLIP
SPRING SPECIFICATIONS
Springs Standard (New)-Unit: mm (in.)
Wire Diameter O.D. Free Length No. of Coils
A Shift valve A spring 0.8 (0.031) 5.6 (0.220) 28.1 (1.106) 15.9
B Shift valve B spring 0.8 (0.031) 5.6 (0.220) 28.1 (1.106) 15.9
C Shift valve C spring 0.8 (0.031) 5.6 (0.220) 28.1 (1.106) 15.9
D Relief valve spring 1.0 (0.039) 9.6 (0.378) 34.1 (1.343) 10.2
E Lock-up control valve spring 0.65 (0.026) 7.1 (0.280) 23.1 (0.909) 12.7
F Cooler check valve spring 0.85 (0.033) 6.6 (0.260) 27.0 (1.063) 11.3
G Servo control valve spring 0.7 (0.028) 6.6 (0.260) 35.7 (1.406) 17.2
H Shift valve E spring 0.8 (0.031) 5.6 (0.220) 28.1 (1.106) 15.9
14-382
ＳＷＡ７Ｅ１ＰＥ１０４８０１３９３０１ＭＥＡＴ００
06/09/15 17:45:43 62SWA00A_140_0385
ATF Pump Inspection

1. Install the ATF pump drive gear (A), driven gear (B), 2. Measure the side clearance of the ATF pump drive
and ATF pump driven gear shaft (C) in the main gear (A) and driven gear (B).
valve body (D). Lubricate all parts with ATF, and
install the ATF pump driven gear with its grooved ATF Pump Gears Side (Radial) Clearance:
and chamfered side facing up. Standard (New):
＊０１ ATF Pump Drive Gear:
A B
0.210−0.265 mm (0.0083−0.0104 in.)
ATF Pump Driven Gear:
0.070−0.125 mm (0.0028−0.0049 in.)
＊０２
B A
C
3. Remove the ATF pump driven gear shaft. Measure
D the thrust clearance between the ATF pump driven
gear (A) and the valve body (B) with a straight edge
(C) and a feeler gauge (D).
ATF Pump Drive/Driven Gear Thrust (Axial)

Clearance:
Standard (New): 0.03−0.05 mm (0.001−0.002 in.)
Service Limit: 0.07 mm (0.003 in.)
＊０３
C B
14-383
ＳＷＡ７Ｅ１ＰＥ１０４８０１１３０２１ＭＡＡＴ００
06/09/15 17:45:43 62SWA00A_140_0386
Valve Body
Regulator Valve Body Disassembly, Inspection, and Reassembly

2. Inspect the valve body for scoring and damage, and check all valves for free movement. If any fail to slide freely,
refer to valve body repair (see page 14-380).
3. Hold the regulator spring cap in place while removing the stop bolt. The regulator spring cap is spring loaded.
5. When reassembling the valve body, align the hole in the regulator spring cap with the hole in the valve body, then
press the spring cap into the valve body, and tighten the stop bolt.
＊０１
REGULATOR SPRING CAP 6 x 1.0 mm
12 N·m (1.2 kgf·m, 8.7 lbf·ft)
ACCUMULATOR COVER
F 1ST ACCUMULATOR PISTON
STOP BOLT G
6 x 1.0 mm
A 12 N·m
(1.2 kgf·m,
B 8.7 lbf·ft) H
3RD
SPRING SEAT ACCUMULATOR
C PISTON
O-RING
D Replace.
TORQUE CONVERTER CHECK VALVE
REGULATOR VALVE
VALVE CAP REGULATOR VALVE BODY
VALVE CAP CLIP

LOCK-UP SHIFT VALVE
E
A Stator reaction spring 4.5 (0.177) 35.4 (1.394) 30.3 (1.193) 1.92
B Regulator valve spring A 1.85 (0.073) 14.7 (0.579) 83.0 (3.268) 16.9
C Regulator valve spring B 1.6 (0.063) 9.2 (0.362) 44.0 (1.732) 12.5
D Torque converter check valve spring 1.2 (0.047) 8.6 (0.339) 33.8 (1.331) 12.2
E Lock-up shift valve spring 1.0 (0.039) 6.6 (0.260) 35.5 (1.398) 18.2
F 3rd accumulator spring 2.5 (0.098) 14.6 (0.575) 29.4 (1.157) 4.9
G 1st accumulator spring A 2.4 (0.094) 18.6 (0.732) 49.0 (1.929) 7.1
H 1st accumulator spring B 2.3 (0.091) 12.2 (0.480) 31.5 (1.240) 6.6
14-384
ＳＷＡ７Ｅ１ＰＥ１０４８０１５０７０１ＭＥＡＴ００
06/09/15 17:45:44 62SWA00A_140_0387
Servo Body Disassembly, Inspection, and Reassembly

2. Inspect the valve body for scoring and damage.
3. Check the shift valve D for free movement. If any fail to slide freely, refer to valve body repair (see page 14-380).
4. When removing and installing the shift solenoid valves, refer to shift solenoid valves removal and installation
(see page 14-386).
6. Replace the O-rings with new ones.

＊０１
6 x 1.0 mm
E 12 N·m (1.2 kgf·m, 8.7 lbf·ft)
D ACCUMULATOR COVER
2ND ACCUMULATOR PISTON
C F
B 5TH ACCUMULATOR PISTON
4TH ACCUMULATOR PISTON O-RING

O-RING Replace.
Replace.
O-RING
Replace. SERVO BODY
A
SHIFT VALVE D SERVO VALVE/SHIFT FORK SHAFT

SPRING SEAT
O-RING
Replace.
A Shift valve D spring 0.8 (0.031) 5.6 (0.220) 28.1 (1.106) 15.9
B 4th accumulator spring B 2.3 (0.091) 12.2 (0.480) 31.5 (1.240) 6.6
C 4th accumulator spring A 2.4 (0.094) 18.6 (0.732) 49.0 (1.929) 7.1
D 2nd accumulator spring B 2.0 (0.079) 10.6 (0.417) 34.0 (1.339) 8.0
E 2nd accumulator spring A 2.2 (0.087) 16.6 (0.654) 48.2 (1.898) 8.5
F 5th accumulator spring 2.5 (0.098) 14.6 (0.575) 29.9 (1.177) 4.9
14-385
ＳＷＡ７Ｅ１ＰＥ１０４８０１５４５０１ＭＥＡＴ００
06/09/15 17:45:44 62SWA00A_140_0388
Valve Body
Shift Solenoid Valve Removal and Installation

NOTE: 5. Install shift solenoid valve E by holding the shift
• Do not hold the shift solenoid connector to remove solenoid valve body; be sure to install mounting
and to install the shift solenoid valves. Hold the shift bracket contacts the servo body.
solenoid valve body.
• Do not install the shift solenoid valve A before 6. Install shift solenoid valve B by holding the shift
installing the shift solenoid valve D, and do not install solenoid valve body; be sure to install mounting
shift solenoid valve B before solenoid valve E. If bracket contacts the bracket on shift solenoid
solenoid valves A and B are installed before solenoid valve E.
valves D and E, it may damage the hydraulic control
system. 7. Install shift solenoid valve C by holding the shift
solenoid valve body; be sure to install mounting
1. Remove the shift solenoid valves by holding the bracket contacts the servo body.
solenoid valve body.
2. Install new O-rings (F) on each shift solenoid valves.
NOTE: A new solenoid valve comes with new

O-rings. If you install a new solenoid valve, use the
O-rings provided on it.
＊０１
6 x 1.0 mm
A 12 N·m (1.2 kgf·m, 8.7 lbf·ft)
D
6 x 1.0 mm
12 N·m
F (1.2 kgf·m, 8.7 lbf·ft)
F
6 x 1.0 mm
E 12 N·m
(1.2 kgf·m,
8.7 lbf·ft)
3. Install shift solenoid valve D by holding the shift

4. Install shift solenoid valve A by holding the shift

bracket contacts the bracket on shift solenoid
valve D.
14-386
ＳＷＡ７Ｅ１ＰＥ１０４８０１５４８０１ＫＤＡＴ００
06/09/15 17:45:45 62SWA00A_140_0389
Torque Converter Housing
Mainshaft Bearing and Oil Seal Replacement

Special Tools Required 3. Install the new oil seal flush with the housing with
• Adjustable bearing remover set 07JAC-PH80000 the special tools.
• Handle driver 07749-0010000 ＊０３
1. Remove the mainshaft bearing and oil seal with the

special tool.
＊０１
07JAC-PH80000
07749-0010000 07746-0010600
2. Install the new mainshaft bearing until it bottoms in

the torque converter housing with the special tools.
＊０２
07749-0010000 07746-0010500
14-387
ＳＷＡ７Ｅ１ＰＥ１０４１０４３９５２１ＫＢＡＴ００
06/09/15 17:45:46 62SWA00A_140_0390
Countershaft Bearing Replacement

Special Tools Required 4. Install the bearing securely in the housing with the
• Adjustable bearing remover set 07JAC-PH80000 special tools.
• Handle driver 07749-0010000 ＊０３
07749-0010000
1. Remove the countershaft bearing with the special
tool.
＊０１
07746-0010500
07JAC-PH80000
5. Make sure that the bearing outer race notch-cut (A)

is installed in height of 0−0.05 mm (0−0.002 in.)
(B) above the housing surface (C). Do not install the
bearing exceed 0.05 mm (0.002 in.) high from
housing surface.
＊０４
A
2. Remove the ATF guide plate (A), and check it for
wear and damage. If the guide plate is worn or
damaged, replace it. B
＊０２
B C
3. Install the ATF guide plate in the housing, and

install the new countershaft bearing (B).
14-388
ＳＷＡ７Ｅ１ＰＥ１０４１０４１７４２４ＫＢＡＴ００
06/09/15 17:46:27 62SWA00A_140_0391
Secondary Shaft Bearing Replacement

Special Tools Required 3. Install the new O-rings (A) on the ATF guide collar
• Handle driver 07749-0010000 (B), then install the ATF guide collar in the housing.
• Driver attachment, 62 x 68 mm 07746-0010500 ＊０３
C
1. Remove the bolt, then remove the lock washer (A)
B
and bearing set plate (B).
＊０１
A 6 x 1.0 mm
B 12 N·m
(1.2 kgf·m, 8.7 lbf·ft)
4. Install the new secondary shaft bearing (C) in the

direction shown.
5. Install the bearing in the housing securely with the

special tools.
＊０４
2. Remove the secondary shaft bearing (A) by heating

the housing to about 100 °C (212 °F) with a heat gun
(B). Do not heat the housing in excess of 100 °C
(212 °F).
NOTE: Let the housing cool to normal temperature

before installing the bearing.
＊０２
B
07749-0010000
07746-0010500
6. Check that the bearing groove aligns with the

housing surface, then install the bearing set plate
with aligning the bearing groove.
7. Install the new lock washer and bolt, then bend the
lock tab of the lock washer against the bolt head.
14-389
ＳＷＡ７Ｅ１ＰＥ１０４１０４５４２０２ＫＢＡＴ００
06/09/15 17:46:27 62SWA00A_140_0392
Selector Control Shaft Oil Seal Replacement

• Handle driver 07749-0010000
• Oil seal driver attachment 07947-ZV00100
1. Remove the oil seal (A) from the torque converter

housing.
＊０１
2. Install the new oil seal (A) in the torque converter

housing in depth of 0.5−1.5 mm (0.02−0.06 in.) (B)
below the housing surface with the special tools.
＊０２
07749-0010000
A 07947-ZV00100
14-390
ＳＷＡ７Ｅ１ＰＥ１０４１０４１７２５８ＫＢＡＴ００
06/09/15 17:46:28 62SWA00A_140_0393
Shafts and Clutches
Mainshaft Disassembly, Inspection, and Reassembly

1. Inspect the thrust needle bearing and the needle bearing for galling and rough movement.
＊０１
LOCKNUT (FLANGE NUT)
24 x 1.25 mm
Replace.
THRUST NEEDLE BEARING
CONICAL SPRING
WASHER
4TH GEAR Replace.
IDLER GEAR
NEEDLE BEARING
4TH GEAR COLLAR

TRANSMISSION
HOUSING BEARING
4TH/5TH CLUTCH
O-RING
Replace.
THRUST WASHER, 41 x 68 mm
Selective part
NEEDLE BEARING
5TH GEAR
SET RINGS,
29 mm
NEEDLE BEARING THRUST NEEDLE BEARING
SET RING
2. Inspect the splines for excessive wear and damage.
3. Check shaft bearing surface for scoring and excessive wear.
4. Before installing the O-rings, wrap the shaft splines with tape to prevent O-ring damage.
5. Lubricate all parts with ATF during assembly.
6. Install the conical spring washer, 41 x 68 mm thrust washer in the direction shown.
7. Replace the locknut and conical spring washer with new ones when assembling the transmission.
8. Check the axial clearance of the 5th gear (see page 14-392).
14-391
ＳＷＡ７Ｅ１ＰＥ１０４１１２０００００ＭＥＡＴ００
06/09/15 17:46:28 62SWA00A_140_0394
Shafts and Clutches
Mainshaft 5th Gear Axial Clearance Inspection

1. Remove the mainshaft transmission housing 5. Set the dial indicator (A) on the 5th gear (B).
bearing (see page 14-375). ＊０２
2. Install the thrust needle bearing (A), 5th gear (B),

needle bearing (C), thrust needle bearing (D),
41 x 68 mm thrust washer (E), 4th/5th clutch (F), 4th
gear collar (G), and transmission housing bearing
(H) on the mainshaft (I). Do not install the O-rings
during inspection.
＊０１
L
K
B
J
G A
6. Lift the 5th gear (A) up while holding the mainshaft,

and use the dial indicator (B) to read the 5th gear
F axial clearance.
＊０３
D E
B
A
I
7. Measure the 5th gear axial clearance in at least
three places while moving the 5th gear. Use the
average as the actual clearance.
Standard: 0.04−0.10 mm (0.002−0.004 in.)
3. Install the idler gear (J) on the mainshaft by a press,

then install the conical spring washer (K) and
locknut (L).
4. Tighten the locknut to 29 N·m (3.0 kgf·m, 22 lbf·ft).
14-392
ＳＷＡ７Ｅ１ＰＥ１０４１１２３９４２１ＭＡＡＴ００
06/09/15 17:46:29 62SWA00A_140_0395
8. If the clearance is out of standard, remove the

41 x 68 mm thrust washer and measure its
thickness (A).
＊０４
9. Select and install a new thrust washer, then

recheck.
No. Part Number Thickness
1 90414-RCT-000 4.450 mm (0.1752 in.)
2 90415-RCT-000 4.475 mm (0.1762 in.)
3 90416-RCT-000 4.500 mm (0.1772 in.)
4 90417-RCT-000 4.525 mm (0.1781 in.)
5 90418-RCT-000 4.550 mm (0.1791 in.)
6 90419-RCT-000 4.575 mm (0.1801 in.)
7 90420-RCT-000 4.600 mm (0.1811 in.)
8 90421-RCT-000 4.625 mm (0.1821 in.)
9 90422-RCT-000 4.650 mm (0.1831 in.)
10 90423-RCT-000 4.675 mm (0.1841 in.)
11 90424-RCT-000 4.700 mm (0.1850 in.)
12 90425-RCT-000 4.725 mm (0.1860 in.)
13 90426-RCT-000 4.750 mm (0.1870 in.)
14 90427-RCT-000 4.775 mm (0.1880 in.)
15 90428-RCT-000 4.800 mm (0.1890 in.)
10. After replacing the thrust washer, make sure the

clearance is within the standard.
11. Disassemble the installed parts from the mainshaft.
12. Reinstall the bearing in the transmission housing

(see page 14-376).
14-393
06/09/15 17:46:29 62SWA00A_140_0396
Shafts and Clutches
Countershaft Disassembly, Inspection, and Reassembly

＊０１
REVERSE GEAR 24 x 1.25 mm
Replace.
CONICAL
SPRING
WASHER
NEEDLE BEARING Replace.
REVERSE
REVERSE SELECTOR
SELECTOR HUB
PARK GEAR
4TH GEAR
NEEDLE BEARING
TRANSMISSION
HOUSING BEARING
COLLAR,
35 x 47 x 7.8 mm
SET RING
3RD GEAR
COTTERS, 31 mm
5TH GEAR
COLLAR,
37 x 41 x 54.3 mm 1ST GEAR
2ND GEAR
COUNTERSHAFT
5. Install the conical spring washer, reverse selector, 35 x 47 x 7.8 mm collar, and all gears in the direction shown.
6. Replace the locknut and conical spring washer with new ones when assembling the transmission. The
countershaft locknut has left-hand threads.
7. Some reverse selector hubs, and the 3rd gear are press-fitted to the countershaft; special tools are needed to
remove them (see page 14-395) and to install them (see page 14-396).
14-394
ＳＷＡ７Ｅ１ＰＥ１０４１０９０００００ＭＥＡＴ００
06/09/15 17:46:30 62SWA00A_140_0397
Countershaft Reverse Selector Hub and 3rd Gear Removal

Special Tools Required 3. Set the press on the countershaft (A) with putting a
Bearing separator 07KAF-PS30200 spacer (B) between the press and countershaft, and
remove the 3rd gear (C).
1. Install the special tool on the 4th gear (A). Set a ＊０２
press on the countershaft (B) with putting a spacer
(C) between the press and countershaft, and B
remove the reverse selector hub (D).
A
C
NOTE: Some reverse selector hubs are not press-
fitted, and can be removed without using the
special tool and a press.
＊０１
C
D
B
4. Remove the 37 x 41 x 54.3 mm collar, 5th gear, 1st

gear, and 2nd gear.
07KAF-PS30200
2. Remove the needle bearing, set ring, 35 x 47 x

7.8 mm collar, and cotters.
14-395
ＳＷＡ７Ｅ１ＰＥ１０４１０９１７４５１ＫＡＡＴ００
06/09/15 17:46:30 62SWA00A_140_0398
Shafts and Clutches
Countershaft Reverse Selector Hub and 3rd Gear Installation

Special Tools Required 4. Slide the reverse selector hub (A) over the
Driver, 40 mm I.D. 07746-0030100 countershaft, then press it in place with the special
tool and a press.
1. Install the 2nd gear, 1st gear, 5th gear, and
37 x 41 x 54.3 mm collar on the countershaft. NOTE: Some reverse selector hubs are not press-
fitted and can be installed without using the special
2. Slide the 3rd gear (A) over the countershaft, and tool and a press.
press it in place with the special tool and a press. ＊０２
＊０１
07746-0030100
07746-0030100
A A
3. Install the cotters, 35 x 47 x 7.8 mm collar, set ring,

needle bearing, and 4th gear.
14-396
ＳＷＡ７Ｅ１ＰＥ１０４１０９１７４５１ＫＣＡＴ００
06/09/15 17:46:31 62SWA00A_140_0399
Secondary Shaft Disassembly, Inspection, and Reassembly

＊０１
24 x 1.25 mm
THRUST Replace.
SECONDARY NEEDLE
SHAFT BEARING CONICAL
SPRING
WASHER
Replace.
IDLER GEAR
TRANSMISSION
HOUSING BEARING
3RD GEAR
NEEDLE BEARING
SEALING RINGS, 3RD GEAR COLLAR

29 mm
THRUST NEEDLE
BEARING
1ST/3RD CLUTCH
NEEDLE BEARING
2ND GEAR
O-RINGS
Replace.
THRUST NEEDLE
BEARING THRUST WASHER, 40 x 51.5 mm
Selective part
THRUST WASHER,
37 x 58 mm
Selective part THRUST NEEDLE BEARING
O-RINGS
Replace.
1ST GEAR
2ND CLUTCH NEEDLE BEARING

SNAP RING
Replace.
4. Before installing the O-rings, wrap the shaft splines with tape to prevent O-ring damage.
6. Install the conical spring washer, idler gear in the direction shown.
7. Replace the locknut and conical spring washer with new ones when assembling the transmission. The locknut has
left-hand threads.
8. Check the axial clearance of the 2nd gear (see page 14-399) and 1st gear (see page 14-401).
14-397
ＳＷＡ７Ｅ１ＰＥ１０４１１３０００００ＭＥＡＴ００
06/09/15 17:46:31 62SWA00A_140_0400
Shafts and Clutches
Secondary Shaft Ball Bearing, Idler Gear Removal and Installation

Special Tools Required Installation
Driver attachment, 42 mm I.D. 07QAD-P0A0100
Install the idler gear (A) on the secondary shaft (B), and
Removal install the ball bearing (C) over the idler gear with the
special tool and a press.
Place a shaft protector (A) on the secondary shaft (B), ＊０２
and set the puller (C) under the idler gear (D), then
07QAD-P0A0100
remove the idler gear and ball bearing (E).
＊０１
C C
A
A
B
B
14-398
ＳＷＡ７Ｅ１ＰＥ１０４１１３５４２０３ＫＤＡＴ００
06/09/15 17:46:32 62SWA00A_140_0401
Secondary Shaft 2nd Gear Axial Clearance Inspection

1. Install the thrust needle bearing (A), needle bearing 2. Measure the clearance between the snap ring (A)
(B), 2nd gear (C), thrust needle bearing (D), and the 2nd clutch guide (B) with a feeler gauge (C),
37 x 58 mm thrust washer (E), and 2nd clutch (F) on in at least three places. Use the average as the
the secondary shaft (G), then secure them with the actual clearance.
snap ring (H). Do not install the O-rings during
inspection. Standard: 0.04−0.12 mm (0.002−0.005 in.)
＊０１＊０２
A
C
B
C
＊０３
B
A
E C
(cont’d)
14-399
ＳＷＡ７Ｅ１ＰＥ１０４１１３５４１８１ＭＡＡＴ００
06/09/15 17:46:32 62SWA00A_140_0402
Shafts and Clutches
Secondary Shaft 2nd Gear Axial Clearance Inspection (cont’d)

3. If the clearance is out of standard, remove the
37 x 58 mm thrust washer and measure its
thickness.

recheck.
1 90511-PRP-010 3.900 mm (0.154 in.)
2 90512-PRP-010 3.925 mm (0.155 in.)
3 90513-PRP-010 3.950 mm (0.156 in.)
4 90514-PRP-010 3.975 mm (0.156 in.)
5 90515-PRP-010 4.000 mm (0.157 in.)
6 90516-PRP-010 4.025 mm (0.158 in.)
7 90517-PRP-010 4.050 mm (0.159 in.)
8 90518-PRP-010 4.075 mm (0.160 in.)
9 90519-PRP-010 4.100 mm (0.161 in.)
10 90520-PRP-010 4.125 mm (0.162 in.)
11 90521-PRP-010 4.150 mm (0.163 in.)
12 90522-PRP-010 4.175 mm (0.164 in.)
13 90523-PRP-000 4.200 mm (0.165 in.)
14 90524-PRP-000 4.225 mm (0.166 in.)
15 90525-PRP-000 4.250 mm (0.167 in.)
16 90526-PRP-000 4.275 mm (0.168 in.)
17 90527-PRP-000 4.300 mm (0.169 in.)
18 90528-PRP-000 4.325 mm (0.170 in.)
19 90529-PRP-000 4.350 mm (0.171 in.)
20 90530-PRP-000 4.375 mm (0.172 in.)

clearance is within standard.
6. Disassemble the shaft and gears.
14-400
06/09/15 17:46:33 62SWA00A_140_0403
Secondary Shaft 1st Gear Axial Clearance Inspection

Special Tools Required 2. Install the idler gear (A), then install the ball bearing
Driver attachment, 42 mm I.D. 07QAD-P0A0100 (B) on the idler gear with the special tool and a
press.
1. Install the thrust needle bearing (A), needle bearing ＊０２
(B), 1st gear (C), thrust needle bearing (D),
40 x 51.5 mm thrust washer (E), 1st/3rd clutch (F), 07QAD-P0A0100
and 3rd gear collar (G) on the secondary shaft (H).
B
Do not install the O-rings during inspection.
＊０１
A
3. Install the conical spring washer and locknut, then

tighten the locknut to 29 N·m (3.0 kgf·m, 22 lbf·ft).
F
4. Turn the secondary shaft assembly upside down,
and set the dial indicator (A) on the 1st gear (B).
＊０３
E B A
D
(cont’d)
14-401
ＳＷＡ７Ｅ１ＰＥ１０４１１３５４１７１ＭＡＡＴ００
06/09/15 17:46:33 62SWA00A_140_0404
Shafts and Clutches
Secondary Shaft 1st Gear Axial Clearance Inspection (cont’d)

5. Hold the secondary shaft, and measure the 1st gear 6. If the clearance is out of standard, remove the
axial clearance in at least three places while 40 x 51.5 mm thrust washer and measure its
moving the 1st gear (A). Use the average as the thickness.
actual clearance.
Standard: 0.04−0.12 mm (0.002−0.005 in.) recheck.
＊０４
THRUST WASHER, 40 x 51.5 mm
1 90503-PRP-000 4.80 mm (0.189 in.)
2 90504-PRP-000 4.85 mm (0.191 in.)
3 90505-PRP-000 4.90 mm (0.193 in.)
4 90506-PRP-000 4.95 mm (0.195 in.)
5 90507-PRP-000 5.00 mm (0.197 in.)
6 90508-PRP-000 5.05 mm (0.199 in.)

clearance is within standard.
A
9. Disassemble the shaft and gears.
14-402
06/09/15 17:46:33 62SWA00A_140_0405
Idler Gear Shaft Removal and Installation

1. Remove the snap ring (A), cotter retainer (B), and
cotter keys (C). Do not distort the snap ring.
＊０１
D
2. Remove the idler gear shaft/idler gear assembly (D)

from the transmission housing.
3. Check the snap rings and cotter retainer for wear

and damage. Replace them if they are worn,
distorted, or damaged.
4. Install the idler gear and shaft in the reverse order

of removal.
14-403
ＳＷＡ７Ｅ１ＰＥ１０４１１９０００００ＫＤＡＴ００
06/09/15 17:46:34 62SWA00A_140_0406
Shafts and Clutches
Idler Gear/Idler Gear Shaft Replacement

Special Tools Required 3. Replace the idler gear or idler gear shaft, and attach
• Handle driver 07749-0010000 the idler gear shaft to the idler gear.
• Driver attachment, 32 x 35 mm 07746-0010100 ＊０３
1. Remove the snap ring from the idler gear/idler

shaft assembly.
＊０１
4. Install the idler gear shaft (A) in the idler gear (B)
with the special tools and a press.
＊０４
2. Remove the idler gear shaft (A) from the idler gear 07749-0010000
(B) with the special tools and a press.
＊０２
07749-0010000 07746-0010100
A
07746-0010100
B
B 5. Install the snap ring.
14-404
ＳＷＡ７Ｅ１ＰＥ１０４１１９３４０６５ＫＢＡＴ００
06/09/15 17:46:35 62SWA00A_140_0407
1st, 2nd, and 3rd Clutch Disassembly

NOTE: The 1st, 2nd, and 3rd clutch packs are included 4. For K24Z1 engine model 2nd clutch: Remove the
clutch pressure release cavity between the spring clutch end plate (A), clutch discs (B) (6), clutch
retainer and clutch piston. The oil seal is installed on waved-plates (C) (5), clutch flat-plate (D) (1), and
the circumference of the spring retainer, and contacts waved spring (E) from the 2nd clutch drum (F).
with the clutch piston. Do not disassemble the spring ＊０３
A
retainer and piston. If you remove the spring retainer
from the piston, it will damage to the oil seal when B
reinstalling the retainer in the piston.
C
1. Remove the snap ring with a screwdriver.

＊０１
2. For K24Z1 engine model 1st clutch: Remove the 5. Make a reference mark on the flat-plate.
clutch end plate (A), clutch discs (B) (5), clutch
waved-plates (C) (4), clutch flat-plate (D) (1), and 6. For K24Z1 engine model 3rd clutch: Remove the
waved spring (E) from the 1st clutch drum (F). clutch end plate (A), clutch discs (B) (6), clutch
＊０２ waved-plates (C) (5), clutch flat-plate (D) (1), and
A
waved spring (E) from the 3rd clutch drum (F).
B ＊０４
A
C B
C
F
E
D
F
3. Make a reference mark on the flat-plate. D
7. Make a reference mark on the flat-plate.
(cont’d)
14-405
ＳＷＡ７Ｅ１ＰＥ１０４１１３１００４１ＬＣＡＴ００
06/09/15 17:46:36 62SWA00A_140_0408
Shafts and Clutches
1st, 2nd, and 3rd Clutch Disassembly (cont’d)

8. For R20A1 and R20A2 engine models 1st clutch: 11. For R20A1 and R20A2 engine models 3rd clutch:
Remove the clutch end plate (A), clutch discs (B) (5), Remove the clutch end plate (A), clutch discs (B) (5),
clutch waved-plates (C) (5), and waved spring (D) clutch waved-plates (C) (3), clutch flat-plates (D) (2),
from the 1st clutch drum (E). and waved spring (E) from the 3rd clutch drum (F).
＊０５ A
＊０７
B A
C B
D
E
F
D
9. For R20A1 and R20A2 engine models 2nd clutch:

Remove the clutch end plate (A), clutch discs (B) (5), 12. Make a reference marks on the flat-plates.
clutch waved-plates (C) (3), 2.0 mm-thick clutch flat-
plate (D) (1), 4.0 mm-thick plate (E), and waved
spring (F) from the 2nd clutch drum (G).
＊０６
A
F
B
C
G
D
E
10. Make a reference mark on the 2.0 mm-thick flat-

plate.
14-406
06/09/15 17:46:37 62SWA00A_140_0409
4th and 5th Clutch Disassembly

Special Tools Required 2. Remove the clutch end plate (A), clutch discs (B) (4),
• Clutch spring compressor set 07LAE-PX40000 clutch waved-plates (C) (4), and waved spring (D)
• Clutch spring compressor attachment from the 4th clutch drum (E).
07LAE-PX40100 ＊０２
A
• Clutch spring compressor attachment
07HAE-PL50101
• Clutch spring compressor bolt assembly B
07GAE-PG40200
• Snap ring pliers 07LGC-0010100 C
1. Remove the snap ring with a screwdriver.

＊０１ D
3. Remove the clutch end plate (A), clutch discs (B) (4),
clutch waved-plates (C) (4), and waved spring (D)
from the 5th clutch drum (E).
＊０３
A
(cont’d)
14-407
ＳＷＡ７Ｅ１ＰＥ１０４１１２１０２５１ＬＣＡＴ００
06/09/15 17:46:38 62SWA00A_140_0410
Shafts and Clutches
4th and 5th Clutch Disassembly (cont’d)

4. Install the special tools. 6. If either end of the special tool is set over an area of
＊０４ the spring retainer that is unsupported by the
07LAE-PX40100
return spring, the retainer may be damaged.
＊０６
07HAE-PL50101
7. Compress the return spring until the snap ring can

be removed.
＊０７
07GAE-PG40200
5. Be sure the special tool (A) is adjusted to have full

contact with the return spring retainer (B).
＊０５
14-408
06/09/15 17:46:38 62SWA00A_140_0411
8. Remove the snap ring with the snap ring pliers. 11. Wrap a shop rag around the clutch drum, and apply
＊０８ air pressure to the fluid passage to remove the
piston. Place a finger tip on the other passage while
applying air pressure.
07LGC-0010100 ＊１０
9. Remove the special tools.
10. Remove the snap ring (A), spring retainer (B), and
return spring (C).
＊０９
A
C
12. Remove the clutch piston (A), and remove the outer
O-ring (B) and inner O-ring (C) from the piston.
＊１１
14-409
06/09/15 17:46:39 62SWA00A_140_0412
Shafts and Clutches
Clutch Inspection
1. Inspect the 4th and 5th clutch pistons and clutch 6. If the clutch discs are worn or damaged, replace
piston check valves (A). them as a set. If the clutch discs are replaced,
＊０１ inspect the clutch end-plate-to-top disc clearance.
A
7. If any plate is worn, damaged, or discolored,
replace the damaged plate with the new plate, and
inspect the other waved-plates for a phase
difference. If the clutch plate is replaced, inspect
the clutch end-plate-to-top disc clearance.
8. If the clutch end plate is worn, damaged, or

discolored, inspect the clutch end-plate-to-top disc
clearance, then replace the clutch end plate.
2. If the clutch piston check valve is loose or damaged,

replace the clutch piston.
3. Check the spring retainer for wear and damage.
4. If the spring retainer is worn or damaged, replace it.
5. Inspect the clutch discs, clutch plates, and clutch

end plate for wear, damage, and discoloration.
Standard Thickness:
Clutch Discs: 1.94 mm (0.076 in.)
Clutch Plates
K24Z1 Engine Model:
1st clutch: Waved-plates: 1.6 mm (0.063 in.)
Flat-plate: 1.6 mm (0.063 in.)
2nd clutch: Waved-plates: 2.0 mm (0.079 in.)
3rd clutch: Waved-plates: 1.6 mm (0.063 in.)
4th clutch (waved-plates): 2.0 mm (0.079 in.)

1st clutch (waved-plates): 1.6 mm (0.063 in.)
2nd clutch: Waved-plates: 2.0 mm (0.079 in.)
2.0 mm-thick
flat-plate: 2.0 mm (0.079 in.)
4.0 mm-thick
flat-plate: 4.0 mm (0.157 in.)
3rd clutch: Waved-plates: 1.6 mm (0.063 in.)
Flat-plates: 1.6 mm (0.063 in.)
14-410
ＳＷＡ７Ｅ１ＰＥ１０４１１３１００４１ＭＡＡＴ００
06/09/15 17:46:39 62SWA00A_140_0413
Clutch Waved-plate Phase Difference Inspection

1. Place the clutch waved-plate (A) on a surface plate, 5. Rotate the waved-plate about 60-degrees. The dial
and set a dial indicator (B) on the waved-plate. indicator should be at the bottom of a phase
＊０１ difference (F and G), and zero the dial indicator.
6. Measure the phase difference at the other two tops

B (H and I) of the waved-plate by following steps 3
E
thru 5.
7. If the two values of the three measurements are

within the standard, the waved-plate is OK. If the
C I two values of the three measurements are out of
the standard, replace the waved-plate.
D G
F H
2. Find the bottom (C) of a phase difference of the

waved-plate, zero the dial indicator and make a
reference mark on the bottom of the waved-plate.
3. Rotate the waved-plate about 60-degrees apart

from the bottom while holding the waved-plate by
its circumference. The dial indicator should be at
the top (D) of a phase difference. Do not rotate the
waved-plate while holding its surface, always
rotate it with holding its circumference.
4. Read the dial indicator. The dial indicator reads the

phase difference (E) of the waved-plate between
the bottom and top.
Standard Phase Difference

K24Z1 Engine Model:
1st clutch: 0.15−0.25 mm (0.006−0.010 in.)
2nd clutch: 0.1−0.2 mm (0.004−0.008 in.)
3rd clutch: 0.1−0.2 mm (0.004−0.008 in.)
4th clutch: 0.1−0.2 mm (0.004−0.008 in.)
5th clutch: 0.1−0.2 mm (0.004−0.008 in.)

1st clutch: 0.07−0.20 mm (0.003−0.008 in.)
2nd clutch: 0.07−0.20 mm (0.003−0.008 in.)
3rd clutch: 0.07−0.20 mm (0.003−0.008 in.)
4th clutch: 0.07−0.20 mm (0.003−0.008 in.)
5th clutch: 0.07−0.20 mm (0.003−0.008 in.)
14-411
ＳＷＡ７Ｅ１ＰＥ１０４１１２１２２３１ＭＡＡＴ００
06/09/15 17:46:40 62SWA00A_140_0414
Shafts and Clutches
Clutch Clearance Inspection

Special Tools Required 3. For K24Z1 engine model 2nd clutch: Install the
Clutch compressor attachment 07ZAE-PRP0100 waved spring (A) in the 2nd clutch drum (B). Install
the clutch flat-plate (C) (1), then starting with the
1. Inspect the clutch piston, discs, plates, and end clutch disc, alternately install the discs (D) (6) and
plate for wear and damage (see page 14-410), and waved-plates (E) (5). Install the clutch-end-plate (F)
inspect the clutch waved-plate phase difference with the flat side down on the top disc.
(see page 14-411), if necessary. ＊０２
F
2. For K24Z1 engine model 1st clutch: Install the
waved spring (A) in the 1st clutch drum (B). Install
clutch disc, alternately install the discs (D) (5) and
waved-plates (E) (4). Install the clutch-end-plate (F)
with the flat side down on the top disc.
＊０１
F
A
B E
A D
B
E
D
4. For K24Z1 engine model 3rd clutch: Install the
C waved spring (A) in the 3rd clutch drum (B). Install
＊０３
F
B
E
D
C
14-412
ＳＷＡ７Ｅ１ＰＥ１０４１１２１２２１１ＭＡＡＴ００
06/09/15 17:46:41 62SWA00A_140_0415
Install the waved spring (A) in the 1st clutch drum Install the waved spring (A) in the 3rd clutch drum
(B). Starting with the clutch waved-plate, (B). Install the clutch flat-plate (C), clutch disc (D),
alternately install the clutch waved-plates (C) (5) and clutch flat-plate (E). Starting with the clutch
and discs (D) (5), then install the clutch-end-plate disc, alternately install the discs (F) (4) and waved-
(E) with the flat side down on the top disc. plates (G) (3), then install the clutch-end-plate (H)
＊０４ with the flat side down on the top disc.
E
＊０６
H
A
A
B G
F
D B
E
C
D
C

Install the waved spring (A) in the 2nd clutch drum
(B). Install the 4.0 mm-thick plate (C) with the shear
droop side (D) toward the inside of the drum, clutch
disc (E), and 2.0 mm-thick flat-plate (F). Starting
with the clutch disc, alternately install the discs (G)
(4) and waved-plates (H) (3), then install the clutch-
end-plate (I) with the flat side down on the top disc.
＊０５
I
A
H
G
C F
E
(cont’d)
14-413
06/09/15 17:46:42 62SWA00A_140_0416
Shafts and Clutches
Clutch Clearance Inspection (cont’d)

8. Install the clutch pistons in the 4th and 5th clutch 10. Install the waved spring (A) in the 5th clutch drum
drums. Do not install the O-rings during inspection. (B). Starting with the clutch waved-plate,
＊０７ alternately install the waved-plates (C) (4) and discs
(D) (4). Install the clutch-end-plate (E) with the flat
side down on the top disc.
＊０９
E
9. Install the waved spring (A) in the 4th clutch drum

(B). Starting with the clutch waved-plate, D
alternately install the waved-plates (C) (4) and discs
(D) (4). Install the clutch-end-plate (E) with the flat C
＊０８
E
11. Install the snap ring with a screwdriver to secure

the clutch-end-plate.
＊１０
A
14-414
06/09/15 17:46:42 62SWA00A_140_0417
12. Set a dial indicator (A) on the clutch-end-plate (B). 14. Release the clutch-end-plate to lower the clutch-
＊１１ end-plate, then put the special tool on the end-plate
A (A).
＊１２
C
B
07ZAE-PRP0100
C
B
A
E
13. Zero the dial indicator with the clutch-end-plate

lifted up to the snap ring (C).
15. Press the special tool down with 150−160 N
(15−16 kgf, 33−35 lbf) (B) using a force gauge, and
read the dial indicator (C). The dial indicator reads
the clearance (D) between the clutch-end-plate and
top disc (E). Take measurements in at least three
places, and use the average as the actual clearance.
Clutch-End-Plate-to-Top Disc Clearance

Service Limit
K24Z1 Engine Model:
1st clutch: 1.38−1.58 mm (0.054−0.062 in.)
2nd clutch: 1.18−1.38 mm (0.046−0.054 in.)
3rd clutch: 1.23−1.43 mm (0.048−0.056 in.)
4th clutch: 0.93−1.13 mm (0.037−0.044 in.)
5th clutch: 0.93−1.13 mm (0.037−0.044 in.)

1st clutch: 1.28−1.48 mm (0.050−0.058 in.)
2nd clutch: 0.88−1.08 mm (0.035−0.043 in.)
3rd clutch: 0.93−1.13 mm (0.037−0.044 in.)
4th clutch: 0.93−1.13 mm (0.037−0.044 in.)
5th clutch: 0.93−1.13 mm (0.037−0.044 in.)
(cont’d)
14-415
06/09/15 17:46:43 62SWA00A_140_0418
Shafts and Clutches
Clutch Clearance Inspection (cont’d)

16. If K24Z1 engine model clutch clearance is out of the K24Z1 Engine Model
service limit, select a new clutch-end-plate (A) from 4TH and 5TH CLUTCH END PLATES
the following tables. Mark Part Number Thickness
＊１３ 1 22581-RZK-003 2.1 mm (0.083 in.)
2 22582-RZK-003 2.2 mm (0.087 in.)
3 22583-RZK-003 2.3 mm (0.091 in.)
4 22584-RZK-003 2.4 mm (0.094 in.)
5 22585-RZK-003 2.5 mm (0.098 in.)
t
6 22586-RZK-003 2.6 mm (0.102 in.)
A
7 22587-RZK-003 2.7 mm (0.106 in.)
8 22588-RZK-003 2.8 mm (0.110 in.)
9 22589-RZK-003 2.9 mm (0.114 in.)
K24Z1 Engine Model

1ST and 2ND CLUTCH END PLATES
Mark Part Number Thickness
1 22571-RZK-003 2.6 mm (0.102 in.)
2 22572-RZK-003 2.7 mm (0.106 in.)
3 22573-RZK-003 2.8 mm (0.110 in.)
4 22574-RZK-003 2.9 mm (0.114 in.)
5 22575-RZK-003 3.0 mm (0.118 in.)
6 22576-RZK-003 3.1 mm (0.122 in.)
7 22577-RZK-003 3.2 mm (0.126 in.)
8 22578-RZK-003 3.3 mm (0.130 in.)
9 22579-RZK-003 3.4 mm (0.134 in.)
K24Z1 Engine Model

3RD CLUTCH END PLATES
1 22551-RZK-003 2.1 mm (0.083 in.)
2 22552-RZK-003 2.2 mm (0.087 in.)
3 22553-RZK-003 2.3 mm (0.091 in.)
4 22554-RZK-003 2.4 mm (0.094 in.)
5 22555-RZK-003 2.5 mm (0.098 in.)
6 22556-RZK-003 2.6 mm (0.102 in.)
7 22557-RZK-003 2.7 mm (0.106 in.)
8 22558-RZK-003 2.8 mm (0.110 in.)
9 22559-RZK-003 2.9 mm (0.114 in.)
14-416
06/09/15 17:46:43 62SWA00A_140_0419
17. If R20A1 and R20A2 engine models clutch R20A1 and R20A2 Engine Models
clearance is out of the service limit, select a new 4TH and 5TH CLUTCH END PLATES
clutch-end-plate (A) from the following tables. If Mark Part Number Thickness
you change the clutch end plate for 1st, 2nd, or 3rd 1 22581-RZK-003 2.1 mm (0.083 in.)
clutch, make sure the letters ‘‘R00’’ or ‘‘R02’’ 2 22582-RZK-003 2.2 mm (0.087 in.)
stamped on the upside (B) of the clutch end plate, 3 22583-RZK-003 2.3 mm (0.091 in.)
and select a new end plate from the same letters 4 22584-RZK-003 2.4 mm (0.094 in.)
table. 5 22585-RZK-003 2.5 mm (0.098 in.)
＊１４ 6 22586-RZK-003 2.6 mm (0.102 in.)
7 22587-RZK-003 2.7 mm (0.106 in.)
8 22588-RZK-003 2.8 mm (0.110 in.)
9 22589-RZK-003 2.9 mm (0.114 in.)
t
18. Install the new clutch-end-plate, and recheck the
B A B
clearance. If the thickest clutch-end-plate is
installed, but the clearance is still over the service
limit, replace the clutch discs and plates.

1st, 2nd, and 3rd Clutches
‘‘R00’’ CLUTCH END PLATES
1 22551-R00-003 2.6 mm (0.102 in.)
2 22552-R00-003 2.7 mm (0.106 in.)
3 22553-R00-003 2.8 mm (0.110 in.)
4 22554-R00-003 2.9 mm (0.114 in.)
5 22555-R00-003 3.0 mm (0.118 in.)
6 22556-R00-003 3.1 mm (0.122 in.)
7 22557-R00-003 3.2 mm (0.126 in.)
8 22558-R00-003 3.3 mm (0.130 in.)
9 22559-R00-003 3.4 mm (0.134 in.)

1st, 2nd, and 3rd Clutches
‘‘R02’’ CLUTCH END PLATES
1 22551-R02-003 2.6 mm (0.102 in.)
2 22552-R02-003 2.7 mm (0.106 in.)
3 22553-R02-003 2.8 mm (0.110 in.)
4 22554-R02-003 2.9 mm (0.114 in.)
5 22555-R02-003 3.0 mm (0.118 in.)
6 22556-R02-003 3.1 mm (0.122 in.)
7 22557-R02-003 3.2 mm (0.126 in.)
8 22558-R02-003 3.3 mm (0.130 in.)
9 22559-R02-003 3.4 mm (0.134 in.)
14-417
06/09/15 17:46:44 62SWA00A_140_0420
Shafts and Clutches
1st, 2nd, and 3rd Clutch Reassembly

1. Soak the clutch discs thoroughly in ATF for a 3. For K24Z1 engine model 2nd clutch: Install the
minimum of 30 minutes. waved spring (A) in the 2nd clutch drum (B). Install
2. For K24Z1 engine model 1st clutch: Install the clutch disc, alternately install the discs (D) (6) and
waved spring (A) in the 1st clutch drum (B). Install waved-plates (E) (5). Install the clutch-end-plate (F)
the clutch flat-plate (C) (1), then starting with the with the flat side down on the top disc.
clutch disc, alternately install the discs (D) (5) and ＊０２
F
＊０１
F
A A
B B E
E
D
D
C
C
4. For K24Z1 engine model 3rd clutch: Install the

waved spring (A) in the 3rd clutch drum (B). Install
＊０３
F
B
E
D
C
14-418
ＳＷＡ７Ｅ１ＰＥ１０４１１３１００４１ＬＤＡＴ００
06/09/15 17:47:22 62SWA00A_140_0421
Install the waved spring (A) in the 1st clutch drum Install the waved spring (A) in the 3rd clutch drum
(B). Starting with the clutch waved-plate, (B). Install the clutch flat-plate (C), clutch disc (D),
alternately install the clutch waved-plates (C) (5) and clutch flat-plate (E). Starting with the clutch
and discs (D) (5), then install the clutch-end-plate disc, alternately install the discs (F) (4) and waved-
(E) with the flat side down on the top disc. plates (G) (3), then install the clutch-end-plate (H)
＊０４ with the flat side down on the top disc.
E
＊０６
H
A
A
B G
F
D B
E
C
D
C

Install the waved spring (A) in the 2nd clutch drum 8. Install the snap ring with a screwdriver to secure
(B). Install the 4.0 mm-thick plate (C) with the shear the clutch-end-plate.
droop side (D) toward the inside of the drum, clutch ＊０７
disc (E), and 2.0 mm-thick flat-plate (F). Starting
with the clutch disc, alternately install the discs (G)
(4) and waved-plates (H) (3), then install the clutch-
end-plate (I) with the flat side down on the top disc.
＊０５
I
H 9. Check that the clutch piston moves by applying air

pressure into fluid passage.
G
C F
E
14-419
06/09/15 17:47:23 62SWA00A_140_0422
Shafts and Clutches
4th and 5th Clutch Reassembly

Special Tools Required 3. Install the clutch piston (A) in the clutch drum (B)
• Clutch spring compressor set 07LAE-PX40000 while applying pressure and rotating to ensure
• Clutch spring compressor attachment proper seating. Do not pinch the O-ring.
07LAE-PX40100 ＊０２
B
• Clutch spring compressor attachment
07HAE-PL50101
• Clutch spring compressor bolt assembly A
07GAE-PG40200
• Snap ring pliers 07LGC-0010100
1. Soak the clutch discs thoroughly in ATF for a

minimum of 30 minutes.
2. Install the new O-rings (A) on the clutch piston (B).

＊０１
A
4. Install the return spring (A) and spring retainer (B),

and position the snap ring (C) on the spring retainer.
B ＊０３
C
14-420
ＳＷＡ７Ｅ１ＰＥ１０４１１２１０２５１ＬＤＡＴ００
06/09/15 17:47:24 62SWA00A_140_0423
5. Install the special tools. 7. If either end of the special tool is set over an area of
＊０４ the spring retainer that is unsupported by the
07LAE-PX40100 return spring, the retainer may be damaged.
＊０６
07HAE-PL50101
8. Compress the return spring until the snap ring can

be installed.
＊０７
07GAE-PG40200
6. Be sure the special tool (A) is adjusted to have full

contact with the spring retainer (B).
＊０５
(cont’d)
14-421
06/09/15 17:47:25 62SWA00A_140_0424
Shafts and Clutches
4th and 5th Clutch Reassembly (cont’d)

9. Install the snap ring with the snap ring pliers. 12. Install the waved spring (A) in the 5th clutch drum
＊０８ (B). Starting with the clutch waved-plate,
07LGC-0010100 side down on the top disc.
＊１０
E
B
10. Remove the special tools.
D
11. Install the waved spring (A) in the 4th clutch drum
(B). Starting with the clutch waved-plate,
C
＊０９
E
13. Install the snap ring with a screwdriver to secure
the clutch-end-plate.
＊１１
14. Check that the clutch piston moves by applying air

pressure into fluid passage.
14-422
06/09/15 17:47:26 62SWA00A_140_0425
Valve Body
Valve Body and ATF Strainer Installation

1. Make sure that the ATF magnet is cleaned and installed in the torque converter housing.
Torque Specifications:
6 x 1.0 mm: 12 N·m (1.2 kgf·m, 8.7 lbf·ft)
8 x 1.25 mm:18 N·m (1.8 kgf·m, 13 lbf·ft)
＊０１
6 x 1.0 mm ATF FEED PIPES,
Eight Bolts 8 x 198 mm
6 x 1.0 mm
6 x 1.0 mm One Bolt REGULATOR
Two Bolts VALVE BODY
ATF
STRAINER
ATF FEED PIPE,

8 x 220 mm
O-RING
Replace. O-RING
6 x 1.0 mm Replace.
12 Bolts STATOR SHAFT STOP
STATOR SHAFT
DOWEL PINS,
ATF JOINT Two Pins
PIPES
REGULATOR
SEPARATOR PLATE
CHECK BALLS,
Two Balls
COOLER CHECK
VALVE SPRING
SERVO BODY COOLER CHECK
8 x 1.25 mm VALVE
Three Bolts MAIN VALVE BODY
SERVO ATF PUMP DRIVE GEAR
ATF PUMP DRIVEN
SEPARATOR GEAR SHAFT
PLATE
DOWEL PINS,
DOWEL PINS, Two Pins
Two Pins ATF MAGNET
MAIN SEPARATOR
PLATE
ATF PUMP DRIVEN

GEAR
TORQUE CONVERTER
HOUSING
(cont’d)
14-423
ＳＷＡ７Ｅ１ＰＥ１０４８０１３９３０１ＫＣＡＴ００
06/09/15 17:47:26 62SWA00A_140_0426
Valve Body
Valve Body and ATF Strainer Installation (cont’d)

2. Install the main separator plate (A) and two dowel 5. If the ATF pump drive gear and ATF pump driven
pins on the torque converter housing. Then install gear shaft do not move smoothly, loosen the main
the ATF pump drive gear (B), driven gear (C), and valve body bolts. Realign the ATF pump driven
ATF pump driven gear shaft (D). Install the ATF gear shaft, and retighten the bolts to the specified
pump driven gear with its grooved and chamfered torque, then recheck. Failure to align the ATF pump
side facing down. driven gear shaft correctly will result in a seized
＊０２ ATF pump drive gear or ATF pump driven gear
B shaft.
D
6. Make sure that the two check balls and the cooler
check valve are in the main valve body, then install
the cooler check valve spring in the cooler check
valve.
A
7. Install the servo separator plate and two dowel pins
on the main valve body.
8. Install the servo body (12 bolts). Install the ATF

C strainer with the two bolts in the bolt holes (A) in
step 12, and install the baffle plate with the two
bolts in the bolt holes (B) in step 2 in shaft
3. Install the main valve body. assembly and housing installation.
＊０４
B
4. Make sure the ATF pump drive gear (A) rotates
smoothly in the normal operating direction, and the
ATF pump driven gear shaft (B) moves smoothly in B
the axial and normal operating direction.
＊０３
A 6 x 1.0 mm
12 N·m (1.2 kgf·m, 8.7 lbf·ft)
9. Install the regulator separator plate and two dowel

pins on the main valve body.
10. Install the new O-ring on the stator shaft, and install
A B the stator shaft and stator shaft stop.
11. Install the regulator valve body (eight bolts).
12. Install the new O-ring on the ATF strainer, and

install the ATF strainer (two bolts).
13. Install the ATF joint pipes (one bolt).
14. Install the ATF feed pipes in the regulator valve

body and servo body.
14-424
06/09/15 17:47:28 62SWA00A_140_0427
Shaft Assembly and Housing Installation

NOTE: The illustration shows the 4WD transmission; the 2WD does not have the transfer assembly.
1. Install the differential assembly in the torque converter housing.

＊０１
ATF FEED ATF
COUNTERSHAFT TRANSMISSION PIPE LUBRICATION
REVERSE GEAR HOUSING PIPE
SHIFT SOLENOID
LOCK WASHER VALVE COVER
Replace.
REVERSE
SELECTOR
SOLENOID
HARNESS
REVERSE CONNECTOR
SHIFT FORK
NEEDLE BEARING
TRANSMISSION
HANGER
COUNTERSHAFT
SUBASSEMBLY
MAINSHAFT
SUBASSEMBLY
6 x 1.0 mm
12 N·m
(1.2 kgf·m, 8.7 lbf·ft)
SECONDARY Two Bolts
SHAFT
SUBASSEMBLY BAFFLE PLATE
DIFFERENTIAL
ASSEMBLY
TORQUE CONVERTER HOUSING
TRANSFER ASSEMBLY
2. Install the baffle plate on the servo body.
(cont’d)
14-425
ＳＷＡ７Ｅ１ＰＥ１０４１０４５９８０１ＫＣＡＴ００
06/09/15 17:47:28 62SWA00A_140_0428
Shaft Assembly and Housing Installation (cont’d)

3. Assemble the mainshaft, countershaft, and 6. If the detent arm was removed, install the detent
secondary shaft. arm (A) with arm collar (B) on the servo body (C),
and install the new lock washer (D) by aligning its
4. Join the mainshaft subassembly (A), countershaft cutout (E) with the projection (F) of the servo body.
subassembly (B), and secondary shaft Install and tighten the bolt, then bend the lock tab
subassembly (C) together, and install them in the of the lock washer against the bolt head.
torque converter housing. Do not bump the ＊０３
6 x 1.0 mm
countershaft on the baffle plate (D). 12 N·m (1.2 kgf·m, 8.7 lbf·ft)
＊０２
E
A
D
B
F
D
7. Install the control shaft (A) in the torque converter

housing aligning the manual valve lever pin (B) on
the control shaft with the guide of the manual valve
5. Make sure if the countershaft and differential are (C). Pull the manual valve gently when aligning the
clear of the baffle plate. manual valve with the control shaft.
＊０４
14-426
06/09/15 17:47:30 62SWA00A_140_0429
8. Hook the detent arm spring (A) to the detent arm 14. Install the three dowel pins (A) and a new gasket (B)
(B). on the torque converter housing (C).
＊０５＊０７
10 x 1.25 mm
44 N·m
A F D (4.5 kgf·m, 33 lbf·ft)
20 Bolts
9. Turn the shift fork shaft (A) so the large chamfered

hole (B) is facing the fork bolt hole (C) of the shift A
fork (D). E
＊０６
D A
B
C
B
6 x 1.0 mm
14 N·m
A
A
C
15. Align the spring pin (D) of the control shaft (E) with
the transmission housing groove (F) by turning the
10. Install the shift fork and reverse selector together control shaft. Do not squeeze the end of the control
on the shift fork shaft and countershaft. Secure the shaft tips together when turning the shaft. If the tips
shift fork to the shift fork shaft with the lock bolt are squeezed together, it will cause a faulty shift
and a new lock washer (E), then bend the lock tab of position signal or position due to the play between
the lock washer against the bolt head. the control shaft and the transmission range switch.
11. Install the needle bearing and countershaft reverse 16. Place the transmission housing (G) on the torque
gear on the countershaft. converter housing. Do not install the input shaft
(mainshaft) speed sensor and output shaft
12. Install the reverse idler gear in the transmission (countershaft) speed sensor before installing the
housing (see page 14-377). transmission housing on the torque converter
housing.
13. Install the idler gear shaft (see page 14-403), if it
was removed.
(cont’d)
14-427
06/09/15 17:47:30 62SWA00A_140_0430
Shaft Assembly and Housing Installation (cont’d)

17. While expanding the snap ring of the secondary 20. Install the new O-ring (A) on the input shaft
shaft bearing using the snap ring pliers, push the (mainshaft) speed sensor (B), and install the input
transmission housing down to start the secondary shaft (mainshaft) speed sensor in the transmission
shaft bearing through the snap ring. Then release housing.
the pliers, and push down the housing until it ＊１０
bottoms and snap ring snaps in place in the A
B
secondary shaft bearing snap ring groove.
6 x 1.0 mm
＊０８ 12 N·m
(1.2 kgf·m,
8.7 lbf·ft)
18. Verify that the secondary shaft bearing snap ring

E
(A) is seated in the bearing and housing groove, 6 x 1.0 mm
12 N·m (1.2 kgf·m, 8.7 lbf·ft)
and check that the ring end gap (B) is 0−7 mm
(0−0.28 in.) 21. Install the new O-ring (C) on the output shaft
＊０９ (countershaft) speed sensor (D), and install the
B
output shaft (countershaft) speed sensor and
sensor washer (E) (only for K24Z1 engine model).
NOTE: The sensor washer is equipped on K24Z1

engine model; R20A1 and R20A2 engine models do
not have a sensor washer.
19. Install the transmission housing mounting bolts

(20 bolts) along with the transmission hanger and
harness clamp brackets. Tighten the mounting
bolts to 44 N·m (4.5 kgf·m, 33 lbf·ft) in two or more
steps in a crisscross pattern.
14-428
06/09/15 17:47:31 62SWA00A_140_0431
22. Install the new O-ring (F) on the shift solenoid 24. Install the new gasket (A), dowel pins (B), and shift
harness connector (G), and install the shift solenoid solenoid valve cover (C), and secure the cover with
harness connector in the transmission housing. the bolts.
＊１１＊１２
ORN RED BLU
6 x 1.0 mm
D 12 N·m
GRN YEL, (1.2 kgf·m, 8.7 lbf·ft)
WHT, WHT
A
B 6 x 1.0 mm
12 N·m
(1.2 kgf·m,
8.7 lbf·ft)
C
C G
B
F
E

valve E, the GRN harness terminal to shift solenoid A
valve B, the BLU harness terminal to shift solenoid
valve A, and the YEL, WHT, WHT harness terminal B
14-429
06/09/15 17:47:32 62SWA00A_140_0432
End Cover Installation

Special Tool Required 4. Install the park lever (A) and park lever stop (B) on
Mainshaft holder set 07PAB-0010000 the selector control shaft (C), then install the lock
bolt with the new lock washer (D). Do not bend the
1. Install the special tool onto the mainshaft. lock tab of the lock washer until step 18.
＊０１＊０３
J
K
G
F I
A E
H
B
07PAB-0010000 6 x 1.0 mm
14 N·m
(1.4 kgf·m,
10 lbf·ft)
C
2. Lubricate the following parts with ATF:

5. Install the park pawl shaft (E), park pawl spring (F),
• Splines and threads of the mainshaft. park pawl (G), and stop shaft (H) on the
• Splines of the mainshaft idler gear. transmission housing.
• Old conical spring washer and old locknut.
6. Lubricate the following parts with ATF:
3. Install the mainshaft idler gear (A), old conical
spring washer (B), and old locknut (C) on the • Threads and splines of the countershaft.
mainshaft (D), and tighten the locknut to 226 N·m • Old conical spring washer and old locknut.
(23.0 kgf·m, 166 lbf·ft). • Areas where the park gear contacts the conical
spring washer.
NOTE:
• Do not tap the idler gear to install. 7. Install the park gear (I), old conical spring washer
• Use a torque wrench to tighten the locknut. Do (J), and old locknut (K) on the countershaft.
not use an impact wrench.
＊０２ 8. Lift the park pawl up, and engage it with the park
C gear, then tighten the locknut to 226 N·m
(23.0 kgf·m, 166 lbf·ft).
B
A
NOTE:
• Do not tap the park gear to install.
• Use a torque wrench to tighten the locknut. Do
D not use an impact wrench.
• Countershaft locknut has left-hand threads.
9. Remove the locknuts and conical spring washers

from the mainshaft and countershaft.
10. Lubricate the threads of the shafts, the new

locknuts and the new conical spring washers with
ATF.
14-430
ＳＷＡ７Ｅ１ＰＥ１０４１０４２４２５１ＫＣＡＴ００
06/09/15 17:47:33 62SWA00A_140_0433
11. Install the new conical spring washers (A) with 15. Install the selector control level (A) on the selector
facing stamped mark side up in the direction shown, control shaft (B), and install the bolt with the new
and install the new mainshaft locknut (B), the new lock washer (C), then bend the lock tab of the lock
countershaft locknut (C), and the new secondary washer against the bolt head.
shaft locknut (D). ＊０６
A
＊０４
B
C A
C
6 x 1.0 mm
D 14 N·m
16. Set the park lever in the P position, then verify that
12. Tighten the locknuts to 167 N·m (17.0 kgf·m, the park pawl (A) engages the park gear (B).
123 lbf·ft). ＊０７
A
NOTE:
• Be sure to install the conical spring washers in
the direction shown.
• Use a torque wrench to tighten the locknut. Do
not use an impact wrench. C
left-hand threads.

D
14. Stake the locknuts into the shafts in depth (A) of

0.7−1.3 mm (0.03−0.05 in.) using a 3.5 mm punch 6 x 1.0 mm
14 N·m
(B). (1.4 kgf·m, B
＊０５ 10 lbf·ft)
17. If the park pawl does not engage fully, check the
distance (C) between the pawl shaft and the park
lever roller pin (see page 14-370).
A
18. Tighten the lock bolt, and bend the lock tab of the
B
lock washer (D) against the bolt head.
(cont’d)
14-431
06/09/15 17:47:34 62SWA00A_140_0434
End Cover Installation (cont’d)

19. Install the ATF feed pipe (A) into the idler gear shaft, 23. Set the selector control shaft (A) to the N position
and install the ATF lubrication pipe (B) into the by turning the selector control lever on the torque
transmission housing. converter side.
＊０８
B
NOTE: Do not squeeze the end of the selector
control shaft tips together when turning the shaft. If
A
the tips are squeezed together it will cause a faulty
shift position signal or position due to the play
between the selector control shaft and the
transmission range switch.
＊１０
20. Install the new gasket (A) on the transmission

housing, and install the two dowel pins (B) and new A
O-rings (C) over the top of the ATF feed pipes.
＊０９
6 x 1.0 mm
E 12 N·m
28 N·m (1.2 kgf·m, 8.7 lbf·ft)
(2.9 kgf·m,
21 lbf·ft)
D 24. Align the cutouts (A) on the rotary-frame with the

neutral positioning cutouts (B) on the transmission
F
range switch (C), then put a 2.0 mm (0.08 in.) feeler
gauge blade (D) in the cutouts to hold in the N
position.
6 x 1.0 mm E
12 N·m NOTE: Be sure to use a 2.0 mm (0.08 in.) blade or
(1.2 kgf·m,
8.7 lbf·ft) C
equivalent to hold the switch in the N position.
＊１１
B C
21. Install the end cover (D), and tighten the three
special bolts (E) and the 6 x 1.0 mm bolts (12 bolts).
D B
22. Install the harness clamp bracket (F) on the end A
cover.
14-432
06/09/15 17:47:34 62SWA00A_140_0435
25. Install the transmission range switch (A) gently on 27. Connect the transmission range switch connector
the selector control shaft (B) while holding it in the (A) securely, then install the harness clamps (B) on
N position with the 2.0 mm (0.08 in.) blade (C). the clamp bracket (C).
＊１２＊１４
C 6 x 1.0 mm
A 12 N·m
(1.2 kgf·m, 8.7 lbf·ft)
D
A
B
C
B
26. Tighten the bolts on the transmission range switch
while you continue to hold it in the N position. Do
not move the transmission range switch when
tightening the bolts. Remove the feeler gauge.
＊１３
6 x 1.0 mm
12 N·m (1.2 kgf·m, 8.7 lbf·ft)
28. Install the transmission range switch cover (D).
(cont’d)
14-433
06/09/15 17:47:35 62SWA00A_140_0436

29. Install the new gasket (B) on the transmission 31. Install the new gasket (A) and the ATF joint pipes
housing, and install the ATF pipe (C) and the ATF (D) on the transmission housing, and install the
joint pipes (D). new O-rings (E) over the ATF joint pipes.
＊１５＊１６
B 6 x 1.0 mm
B C 12 N·m
(1.2 kgf·m, 8.7 lbf·ft)
D
E
C E
D
6 x 1.0 mm
12 N·m (1.2 kgf·m, 8.7 lbf·ft) A
30. Install the new O-rings (E) over the ATF joint pipes,
and install A/T clutch pressure control solenoid 32. Install A/T clutch pressure control solenoid valve B
valve A. and C, and the harness clamp bracket (F).
33. Install the new O-ring (A) on the dipstick guide tube
(B), then install the dipstick guide tube.
＊１７
A
6 x 1.0 mm
12 N·m
(1.2 kgf·m, 8.7 lbf·ft)
6 x 1.0 mm
12 N·m (1.2 kgf·m, 8.7 lbf·ft)
14-434
06/09/15 17:47:36 62SWA00A_140_0437
34. For K24Z1 engine model: Install the ATF cooler inlet 36. For R20A1 and R20A2 engine models: Install the
line (A) with the line bolt (B) and new sealing ATF filter mounting bracket (A) on the transmission
washers (C), and secure the inlet line with the bolts housing, and secure the ATF filter (B) on its
(D) on the transmission. mounting bracket with the filter holder (C) and
6 x 1.0 mm bolt (D). Secure the ATF cooler inlet line
NOTE: Steps 34 and 35 describe ATF cooler line (E) with the line bolt (F) and new sealing washers
installation for K24Z1 engine model; go to step 36 (G).
for R20A1 and R20A2 engine models. ＊１９
I
＊１８ 6 x 1.0 mm 28 N·m (2.9 kgf·m, 21 lbf·ft)
F
28 N·m 12 N·m
(2.9 kgf·m, 21 lbf·ft) (1.2 kgf·m, 8.7 lbf·ft) J
D
H
D
D D
E
D G D
A 6 x 1.0 mm
C
D 12 N·m
6 x 1.0 mm A (1.2 kgf·m,
B 8.7 lbf·ft)
12 N·m E
(1.2 kgf·m, 8.7 lbf·ft) C
B F
28 N·m (2.9 kgf·m, 21 lbf·ft) 28 N·m (2.9 kgf·m, 21 lbf·ft)
37. For R20A1 and R20A2 engine models: Secure the
35. For K24Z1 engine model: Install the ATF cooler ATF cooler inlet line with 6 x 1.0 mm bolts on the
outlet line (E) with the line bolt (F) and new sealing transmission.
washers (G), and secure the outlet line with the bolt
on the transmission. 38. For R20A1 and R20A2 engine models: Install the
ATF cooler outlet line (H) with the line bolt (I) and
new sealing washers (J), and secure the outlet line
with 6 x 1.0 mm bolt.
(cont’d)
14-435
06/09/15 17:47:36 62SWA00A_140_0438

39. Install the breather cap (A) on the breather pipe (B).
＊２０
B A
40. 4WD model: Install the transfer assembly (A) with

the new O-ring (B) and dowel pin (C).
＊２１
10 x 1.25 mm
44 N·m
B
C
14-436
06/09/15 17:47:41 62SWA00A_140_0439
A/T Differential

4WD 2WD
＊０１＊０１
THRUST SHIM, 76 mm THRUST SHIM, 76 mm
Preload Inspection, Preload Inspection,
page 14-444 page 14-444
SPACER, 76.2 mm
SPACER, 76.2 mm
BEARING OUTER RACE
Replacement, BEARING OUTER RACE
page 14-442 Replacement, page 14-442
CARRIER BEARING CARRIER BEARING

Replacement, Replacement, page 14-440
page 14-440
FINAL DRIVEN GEAR
FINAL DRIVEN GEAR Replacement,
page 14-439
DIFFERENTIAL CARRIER
DIFFERENTIAL CARRIER Backlash Inspection,
Backlash Inspection, page 14-438
page 14-438 Replacement,
page 14-439
CARRIER BEARING
TRANSFER DRIVE GEAR Replacement, page 14-440
Replacement,
page 14-439 BEARING OUTER RACE
CARRIER BEARING THRUST WASHER, 80 mm

BEARING OUTER RACE

THRUST WASHER, 80 mm
14-437
ＳＷＡ７Ｅ１ＳＥ１０４１１６０００００ＤＡＡＴ００ＳＷＡ７Ｅ１ＱＥ１０４１１６０００００ＤＡＡＴ００
06/09/15 17:47:41 62SWA00A_140_0440
A/T Differential
Backlash Inspection
NOTE: The illustration shows the 4WD model; 2WD is
similar.
1. Install the drive shaft and intermediate shaft into

the differential assembly.
2. Secure the driveshaft (A) in a bench vise (B) with

soft jaws (C). To prevent damage to the driveshaft,
always use soft jaws or equivalent material
between the driveshaft and the vise.
＊０１
H F D
G E
3. Place the intermediate shaft (D) on a V-block (E),

then fix the intermediate shaft using a vise (F) or
equivalent.
4. Measure the backlash of the final driven gear (G)

with a dial indicator (H).
Standard: 0.4−1.3 mm (0.016−0.051 in.)
5. If the backlash is out of standard, replace the

differential carrier:
• 4WD (see page 14-439)

• 2WD (see page 14-439)
14-438
ＳＷＡ７Ｅ１ＰＥ１０４１１６０００００ＭＡＡＴ００
06/09/15 17:47:42 62SWA00A_140_0441
Differential Carrier, Final Driven Differential Carrier, Final Driven

Gear, and Transfer Drive Gear Gear Replacement
Replacement
2WD
4WD
1. Remove the final driven gear (A) from the
1. Remove the final driven gear (A) and transfer drive differential carrier (B).
gear (B) from the differential carrier (C).
NOTE: The final driven gear bolts have left-hand
NOTE: The final driven gear bolts have left-hand threads.
threads. ＊０１
＊０１ 10 x 1.5 mm
10 x 1.5 mm 101 N·m (10.3 kgf·m, 74.5 lbf·ft)
101 N·m (10.3 kgf·m, 74.5 lbf·ft)
A
A
B
C
2. Install the final driven gear on the differential

carrier in the direction shown.
B
3. Secure the final drive gear and differential carrier
with the bolts. Tighten the bolts to the specified
torque in a crisscross pattern in two or more steps.
2. Install the final driven gear and transfer drive gear
on the differential carrier in the direction shown.
3. Secure the final drive gear, differential carrier, and

transfer drive gear with the bolts. Tighten the bolts
to the specified torque in a crisscross pattern in two
or more steps.
14-439
ＳＷＡ７Ｅ１ＳＥ１０４１１６１９６２１ＫＢＡＴ００ＳＷＡ７Ｅ１ＱＥ１０４１１６１９６２１ＫＢＡＴ００
06/09/15 17:47:42 62SWA00A_140_0442
A/T Differential
Carrier Bearing Replacement

Special Tools Required 3. Install the new carrier bearing with the special tools
Attachment, 40 x 50 mm 07LAD-PW50601 and a press. Press the bearing on securely until it
bottoms so there is no clearance between the
NOTE: bearing and the differential carrier.
• The bearing and bearing outer race should be ＊０２
replaced as a set.
• Inspect and adjust the carrier bearing preload
07LAD-PW50601
whenever bearing replaced.
• Check the bearing for wear and rough movement. If
the bearing is OK, removal is not necessary.
• The illustration shows the 4WD model; 2WD is similar.
1. Remove the final driven gear from the differential

carrier.
NOTE: Final driven gear removal is no needed

when the carrier bearing on opposite side of the
final driven gear.
2. Place a stepper adapter (A) on the differential

carrier (B), and set a commercially available puller
(C) under the carrier bearing (D), then remove the
carrier bearing.
＊０１
C
4. Install the final driven gear if the gear was removed.
14-440
ＳＷＡ７Ｅ１ＰＥ１０４１１６１９６１１ＫＢＡＴ００
06/09/15 17:47:43 62SWA00A_140_0443
Oil Seal Replacement

Special Tools Required 3. Install the new oil seal flush with the transmission
• Handle driver 07749-0010000 housing with the special tools.
• Oil seal driver attachment 07947-SD90101 ＊０３
• Oil seal driver attachment 07JAD-PH80101
07749-0010000
1. Remove the oil seal from the transmission housing.
＊０１
07947-SD90101
4. Install the new oil seal flush with the torque

converter housing with the special tools.
＊０４
07749-0010000
2. Remove the oil seal from the torque converter

housing.
＊０２ 07JAD-PH80101
14-441
ＳＷＡ７Ｅ１ＰＥ１０４１１６１９６３１ＫＢＡＴ００
06/09/15 17:47:44 62SWA00A_140_0444
A/T Differential
Carrier Bearing Outer Race Replacement

Special Tools Required 2. Install the 76 mm thrust shim (A), 76.2 mm spacer
• Handle driver 07749-0010000 (B), and the new bearing outer race (C) in the
• Driver attachment, 78 x 80 mm 07NAD-PX40100 transmission housing (D).
• Driver attachment, 72 x 75 mm 07746-0010600 ＊０２
C
NOTE:
• The bearing and the bearing outer race should be
replaced as a set. B
• Replace the bearing with a new one whenever the
outer race is replaced.
• Do not use the thrust shim on the torque converter A
housing.
• Adjust bearing preload after replacing the bearing
and outer race.
• Coat all parts with ATF during installation.
1. Remove the bearing outer race (A), the 76.2 mm

spacer (B), and the 76 mm thrust shim (C) from the
transmission housing (D) by heating the housing to
about 100 °C (212 °F) with a heat gun (E). Do not D
heat the housing in excess of 100 °C (212 °F).
3. With the special tools, drive the bearing outer race
NOTE: Let the transmission housing cool to room securely in the housing so there is no clearance
temperature before installing the bearing outer between the outer race, spacer, shim, and housing.
race. ＊０３
＊０１
E 07749-0010000
D
07NAD-PX40100
14-442
ＳＷＡ７Ｅ１ＰＥ１０４１１６１９６０１ＫＢＡＴ００
06/09/15 17:47:44 62SWA00A_140_0445
4. Remove the bearing outer race (A) and 80 mm

thrust washer (B) from the torque converter
housing (C).
＊０４
A
5. Install the 80 mm thrust washer and the new

bearing outer race in the torque converter housing.
6. Drive the bearing outer race securely in the

housing with the special tools.
＊０５
07749-0010000
07746-0010600
14-443
06/09/15 17:47:45 62SWA00A_140_0446
A/T Differential
Carrier Bearing Preload Inspection

Special Tools Required 2. Install the 76 mm thrust shim (A) in the
• Handle driver 07749-0010000 transmission housing (B). If you replace the 76 mm
• Driver attachment, 78 x 80 mm 07NAD-PX40100 thrust shim with a new one, use the same thickness
• Driver attachment, 72 x 75 mm 07746-0010600 shim as the old one.
• Preload inspection tool 070AJ-0020101 ＊０２
D
NOTE:
• If the transmission housing, torque converter housing,
differential carrier, carrier bearing and the outer race, C
or thrust shim were replaced, the bearing preload
must be adjusted.
• Replace the bearing with a new one whenever the A
outer race is replaced.
• Do not use the thrust shim on the torque converter
housing.
• Coat all parts with ATF during installation.
1. Remove the bearing outer race (A), the 76.2 mm

spacer (B), and the 76 mm thrust shim (C) from the
transmission housing (D) by heating the housing to
about 100 °C (212 °F) with a heat gun (E). Do not B
heat the housing in excess of 100 °C (212 °F).
3. Install the 76.2 mm spacer (C) and the bearing outer
NOTE: Let the transmission housing cool to room race (D) in the transmission housing.
temperature before adjusting the bearing preload.
＊０１ 4. Drive the bearing outer race securely in the
E housing with the special tools so there is no
clearance between the outer race, spacer, shim,
and housing.
＊０３
07749-0010000
B 07NAD-PX40100
14-444
ＳＷＡ７Ｅ１ＰＥ１０４１１６１９６０５ＭＡＡＴ００
06/09/15 17:47:46 62SWA00A_140_0447
5. Install the differential assembly (A) in the torque 10. Rotate the differential assembly in both directions
converter housing (B). to seat the bearings.
＊０４
G 10 x 1.25 mm
E 44 N·m 11. Measure the starting torque of the differential
(4.5 kgf·m, 33 lbf·ft) assembly with the special tool, a torque wrench (A),
20 Bolts and a socket (B). Measure the starting torque at
normal room temperature in both directions.
H
Standard
New Bearing:
2.7−3.9 N·m (28−40 kgf·cm, 24−35 lbf·in.)
Reused Bearing:
2.5−3.6 N·m (25−37 kgf·cm, 22−32 lbf·in.)
＊０５
A
I
J
F
C
C
070AJ-0020101
B
C
6. Install the three dowel pins (C) and a new gasket (D)
on the torque converter housing.
7. Align the spring pin (E) of the control shaft (F) with
the transmission housing groove (G) by turning the
control shaft. Do not squeeze the end of the control
shaft tips together when turning the shaft.
8. Place the transmission housing (H) on the torque

converter housing.
9. Install the transmission housing mounting bolts

(20 bolts) along with the transmission hanger (I)
and harness clamp brackets (J). Tighten the
mounting bolts to 44 N·m (4.5 kgf·m, 33 lbf·ft) in
two or more steps in a crisscross pattern.
(cont’d)
14-445
06/09/15 17:47:46 62SWA00A_140_0448
A/T Differential
Carrier Bearing Preload Inspection (cont’d)

12. If the measurement is out of standard, remove the THRUST SHIM, 76 mm (cont’d)
thrust shim and select the thrust shim from table. No. Part Number Thickness
Install the new thrust shim and recheck. To A 41428-PAX-000 1.575 mm (0.062 in.)
increase the starting torque, increase the thickness B 41429-PAX-000 1.625 mm (0.064 in.)
of the thrust shim. To decrease the starting torque, C 41430-PAX-000 1.675 mm (0.066 in.)
decrease the thickness of the shim. Changing the D 41431-PAX-000 1.725 mm (0.068 in.)
shim to the next size will increase or decrease E 41432-PAX-000 1.775 mm (0.070 in.)
starting torque about 0.3−0.4 N·m (3−4 kgf·cm, F 41433-PAX-000 1.825 mm (0.072 in.)
2−3 lbf·in). G 41434-PAX-000 1.875 mm (0.074 in.)
H 41435-PAX-000 1.925 mm (0.076 in.)
THRUST SHIM, 76 mm I 41436-PAX-000 1.975 mm (0.078 in.)
No. Part Number Thickness J 41437-PAX-000 2.025 mm (0.080 in.)
S 41438-PX4-700 2.05 mm (0.080 in.) K 41438-PAX-000 2.075 mm (0.082 in.)
T 41439-PX4-700 2.10 mm (0.082 in.) L 41439-PAX-000 2.125 mm (0.084 in.)
U 41440-PX4-700 2.15 mm (0.084 in.) M 41440-PAX-000 2.175 mm (0.086 in.)
A 41441-PK4-000 2.20 mm (0.086 in.) N 41441-PAX-000 2.225 mm (0.088 in.)
B 41442-PK4-000 2.25 mm (0.088 in.) O 41442-PAX-000 2.275 mm (0.090 in.)
C 41443-PK4-000 2.30 mm (0.090 in.) P 41443-PAX-000 2.325 mm (0.092 in.)
D 41444-PK4-000 2.35 mm (0.092 in.) Q 41444-PAX-000 2.375 mm (0.094 in.)
E 41445-PK4-000 2.40 mm (0.094 in.) R 41445-PAX-000 2.425 mm (0.095 in.)
F 41446-PK4-000 2.45 mm (0.096 in.) S 41446-PAX-000 2.475 mm (0.097 in.)
G 41447-PK4-000 2.50 mm (0.098 in.) T 41447-PAX-000 2.525 mm (0.099 in.)
H 41448-PK4-000 2.55 mm (0.099 in.) U 41448-PAX-000 2.575 mm (0.101 in.)
I 41449-PK4-000 2.60 mm (0.101 in.) V 41449-PAX-000 2.625 mm (0.103 in.)
J 41450-PK4-000 2.65 mm (0.103 in.) W 41450-PAX-000 2.675 mm (0.105 in.)
K 41451-PK4-000 2.70 mm (0.105 in.) X 41451-PAX-000 2.725 mm (0.107 in.)
L 41452-PK4-000 2.75 mm (0.107 in.) Y 41452-PAX-000 2.775 mm (0.109 in.)
M 41453-PK4-000 2.80 mm (0.109 in.) Z 41453-PAX-000 2.825 mm (0.111 in.)
N 41454-PK4-000 2.85 mm (0.111 in.) 0A 41454-PAX-000 2.875 mm (0.113 in.)
O 41455-PK4-000 2.90 mm (0.113 in.) 0B 41455-PAX-000 2.925 mm (0.115 in.)
P 41456-PK4-000 2.95 mm (0.115 in.) 0C 41456-PAX-000 2.975 mm (0.117 in.)
Q 41457-PK4-000 3.00 mm (0.117 in.) 0D 41457-PAX-000 3.025 mm (0.119 in.)
R 41458-PK4-000 3.05 mm (0.119 in.)
0A 41428-PRP-000 1.55 mm (0.061 in.)
0B 41429-PRP-000 1.60 mm (0.063 in.)
0C 41430-PRP-000 1.65 mm (0.065 in.)
0D 41431-PRP-000 1.70 mm (0.067 in.)
0E 41432-PRP-000 1.75 mm (0.069 in.)
0F 41433-PRP-000 1.80 mm (0.071 in.)
0G 41434-PRP-000 1.85 mm (0.073 in.)
0H 41435-PRP-000 1.90 mm (0.075 in.)
0I 41436-PRP-000 1.95 mm (0.077 in.)
0J 41437-PRP-000 2.00 mm (0.079 in.)
(cont’d)
14-446
06/09/15 17:47:47 62SWA00A_140_0449
Transfer Assembly
Inspection
1. Set the dial indicator (A) on the companion flange 3. Secure the transfer housing (A) in a bench vise (B)
(B). with soft jaws. To prevent damage to the transfer
＊０１ housing, always use soft jaws or equivalent
B materials between the transfer housing and the
vise.
＊０２
A A
C
B
E
2. Measure the transfer gear backlash.

D
Standard: 0.06−0.16 mm (0.02−0.06 in.)
4. Rotate the companion flange several times to seat

the tapered roller bearings.
5. Measure the starting torque at the companion

flange (C) with a torque wrench (D) and a socket (E).
Standard: 2.44−3.87 N·m

(24.8−39.4 kgf·cm, 21.5−34.1 lbf·in.)
6. Remove the transfer assembly from the vise.
(cont’d)
14-447
ＳＷＡ７Ｅ１ＳＥ１０４７４５０００００ＭＡＡＴ２０
06/09/15 17:47:47 62SWA00A_140_0450
Transfer Assembly
Inspection (cont’d)
7. Remove the transfer holder (A) from the transfer 11. Remove the transfer holder, and check the transfer
housing (B), then remove the O-ring (C) from the drive gear tooth contact pattern. The pattern should
transfer holder. be centered on the gear teeth as shown.
＊０３＊０４
8 x 1.25 mm
26 N·m (2.7 kgf·m, 20 lbf·ft)
B 12. If the measurements are out of standard or the

tooth contact pattern are incorrect, disassemble the
transfer assembly and repair.
8. Apply Prussian Blue to both side of the transfer

drive gear teeth lightly and evenly.
9. Install the transfer holder, and tighten the bolts. Do

not install the O-ring on the transfer holder.
10. Rotate the companion flange in both directions

until the transfer gears rotate one full turn in both
directions.
14-448
06/09/15 17:48:14 62SWA00A_140_0451
Disassembly
Exploded View
＊０１
TRANSFER SHAFT
ROLLER BEARING
8 x 1.25 mm
26 N·m
TRANSFER HOLDER
O-RING
Replace.
TRANSFER SHIM, 75 mm
Selective part
TAPERED ROLLER
BEARING OUTER RACE
DOWEL PIN TAPERED ROLLER BEARING

TRANSFER
OUTPUT SHAFT
TRANSFER DRIVE GEAR (HYPOID GEAR)
TRANSFER COLLAR (HYPOID GEAR)
TAPERED ROLLER
THRUST SHIM, 25 mm BEARING
Selective part
LOCKNUT,
22 x 1.25 mm
Replace.
CONICAL SPRING WASHER THRUST SHIM, 35 mm
Replace. Selective part
TAPERED ROLLER
BEARING OUTER RACE TAPERED ROLLER BEARING
TAPERED TAPERED ROLLER
ROLLER BEARING BEARING OUTER RACE
CONICAL SPRING
WASHER
Replace.
TRANSFER SPACER
Replace.
TRANSFER HOUSING
TAPERED ROLLER
BEARING OUTER RACE
OIL SEAL
Replace.
LOCKNUT, O-RING COMPANION FLANGE
22 x 1.25 mm Replace.
Replace.
BACK-UP RING
(cont’d)
14-449
ＳＷＡ７Ｅ１ＳＥ１０４７４５０００００ＬＣＡＴ００
06/09/15 17:48:14 62SWA00A_140_0452
Transfer Assembly
Disassembly (cont’d)
Special Tools Required 3. Secure the transfer housing (A) in a bench vise (B)
Companion flange holder 07PAB-0020000 with soft jaws. To prevent damage to the transfer
housing, always use soft jaws or equivalent
NOTE: Refer to the Exploded View as needed during the materials between the transfer housing and the
following procedure. vise.
＊０４
A
1. Remove the transfer holder (A) from the transfer
housing (B). 07PAB-0020000
＊０２ B
4. Install the special tool on the companion flange,

then loose the locknut.
5. Remove the special tool.
6. Remove the locknut (A), conical spring washer (B),

back-up ring (C), O-ring (D), and companion flange
(E) from the transfer output shaft (F).
2. Cut the lock tab on the locknut using a chisel. ＊０５
＊０３
B
F
E
D
C
A
14-450
06/09/15 17:48:15 62SWA00A_140_0453
7. Remove the transfer output shaft (A) from the

transfer housing (B), then remove the transfer
spacer (C) from the transfer output shaft.
＊０６
A
8. Remove the oil seal (A) and tapered roller bearing

(B) from the transfer housing (C).
＊０７
A
14-451
06/09/15 17:48:15 62SWA00A_140_0454
Transfer Assembly
Transfer Holder Disassembly

1. Cut the lock tab on the locknut of the transfer shaft 3. Remove the locknut (A) and conical spring washer
using a chisel. (B).
＊０１＊０３
G
F
2. Put a 14 mm Allen wrench (A) in the transfer shaft
(B), then secure the Allen wrench in a bench vise.
＊０２ E
B D
4. Remove the tapered roller bearing (C), 25 mm

thrust shim (D), transfer collar (E), transfer drive
gear (F), and transfer shaft (G) from the transfer
B holder (H).
14-452
ＳＷＡ７Ｅ１ＳＥ１０４７４５５９７６４ＬＣＡＴ００
06/09/15 17:48:16 62SWA00A_140_0455
Transfer Holder Roller Bearing Transfer Holder Tapered Roller

Replacement Bearing Outer Race Removal/
Installation
• Handle driver 07749-0010000 Special Tools Required
• Driver attachment, 62 x 68 mm 07746-0010500 • Handle driver 07749-0010000
1. Remove the roller bearing from the transfer holder.
＊０１ 1. Remove the tapered roller bearing outer race (A)
and 75 mm thrust shim (B) from the transfer holder.
＊０１
2. Install the new roller bearing in the transfer holder A

with the special tools.
＊０２ 2. Install the 75 mm thrust shim (A) in the transfer
holder, then install the tapered roller bearing outer
race (B) with the special tools.
＊０２
07749-0010000
07746-0010500
07749-0010000
07746-0010600
14-453
ＳＷＡ７Ｅ１ＳＥ１０４７４５５９７６６ＫＢＡＴ００ＳＷＡ７Ｅ１ＳＥ１０４７４５５９７６７ＫＤＡＴ００
06/09/15 17:48:17 62SWA00A_140_0456
Transfer Assembly
Transfer Drive Gear Bearing Transfer Output Shaft Bearing

Replacement Removal/Installation
Special Tools Required Special Tools Required

• Handle driver 07749-0010000 • Driver, 40 mm I.D. 07746-0030100
• Driver attachment, 42 x 47 mm 07746-0010300 • Driver attachment, 35 mm I.D. 07746-0030400
1. Remove the tapered roller bearing (A) from the 1. Remove the tapered roller bearing (A) from the
transfer drive gear (B) with the special tools, transfer output shaft (B) with the bearing separator
bearing separator (C) and a press. (C) and a press. Place a shaft protector (D) between
＊０１ the transfer output shaft and the press to prevent
damaging the transfer output shaft.
07749-0010000 ＊０１
A B
07746-0010300
A C
2. Install the 35 mm thrust shim (A) on the transfer

2. Install the new tapered roller bearing (A) on the output shaft (B).
transfer drive gear (B) with the special tools and a ＊０２
press. 07746-0030100
＊０２
07749-0010000
07746-0030400
07746-0010300 C
B
A
B
3. Install the tapered roller bearing (C) on the transfer
output shaft with the special tools and a press.
14-454
ＳＷＡ７Ｅ１ＳＥ１０４７４５５９７５２ＫＢＡＴ００ＳＷＡ７Ｅ１ＳＥ１０４７４５５９７７３ＫＤＡＴ００
06/09/15 17:48:17 62SWA00A_140_0457
Transfer Housing Tapered Roller Bearing Outer Race Replacement

Special Tools Required 2. Remove the press-fitted bearing outer race (A) from
• Handle driver 07749-0010000 the transfer housing (B) by heating the housing to
• Oil seal driver attachment 07947-SD90101 about 100 °C (212 °F) with a heat gun (C). Do not
• Bearing installer attachment 07KAF-PS30120 heat the housing more than 100 °C (212 °F).
• Bearing installer attachment 07LAF-PZ70110 ＊０２
• Installer shaft, 14 x 165 mm 07JAF-SJ80110 C
• Installer nut, 14 mm 07JAF-SJ80120
B
NOTE: Replace the bearing with a new one whenever
the outer race is replaced.
1. Remove the 57 mm bearing outer race (A) from the

transfer housing (B).
NOTE: Some 57 mm bearing outer race is press-

fitted in the housing. The 62 mm bearing outer race
(C) and 50.3 mm bearing outer race (D) are press-
fitted, and the press-fitted outer races must be
removed by heating the housing. A
＊０１
A B
3. Install the 57 mm bearing outer race (A) in the

transfer housing (B) with the special tools.
＊０３
B 07749-0010000
C D
07947-SD90101 A
(cont’d)
14-455
ＳＷＡ７Ｅ１ＳＥ１０４７４５５９７７１ＫＢＡＴ００
06/09/15 17:48:18 62SWA00A_140_0458
Transfer Assembly
Transfer Housing Tapered Roller Bearing Outer Race Replacement (cont’d)

4. Install the 62 mm bearing outer race (A) and
50.3 mm bearing outer race (B) in the transfer
housing (C), set the special tool attachments over
the races, and install the installer shaft through the
attachments.
＊０４
07JAF-SJ80110
07KAF-PS30120
07JAF-SJ80120
07LAF-PZ70110
C
B
07JAF-SJ80120
5. Tighten the installer nut (07JAF-SJ80120) to install

the races (A) (B) into the transfer housing securely.
＊０５
A 07JAF-SJ80120
C
B
07JAF-SJ80120
07LAF-PZ70110
07KAF-PS30120
07JAF-SJ80110
14-456
06/09/15 17:48:18 62SWA00A_140_0459
Reassembly
Special Tools Required Example
• Driver, 40 mm I.D. 07746-0030100 ＊０１
C: EXISTING 35 mm X: REPLACEMENT 35 mm
• Driver attachment, 35 mm I.D. 07746-0030400 THRUST SHIM THRUST SHIM
• Handle driver 07749-0010000 Thickness: C = 1.05 mm Thickness: X = ？？ mm
• Oil seal driver attachment 07JAD-PH80101
• Companion flange holder
07XAB-0010101 or 07PAB-0020000
NOTE:
• While reassembling the transfer assembly:
– Check and adjust the transfer gear tooth contact.
– Measure and adjust the transfer gear backlash.
– Check and adjust the tapered roller bearing starting A: EXISTING B: REPLACEMENT
torque. TRANSFER TRANSFER
OUTPUT SHAFT OUTPUT SHAFT
• Coat all parts with ATF during reassembly. Number: A = ＋ 2 Number: B = − 1
• Replace the tapered roller bearing and the bearing A B 2 −1
X= − ＋C= − ＋ 1.05
outer race as a set if either part is replaced. 100 100 100 100
• Replace the transfer drive gear and the transfer = 0.02 ＋ 0.01 ＋ 1.05 = 1.08 mm
output shaft as a set if either part is replaced.
Select No. M 35 mm thrust shim of 1.08 mm
in this cause.
1. Select the 35 mm thrust shim if the transfer output
shaft is replaced. Calculate the thickness of the THRUST SHIM, 35 mm
35 mm thrust shim using the formula, and select Shim Part Number Thickness
the shim from the table. No.
A 41361-PS3-000 0.72 mm (0.028 in.)
NOTE: The number on the transfer output shaft is B 41362-PS3-000 0.75 mm (0.030 in.)
shown in 1/100 mm. C 41363-PS3-000 0.78 mm (0.031 in.)
＊３０ D 41364-PS3-000 0.81 mm (0.032 in.)
A B E 41365-PS3-000 0.84 mm (0.033 in.)
FORMULA: X = − ＋C
100 100 F 41366-PS3-000 0.87 mm (0.034 in.)
G 41367-PS3-000 0.90 mm (0.035 in.)
A: Number on the existing transfer output shaft H 41368-PS3-000 0.93 mm (0.037 in.)
B: Number on the replacement transfer output shaft I 41369-PS3-000 0.96 mm (0.038 in.)
J 41370-PS3-000 0.99 mm (0.039 in.)
C: Thickness of the existing 35 mm thrust shim K 41371-PS3-000 1.02 mm (0.040 in.)
X: Thickness needed for the replacement 35 mm L 41372-PS3-000 1.05 mm (0.041 in.)
thrust shim M 41373-PS3-000 1.08 mm (0.043 in.)
N 41374-PS3-000 1.11 mm (0.044 in.)
2. Select the 35 mm thrust shim if the tapered roller

bearing on the transfer output shaft is replaced.
Measure the thickness of the replacement bearing
and the existing bearing, and calculate the
difference of the bearing thickness. Adjust the
thickness of the existing 35 mm thrust shim by the
amount of the difference in bearing thickness, and
select the replacement 35 mm thrust shim from the
table.
(cont’d)
14-457
ＳＷＡ７Ｅ１ＳＥ１０４７４５０００００ＬＤＡＴ００
06/09/15 17:48:19 62SWA00A_140_0460
Transfer Assembly
Reassembly (cont’d)
3. Install the 35 mm thrust shim (A) on the transfer 6. Install the output shaft (A) in the transfer housing
output shaft (B), then install the tapered roller (B). Do not install the transfer spacer on the transfer
bearing (C) with the special tools and a press. output shaft.
＊０２＊０４
A
07746-0030100
07746-0030400
B 7. Install the companion flange (A), conical spring

washer (B), and locknut (C) on the transfer output
A
shaft (D). Do not install the O-ring and back-up ring.
＊０５
4. Place the tapered roller bearing (A) on the bearing
outer race of the companion flange side of the
transfer housing. B
＊０３
07749-0010000
D
B
C A
A
07JAD-PH80101
5. Install the new oil seal (B) on the transfer housing

with the special tools.
14-458
06/09/15 17:48:20 62SWA00A_140_0461
8. Secure the transfer housing (A) in a bench vise (B) 11. Install the transfer shaft (A) in the transfer holder
with soft jaws. To prevent damage to the transfer (B), and install the transfer drive gear (C), transfer
housing, always use soft jaws or equivalent collar (D), 25 mm thrust shim (E), tapered roller
materials between the transfer housing and the bearing (F), conical spring washer (G), and locknut
vise. (H).
＊０６＊０７
A A
07PAB-0020000
B
G E
9. Install the special tool on the companion flange.
F
10. Tighten the locknut while measuring the starting

H
torque so the starting torque is within
0.98−1.39 N·m (10.0−14.2 kgf·cm,
8.7−12.3 lbf·in.) Do not stake the locknut in this
step. 12. Put a 14 mm Allen wrench (A) in the transfer shaft
(B), then secure the Allen wrench in a bench vise.
＊０８
13. Tighten the locknut 118 N·m (12.0 kgf·m, 87 lbf·ft).

Do not stake the locknut in this step.
(cont’d)
14-459
06/09/15 17:48:20 62SWA00A_140_0462
Transfer Assembly
14. Apply Prussian Blue to both sides of the transfer 19. Remove the transfer holder, and check the transfer
drive gear teeth lightly and evenly. drive gear tooth contact pattern.
＊１１
CORRECT CONTACT PATTERN
15. Temporarily install the transfer holder (A) and
dowel pin (B) without O-ring, and tighten the bolts.
＊０９
8 x 1.25 mm A
26 N·m
(2.7 kgf·m, 20 lbf·ft) INCORRECT CONTACT PATTERNS
TOE CONTACT
HEEL CONTACT
FLANK CONTACT
16. Rotate the companion flange in both directions
until the transfer gears rotate one full turn in both
directions.
17. Set a dial indicator (A) on the companion flange (B).

＊１０
B FACE CONTACT
18. Measure the transfer gear backlash.
Standard: 0.06−0.16 mm (0.02−0.06 in.)
14-460
06/09/15 17:48:21 62SWA00A_140_0463
20. If the backlash measurement is out of standard, THRUST SHIM, 25 mm

adjust the backlash with the 35 mm thrust shim and Shim Part Number Thickness
recheck. Do not use more than two 35 mm thrust No.
shims to adjust the backlash. 1.70 29411-P1C-000 1.70 mm (0.067 in.)
1.73 29412-P1C-000 1.73 mm (0.068 in.)
21. If the transfer gear tooth contact is incorrect, adjust 1.76 29413-P1C-000 1.76 mm (0.069 in.)
the tooth contact with the 25 mm or 35 mm thrust 1.79 29414-P1C-000 1.79 mm (0.070 in.)
shim. Do not use more than two of each thrust 1.82 29415-P1C-000 1.82 mm (0.072 in.)
shim to adjust the tooth contact. 1.85 29416-P1C-000 1.85 mm (0.073 in.)
1.88 29417-P1C-000 1.88 mm (0.074 in.)
• Toe Contact 1.91 29418-P1C-000 1.91 mm (0.075 in.)
Use a thicker 35 mm thrust shim to move the 1.94 29419-P1C-000 1.94 mm (0.076 in.)
transfer output shaft toward the transfer drive 1.97 29420-P1C-000 1.97 mm (0.078 in.)
gear. Because this movement causes the transfer 2.00 29421-P1C-000 2.00 mm (0.079 in.)
gear backlash to change, move the transfer drive 2.03 29422-P1C-000 2.03 mm (0.080 in.)
gear away from the transfer output shaft to 2.06 29423-P1C-000 2.06 mm (0.081 in.)
adjust the transfer gear backlash as follows: 2.09 29424-P1C-000 2.09 mm (0.082 in.)
– Increase the thickness of the 25 mm thrust 2.12 29425-P1C-000 2.12 mm (0.083 in.)
shim. 2.15 29426-P1C-000 2.15 mm (0.085 in.)
– Reduce the thickness of the 75 mm thrust shim 2.18 29427-P1C-000 2.18 mm (0.086 in.)
by the amount you increased the 25 mm thrust 2.21 29428-P1C-000 2.21 mm (0.087 in.)
shim. 2.24 29429-P1C-000 2.24 mm (0.088 in.)
• Heel Contact 22. Remove the transfer holder (A) from the transfer
Use a thinner 35 mm thrust shim to move the housing (B) after adjusting the transfer gear
transfer output shaft away from the transfer drive backlash or transfer gear tooth contact.
gear. Because this movement causes the transfer ＊１２
gear backlash to change, move the transfer drive
gear toward the transfer output shaft to adjust
the transfer gear backlash as follows:
– Reduce the thickness of the 25 mm thrust shim.
– Increase the thickness of the 75 mm thrust A
shim by amount you reduced the thickness of
the 25 mm thrust shim.
• Flank Contact
Use a thinner thrust shim to move the transfer
drive gear toward the transfer output shaft. Flank
contact must be adjusted within the limits of the B
transfer gear backlash. If the backlash exceeds
the limits, adjust as described under Heel Contact.
• Face Contact
Use a thicker thrust shim to move the transfer
drive gear away from the transfer output shaft.
Face contact must be adjusted within the limits of
the transfer gear backlash. If the backlash
exceeds the limits, adjust as described under Toe
Contact.
(cont’d)
14-461
06/09/15 17:48:21 62SWA00A_140_0464
Transfer Assembly
23. Secure the transfer housing (A) in a bench vise (B) 26. Remove the transfer output shaft (A) from the
with soft jaws. To prevent damage to the transfer transfer housing (B).
housing, always use soft jaws or equivalent ＊１５
A
materials between the transfer housing and the
vise.
＊１３
A
07PAB-0020000 B
B
27. Install the new transfer spacer (C) on the transfer

output shaft in the direction shown, and install
them in the transfer housing.
24. Install the special tool on the companion flange, 28. Coat the threads of the locknut and transfer output
loose the locknut, and remove the special tool. shaft with ATF.
25. Remove the locknut (A), conical spring washer (B), 29. Install the companion flange (A), new O-ring (B),
and companion flange (C) from the transfer driven back-up ring (C), new conical spring washer (D),
gear (D). and new locknut (E) on the transfer output shaft (F).
＊１４ Install the conical spring washer in the direction
shown.
＊１６
B
D
F
A C
A
B
C
E
14-462
06/09/15 17:48:22 62SWA00A_140_0465
30. Secure the transfer housing (A) in a bench vise (B) 34. Stake the locknut into the transfer output shaft in
with soft jaws. To prevent damage to the transfer depth (A) of 0.7−1.2 mm (0.03−0.05 in.) using a
housing, always use soft jaws or equivalent 3.5 mm punch (B).
materials between the transfer housing and the ＊１８
vise.
＊１７
A
07PAB-0020000
B
35. Temporarily install the transfer holder (A) and

dowel pin (B) without O-ring, and tighten the bolts.
31. Install the special tool on the companion flange. ＊１９
32. Tighten the locknut while measuring the starting

torque of the transfer output shaft.
8 x 1.25 mm
26 N·m A
Starting torque: (2.7 kgf·m, 20 lbf·ft)
0.98−1.39 N·m
(10.0−14.2 kgf·cm, 8.7−12.3 lbf·in.)
Tightening torque:
132−260 N·m
(13.5−26.5 kgf·m, 97.6−192 lbf·ft)
B
NOTE:
• Rotate the companion flange several turns to
seat the tapered roller bearings, then measure
the starting torque.
• If the starting torque exceeds 1.39 N·m
(14.2 kgf·cm, 12.3 lbf·in.), replace the transfer
spacer and reassemble the parts. Do not adjust
the starting torque with the locknut loose.
• If the tightening torque exceeds 260 N·m
(26.5 kgf·m, 192 lbf·ft), replace the transfer spacer
and reassemble the parts.
33. Remove the special tool.
(cont’d)
14-463
06/09/15 17:48:23 62SWA00A_140_0466
Transfer Assembly
36. Secure the transfer housing (A) in a bench vise (B) 41. If the measurement is out of standard, put a 14 mm
with soft jaws. To prevent damage to the transfer Allen wrench (A) in the transfer shaft (B), then
housing, always use soft jaws or equivalent secure the Allen wrench in a bench vise.
materials between the transfer housing and the ＊２１
vise.
＊２０
A
C
B
E
A
D
42. Loosen the locknut.
37. Rotate the companion flange several times to seat

the tapered roller bearing.
38. Measure the starting torque at the companion

flange (C) using a torque wrench (D) and a socket
(E).
Standard: 2.44−3.87 N·m

(24.8−39.4 kgf·cm, 21.5−34.1 lbf·in.)
39. Remove the transfer holder from the transfer

housing.
40. If the measurement is within the standard, go to

step 53.
14-464
06/09/15 17:48:23 62SWA00A_140_0467
43. Remove the locknut (A) and conical spring washer 46. Measure the thickness of the 75 mm thrust shim,
(B). and select the new 75 mm thrust shim.
＊２２
G THRUST SHIM, 75 mm
Shim Part Number Thickness
No.
AA 41401-PGV-000 1.52 mm (0.060 in.)
AB 41402-PGV-000 1.55 mm (0.061 in.)
AC 41403-PGV-000 1.58 mm (0.062 in.)
AD 41404-PGV-000 1.61 mm (0.063 in.)
AE 41405-PGV-000 1.64 mm (0.065 in.)
B 41402-PW8-010 1.67 mm (0.066 in.)
H C 41403-PW8-010 1.70 mm (0.067 in.)
D 41404-PW8-010 1.73 mm (0.068 in.)
E 41405-PW8-010 1.76 mm (0.069 in.)
F 41406-PW8-010 1.79 mm (0.070 in.)
G 41407-PW8-010 1.82 mm (0.072 in.)
F
H 41408-PW8-010 1.85 mm (0.073 in.)
I 41409-PW8-010 1.88 mm (0.074 in.)
E J 41410-PW8-010 1.91 mm (0.075 in.)
K 41411-PW8-010 1.94 mm (0.076 in.)
B D L 41412-PW8-010 1.97 mm (0.078 in.)
C M 41413-PW8-010 2.00 mm (0.079 in.)
N 41414-PW8-010 2.03 mm (0.080 in.)
A O 41415-PW8-010 2.06 mm (0.081 in.)
P 41416-PW8-010 2.09 mm (0.082 in.)
Q 41417-PW8-010 2.12 mm (0.083 in.)
R 41418-PW8-010 2.15 mm (0.085 in.)
44. Remove the tapered roller bearing (C), 25 mm S 41419-PW8-010 2.18 mm (0.086 in.)
thrust shim (D), transfer collar (E), transfer drive T 41420-PW8-010 2.21 mm (0.087 in.)
gear (F), and transfer shaft (G) from the transfer U 41421-PW8-010 2.24 mm (0.088 in.)
holder (H). V 41422-PW8-010 2.27 mm (0.089 in.)
W 41423-PW8-010 2.30 mm (0.091 in.)
45. Remove the tapered roller bearing outer race (A) X 41424-PW8-010 2.33 mm (0.092 in.)
and the 75 mm thrust shim (B) from the transfer Y 41425-PW8-010 2.36 mm (0.093 in.)
holder (C). Z 41426-PW8-010 2.39 mm (0.094 in.)
＊２３ ZA 41406-PGV-000 2.42 mm (0.095 in.)
ZB 41407-PGV-000 2.45 mm (0.096 in.)
ZC 41408-PGV-000 2.48 mm (0.098 in.)
ZD 41409-PGV-000 2.51 mm (0.099 in.)
ZE 41410-PGV-000 2.54 mm (0.100 in.)
ZF 41411-PGV-000 2.57 mm (0.101 in.)
ZG 41412-PGV-000 2.60 mm (0.102 in.)
ZH 41413-PGV-000 2.63 mm (0.104 in.)
ZI 41414-PGV-000 2.66 mm (0.105 in.)
A C
(cont’d)
14-465
06/09/15 17:48:24 62SWA00A_140_0468
Transfer Assembly
47. Install the new 75 mm thrust shim (A) in the 49. Put a 14 mm Allen wrench (A) in the transfer shaft
transfer holder, then install the tapered roller (B), then secure the Allen wrench in a bench vise.
bearing outer race (B) with the special tools. ＊２６
＊２４
A
B
07749-0010000 A
07746-0010600
50. Tighten the locknut 118 N·m (12.0 kgf·m, 87 lbf·ft).
48. Install the transfer shaft (A) in the transfer holder Do not stake the locknut in this step.
(B), and install the transfer drive gear (C), transfer
collar (D), 25 mm thrust shim (E), tapered roller 51. Temporarily install the transfer holder (A) and
bearing (F), conical spring washer (G), and locknut dowel pin (B) without the O-ring, and tighten the
(H). Install the conical spring washer in the bolts.
direction shown. ＊２７
＊２５
A
8 x 1.25 mm
26 N·m A
B
B
G E
14-466
06/09/15 17:48:24 62SWA00A_140_0469
52. Rotate the companion flange several turns to seat 54. Install the new O-ring (A) on the transfer holder (B),
the tapered roller bearings, and recheck the then install the transfer holder with the dowel pin
starting torque. Remove the transfer holder after (C) on the transfer housing (D).
adjusting the starting torque. ＊２９
8 x 1.25 mm
26 N·m (2.7 kgf·m, 20 lbf·ft)
53. Stake the locknut into the transfer shaft in depth (A)
of 0.7−1.2 mm (0.03−0.05 in.) using a 3.5 mm
punch (B).
＊２８
A
D
B
14-467
06/09/15 17:48:24 62SWA00A_140_0470
ＳＷＡ７Ｅ０００００００００Ｊ１４０１ＺＡＡＴ００

Automatic Transmission CR-V 2007

Uploaded by

Document Information

Copyright

Available Formats

Share this document

Share or Embed Document

Sharing Options

Did you find this document useful?

Is this content inappropriate?

Copyright:

Available Formats

Automatic Transmission CR-V 2007

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

06/09/15 17:32:25 62SWA00A_140_0001

SUPPLEMENTAL RESTRAINT SYSTEM (SRS) (If automatic transmission maintenance is

Valve Body A/T Differential

Ref. No. Tool Number Description Qty

Service Precautions for 4WD Model

• Make sure to place the free rollers parallel to the

General Troubleshooting Information

NOTE: If the HDS does not communicate with the

3. Record all fuel and emissions DTCs, and A/T DTCs,

4. If there is a fuel and emissions DTC, first check the

Symptom Troubleshooting Versus DTC

General Troubleshooting Information (cont’d)

NOTE: The PCM overwrite data and monitors the EVAP A

1. Connect the HDS to the DLC.

4. Disconnect PCM connectors (A), and probe the

*: This illustration shows LHD model.

2. Jump the SCS line with the HDS.

NOTE: If the HDS does not communicate with the

• For accurate result, always use the pin

General Troubleshooting Information (cont’d)

2. Turn the ignition switch OFF.

3. Turn the ignition switch ON (II), and wait for

4. Turn the ignition switch OFF, and disconnect the

5. Do the PCM idle learn procedure; R20A1 and R20A2

*: This illustration shows LHD model.

• PASSED: On board diagnosis is successfully finished.

NOTE: Do not turn the ignition switch OFF while

How to Update the PCM

6. If the HDS does not have the update function,

General Troubleshooting Information (cont’d)

8. Do the PCM idle learn procedure; R20A1 and R20A2

9. Do the crank pattern clear/crank pattern learn

*: This illustration shows LHD model.

3. Turn the ignition switch ON (II).

4. Make sure the HDS communicates with the PCM. If

5. Select the INSPECTION MENU with the HDS.

6. Select the TP POSITION CHECK in the ETCS TEST

NOTE: If the result of TP POSITION CHECK was

7. Turn the ignition switch OFF.

8. Remove the battery.

14. Input the VIN to the PCM with the HDS.

15. Update the PCM if it does not have the latest

16. Select the IMMOBILIZER SYSTEM with the HDS.

17. Rewrite the immobilizer code with the PCM

18. Reset the PCM with the HDS.

C 20. Do the crank pattern learn procedure.

21. Enter the anti-theft code for the audio or the

11. Disconnect PCM connectors A (C), B (D), and C (E).

NOTE: PCM connectors A, B, and C have symbols

DTC Troubleshooting Index

DTC D MIL Detection Item Page

KE, KG, KS, KK, KM, KN,

DTC D MIL Detection Item Page

KE, KG, KS, KK, KM, KN,

DTC Troubleshooting Index (cont’d)

KE, KG, KS, KK, KM, KN,

DTC D MIL Detection Item Page

KE, KG, KS, KK, KM, KN,

Symptom Troubleshooting Index

Symptom Probable cause(s) Notes

Symptom Troubleshooting Index (cont’d)

Symptom Probable cause(s) Notes

Symptom Troubleshooting Index (cont’d)

Symptom Probable cause(s) Notes